FCC ID: QJCH432B Braile Sense U2

 

Braille Sense U2 User Manual ENGLISH MANUAL For Software Version 6.2

(December, 2011) When there are any manual updates, the readme files or appendices will be added to the manual CD and website. HIMS Inc. 4616 W. Howard Lane, Ste 960 Austin, TX 78728 Phone: 888-520-4467 Fax: 512-837-2011 Email: support@hims-inc.com Safety Precautions For your safety from the Braille Sense U2, please read safety precautions carefully. 1. The input voltage of the AC adapter is 100V - 240V, and the output is DC 5V / 2A. 2. When the Braille Sense U2 is shipped, the battery may be separate from the unit to avoid damage. The battery may not be fully charged when it is shipped. Before you use the Braille Sense U2, you should make sure the battery is fully charged. When you use the Braille Sense U2 for the first time, you may need to open the package, take the battery, and insert it into the battery slot at the rear panel of the unit. It is possible that the dealer or distributor from whom you purchased the Braille Sense U2 from has already done this for you. 3. When you use the Braille Sense U2 with the battery for the first time, the battery status may not be displayed accurately. In order to avoid this, connect the Braille Sense U2 to the AC adapter for about six hours with turn on. If you want to use the Braille Sense U2 immediately after opening the box, you will need to connect the AC adapter to the unit for more than six hours to fully charge the battery. 4. If you want or need to take the battery out of the unit, turn the power off, and then take the battery out of the unit. Before putting the battery back in to the unit, make certain that the power is off. There is a risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Please dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 5. When you are using the Braille Sense U2 on battery power only

(without the AC adapter), the status of the remaining battery power will be announced when the battery power is low. When the batterys charge falls below 15 percent, connect the AC adapter to the unit for recharging. If the remaining battery power drops to five percent, and the unit is not connected to the AC adapter, the Braille Sense U2 will shut down one minute after the announcement of the batterys status. The amount of battery life per charge will vary depending on the options you have set. 6. Your Braille Sense U2 needs to be handled with care. The Braille Sense U2 is a very delicate machine. You should make sure to handle the unit in a proper manner. Also, the Braille Sense U2 is very sensitive to dust. Make sure to keep the Braille Sense U2 away from dusty environments. 7. The Braille cells are very sensitive parts. If any of the Braille cells are not working properly due to dust or any other reason, please contact our repair center, or the dealer whom you purchased the Braille Sense U2 from for support. 8. You will need to register your Braille Sense U2 in order to ensure further maintenance, service, and upgrade information. Please visit www.hims-inc.com, to register your information. If you have any trouble when registering your information, please contact the dealer whom you purchased your Braille Sense U2 product from for help. 9. Do not take apart the Braille Sense U2 by yourself. Do not have anyone else who is not authorized by HIMS take apart the Braille Sense U2. If an unqualified person disassembles the unit, serious damage may occur to the Braille Sense U2. If an unauthorized person disassembles the Braille Sense U2, the unit will be excluded from any free maintenance, and the warranty will become void. If any liquid or external force damages the unit, it may also be excluded from free maintenance, even if the damage occurred during the warranty period. 10. If you let your Braille Sense U2 remain for a long time at the closed or high temperature places like inside of car, the battery attached to the Braille Sense U2 may be defected or fired. So please dont keep your Braille Sense U2 at those places. 11. If you have any complaints or suggestions, please provide us with your comments on our website. We will improve our product based on your comments and suggestions. Thank you for using the Braille Sense U2, and we value any comments or suggestions you have for our product. 12. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. Operation is subject to the following two conditions. 1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment can generate, use and radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. IMPORTANT NOTE:

FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Congratulations on the purchase of your Braille Sense U2! The Braille Sense U2 is capable of doing everything that an ordinary PDA can do, and more all without the need for a screen!

I. You will find the following items when you open the Braille Sense U2 package:

1) Braille Sense U2 2) Battery 3) Carrying Bag 4) AC adapter 5) USB Cable 6) USB to Parallel Cable 7) Earphone 8) User Manual (CD) 9) Braille User Manual (Hot Keys List) II. How to use this manual Before using the Braille Sense U2, you should read the entire manual to familiarize yourself with the functions of the Braille Sense U2. Reading the entire manual will allow you to operate the Braille Sense U2 to its fullest potential. The Braille Sense U2 has many functions. Many of these functions operate in a similar manner, so it is important to become familiar with all of the functions of the Braille Sense U2. You will see references to hot keys and shortcut keys. These keys refer to ways to access menus and functions quickly by using a combination of keystrokes. Please note that not all hot keys and shortcut keys will work while you are in the Braille Sense U2. Some hot keys and shortcut keys require that you be within a program in order for specific hot keys and shortcut keys to work. This user manual uses a specific notation of how to press keys. When you see Space-b (dots 1-2), this means that you would press Space and dots 1 and 2 simultaneously. This is a very important concept to understand when using this manual. In order to use the Braille Sense U2, you will need to understand what a menu is, and how it works. You will also need to understand what a text box is, and how to type in information in a text box. It is very important that you completely understand concepts such as this, so that you are able to use the Braille Sense U2 to its fullest potential. If you find that you are unable to find a solution to a problem within the manual, or if you need assistance with the Braille Sense U2, please email us at support@hims-inc.com. Visit us on the web at www.hims-

inc.com; or, you can call us at 512-837-2000. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION................................................................................34 1.1 What is the Braille Sense U2?.......................................................34 1.2 Hardware.........................................................................................35 1.2.1 Top Panel..................................................................................36 1.2.2 Right Side Panel.......................................................................38 1.2.3 Left Side Panel .........................................................................39 1.2.4 Rear Panel ................................................................................39 1.2.5 Front Panel ...............................................................................40 1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense U2 .......................41 1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense U2 ..................................................41 2. BASIC FUNCTIONS OF THE BRAILLE SENSE U2.........................43 2.1 How to Use the Commands...........................................................43 2.1.1 Messages..................................................................................43 2.2 Concept of the Menu......................................................................44 2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense U2 .............................46 2.3 Using the Function Keys ...............................................................49 2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille Sense U2 ..........................................................................................................50 2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files.............................51 2.6 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and the Pitch of Speech ..........52 2.7 How to use the Voice and the Braille display..............................52 2.8 How to type the character .............................................................53 2.8.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input.........................53 2.8.2 Input/search for Control character.........................................56 2.9 Multi Tasking ..................................................................................57 2.10 Switching Audio mode ................................................................58 2.11 Switching Key lock ......................................................................59 2.12 Print Spool....................................................................................59 2.13 One-Handed Mode .......................................................................60 2.14 Using Typing Mode......................................................................61 2.15 Common Combination Keys .......................................................61 3. GLOBAL OPTIONS...........................................................................64 3.1 Global options Overview...............................................................65 3.2 Global options in Detail .................................................................65 3.2.1 Braille display...........................................................................66 3.2.2 Braille Cursor ...........................................................................66 3.2.3 Eight Dot Mode.........................................................................67 3.2.4 View/input the Grade of Braille...............................................67 3.2.5 Braille Code ..............................................................................68 3.2.6 Message Display Time.............................................................69 3.2.7 Language ..................................................................................69 3.2.8 Voice..........................................................................................70 3.2.9 Punctuation Level ....................................................................71 3.2.10 Keyboard Echo.......................................................................71 3.2.11 Capitalization alert .................................................................72 3.2.12 Numbers .................................................................................72 3.2.13 Abbreviations .........................................................................73 3.2.14 Voice Volume ..........................................................................73 3.2.15 Voice Rate...............................................................................74 3.2.16 Voice Pitch..............................................................................74 3.2.17 Scroll Voice.............................................................................75 3.2.18 LCD..........................................................................................75 3.2.19 Flip LCD display.....................................................................76 3.2.20 LCD Font Size.........................................................................76 3.2.21 Video Display..........................................................................77 3.2.22 Printer Port .............................................................................77 3.2.23 Print Paper Size......................................................................77 3.2.24 Audio alerts ............................................................................78 3.2.25 Play Power On/Off Sound......................................................78 3.2.26 Left Scroll Buttons .................................................................79 3.2.27 Right Scroll Buttons ..............................................................80 3.2.28 Skip Empty Lines ...................................................................81 3.2.29 Control Information ...............................................................81 3.2.30 Hide passwords......................................................................82 3.2.31 Hot Key Information...............................................................82 3.2.32 Announce shortcut keys .......................................................83 3.2.33 Power Saving Mode ...............................................................83 3.2.34 Power Saving Kick In.............................................................84 3.2.35 Check Todays Schedule .......................................................85 3.2.36 One-Handed Mode .................................................................85 3.2.37 Automatic spell-check ...........................................................86 3.2.38 Default Document ..................................................................86 3.2.39 Automatically synchronize with time server .......................87 3.2.40 Progress indicator .................................................................87 3.2.41 Bluetooth ................................................................................88 3.2.42 Wireless LAN..........................................................................88 3.2.43 Ethernet port ..........................................................................89 3.2.44 Mass-storage device mode ...................................................90 4. FILE MANAGER................................................................................91 4.1 Overview .........................................................................................91 4.1.1 Navigating the File List............................................................91 4.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key.........................................92 4.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key ......................................................................93 4.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List ...............................93 4.2.1 Selecting Disks ........................................................................93 4.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a Folder) .93 4.2.3 Opening a File ..........................................................................94 4.2.4 Send To .....................................................................................96 4.2.5 Copy / Move..............................................................................96 4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders ............................................................97 4.2.7 Rename .....................................................................................98 4.2.8 New Document .........................................................................98 4.2.9 New Folder................................................................................99 4.2.10 File Conversion ......................................................................99 4.2.11 Select All ...............................................................................100 4.2.12 Search for File ......................................................................100 4.2.13 Sort Files By .........................................................................101 4.2.14 Set File Info...........................................................................102 4.2.15 Display Only Files of Type...................................................103 4.2.16 Zip..........................................................................................103 4.2.17 Unzip .....................................................................................104 4.2.18 Information ...........................................................................104 4.3 Using the Address Window.........................................................105 4.3.1 Editing.....................................................................................106 4.3.2 Type in Path / File Name........................................................106 4.3.3 Opening the History List .......................................................106 4.4 Network share function ...............................................................107 4.4.1 Search for shared computers and add the network list. ...108 4.4.2 Remove Remote folder registered........................................110 4.5 Hot Keys in the File Manager ..................................................111 5. WORD PROCESSOR......................................................................112 5.1 File Menu.......................................................................................112 5.1.1 New..........................................................................................113 5.1.2 Open........................................................................................113 5.1.3 Save.........................................................................................115 5.1.4 Save As ...................................................................................116 5.1.5 Close Current Document.......................................................117 5.1.6 Print.........................................................................................118 5.1.7 Settings...................................................................................120 5.1.8 Exit ..........................................................................................122 5.2 Edit Menu......................................................................................122 5.2.1 Start Selection........................................................................122 5.2.2 Copy ........................................................................................123 5.2.3 Cut ...........................................................................................123 5.2.4 Paste .......................................................................................124 5.2.5 Delete ......................................................................................124 5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines .................................................................124 5.2.7 Add to Clipboard....................................................................125 5.2.8 Clear Clipboard ......................................................................125 5.2.9 Select All.................................................................................125 5.2.10 Insert from File .....................................................................126 5.2.11 Insert Date ............................................................................126 5.2.12 Insert Time............................................................................127 5.2.13 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode.................127 5.2.14 Check Spelling .....................................................................128 5.3 Go to Menu ...................................................................................131 5.3.1 Find .........................................................................................132 5.3.2 Find Again ..............................................................................133 5.3.3 Replace ...................................................................................134 5.3.4 Go to Location........................................................................135 5.3.5 Go to Previous Page..............................................................137 5.3.6 Go to Next Page .....................................................................137 5.3.7 Set Mark ..................................................................................137 5.3.8 Go to Mark ..............................................................................138 5.3.9 Go to Previous Document.....................................................138 5.3.10 Go to Next Document ..........................................................139 5.4 Read Menu....................................................................................139 5.4.1 Read Selected Text ................................................................139 5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text .........................................140 5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor.............................................140 5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End ......................................................140 5.4.5 Auto Scroll..............................................................................141 5.4.6 Read Current Sentence .........................................................141 5.4.7 Read Current Line..................................................................142 5.4.8 Read Current Word ................................................................142 5.4.9 Read Current Character ........................................................142 5.4.10 Read Status ..........................................................................143 5.5 Layout ...........................................................................................143 5.5.1 Braille Document Layout.......................................................143 5.5.2 Print Document Layout .........................................................145 5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout ......................................................147 5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout .........................................................148 5.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting .........................................150 5.7 Cursor Location ...........................................................................151 5.8 Hot keys in the word processor: ................................................151 6. ADDRESS MANAGER....................................................................154 6.1 What is the Address Manager? ...............................................154 6.2 Starting the Address Manager ....................................................155 6.3 Using Add Address ..................................................................155 6.3.1 Adding an Address ................................................................155 6.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields ..................................................157 6.3.3 Using Search Address in Add address.........................158 6.4 Searching For an Address ..........................................................158 6.4.1 Using search address ........................................................158 6.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields........................................159 6.4.3 Using Add Address In Search Address........................160 6.5 Backing up and restoring the address list ................................160 6.5.1 Backup Address List .............................................................160 6.5.2 Restore Address List.............................................................161 6.5.3 Setting Backup Option ..........................................................161 6.6 Importing and Exporting CSV .....................................................162 6.6.1 Import from CSV ....................................................................163 6.6.2 Exporting CSV........................................................................166 6.7 Commands in the Found Records..............................................168 6.7.1 Find again ...............................................................................168 6.7.2 Opening a home page ...........................................................168 6.7.3 Editing Addresses .................................................................169 6.7.4 Deleting Addresses ...............................................................169 6.7.5 Printing addresses.................................................................170 6.7.6 Saving Addresses to a File ...................................................171 6.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook......................................171 6.9 Hot Keys in the Address Manager..............................................172 7. SCHEDULE MANAGER..................................................................175 7.1 Overview .......................................................................................175 7.2 Starting Schedule Manager .....................................................175 7.3 Setting time and date...................................................................175 7.4 Adding a Schedule.......................................................................176 7.4.1 Start date ................................................................................177 7.4.2 Start time ................................................................................178 7.4.3 End date..................................................................................178 7.4.4 End time..................................................................................178 7.4.5 Subject ....................................................................................179 7.4.6 Location ..................................................................................179 7.4.7 Memo.......................................................................................179 7.4.8 Alarm Time .............................................................................179 7.4.9 Setting a recurring Schedule ................................................180 7.4.10 Confirm .................................................................................183 7.4.11 Cancel ...................................................................................183 7.5 Search Schedule ..........................................................................184 7.5.1 Searching with date ...............................................................184 7.5.2 Searching with subject..........................................................185 7.6 Modify Schedule...........................................................................186 7.7 Deleting a Schedule.....................................................................186 7.8 Printing a Schedule......................................................................187 7.9 Saving Appointments as a File...................................................187 7.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments......................188 7.10.1 Backup Schedule .................................................................188 7.10.2 Restore Schedule.................................................................188 7.10.3 Setting Backup Option ........................................................189 7.11 Setting Alarm Option .................................................................190 7.11.1 Alarm Duration .....................................................................191 7.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time.................................................191 7.11.3 Repetition Times ..................................................................191 7.11.4 Confirm .................................................................................192 7.11.5 Cancel ...................................................................................192 7.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook....................................192 7.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager.........................................193 8. E-MAIL.............................................................................................195 8.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail service management ..................195 8.1.1 Executing e-mail ....................................................................196 8.1.2 Management e-mail service information..............................197 8.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail....................................................204 8.2.1 Receiving E-mail ....................................................................204 8.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages..............................205 8.2.3 Writing e-mail .........................................................................211 8.3 Major features of E-mail ..............................................................220 8.3.1 Deleting E-mail .......................................................................220 8.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail. .........................223 8.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message..............................224 8.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document. ............................225 8.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages......................................................226 8.4 Additional features of E-mail ......................................................227 8.4.1 Find .........................................................................................227 8.4.2 Find Again ..............................................................................228 8.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message .............................................229 8.4.4 Copy or Move to Mailbox.......................................................230 8.5 Use the Tools Menu .....................................................................234 8.5.1 Set Path...................................................................................235 8.5.2 Set Options.............................................................................238 8.5.3 Spam Settings ........................................................................239 8.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail .....................................................................246 8.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox...................................246 8.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the Mail Outbox .................................................................247 8.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an E-mail Message...........................................................................................247 9. MEDIA PLAYER..............................................................................249 9.1 Using the Audio Buttons .............................................................249 9.1.1 Play/Pause Button .................................................................249 9.1.2 Next button and previous button..........................................250 9.1.3 Record Button ........................................................................250 9.1.4 Stop Button ............................................................................251 9.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box ................251 9.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys ........................................251 9.2.1 Playback Information Tab .....................................................252 9.2.2 Play List Tab...........................................................................252 9.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List Tab

..........................................................................................................253 9.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu............................................256 9.3.1 File...........................................................................................256 9.3.2 Play..........................................................................................260 9.3.3 Record.....................................................................................263 9.3.4 Position Menu ........................................................................265 9.3.5 Mark.........................................................................................270 9.3.6 Settings...................................................................................272 9.4 Additional features.......................................................................278 9.4.1 Moving features using the cursor keys ...............................278 9.5 Hot Keys in the Media Player......................................................278 10. FM RADIO .....................................................................................281 10.1 Listening to FM Radio via internal speakers ...........................281 10.2 Frequency control......................................................................282 10.3 Add of the channel and move among channels......................283 10.4 Recording FM Radio sound ......................................................285 10.4.1 Recording Setting Dialog Box ............................................286 10.5 Additional features.....................................................................288 10.6 Hot Keys in the FM Radio..........................................................288 11. WEB BROWSER...........................................................................290 11.1 File...............................................................................................290 11.1.1 Open URL .............................................................................290 11.1.2 Open......................................................................................291 11.1.3 Save As .................................................................................292 11.1.4 Page Information..................................................................293 11.1.5 Exit ........................................................................................293 11.2 Read ............................................................................................294 11.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor..........................................294 11.2.2 Read from Cursor to End ....................................................294 11.2.3 Auto Scroll............................................................................295 11.3 Edit ..............................................................................................295 11.3.1 Start selection ......................................................................295 11.3.2 Copy ......................................................................................296 11.3.3 Add to clipboard ..................................................................296 11.3.4 Copy URL..............................................................................296 11.3.5 Copy Link..............................................................................297 11.4 Go To...........................................................................................297 11.4.1 Go to Home Page .................................................................297 11.4.2 Go to Previous Page............................................................298 11.4.3 Go to Next Page ...................................................................298 11.4.4 Go to Previous Heading ......................................................299 11.4.5 Go to Next Heading..............................................................299 11.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text ....................................................299 11.4.7 Refresh..................................................................................300 11.4.8 History...................................................................................300 11.4.9 Find .......................................................................................301 11.4.10 Find Again ..........................................................................302 11.4.11 Links list .............................................................................302 11.5 Favorites .....................................................................................303 11.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page ........................................303 11.5.2 Add to Favorites...................................................................304 11.5.3 Favorites List........................................................................304 11.6 Options........................................................................................306 11.6.1 The Structure and Movement..............................................306 11.6.2 Set User Agent .....................................................................306 11.6.3 Show visited links................................................................307 11.6.4 Changing the Default Download Folder.............................307 11.6.5 Clear cookies........................................................................308 11.7 Read Page...................................................................................309 11.7.1 Moving Between Controls...................................................309 11.7.2 Moving to a Form .................................................................311 11.7.3 Table......................................................................................311 11.7.4 Move to the Frame ...............................................................314 11.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files ....................................314 11.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser....................................................315 11.9 What the Web browser Does Not Support...............................317 12. DAISY PLAYER.............................................................................318 12.1 Components of the DAISY Player.............................................321 12.2 File...............................................................................................322 12.2.1 Open DAISY..........................................................................322 12.2.2 Voice Settings ......................................................................323 12.2.3 Book-Info ..............................................................................325 12.2.4 Exit ........................................................................................325 12.3 Document....................................................................................326 12.3.1 Play and Pause.....................................................................326 12.3.2 Move by Phrase....................................................................326 12.3.3 Move by Page .......................................................................327 12.3.4 Move by Level ......................................................................327 12.3.5 Move by Time Index.............................................................327 12.3.6 Move by Text Index..............................................................328 12.4 Mark.............................................................................................329 12.4.1 Previous Mark ......................................................................329 12.4.2 Next Mark..............................................................................330 12.4.3 Set Mark ................................................................................330 12.4.4 Move to Mark ........................................................................330 12.4.5 Deleting a Mark ....................................................................331 12.5 Heading.......................................................................................331 12.5.1 Move by Heading .................................................................331 12.5.2 Move to Specific Heading....................................................332 12.5.2 Find Heading ........................................................................332 12.5.3 Scan Heading and Read Heading.......................................333 12.5.4 Find Phrase ..........................................................................333 12.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player ...................................................334 13. BLUETOOTH MANAGER .............................................................337 13.1 Bluetooth Device List ................................................................337 13.2 Bluetooth Service List ...............................................................340 13.2.1 Connecting Service .............................................................341 13.2.2 LAN Service..........................................................................343 13.2.3 FTP Service ..........................................................................343 13.2.4 ActiveSync Service..............................................................350 13.2.5 Serial Port .............................................................................351 13.2.6 Bluetooth keyboard service................................................354 13.2.7 Bluetooth Printer service ....................................................355 13.2.8 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously ...........................355 13.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager ................................................355 14. DATABASE MANAGER................................................................357 14.1 Table Manager............................................................................358 14.1.1 Add Table..............................................................................359 14.1.2 Modify Table .........................................................................361 14.1.3 Delete table...........................................................................362 14.1.4 Set Default Table..................................................................363 14.2 Add Record.................................................................................363 14.3 Search Records..........................................................................365 14.4 List of Records Found...............................................................366 14.5 Setting Backup Option ..............................................................367 14.6 Backup Database .......................................................................368 14.7 Restore Database.......................................................................368 14.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager ...............................................369 15. EXTRAS .....................................................................................370 15.1 Games .........................................................................................370 15.1.1 Sense Dice game .................................................................370 15.1.2 Sense Brain Game ...............................................................371 15.2 Hot Keys in Extras .....................................................................374 16. SOCIAL NETWORKING................................................................375 16.1 The component of the Social networking service ..................375 16.2 Twitter .........................................................................................375 16.2.1 Main Terms ...........................................................................376 16.2.2 Launch Twitter..................................................................377 16.2.3 Twitter window .....................................................................378 16.2.4 Timeline ................................................................................380 16.2.5. Manage "Tweet" ..................................................................382 16.2.6. Manage Follow ....................................................................387 16.2.7. Use Direct Message ............................................................389 16.2.8. Use Search function ...........................................................392 16.2.9. Additional Function ............................................................395 16.2.10 Hot Keys for Twitter...........................................................397 16.3 Google talk..................................................................................399 16.3.1 Launch the Google Talk ......................................................399 16.3.2 Manage Contact ...................................................................402 16.3.3 Start Chat..............................................................................407 16.3.4 Start Voice Chat ...................................................................409 16.3.5 Send/Receive a file ..............................................................410 16.3.6 Other functions ....................................................................412 16.3.7 Setup Options ......................................................................419 16.3.8 Hot keys in the Google Talk................................................425 16.4 MSN messenger .........................................................................426 16.4.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger ................................427 16.4.2 Using a Contact List ............................................................428 16.4.3 Instant Message Dialog Box ...............................................435 16.5 Hot Keys in Social Networking .................................................438 16.5.1 Twitter ...................................................................................438 16.5.2 Google talk ...........................................................................439 16.5.3 MSN messenger ...................................................................441 17. UTILITIES ......................................................................................443 17.1 Calculator....................................................................................444 17.1.1 General Functions ...............................................................444 17.1.2 Memory Functions ...............................................................446 17.1.3 Sine Functions .....................................................................448 17.1.4 Cosine Functions.................................................................449 17.1.5 Tangent Functions...............................................................449 17.1.6 Logarithm Functions ...........................................................449 17.1.7 Copy to Clipboard................................................................450 17.1.8 Option Settings ....................................................................451 17.1.9 Exit ........................................................................................451 17.1.10 Sample Math Calculations.................................................451 17.2 Display Compass Heading........................................................455 17.2.1 Options of gyrocompass.....................................................455 17.3 Set Time and Date......................................................................456 17.4 Display Time and Date...............................................................458 17.5 Wake up alarm............................................................................458 17.5.1 Set Time ................................................................................459 17.5.2 Alarm Sound.........................................................................459 17.5.3 Term ......................................................................................459 17.5.4 Ringing Duration..................................................................460 17.5.5 Repeat Interval .....................................................................460 17.5.6 Wakeup Call Times ..............................................................460 17.5.7 Confirm/Cancel ....................................................................460 17.6 Calendar......................................................................................461 17.6.1 Using the Calendar ..............................................................461 17.7 Pronunciation Dictionary ..........................................................462 17.8 Stopwatch...................................................................................464 17.9 Terminal for Screen reader .......................................................465 17.10 Setup Internet...........................................................................466 17.10.1 LAN Setup...........................................................................467 17.10.2 Setup Wireless LAN...........................................................467 17.10.3 Modem & Bluetooth DUN setup........................................470 17.10.4 ADSL Setup ........................................................................472 17.11 Display Network Status ...........................................................473 17.12 Display Power Status...............................................................474 17.13 Backup/Restore Personalized settings..................................474 17.14 Menu manager..........................................................................476 17.15 Format.......................................................................................477 17.15.1 Formatting the disk............................................................477 17.16 Set Sleep Timer ........................................................................478 17.17 Upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware ......................................479 17.17.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware Using the Internet.............................................................................................479 17.17.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware from a Disk ..480 17.18 Hot Keys for Utilities................................................................481 18. USING THE HELP MENU .............................................................485 19. USING ACTIVESYNC....................................................................488 19.1 What is ActiveSync?..................................................................488 19.2 Connecting the Braille Sense U2 to a PC ................................488 19.3 Setting up the Braille Sense U2 in the ActiveSync Program .488 19.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense U2 Via ActiveSync ....489 20. COMMAND SUMMARY ................................................................491 20.1 Common Combination Keys .....................................................491 20.2 File Manager ...............................................................................492 20.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ...................492 20.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List ........................................493 20.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key......................................493 20.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands...............................................493 20.3 Word Processor .........................................................................494 20.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands...............................................494 20.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys......................................................495 20.4 Address Manager.......................................................................496 20.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu.............496 20.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List .................................496 20.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands ...............................................497 20.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys......................................................497 20.5 Schedule Manager .....................................................................497 20.5.1 Hot keys for the commands................................................497 20.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List .................................498 20.6 E-mail ..........................................................................................498 20.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox....................................498 20.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the Mail Outbox .................................................................499 20.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message

..........................................................................................................499 20.7 Media Player ...............................................................................500 20.7.1 Hot keys for commands ......................................................500 20.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab ................................501 20.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab..............................................502 20.8 FM Radio.....................................................................................503 20.9 Web Browser ..............................................................................503 20.9.1 Hot keys for the command..................................................503 20.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser .......504 20.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages ......................................505 20.10 Daisy Player..............................................................................505 20.11 Bluetooth Manager...................................................................506 20.12 Database Manager ...................................................................507 20.13 Extras ........................................................................................508 20.13.1 Games .................................................................................508 20.14 Social Networking....................................................................508 20.14.1 Twitter .................................................................................508 20.14.2 Google talk .........................................................................509 20.14.3 MSN messenger .................................................................511 20.15 Utilities ......................................................................................512 20.15.1 Calculator ...........................................................................512 20.15.2 Setting time and date.........................................................513 20.15.3 Checking Date and Time ...................................................514 20.15.4 Calendar..............................................................................514 20.15.5 Pronunciation dictionary...................................................514 20.15.6 Stopwatch...........................................................................515 20.15.7 Display Network Status .....................................................515 20.15.8 Display power status .........................................................515 20.15.9 Backup/Restore personalized settings............................515 20.15.10 Format...............................................................................515 20.15.11 Sleep Timer.......................................................................516 20.15.12 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware.....................516 21. COMMAND SUMMARY FOR USB KEYBOARDS .......................517 21.1 Common Combination Keys .....................................................517 21.2 File Manager ...............................................................................518 21.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list ...................518 21.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List..........................................518 21.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys...................................518 21.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands...............................................519 21.3 Word Processor .........................................................................519 21.3.1 Hot keys for the command..................................................519 21.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys......................................................521 21.4 Address Manager.......................................................................521 21.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the record or in the menu ..........................................................................................522 21.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record.................522 21.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands...............................................522 21.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys......................................................523 21.5 Schedule Manager .....................................................................523 21.5.1 Hot keys for the commands................................................523 21.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List .......................523 21.6 E-mail ..........................................................................................524 21.7 Media Player ...............................................................................525 21.7.1 Hot keys for commands ......................................................525 21.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab ................................526 21.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab..............................................527 21.8 FM Radio.....................................................................................528 21.9 Web Browser ..............................................................................528 21.9.1 Hot keys for the command..................................................528 21.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser .......529 21.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages ......................................529 21.10 Daisy Player..............................................................................530 21.11 Bluetooth Manager...................................................................531 21.12 Database Manager ...................................................................532 21.13 Extras ........................................................................................533 21.13.1 Games .................................................................................533 21.14 Social Networking....................................................................533 21.14.1 Twitter .................................................................................533 21.14.2 Google talk .........................................................................534 21.14.3 MSN messenger .................................................................536 21.15 Utilities ......................................................................................537 21.15.1 Calculator ...........................................................................537 21.15.2 Setting the Date and Time.................................................539 21.15.3 Checking the Date and Time.............................................539 21.15.4 Calendar..............................................................................539 21.15.5 Pronunciation dictionary...................................................540 21.15.6 Stopwatch...........................................................................540 21.15.7 Display Network Status .....................................................540 21.15.8 Display power status .........................................................540 21.15.9 Backup/Restore personalized settings............................540 21.15.10 Upgrading Braille Sense U2 Firmware...........................541 22. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ......................................................542 22.1 The Braille Sense U2 Will Not Turn On ....................................542 22.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard......................................................542 22.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand.......................................542 22.4 The Voice Pitch Is Too Low or Too High to Understand ........542 22.5 Lost Your Place..........................................................................543 22.6 No Internet Connection .............................................................543 22.7 Email ...........................................................................................543 22.8 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille...........................543 22.9 The Braille Sense U2 Does Not Respond ................................543 22.10 The LCD Does Not Come On...................................................544 23. ACCESSORIES.............................................................................545 24. OBTAINING SUPPORT.................................................................546 1. Introduction 1.1 What is the Braille Sense U2?

The Braille Sense U2 is a Braille note taker developed and manufactured by HIMS, for people who are blind and visually impaired. You can do the following with the Braille Sense U2. 1. You can use the Word Processor, and the Perkins style keyboard, to create Braille documents. 2. You can print your text documents using any compatible ink printer. 3. You can emboss your Braille documents when you connect the unit to a Braille printer. 4. You can open Microsoft (MS) Word documents, and read them in Braille. The Braille Sense U2 will import any document that was created in MS Word, and translate it into Braille. 5. Using the E-Mail Program, you can send email messages to sighted individuals, as well as read your email messages in Braille. 6. Using the Schedule Manager, you can enter your appointments on the Braille Sense U2. The Braille Sense U2 will then alert you at the time of your appointments. 7. With the Address Manager, you can input information about your contacts and the Braille Sense U2 can retrieve the information for those contacts. 8. Using the Braille Sense U2 Web Browser, you can surf the Internet with the Braille display that is located on the Braille Sense U2. 9. Using the Braille Sense U2 Media Player, you can listen to music, or any other sounds that are recorded in mp3, wma, or a wave file format. 10. Using the Braille Sense U2 FM Radio, you can listen to radio sound. format. 11. You can record the voice and radio sound in mp3 or wav file 12. On the Calculator, you can calculate algebraic equations, including scientific calculations. 13. You can copy any files from your personal computer to the Braille Sense U2, and vice versa. 14. You can use the Braille Sense U2 as a Braille display with a compatible screen reader, such as Window-Eyes. 15. You can copy, move, and delete files on the Braille Sense U2. 16. You can adjust the volume, the speed, and the pitch of the speech. You can change as many of these features as you want on the Braille Sense U2. 17. You can use the Database Manager to create your own Database for keeping and storing important information. 18. You can use MSN messenger to communicate in real time, with others who are running the MSN messenger program. 19. The sighted person who is learning Braille for the first time can use the LCD screen on the Braille Sense U2, to easily learn Braille. Likewise, using the LCD screen, sighted people, who do not know Braille, can teach Braille to those who are blind when using the Braille Sense U2. 1.2 Hardware In order to get the most out of your Braille Sense U2, you will want to become familiar with the Braille Sense U2 by learning where the buttons and ports are located, as well as the function of each of these buttons and ports. This section explains the hardware configuration of the Braille Sense U2. The dimensions of the Braille Sense U2 are 10 inches long by 6.1 inches wide by 1.9 inches high. On the bottom of the unit, there are rubber feet in order to prevent slipping while you are using the Braille Sense U2. The input keys are Perkins-style, which consist of seven keys that represent dot one through dot six, and the space bar. In addition to these seven keys, there are two function keys that correspond to the Backspace and Enter keys. Also there are 32 cells that make up the Braille display. The first thing you should do is place the Braille Sense U2 on a level surface that you can use to examine the Braille Sense U2, such as a table or desk. When the Braille Sense U2 is placed on a level surface, the shape of the entire unit will resemble a small, thin rectangular box. The Braille Sense U2 has six sides. You should feel for the Braille keys and Braille display. The side that the Braille keys and Braille display are on should be facing up. The side that is now facing up is referred to as the top of the Braille Sense U2. The side that is facing to your right is called the right side panel. The side facing to your left is called the left side panel. The side that is facing away from you is called the rear panel. The side that is facing toward you is called the front panel, and the side that the Braille Sense U2 is sitting on is called the bottom panel. This section of the manual describes each side of the Braille Sense U2 and the basic function(s) of each button and port. We will discuss each of the panels in the following order: top panel, right side panel, left side panel, rear panel, and front panel. 1.2.1 Top Panel Starting with the top of the Braille Sense U2, you will find a Braille display that is located close to the front panel on the Braille Sense U2. Above the Braille display, there are 32 small buttons that correspond to 32 Braille cells. These 32 small buttons are called cursor routing keys. You can use these buttons as cursor placement keys on the corresponding Braille cells when you are editing documents. The cursor routing keys will also work as shortcut keys in certain situations. On both the extreme right and left sides of the Braille display, are two capsule shaped buttons. These buttons divided into two parts up and down. These buttons are called scroll buttons. The upper button called up scroll button and the lower button called down scroll button. The scroll buttons can be used to scroll through the menus or other information that is displayed on the Braille display. If you are on text that has more than 32 Braille cells, the scroll buttons will scroll the Braille display. Above the cursor routing keys, are four rectangular shaped buttons. The spacebar is located between these four rectangular shaped buttons. Two of the rectangular shaped buttons are located on the left side of the spacebar and the other two are located on the right of the spacebar. These four rectangular shaped buttons are function keys. Moving from left to right, the key that is the farthest to the left is called the F1 key, and the key to the right of the F1 key is called the F2 key. Then, you will feel the spacebar. The key that is to the right of the spacebar is called the F3 key, and the key that is to the right of the F3 key is the F4 key. Above the function keys, you will find the Braille keys that are Perkins-

style, including the spacebar. If you have ever used a regular computer keyboard, this setup is very similar to the keys on the home row on a regular computer keyboard. When you are typing, you should place your fingers on these 9 Perkins-style keys in the following manner:

Place your index finger, middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of your left hand on the left four buttons. Then, place your index finger, middle finger, ring finger, and pinky finger of your right hand on the right four buttons. Finally, place both of your thumbs on the spacebar, also called the Space key. The button where you placed your left index finger corresponds with dot one in Braille. The button that your left middle finger is on corresponds to dot two, and the button that your left ring finger is on corresponds to dot three. The button on which your left pinky finger is placed on is the Backspace key. The button that your right index finger is on corresponds with dot four in Braille. The button that your right middle finger is on is dot five, and the button your ring finger is placed on corresponds with dot six in Braille. The button on which your right pinky is placed is the Enter key. And, the long bar shaped button where your thumbs are placed is called the spacebar. Toward the top of the Braille Sense U2 on the top panel, is a liquid crystal display (LCD) in the center. The LCD displays the printed text, so that someone who has sight can see what you are typing. On both sides of the LCD, there are two speakers, which enable the Braille Sense U2 to emit sound. At the right side of this LCD, there are there are 4 LED lights. From the left to right, first LED light is for wireless LAN and when you activate the wireless LAN, this LED light turns on with blue color. Second LED light is for Bluetooth and when you activate the Bluetooth, this LED light turns on with blue color. Third LED light is for the GPS and when you execute Sense Navigation, LED turns on with blue color (Only when you download the navigation map to the Braille Sense U2). Fourth LED light is for the power. When you turn on the Braille Sense U2, LED turns on with red color. These LED lights appear used option so that someone who has sight can see which option you activate with Braille Sense U2 and can turn of the option which you dont use currently. 1.2.2 Right Side Panel Next, let's discuss the right side panel of the Braille Sense U2. We will start from the front of the unit on the right side panel, and move our way toward the back. Toward the front of the Braille Sense U2 on the right side panel, you will find the USB OTG port. If you connect the unit to a personal computer by using this USB port, you can transfer files that are stored in the Braille Sense U2 to your personal computer, and vice versa. Continuing toward the back of the unit on the right side panel, you will find on the right side panel of the unit is the AC adapter jack. The AC adapter will plug in to this hole, and then plug in to a standard AC electrical outlet, so that you can use the Braille Sense U2 with electricity, instead of using power from the battery. The back of the AC adapter jack, you will find a slide switch which is key lock switch. This switch will be explained in more detail in the next section. 1.2.3 Left Side Panel Now, let's take a look at the left side panel of the unit. If you move your finger to the left side of the Braille Sense U2, you will find USB port. You can connect USB cable to this USB port. Continuing toward the back of the unit on the left side panel, you will find second USB port. The back of the USB port you will find SD slot and can insert SD card (secure digital card) in SD slot. 1.2.4 Rear Panel Next, let's take a look at the rear panel of the Braille Sense U2. On the far left of the rear panel, you will find a small button in round groove. This is the reset button. If your unit is not responding properly, you can press this button with your finger, which will reboot the unit via a hard reset. Pressing the reset button is a hardware reset. Do NOT press Reset button for more than 5 seconds. You can also do a soft reset by pressing F2-F3-1-2-3-4-5-6. This is a software reset, instead of a hardware reset. If you press down dots 1-2 and the reset button at the same time while the power is on, the Braille Sense U2 will turn on without speech. When the reset button is pressed, the Braille Sense U2 will reboot. It will take about fifteen seconds for your unit to complete the reboot process. At the right side of this reset button, you will find the local area network

(LAN) port. If you connect the Braille Sense U2 to an Ethernet interface through this port, you will be able to connect to the Internet, allowing you to browse websites as well as send and receive email. At the right of the LAN port, you will find USB port which is used for user to connect USB cable or USB memory stick. The details of this feature will be explained in more detail later in this manual. Next, to the right of the USB port, you will find a video output port. The video output port can be used to display the text that is shown on the Braille display on a regular computer monitor for sighted people. If you want to use this port, it will have to be turned on from within the options menu. This port is very beneficial when using the Braille Sense U2 in educational settings. The last thing you will find on the rear side panel of the unit is a rectangular hole that is for the detachable battery. The battery is separated from the unit when the Braille Sense U2 is shipped. Insert the battery into this rectangular slot until you hear a click sound. When you hear this sound, you will know that the battery is inserted correctly. To remove the battery from the unit, you will need to locate the latch that is found on the bottom of the unit. Using your left hand, pull the latch to the right panel, and then use your right hand to pull the battery out of the slot. 1.2.5 Front Panel Finally, lets take a look at the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. On the far left of the front panel, there is microphone jack. You can plug in microphone. To the right of the microphone jack is headphone jack. You can plug in stereo headphone jack. To the right of the headphone jack is slide switch. This slide switch is the audio mode switch. This switch will be explained in more detail in the next section. Next, to the right of the slide switch is five buttons in different shapes. The five buttons are for playback audio and recording sounds. These five buttons will be explained in the FM Radio, Daisy and Media program sections in this user manual. To the right of the five buttons is power switch. This switch will turn the unit on and turn the unit off. To turn on the unit, push the switch to the right. To turn off the unit, push the switch to right again. Congratulations! You are now familiar with the very basic functions of the buttons and ports that are located on the Braille Sense U2. The rest of the manual will discuss each function in greater detail to allow you to maximize the potential of your Braille Sense U2. 1.3 Hardware Specifications of the Braille Sense U2 1) Operating system: Windows CE 6.0. 2) Flash memory: 32GB. 3) RAM: 256MB. 4) CPU: Mobile CPU (800MHz). 5) Battery: Lithium Ion (detachable), backup battery and watch-

battery installed. 6) Battery running time: About 17 hours (with turning Braille, TTS and LCD on, middle volume of internal speaker) 7) Keyboard: 9 Braille keyboards with Perkins-style, 4 function keys, 32 cursor routing keys, 4 scroll buttons. 8) Additional button and switch: key lock switch, audio mode switch, reset button, 5 audio buttons. 9) Braille display: 32 refreshable Braille cells. 10) Video output: VGA output, LCD. 11) Network: 10/100 based Ethernet. 12) Wireless: WLAN (IEEE802.11 b/g/n), Bluetooth ver.2.0+EDR. 13) Sensor: 6-axis motion sensor 14) GPS: Internal GPS receiver 15) Interface: USB Slave(v2.0) ,3 USB Master(ver2.0), SD slot 16) Sound: Internal stereo speakers, stereo headphone jack. 17) Voice recording: Internal microphone, external microphone jack. 18) Vibrator motor is installed 1.4 Memory on the Braille Sense U2 The Braille Sense U2 has 256MB of RAM (random access memory) and 32GB of flash memory. The RAM is memory space that is reserved for running programs. This memory space is a temporary storage of any program files that are running or any current data located in documents that you are editing. The data in the RAM area will disappear if your battery goes dead, and the AC adapter is not connected. Also, when the Braille Sense U2 reboots for any reason, the data in the RAM will disappear. However, the data in flash memory will not disappear, even if your battery goes dead, or if your unit reboots. Now that you know what the Braille Sense U2 is, move on to the next section to learn more about the basic functions of the Braille Sense U2. 2. Basic Functions of the Braille Sense U2 2.1 How to Use the Commands All of the commands that you will use on the Braille Sense U2 are comprised of different combinations of the Braille keys. In this user manual, the - sign is used to indicate key combinations. For example, Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) indicates that the user should press space and letter z (dots 1-3-5-6) simultaneously and then release them at the same time. You will also find expressions like Space-1-3-5-6 in this manual. This means that the spacebar with dots 1, 3, 5, and 6 should be pressed and released simultaneously. You can execute most commands by pressing Enter button. If you want to cancel the execution of any command, and return to the previous status, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-

6). Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) is a very important command to remember, as it will allow you to back out of programs and menus, when you may have pressed keys that you did not mean to press. 2.1.1 Messages If you have setup an appointment in the Braille Sense U2, schedule Manager, you will be notified of your appointments by the Braille Sense U2 on the day of your appointment. When you are notified of an appointment, you can interact with the Schedule Manager as you normally would. In order to exit from the Schedule Manager, you should press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5), and launch another program. If you do not want to be alerted of todays schedule when you turn on the Braille Sense U2, you should turn off the Check todays schedule option. If you turn off the Braille Sense U2 while another program is opened, and then you turn it on again, the Braille Sense U2 will tell you the name of the program that was running on the Braille Sense U2 when you turned it off. If you turn off the Braille Sense U2 while you are using the word processor, it will tell you the file name/input mode and file protection status as well as the program name. When you connect the AC adapter to the Braille Sense U2, the Braille Sense U2 will speak the message AC adapter connected. When you disconnect it from the Braille Sense U2, the Braille Sense U2 will say, AC adaptor disconnected. 2.2 Concept of the Menu The menu on the Braille Sense U2 is similar to the concept of a restaurant menu. For instance, a menu that is used at a restaurant will help you select your choice of food that will be served, while the menu on the Braille Sense U2 provides you with choices that you can select. If you have selected a menu item from the menu items list, and there are sub menus, the Braille Sense U2 will display those choices for that particular item. Moving among the menu items is very simple. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and press up scroll button or Space-1 to move to the previous item, and press down scroll button or Space-4 to move to the next item. Or just press an alphabet that follows the menu names. This is a shortcut key. Or you can execute the menu item without calling up the menu by pressing hotkey. Shortcut keys are the alphabets in the parentheses that follow the menu names. And hotkeys are the combination of a couple of keys like Enter, Space, or Backspace. These are displayed after the shortcut keys. For example, if you are in the word processor, and press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on File, you will hear New (n) pull down Enter-n. The word New represents the function. The letter n

(dots 1-3-4-5) is the letter that you would press while you are in the File menu in order to move directly to New. Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) is what you would press to access the function New from anywhere in the word processor. The n is the shortcut key and Enter-n is the hotkey. It is important to note that not all shortcut keys work from anywhere in the Braille Sense U2; some commands will only work while you are in a specific program. For example, if you want to activate the new document option in the word processor. You cannot press Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the program menu to activate this option. You must be in the word processor program in order for Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) to activate the new document option. You can also move to the next menu item by pressing Space-4. You can move to the previous menu item by pressing Space-1. When you want to move to the first item of the menu, you can press Space-1-2-3. If you would like to move to the last item of the menu, you can press Space-4-5-6. The corresponding menu name will be displayed on the Braille display, and the menu name will be spoken through the TTS (text to speech) engine. If you want to listen to the name of the menu again, press Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5). Once you move to a menu item that you want to execute, press Enter in order to execute the menu. By pressing Enter, you will move to the sub menu. If there is no submenu, the Braille Sense U2 will execute the command from the menu. This process is called menu selection. You may also move to any menu or execute any menu by pressing an initial spelling of the menu. Sometimes, if a menu is executed by pressing Enter, the lower-level menu is displayed. In this case, the right direction arrow sign (->) is displayed after the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille display. When this happens, the Braille Sense U2 will say, pull down. Or, if a menu is executed by pressing Enter, the dialog box is displayed. In this case, the ellipsis sign () will be displayed after the name of the corresponding menu on the Braille display. The Braille Sense U2 will also speak the message, common dialog. Lets begin going through the various menus. First, turn the unit on by pushing the power switch toward you. Now, bring up the program menu. You can bring up the program menu by pressing F1. The program menu is the top menu in the Braille Sense U2. That is, the program menu is the parent directory for everything, as there are no directories or menus above the program menu. The items in the program menu are file manager, word processor, address manager, schedule manager, e-

mail, media player, FM Radio, web browser, daisy player, Bluetooth manager, database manager, extras, social networking, utilities, global options, and help. The first item of the program menu is File manager. If Space-4 is pressed, the next menu item is displayed on the Braille display, and it is also spoken. If Space-4 is pressed repeatedly, the Help menu will be displayed. The Help menu is the last item on the program menu. Press Space-4-5-6 when File manager is displayed. The Braille Sense U2 will say Help, as the help menu is displayed. Then, press Space-1-2-3, and the Braille Sense U2 speaks File manager. It means that Space-4-5-6 moves to the last item of the program menu, and Space-1-2-3 moves to the first item of the program menu. If you want to move from the current menu to the upper level menu, press Space-e (dots 1-5). At any point in the program menu or navigating sub-menus, you can press the F1 key to go to the program menu immediately. The file manager, which is the first item of the program menu, will be displayed. 2.2.1 Control Symbols on the Braille Sense U2 The Braille Sense U2 has many control symbols. Those symbols appear when you set Before and After the Control information in the Global options. The default value is set to Before. However, if you are in the web browser, the control symbols will be displayed even if you turn off the Control information option. The control symbol will appear in front and back of the menu name or item name. For example, you might see something like, MN File (f) pull down. The following table shows the names and the symbols of the control symbols that are displayed in front and back of menu names. Name Menu Symbol MN Menu item List item MI LI Edit box EB Multi edit box MEB Computer edit box CE Combo box CB Comments It means the menu that has submenus. It means the menu that does not have a submenu. The item name after this symbol represents the name of the item in any list.

(Ex: LI database or LI sample.txt in the file list of the file manager) The item name after this symbol represents the edit box name. You can find the edit box after the edit box name. In the web browser, the symbol EB may be followed by an edit box without an edit box name. Edit boxes that begin with the symbol EB are one line.

(Ex: EB Last name: (cursor) in the address manager program or EB (cursor) This also represents the edit box. But you can type in more than one line in the edit box.

(Ex: MEB Subject: (cursor) in the e-mail program) It means there is an edit box to input ASCII Braille. The edit box after this symbol should allow ASCII Braille to be typed in.

(Ex: CE To: (cursor) in the email program) It represents the combo box in Edit combo box ECB Prompt button PB Static box ST Link Anchor LN ANC Radio button RB which you can choose an item by pressing the up scroll button or the down scroll button.

(Ex: CB Type: *.* in the Open dialog box of the word processor program) You can choose the desired item by pressing the up or down scroll button, or by directly typing in the item name.

(Ex: ECB File name: (cursor) in the Open dialog box of the word processor program) PB follows any question in which you have to choose Yes or No. You can toggle between Yes and No by pressing the Space or the Backspace button.

(Ex: When you exit from the word processor, PB Save: Yes) ST is followed by the current status.

(Ex: ST noname.hbl/insert mode/write in the word processor program) It means there is a link in the web page. It means there is an anchor in the web page. It represents a radio button, which allows you to choose an item by pressing the up scroll button, down scroll button, space, or Backspace. Also it cycles between items when pressing this key.

(Ex: RB Attribute: Write in the Information dialog box of the file manager) It means that the radio button is selected in the web browser It means that the radio button is not selected in the web browser. It means that the check box is selected. It means that the check box is not selected. SRB Radio button select Radio button unselect Check box check SCHB URB Check box uncheck UCHB Links, anchors, and radio button are controls that are only used in the web browser. The symbols enable you to understand what type of box or menu you are working with. For example, if MN, MI, or LI are displayed in front of a list, you can move from one item to the next item or previous item by pressing the up or down scroll button. If ECB, EB, CB, or MEB are displayed on the display, you will have to find the cursor and input the desired letters at the cursor position. If BT is displayed, you can press Enter to push the button. 2.3 Using the Function Keys There are four function keys on the Braille Sense U2. When using the Braille Sense U2, you can open the menus, cancel tasks, and move to other items by using these function keys. No matter where you are in the Braille Sense U2, the F1 key will open the Braille Sense U2 program menu. You can also use F1 and the shortcut key for each program in the program menu to open each program anywhere in the Braille Sense U2. For example, if you are in the word processor, and want to open the web browser, you could press F1-b (dots 1-2) to open the web browser. In each program, Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and the F2 key will open the specific menu for each program. The F3 key has the same function as tab (Space-4-5). If you press Space-F3, this will have the same function as pressing shift-tab (Space-1-2). The F4 key will function just like the escape key does on a personal computer. This key performs the same function as pressing Space-e (dots 1-5). Please note that the escape key does not exit a program, as does Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). You can use combinations of the function keys to allow you to do many tasks. Pressing F1 and F2 at the same time will work the same as page up on a personal computer. If you press the F3 and F4 keys at the same time, this is the same as pressing page down on a personal computer. The combination of the F1 and F4 keys will move you to the Task Name (like the task bar in a computer running Microsoft Windows). If you press the F2 and F3 keys simultaneously, you can switch between the different programs that are running just like pressing alt-tab in your PC. The Task Name and program switching will be explained in greater detail in the section 2.10, entitled, Multi-Tasking. 2.4 The AC Power Supply and the Battery Pack for the Braille Sense U2 It is very useful to know what the remaining battery power when the Braille Sense U2 is being operated only on battery power. If the remaining battery power is not sufficient, the Braille Sense U2 will indicate that the battery power is low. In this case, you need to check the remaining battery power, especially when you are using the Braille Sense U2 without plugging it into an AC power supply. To check the battery power status, press Space-1-6. You will find the following 2 items:

1. Battery power level 2. Power source (battery, AC supply or USB power) The battery power level represents the percentage of the remaining battery power. The power source indicates whether power is coming from the battery or the AC power/USB power supply. If the battery power level drops under 15 percent, the Braille Sense U2 will display the battery status on the Braille display, and it will announce (through the speakers) that the battery has less than 15 percent of its power left. If the battery power level falls below five percent, the Braille Sense U2 will give you a warning indicating that your battery power level is under five percent, and the Braille Sense U2 will be automatically turned off in one minute, unless you connect the Braille Sense U2 to an AC power supply. Lets explore the detachable battery pack. When the Braille Sense U2 is shipped, you will find the battery pack is not installed in the Braille Sense U2. This is done to prevent damage during shipping. When you insert this battery pack in to the Braille Sense U2 for the first time, the unit may display an inaccurate battery power level. Before using the Braille Sense U2 for the first time, please charge the battery for five hours. If you need to use the unit during the initial recharge, the unit should be connected to the AC power supply for at least five hours in order to fully charge the battery. When you remove the battery from the Braille Sense U2, make sure your unit is turned off; especially when the AC power supply is not connected to your unit. Otherwise, you will lose all of your data that is stored in RAM. If you remove the battery, and do not have the Braille Sense U2 hooked up to the AC power supply or USB power supply, your data that is stored in RAM will remain for only about an hour. In order to keep your data that is stored in RAM, the Braille Sense U2 must be connected to an AC power supply or USB power supply or battery pack within an hour; otherwise the data that is stored in RAM will be lost. 2.5 Basic Explanation of Disks, folders, and files The flash memory in the Braille Sense U2 is similar to a big bookshelf in a library. The piece of hardware in the Braille Sense U2 that is called the disk is similar to the idea of a bookshelf in a library. You can make partitions on a bookshelf in order to organize books into categories. Each category can be compared to what are called folders on the Braille Sense U2. The books in each section can be compared to what are called files on the Braille Sense U2. You can save files into any folders at your convenience. If you make the proper folder names for files you are saving, it will make it easier to find saved files when you need to access them later. When the Braille Sense U2 is shipped from the factory, the name of the flash memory in the Braille Sense U2 is called flashdisk. You can create folders on this flashdisk in any way that you prefer. You can also expand your memory space by adding additional memory devices, such as a floppy disk drive through a USB port, USB stick memory (also known as a USB flash drive), or SD card. The USB stick memory is called USB. If you decide to add any of these memory devices, you will be able to create folders, and save files on the additional memory devices. 2.6 Controlling the Volume, Speed, and the Pitch of Speech You can change the volume, speed, and pitch of speech used on the Braille Sense U2. To change the volume, you can press Backspace-F4 to raise the volume. Press Backspace-F1 to lower the volume. To make changes in the reading speed, you can press Space-F4 to make the reading faster. Press Space-F1 to make the reading speed slower. In order to make changes in pitch, press Enter-F4 for a higher pitch and Enter-F1 for a lower tone. When any of the above combination keys are pressed, the Braille Sense U2 will announce the status of its volume, rate, or pitch. The changes you made with these combination keys will remain in effect even when you turn off the machine and turn it back on again. 2.7 How to use the Voice and the Braille display When using the Braille Sense U2, you can choose to use Braille only or speech only for reading. You can also use both Braille and speech at the same time for reading. However, you cannot turn off both Braille and the speech simultaneously. You can utilize Backspace-F2 to turn the speech on and off. You can use Backspace-F3 to turn the Braille on and off. Please refer to section 3.2.1 in this user manual for more information. 2.8 How to type the character In the document, edit box and multi edit box on Braille Sense U2, you can enter the grade 1 or grade 2 Braille. But in the computer edit box such as To in email program, you have to enter the computer Braille. If you want to enter the capital letter, you can use the capital sign (Space-

u (dots 1-3-6)) when you enter the computer Braille. For example, if you want to enter the H in computer edit box, you press Space-u (dots 1-3-

6) and press dots 1-2-5. If you press Space-u (dots 1-3-6) twice, capitals continue until you turn off by pressing Space-u (dots 1-3-6). You can use the Space-Backspace instead of capital sign (Space-u). Only, you have press Space-Backspace and dots 1-2-5 simultaneously. Also you can use the capital sign when you enter the at sign. To input the at sign, you need to press Space-u (dots 1-3-6) and press dot 4. Also you can input the at sign by pressing Space-

Backspace-dot 4. And if you want to enter the number, you can use the number sign (dots 3-4-5-6). But in the computer edit box, you have to input the number in computer Braille that lowered by one row and no number sign. 2.8.1 The ASCII table for a computer Braille input exclamation mark: dots 2-3-4-6 quotation mark: dot 5 number sign: dots 3-4-5-6 dollar sign: dots 1-2-4-6 percent: dots 1-4-6 ampersand: dots 1-2-3-4-6 apostrophe: dot 3 left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6 right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6 asterisk: dots 1-6 PLUS: dots 3-4-6 comma: dot 6 dash: dots 3-6 period: dots 4-6 slash: dots 3-4 0: dots 3-5-6 1: dot 2 2: dots 2-3 3: dots 2-5 4: dots 2-5-6 5: dots 2-6 6: dots 2-3-5 7: dots 2-3-5-6 8: dots 2-3-6 9: dots 3-5 colon: dots 1-5-6 semi colon: dots 5-6 less than: dots 1-2-6 equal: dots 1-2-3-4-5-6 great than: dots 3-4-5 question mark: dots 1-4-5-6 at sign: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 4 A: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dot 1 B: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2 C: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4 D: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-4-5 E: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-5 F: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4 G: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5 H: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5 I: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4 J: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5 K: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3 L: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3 M: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4 N: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5 O: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5 P: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4 Q: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-4-5 R: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-5 S: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4 T: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-3-4-5 U: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-6 V: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-3-6 W: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-5-6 X: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-6 Y: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-4-5-6 Z: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-3-5-6 left bracket: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 2-4-6 back slash: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-5-6 right bracket: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 1-2-4-5-6 carat: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5 underscore: Space-u (dots 1-3-6), dots 4-5-6 grave accent: dots 4 a: dot 1 b: dots 1-2 c: dots 1-4 d: dots 1-4-5 e: dots 1-5 f: dots 1-2-4 g: dots 1-2-4-5 h: dots 1-2-5 i: dots 2-4 j: dots 2-4-5 k: dots 1-3 l: dots 1-2-3 m: dots 1-3-4 n: dots 1-3-4-5 o: dots 1-3-5 p: dots 1-2-3-4 q: dots 1-2-3-4-5 r: dots 1-2-3-5 s: dots 2-3-4 t: dots 2-3-4-5 u: dots 1-3-6 v: dots 1-2-3-6 w: dots 2-4-5-6 x: dots 1-3-4-6 y: dots 1-3-4-5-6 z: dots 1-3-5-6 left brace: dots 2-4-6 vertical bar: dots 1-2-5-6 right brace: dots 1-2-4-5-6 tilde: dots 4-5 2.8.2 Input/search for Control character

Control character is a code in a character set, which does not in itself represent a written symbol in computing. For example, all entries in the ASCII table below code 32 such as Form Feed (FF), TAB, and Carriage Return (CR). In the Braille Sense U2, you can input or search the control character in the Braille documents.

1) Inputting the Control character The control character can be input only in the Braille documents. Inputting the control character in the Braille documents, follow these steps below.

(1) While opening the Braille document, press Space-x (dots 1-3-4-

6) and control character will be announced.

(2) Input the control character. For example, pressing l (dots 1-2-3) for Form Feed (FF) and i (dots 2-4) for TAB in alphabetic order. Pressing dot(s) for each control character except dot-7 and 8.

(3) The control character will be inputted in the Braille documents. 2) Searching for the Control character The control character can be searched as well in the Braille documents. Searching for the control character, follow these steps below.

(1) While opening the Braille document, press Space-f (dots 1-2-6).

(2) Text to find will be displayed.

(3) Press Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6) and control character will be announced.

(4) Input the control character that you want to search for. For example, pressing l (dots 1-2-3) for Form Feed (FF) and i (dots 2-4) for TAB in alphabetic order. Pressing dot(s) for each control character except dot-7 and 8.

(5) Pressing Enter will search for the control character. 2.9 Multi Tasking The Braille Sense U2 can do more than one task at the same time, which is called multi-tasking. For example, you can work with the word processor while you are listening to music, and you can put calculations into a document at the same time. This is called a Braille Sense U2 multi-task. If you want to work with the word processor while listening to music, you can first run the media player and play a music file. While playing music, you can press F1 key to open the Braille Sense U2 menu and run the word processor. The Braille Sense U2 can run up to seven programs simultaneously. You cannot have more than seven multi-tasks. That is, you cannot run more than seven programs at the same time. If you try to run a program that you are already running, the new instance of the program will not start, and you will be taken to the instance of the program that is already running. For example, while you are working with a document called A, you decide to execute the file manager. Next, you move to a document called B by pressing the move keys in the file list of file manager, and you press Enter. Then, the word processor will not load again for opening the document B, but the document B will be opened in the word processor, which document A is also running on. If you want to switch documents, you need to open them in the word processor without running other programs. In this case, you can switch them with tab(Space-4-5 or F3) or shift-

tab(Space-1-2 or Space-F3). Switching documents will be explained later in detail in section 4, which covers the word processor. After you press F1 to call up the program menu, or after you press F1-

F4 to open the Task Name, you can press escape (Space-e or F4) to return to the previously-running program. If you want to switch between programs while running more than one program, press F1 and F4 keys at the same time to open the Task Name. The Task Name shows the names and numbers of the running programs, just like the file manager. You can cycle through the running programs on the Braille Sense U2 with the Space-1 or the Space-4 and scroll buttons. Press Enter key to run the program that you want after focusing on your selection. The combination of the F2 and F3 keys can switch between all of the running programs immediately without opening the Task Name. It functions the same way as the alt-tab keys on your PC. If you are running three programs and you are in the second program, pressing the F2 and F3 keys at the same time will move you to the third program. If you press F2-F3 again, you will be on the first program. In the above case, pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) will close the current running program and move you to the previous program. However, if there is only one program running, pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) will close the program and move you to the Braille Sense U2 program menu. Note that Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) is different from the escape key, which does not close programs. 2.10 Switching Audio mode The audio buttons on the front panel will work for different function according to the location of Audio mode switch. If you push the audio mode switch to the left side, the Braille Sense U2 will say radio mode and the audio buttons will work for the FM Radio program. If you set the audio mode switch to the center, the Braille Sense U2 will say daisy mode and the audio buttons will work for the Daisy program. If you push the audio mode switch to the right side, the Braille Sense U2 will say media mode and the audio buttons will work for the Media program. So in order to use the audio buttons as you desire, you have to set the audio mode switch to the proper position. For example, when you are using Media program and the audio mode switch is located in the left side, the audio buttons on the front panel will work for FM Radioprogram. The detailed function of the audio buttons will be explained in the FM Radio, Daisy and Media program sections in this user manual. 2.11 Switching Key lock You can disable or enable any specified keys on the Braille Sense U2 by using Key Lock switch on the right side panel. If the key lock switch put on front, Braille Sense U2 will say all keys locked. In this case, you cant use the all keys including the on/off switch. If the key lock switch put on center, Braille Sense U2 will say top panel locked. In this case, only you can use the buttons and switches in the front panel (audio mode switch, audio buttons and on/off switch). If the key lock switch put on rear, Braille Sense U2 will say unlocked. In this case, you can use the all keys (Braille keyboard, audio buttons, scroll buttons, function keys, audio mode switch and on/off switch). But, you can use the reset button, regardless of location of key lock switch. 2.12 Print Spool The Braille Sense U2 has a print spool function. This function enables the Braille Sense U2 to do other tasks while printing to an ink-printer or Braille embosser. For example, if you send data to your printer or embosser, you will be immediately returned to where you were before the print command was executed. If you want to check the print spool dialog box after you have given the print command, press Space-2-3-4-

6. Then, you will see the dialog box which has three controls. The first control is a list that gives you information about files that are being printed. There is also a Cancel button and a Close button. You can cycle through the three controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-

tab (Space-1-2). In the information list, you can move item by item by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. However, if you open up the dialog box without printing anything, you will see no items and the Close button. While printing, the information list will contain the following: running program name, printing file name, printer type, the number of copies, and either printing or ready. For example, lets assume that we are printing one copy of sample.hbl in the word processor. In the info list, you will see program: word processor, file: sample.hbl, printer, copy: 1, printing. If you are using a Braille embosser, you will see embosser instead of printer. If there is not anything printing and, (the printer is waiting), you will see ready instead of printing. If you print something out in the e-mail program, you will see emailtemp.txt, instead of the file name. When you are printing something from the address manager, or the schedule manager, you will see the message, prn_(time).txt. If you focus on any of the files in the info list, and press Enter on Cancel after pressing tab (Space-4-5), you will cancel the printing of that file. If you press Space-4-5 repeatedly, locate Close, and press Enter on Close, you will close the print spool dialog box. Pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) will also close the print spool. 2.13 One-Handed Mode Braille Sense U2 provides a one-handed mode for users restricted to the use of one hand for Braille input. To turn on one-handed mode, hold down F3, while turn on the power switch. And to turn off this mode (i.e. to return on two-handed mode), hold down F4, while turn on the power switch. Also, by using the Option menu, you can turn on or off this mode. When one-handed mode turned on, the input methods are as follows:

1. To type a character, you press the dots in any combination or order. And when you have pressed all dots, press Space. For example, if you want to type the h, you press dot 1 and dot 2 separately or together and then press dot 5. And finally you press Space. 2. To press a command that includes Space, you press Space both before and after the other keys. For example, if you want to press Space-o (dots 1-3-5), you press Space and then press dot 1, dot 3 and dot 5 separately or together in any order. Then press Space again. 3. To press a command that includes Backspace or Enter, you press Backspace or Enter before the other keys. And then press other keys. Finally you press Space. For example, if you want to press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), you press Enter and then press dots 1-2-3. And press Space. 4. To press Space, Backspace and Enter, you press this keys twice. For example, if you want to press Space to make a space between words, you press Space twice. The operation of the scroll buttons, function keys, audio buttons remains the same as in two-handed mode. If one-handed mode is on, the Braille Sense U2 will advise this each time it is turned on, and will also advise what to do to return to the two-

handed mode. 2.14 Using Typing Mode While you are typing in document, you execute Typing Mode. In order to execute the Typing Mode, follow these steps:

(1) Press Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4), while you are typing in document.

(2) It shows Start typing mode If you are executing the Typing Mode, press Space-4 in document. It doesnt go to next line. It will be typed Space and Dot 4 in document. In order to cancel the Typing Mode, follow these steps:

(1) Press Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4) in the Typing Mode.

(2) It shows End typing mode. After you cancel the Typing Mode, it will go to the next line in document when you press Space-4. 2.15 Common Combination Keys 1. Call up the program menu: F1 2. Execute the individual program in the program menu F1-shortcut key (varies for each program) 3. Call up the Task Name list: F1-F4 4. Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3 5. Switch to next program: F2-F3 6. Call up the menu in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or 7. Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 8. Escape: Space-e (Space-1-5) or F4 9. Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) 10. Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or F2 Space-F3) 11. Move to the previous character: Space-3 12. Move to the next character: Space-6 13. Move to the previous line/item: Space-1 14. Move to the next line/item: Space-4 15. Move to the beginning of line/item: Home (Space-1-3) 16. Move to the end of line/item: End (Space-4-6) 17. Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home (Space-

1-2-3 or F1-F2-up scroll button) 18. Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end

(Space-4-5-6 or F3-F4-down scroll button) 19. Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2) 20. Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group:

Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4) 21. Scroll left: Up scroll button 22. Scroll right: Down scroll button 23. Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding cursor routing key 24. Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5) 25. Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) 26. Display power status: Space-1-6 27. Call up the Global options: Space-o (dots 1-3-5) 28. Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5) 29. Checking your version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille 30. Display Network Status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense Sense U2 program menu. U2 program menu 31. Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4 32. Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1 33. Increase the voice rate: Space-F4 34. Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1 35. Increase the voice pitch: Enter-F4 36. Decrease the voice pitch: Enter-F1 37. One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on 38. One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on 39. Bluetooth on/off: Backspace-3-4-5-6 40. Wireless LAN on/off: Backspace-1-4-5-6 41. Ethernet port on/off: Backspace-1-5-6 42. Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button 43. Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button 44. Selection control information: F2-down scroll button 45. Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button 46. Use typing mode: Backspace-Enter-c (dots 1-4) 47. Change the Language: Enter-Backspace -v (dots 1-2-3-6) 3. Global options The Global options in the Braille Sense U2 has information on all of your settings. You can change your preferences regarding each option. You can access the Global options by pressing F1. Then, use Space-

4 or Space-1 until you find Global options. Then, press Enter on Global options. By pressing the Space-o (dots 1-3-5), you can open the Global option while you are anywhere in the Braille Sense U2. You can navigate all of the items in the Global options with Space-1 or Space-4. You can also use the scroll buttons for navigating through each of the items. You can change the setting values with the spacebar or Backspace buttons. There are many shortcut keys which you can use to quickly move you to wherever you want to go in the Global options. By pressing Space on an item in the Global options, you can turn the setting on or off, or toggle between the various options that are available for the item you are on. The Global options is like a dialog box. To change and save the settings in the Global options, you must press Enter once you have selected the setting that you want to save. If you do not press Enter (or select Confirm) on the setting that you want, the setting will not be saved. Once you press Enter to save the setting, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Saved options, and you will be returned to where you were before you entered the Global options. To cancel the change to the setting, press F4 key, Space-e (dots 1-5), or Space-z (dots 1-3-4-5). The Braille Sense U2 will then speak the message, Canceled saving options. When you are on an option, you can also use tab (Space-4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to go to the Confirm and Cancel buttons. If you want to save your settings, press Enter on the Confirm button. If you do not want to save the changes you made to the settings, press Enter on the Cancel button. Before we go in to detail about each option, lets first go through a brief overview of what you will find in the Global options. 3.1 Global options Overview The Global options contains different settings that can be changed in the Braille Sense U2. By pressing Space-o (dots 1-3-5), you can open the Global options while you are anywhere in the Braille Sense U2. The Global options has five groups. 1. Braille setting (which includes Braille display, Braille cursor, eight dot mode, view/input grade, Braille Code and message display time) 2. Voice setting (which includes voice, language, punctuation level, keyboard echo, capitalization alert, numbers, abbreviation, voice volume, voice rate, voice pitch, and scroll voice) 3. Display setting (which includes LCD, flip LCD display, LCD font size, and video display) 4. Print setting (which includes printer port and print paper size) 5. General setting (which includes audio alerts, play power on/off sound, left scroll buttons, right scroll buttons, skip empty lines, control information, hide passwords, hot key information, announce shortcut keys, power saving mode, power saving kick in, check today's schedule, one-handed mode, Automatic spell-check, default document type, Automatically synchronize with time server, progress indicator, Bluetooth, wireless LAN, Ethernet port, and mass-storage device mode.) You can move between the five groups by pressing page down

(Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4) or page up (Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2). When a group is opened, a list of options will appear that can be changed for the particular setting that you are on. A list of options under a group, are referred to as a list. You can move between items in the list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can then change the setting for each option by pressing Space or Backspace on each option. 3.2 Global options in Detail Now, lets take a look at each function in the Global options in more detail, and look at the specific steps on how to change the various settings. It is very important to note that there are duplicate shortcut keys; therefore, pressing a shortcut key will move the focus to the next setting that has a matching shortcut key, and pressing the same shortcut key will move the focus to the next setting that has the same shortcut key. If there are no more settings that have the same shortcut key, the Braille Sense U2 will wrap around and move to the first match. Pressing Space-1 or Space-4 moves the focus to the previous setting or the next setting. Pressing page up (Space-1-2-6) or page down (Space-

3-4-5) will move the focus to the beginning of the previous group of settings or to the beginning of the next group of settings. 3.2.1 Braille display The first item that you will find in the Global options is Braille display. You can switch the Braille display on and off with Space key. The default is set to On and the shortcut key is b (dots 1-2). You can toggle the Braille display on or off, by pressing Backspace-F3 while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2, without having to pull up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-

tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.2 Braille Cursor You can choose how you want the Braille cursor to show up on the Braille display. The shortcut key is c (dots 1-4). By default the cursor is set to Always up. If you do not want the cursor set to Always up, you can press Space key to turn the cursor Blinking, and one more press Space key to turn the cursor Off. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-

1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). Note that there are three types of cursors:

1. dots 7-8 2. blinking dots 7-8 3. blinking dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 The blinking dots 7-8 will be displayed when you are in the overwirte mode in the word processor. The blinking dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 will appear when you are using the Start Selection setting in the word processor and when you are in an edit box. In all other situations, the cursor will be displayed as dots 7-8. 3.2.3 Eight Dot Mode You can choose to use a 6-dot-Braille or 8-dot-Braille display when using ASCII text mode. The shortcut key is e (dots 1-5). By default the 8-dot-Braille display is set to off. You can switch this option to 8-dot-

Braille mode by pressing Space key. You can toggle this option on or off by pressing F1-down scroll button while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2, without having to pull up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.4 View/input the Grade of Braille You can choose what grade of Braille you want the Braille display to use when reading. The shortcut key is g (dots 1-2-4-5). The setting choices are Uncontracted Braille, Contracted Braille, and Computer Braille. You can switch between the settings by pressing Space key. You can press Space-g (dots 1-2-4-5) to cycle through the three settings while you are using other programs without calling up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.5 Braille Code The Braille code setting defines the rules by which Braille is translated to text and vice versa. The Braille Sense U2 offers 2 English Braille codes as well as entry of Spanish Braille. Thus the Braille code can be set to use US, UEBC, (Unified English Braille Code) or Spanish. The original intent of the UEBC was to explore the possibility of bringing together three of the official Braille codes that are used for Braille in English-speaking countries for various purposes, viz.: literary material

(English Braille, American Edition), mathematics and scientific notation

(Nemeth Code), and computer notation (Computer Braille Code). Choosing Spanish allows you to input Braille according to Spanish Braille rules, and read documents created in Spanish using Spanish Braille translation. The short cut key of the Braille code is c (dots 1-4). The default setting is set to US. If you want to change to UEBC you need to press Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). Note: If you change the Braille Code option while you are editing Braille in the Word Processor, current written Braille would be changed to different meanings in text. In order to avoid this situation, the Braille Code option needs to be changed before launching the Word Processor. 3.2.6 Message Display Time You can choose when a Braille message will disappear from the Braille display. This setting will only work when the voice setting is set to Off. But Stand by and Ignore execute when the voice setting is set to On. The shortcut key is m (dots 1-3-4). The setting options that you can choose from are Stand by, Ignore, and 1 to 10 seconds. The default is 3 seconds. The Space key increases the option by one second and the Backspace key decreases the option by one second. You can set the unit to standby mode by pressing the Space key until you reach Stand by. In this mode, the message will remain until you press a key. The higher value you select, the longer the message remains. If you read the message before setting the number of seconds, you can clear the message by pressing any key. If you choose Ignore, then messages will be ignored and wont show on the display. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.7 Language The Braille Sense U2 can output speech in both US English and Mexican Spanish. You can change the Text-to-Speech (TTS) engine using the Language setting in the Global Options. The shortcut for jumping quickly to the Language setting is l (dots1-2-

3). Press Space to toggle the TTS voice between English and Spanish. If you have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). Note: you can change the TTS language from anywhere on the unit by pressing Backspace-Enter-v (dots1-2-3-6). 3.2.8 Voice This menu will allow you to turn the Braille Sense U2 voice on or off. The shortcut key is v (dots 1-2-3-6). By default the voice is set to on, so you will hear the Braille Sense U2 speak. You can turn off the voice with the Space key. You can toggle it on and off by pressing Backspace-F2 while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2 without having to call up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-

1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). You can also press dots 1-2 while turning on the Braille Sense U2, which will turn the Braille Sense U2 on without speech. When resetting the Braille Sense U2, you can also press dots 1-2 when you press the reset button to reset the Braille Sense U2, and turn on the Braille Sense U2 without speech. 3.2.9 Punctuation Level You can choose how you want the Braille Sense U2 to read punctuation marks. The shortcut key is p (dots 1-2-3-4). The setting options are All, Off, Punctuation, and Symbol. The default setting is set to All in which the Braille Sense U2 will say all punctuation marks and symbols. The Space key allows you to cycle through all four of the setting values. If you select Off, the Braille Sense U2 will not say any punctuation marks. The option, Punctuation will make the Braille Sense U2 say only punctuation marks, but the Symbol option will say all symbols without saying punctuation marks. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-

1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.10 Keyboard Echo With this option, you can decide how the Braille Sense U2 will speak when you are typing. The shortcut key is k (dots 1-3). The setting values are On with characters and words, On with characters, On with words, and Off. If you select the default On with characters and words, you can hear each keystroke and a word right after it is completed. If you select On with characters, you can hear each keystroke letter by letter. If you select the On with words option, you can hear each word right after it is completed, but not each letter. You can cycle through each of the options by pressing Space key. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.11 Capitalization alert You can decide how the Braille Sense U2 will speak the capital character when you type the character or read the document by using Space-3 or Space-6 in computer edit box or ASCII mode . The shortcut key is u (dots 1-3-6). The setting values are Off, Say cap, and Pitch. The default value is Pitch. If you select the default, you will hear higher pitch when meet the capital letter. And if you select the Off, read the same regardless of capital letter and lower case letter. And if you select the say cap, you will hear cap sound before the capital letter. For example, when you meet the capital letter V, Braille Sense U2 will talk cap v. You can cycle through each of the options by pressing Space key. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.12 Numbers You can choose how you want the Braille Sense U2 to read number. The shortcut key is n (dots 1-3-4-5) with the default set to On. For example, if you set On, the 2007 will read two thousand seven. And you set Off, the 2007 will read two zero zero seven. You can change the value by using Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.13 Abbreviations You can turn the translation of acronyms on/off in Braille Sense U2. For example, when the Braille Sense U2 reads Ala it announces Alabama. But if using Abbreviations set to Off, it will announce Ala. To change the setting value, follow these steps below.

(1) Move to the Global option by pressing short cut key, o (dots 1-3-

5) or navigating key in the main program.

(2) The short cut key is a (dot 1). Press the short cut key or move to the Abbreviations by pressing Space-4.

(3) The default setting is On. By pressing Space to change to Off.

(4) Pressing Enter key allows you to change and save the setting. 3.2.14 Voice Volume You can set the volume level of the voice on the Braille Sense U2. The shortcut key is l (dots 1-2-3). The setting value is 1 through 10 with the default set on 6. When you have set this option to 1, the volume will be set at the lowest level. If you set this option to 10, the volume is the loudest. If you set the volume level to 1, you will almost not be able to hear. The Space key increases the volume and the Backspace key decreases the volume by one number at a time. Please note that if you are at volume level 10, and increase the volume by one, the volume loops back to level 1. The same is true if you are at level 1, and decrease the volume by one unit. You will then be at level 10. Without opening the Global options, you can increase the volume with the key combination of the Backspace and F4 keys or you can decrease it with the Backspace and the F1 key. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.15 Voice Rate You can control the speed of the Braille Sense U2 speech. The shortcut key is r (dots 1-2-3-5). The setting options are 1 through 12 with the default set to 8. The Space key increases the speed level and the Backspace key decreases the speed level by one unit at a time. Without opening the Global options, you can increase the speed with the key combination of Space and F4 keys, or you can decrease it with Space and the F1 key. If you are at level 12, and increase the speed by one unit, you will go to level 1. Also, if you are at level 1, and decrease the speed by one unit, you will go to level 12. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.16 Voice Pitch You can control the voice pitch of the Braille Sense U2. The shortcut key is t (dots 1-2-3-4-5). The available options are 1 through 10 with the default set to 6. At level 10, the voice pitch will be the highest; and, at level 1, the voice pitch will be the lowest. The Space key will increase the voice pitch and the Backspace key will decrease the voice pitch by one level. Just as with the voice volume and voice speed, if you are at level 10, and you increase the voice pitch by one level, you will go to level 1. And, if you are at level 1 and decrease the voice pitch by one level, you will go to level 10. When you are not in the option, menu, you can increase the pitch by pressing, Enter and F4, or you can decrease it by pressing Enter and F1. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.17 Scroll Voice You can decide if you want the Braille Sense U2 to speak while using the scroll buttons in the document. The shortcut key is s (dots 2-3-4) with the default set to Off. The default setting (Off) does not allow the Braille Sense U2 to speak while scrolling. The Space key toggles off/on. If you set the option to On, you can hear the Braille Sense U2 while scrolling. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.18 LCD You can decide whether the Braille Sense U2 will show text on the LCD screen. If you decide to turn the LCD screen on, sighted people will be able to see what you are working on when they look at the LCD screen. The shortcut key is l (dots 1-2-3) with the default set to Off. The options that you can choose from for settings are, On, Off, and On with backlight. The On with backlight setting will light the background of the LCD screen. You can toggle between all three of these options by pressing Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.19 Flip LCD display You can decide if the text on the LCD screen is shown in the right or reverse direction. By default, it is set to Off, You can switch the value to On or Off. If you set this option to Off, the text on the LCD screen is shown in the right direction and if you set this option to On, the text on the LCD screen is shown in the reverse direction and it means the sighted person facing you can see the text on the LCD screen in the right direction. It is a good tool for teachers or Deaf-blinds. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.20 LCD Font Size Here, you can change the font size on your LCD panel. The shortcut key is f (dots 1-2-4). The default is set to 19, but you can set the font size anywhere from 12 to 20. You can increase the font by one size with Space key, and you can decrease the font size with the Backspace key. If you have the font size set to 20, and you increase the font by one size, the font will go to 12. If your font size is 12, and you decrease the font by one size, the font will go to 20. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.21 Video Display You can choose to have the Braille Sense U2 show your tasks on a VGA monitor. That is, a monitor that would normally hook up to a personal computer. The shortcut key is d (dots 1-4-5) with the default set to Off. To use a VGA monitor, you need to connect a cable from the Braille Sense U2 VGA port to a computer monitor. You can toggle this option on and off with the Space key. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-

1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.22 Printer Port You can choose which port will be used for your printer port when sending your documents to a printer. The shortcut key is p (dots 1-2-3-

4). The default is set to USB. If you want to use a USB port printer, you keep the default setting. If you want to use a parallel port printer or Bluetooth, you change the setting. You can toggle the options by pressing Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, if you want to use parallel port printer, you must connect the USB port to cable that convert USB into parallel. 3.2.23 Print Paper Size This option allows you to select the size of the paper that an ink printer will use, if you will be printing to an ink printer. The shortcut key for this function is s (dots 2-3-4). You can change the size for this option by pressing Space. You can choose between the settings of, Letter (8.5 inches by 11 inches) or, Legal (8.5 inches by 14 inches.) If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.24 Audio alerts You can choose whether you will hear a warning sound or not. The shortcut key is a (dot 1). This option is useful if the speech setting on the Braille Sense U2 is turned off. The default for this option is set to On. If you turn off the speech, you will hear a beeping sound when you type in keys that the Braille Sense U2 does not accept. If you don't want to hear the warning sound, you can press Space key once to turn Off the audio alerts. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.25 Play Power On/Off Sound You can choose whether you will hear a power on/off sound or not when you turn on the Braille Sense U2. The shortcut key is s (dots 2-3-4). The default for this option is set to On. If you keep default setting, you will hear a starting sound signal when you turn on or off the Braille Sense U2. If you dont want to hear the on/off sound signal, you can press Space key once to turn Off the sound signal. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.26 Left Scroll Buttons You can decide how scroll buttons on the left side of Braille display are used. You can set the value with one of Scroll display, Move by line, Move by character, Move by paragraph and Move by sentence. If you set the value to Scroll display, left-scroll buttons are used to scroll previous or next Braille. It means if you press left-up scroll button, you can scroll previous Braille and if you press left-down scroll button, you can scroll next Braille. If you set the value to Move by line, left-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next line and it works as if you press Space-1 or Space-

4. If you set the value to Move by character, left-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next character on the Braille display. It means if you press left-up scroll button, you can move to previous character on the Braille display and if you press left-down scroll button, you can move to next character on the Braille display and it works as if you press Space-

3 or Space-6. If you set the value to Move by paragraph, left-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next paragraph and it works as if you press Space-2-3 or Space-5-6. If you set the value to Move by sentence, left-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next sentence and it works as if you press Space-

2-3-5 or Space-2-5-6. If you have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.27 Right Scroll Buttons You can decide how scroll buttons on the right side of Braille display are used. You can set the value with one of Scroll display, Move by line, Move by character, Move by paragraph and Move by sentence. If you set the value to Scroll display, right-scroll buttons are used to scroll previous or next Braille. It means if you press right-up scroll button, you can scroll previous Braille and if you press right-down scroll button, you can scroll next Braille. If you set the value to Move by line, right-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next line and it works as if you press Space-1 or Space-4. If you set the value to Move by character, right-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next character on the Braille display. It means if you press right-up scroll button, you can move to previous character on the Braille display and if you press right-down scroll button, you can move to next character on the Braille display and it works as if you press Space-3 or Space-6. If you set the value to Move by paragraph, right-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next paragraph and it works as if you press Space-2-3 or Space-5-6. If you set the value to Move by sentence, right-scroll buttons are used to move to previous or next sentence and it works as if you press Space-2-3-5 or Space-2-5-6. If you have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.28 Skip Empty Lines You can choose to have the Braille Sense U2 read a blank line, or to skip empty lines. The shortcut key is e (dots 1-5), and the default is set to Off. If you keep the default setting, you will hear the words empty line if there is a blank line. The Space key toggles off/on. If you choose to turn this option on, the Braille Sense U2 will skip all blank lines, and you will not hear the words empty line when there is a blank line. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.29 Control Information You can choose the display location of information regarding the files and menus in the Braille Sense U2. The short cut key is i (dots 2-4), and the default is set to After. To toggle Control information between before, after and off, press space. If you select Before, you will hear control information before a menu or list item. If you select After, you will hear control information such as list item or menu item after a menu or list item. If you have control information shut off, you will not hear list item or menu item. Note that if the Web browser is activated, the control symbols will appear even if you turn off the Control information option. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.30 Hide passwords When you enter the password in computer edit box, you can select display mode either *(dots 1-6) or the letter exactly that you write on the LCD and the Braille display. The short cut key is p (dots 1-2-3-4), and the default is set to On. When you enter the password, it will be shown the letter exactly that you write on the LCD and the Braille display. By pressing Space, you can change set to Off. When you type the password, it will be shown *(dots 1-6) on the LCD and the Braille display. You have changed the setting, press Enter to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.31 Hot Key Information As described before, hot keys are keystrokes that can take you directly to an item, such as a menu, or a particular item in a list. You can choose the speech output method of hot key. The short cut key is h (dots 1-2-

5), and the default is set to Letters. The setting values are Letters, Dot patterns, and Off. You can cycle through each of the options by pressing Space key. For example, when you select Letters, the Open (o) Enter-o will output with Open (o) Enter-o. And if you select Dot patterns, the Open (o) Enter-o will out put with Open (o) enter dots 1 3 5. And if you select Off, you cant hear the hot key information. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.32 Announce shortcut keys The Announce shortcut keys option allows you to decide if the Braille Sense U2 will say the shortcut key for a function. The shortcut key is s

(dots 2-3-4) and the default is set to On. For example, if you hear, File (f) pull down, the shortcut key is the letter f. If you prefer the Braille Sense U2 only says, File pull down, you will want to turn the Announce shortcut keys setting off. To toggle Announce shortcut keys between on and off, press Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.33 Power Saving Mode You can choose to have the Braille Sense U2 use the power saving mode. The shortcut key is p (dots 1-2-3-4). The default setting is set to On, which will use the power saving mode. The Space key switches between On, Off, and Message. If you don't want to use the power saving mode, you can set the option to Off. If you set the option to Message, you will hear a warning message that says power on in 10, 20, or 30 minute increments (depending on the setting that you will choose for power saving kick in) if you have not pressed any keys on the Braille Sense U2. The next section explains how to change the power saving kick in to 10, 20, or 30 minutes. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-

1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, this option is available only when the AC adaptor is connected to the unit. In other word, although you set the option to On if AC adaptor is connected to the unit, the unit will not go to the sleep mode automatically when you meet the Power saving kick in time. 3.2.34 Power Saving Kick In When you want to use the power saving mode, you can set the time when the power saving mode will begin. The shortcut key is k (dots 1-

3) with the default set at After 10 minutes. If you set this option to the default, the Braille Sense U2 will enter into power saving mode when you have not used the Braille Sense U2 for 10 minutes. The Space key changes the option setting to 10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.35 Check Todays Schedule In the Schedule manager (which you will learn about later), you are able to keep track of your appointments, using the Braille Sense U2. The Braille Sense U2 is able to check todays schedule when you turn it on. You can decide if you want the Braille Sense U2 to show todays schedule when it powers on. The short cut key for this option is s (dots 2-3-4). To toggle this option between off and on, press Space. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.36 One-Handed Mode You can choose one-handed mode on or off when you use the Braille Sense U2. The shortcut key is h (dots 1-2-5). The default for this option is set to Off. The setting options are On and Off. The detail information about one-handed mode refers to 2.14 One-Handed Mode. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, this option is set to Off even if you are set to On when connected the Braille Sense U2 to USB keyboard. And if you remove the USB keyboard, this option will be returned to value that before you connected to the USB keyboard. 3.2.37 Automatic spell-check You can choose whether the Braille Sense U2 will check spelling or not. This option is available in multi edit boxes in programs such as the schedule manager, address manager, e-mail messages, the word processor, etc. The short cut key for this option is c (dots1-4). By default this setting is set to Off which will not check your spelling. If you want to check spelling, press Space to toggle the option to On and press Enter. Or, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you set the option to On and enter a misspelled word, you will hear a beep sound. You will hear a beep sound, even though you shut Off the audio alert. If you do not want to save the changed setting, press tab (Space-4-

5) to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.38 Default Document This function is used to set the default document type applied when you create a new document using the word processor on the Braille Sense U2. The shortcut key for this option is q (dot 1-2-3-4-5). When you create a new document in the word processor, Braille document (.brl file) is selected as the file type by default. You can change the default setting using this option. You can choose between Sense document, Braille document, and Text document. By default, it is set to Braille document. Press Space to toggle through the three settings, and press Enter, or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter, to save the changed setting. If you do not want to save the changed setting, press tab (Space-4-

5) to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, this option is set to Text document even if you are set to Sense document or Braille document when connected the Braille Sense U2 to USB keyboard. And if you remove the USB keyboard, this option will be returned to value that before you connected to the USB keyboard. 3.2.39 Automatically synchronize with time server Automatically synchronize with time server, the date and time synchronize automatically, when the Braille Sense U2 is being connected to internet. Using this feature, you can correct the time of Braille Sense U2 through accurate internet time server. Once the Braille Sense U2 is being connected to internet, you will hear the sound. From this point, the date and time of Braille Sense U2 synchronize the internet server automatically. The default is "ON", you can check or change this option following steps. 1) Press Space-o (dots 1-3-5) to call up the menu. 2) Press T (dots 2-3-4-5) or press Space-4, move to Automatically synchronize with time server and press Enter. 3) By pressing Space, you can change setting value. 4) Press Enter. 3.2.40 Progress indicator Progress indicator shows the progress of opening a document, copying files or opening any webpage. This option is used to set the progress sign. The shortcut key is p (dots 1-2-3-4), and you can choose one among Silent, Beep, and Message. By default, it is set to Message. Press Space to toggle through three settings, and press Enter to save to the changed option. If it is set to Message, the Braille Sense U2 will say progress in percentage, like 10% or 20%. If it is set to Beep, the Braille Sense U2 outputs beep sound during copying or opening any documents or webpage. If it is set to Silent, the Braille Sense U2 will not hear the any sound in progress of copying or opening. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 3.2.41 Bluetooth You can decide whether the Braille Sense U2 will turn Bluetooth on. The shortcut key for this option is b (dots 1-2). You can choose between On and Off by pressing Space. By default, it is set to Off. You can toggle it on and off by pressing Backspace-3-4-5-6 while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2 without having to call up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, in order to use Bluetooth function of the Braille Sense U2, please turn it on. And please turn it off while you are not using the Bluetooth function to save battery power. 3.2.42 Wireless LAN You can decide whether the Braille Sense U2 will turn Wireless LAN on. The shortcut key for this option is w (dots 2-4-5-6). You can choose between On and Off by pressing Space. By default, it is set to Off. You can toggle it on and off by pressing Backspace-1-4-5-6 while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2 without having to call up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, in order to use wireless LAN function of the Braille Sense U2, please turn it on. And please turn it off when you are not using the wireless LAN to save battery power. 3.2.43 Ethernet port You can decide whether the Braille Sense U2 will turn Ethernet card

(Ethernet port) on or off. The shortcut key for this option is l (dots 1-2-

3). You can switch to On or Off by pressing Space. By default, it is set to On. You can toggle it on and off by pressing Backspace-1-5-6 while you are using another program in the Braille Sense U2 without having to call up the Global options. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). For your reference, if you want to save battery power, turn this option off when you are not using the Ethernet. 3.2.44 Mass-storage device mode You can choose whether the Braille Sense U2 will be used as a mass-

storage device mode or not when the Braille Sense U2 is connected to the personal computer (PC) via USB cable. The shortcut key for this option is d (dots 1-4-5) with the default set to On. The Space key toggles off/on. If you keep default setting, PC recognizes the Braille Sense U2 as the mass-storage device mode automatically when connecting the Braille Sense U2 to PC. If you select Off, PC doesnt recognizes the Braille Sense U2. In this case, if you want to connect the PC to the Braille Sense U2, you need to install and execute the Active Sync program in the PC. You can download the Active Sync program from the Microsoft website for free. If you have changed the setting, press Enter key to save the setting. You can also tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you do not want to save the setting, tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. You can also cancel saving the setting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5). 4. File Manager 4.1 Overview The functions and structures of the File manager on the Braille Sense U2 are very similar to the file manager on a personal computer. In order to run the file manager, press f (dots 1-2-4) or press Enter when you are on file manager in the program menu. The File manager includes an address window and a file list. When you open the file manager, the disk name will appear. The default disk name is flashdisk. You can use the up and down arrows (Space-1 or Space-4) or the scroll buttons to explore additional disks. Press Enter on the disk you want to open. The Braille Sense U2 will show you the list of the files or folders on the disk you have opened. When you press tab (Space-4-5 or F3) or shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) on the file list, you will enter into an address window. For your convenience, the File manager provides you with menus and hot keys. The menus will appear when you press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2. It is possible to format the flashdisk, which will erase everything on the flashdisk. Be extremely cautious when executing this command. If you execute this command, you will loose all of your data. You will NOT be able to get this data back once the command has been executed. To format the flashdisk, press Space-1-2-3. While holding down Space-1-

2-3, quickly press and release the reset button. Continue pressing Space-1-2-3 until you hear the flashdisk formatting. 4.1.1 Navigating the File List There are two kinds of lists that you will see when using the Braille Sense U2. The lists are: file list and the menu list. When you reach the end of the menu list, the Braille Sense U2 will automatically bring you back to the top of the list when you press Space-4. However, when you reach the end of a file list, the Braille Sense U2 will remain at the end of the file list, even if you press Space-4. The following is a list of the navigation keys;

1. Move to previous item: Up arrow key(Space-1) or up scroll button 2. Move to next item: Down arrow key(Space-4) or down scroll button 3. Move to the beginning of a list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) 4. Move to the end of a list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) The following keystrokes are valid only when you are on a file list. 1. Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6 2. Move between file list and address window: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) /

shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) 3. Enter into a selected folder or open the selected file: Enter 4. Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 5. Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6 6. Move to the previous 32-item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2) 7. Move to the next 32-item group: Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4) 8. Find and move to the file or folder in the file list by pressing the first character of the folder or file names. You must use ASCII characters. 4.1.2 Item (Folder or File) Selection Key 1. Select item by item (Space): Select one or more item(s) while moving in a list. * is displayed in front of the selected item. Pressing Space again on the selected file that has * displayed by it will cancel the selection. 2. Continuous selection (Enter-b (dots 1-2)): This will select all of the items from the point where this command is executed to the item where the cursor is moved to. * will appear in front of the selected items. 3. Select all (Enter-a (dot 1)): This selects all the items including files and folders in the current path. You can use navigation keys to move around the selected items to make sure they are selected. You can cancel selections or reselect canceled items by pressing Space on the item. When the Select All command is given, the Braille Sense U2 will say the number of selected files, and will display * in front of the selected files on the Braille display. 4.1.3 Cancel / Exit Key Cancel (Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4): This command will cancel a function, just like the esc key cancels functions on a personal computer. Exit (Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)): This will cancel or stop a selected function or program. This is similar to the way alt-F4 closes a program on a personal computer. 4.2 Using File Manager Features in the File List When you open the File manager, you will see the list of disks that you can access. You can choose a disk from the list, and then press Enter to get into the selected disk. The Braille Sense U2 will show you the list of folders and files on that disk. The items within the quotation marks are the folders, and the items without quotation marks are the files. The items on the list will be followed by numbers, such as 1/5 or 2/5. The numbers after the names of the items indicate where an item is on the list, and how many items are on the list. For example, database 1/5, means that this is the first folder on a list that has five items. 4.2.1 Selecting Disks When you open the File manager, the first item on the list is flashdisk. If you inserted the SD card in SD card slot, SD card will be listed on this list. Any of the disks can be selected by using the up and down arrows

(Space-1 or Space-4). You can also use the scroll buttons to choose one of the disks. After selecting the disk you want, press Enter to open the disk you have selected. 4.2.2 Getting in and Out of a Folder (Opening/Closing a Folder) There are several ways to open a folder. You can utilize a menu to get into a specific folder. 1) You can call up a menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. You will have to choose the menu item called Open from the list and press Enter to get into a selected folder. 2) You can also press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) to call up the menu to 3) Another way to open a selected folder is by just pressing Enter open a desired folder. on the folder that is selected. To close the current folder, you can use the Backspace key. Then, you will be at the next upper level folder list. 4.2.3 Opening a File You can open a file by pressing Enter on the item that is displayed. You can also use Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) to open a file or folder. The Braille Sense U2 will load the appropriate application or program to open the file you have chosen. Another way of opening a file is using the menu. You can press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. Then, press the letter o

(dots 1-3-5), or you can press Enter on the item named Open. The file formats that are supported by the Braille Sense U2 are as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4. Hbl, brl, txt, pwd, brf, rtf, doc,docx, pdf and epub files are supported by the word processor on the Braille Sense U2. Url, and html files are supported by the Web browser on the Braille Sense U2. ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma, wmv and flac files are supported by the media player on the Braille Sense U2. Daisy files are supported by the Daisy player on Braille Sense U2. If you press Enter on a file type other than those mentioned above, the Open With dialog box appears, because the file type is not associated with a program. Also, you can bring up the Open With dialog box through the menu. By using the Open With menu item, you can open the currently selected file with a program other than the program originally associated with it. First, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to bring up the menu, press Space-4 repeatedly until you reach Open With, and then press Enter. You can also open the dialog box by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5) in the file list, or by pressing e (dots 1-5) in the menu. This dialog box consists of the Open With list, the adopt list, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between these elements by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). Within the list, you can select the next item by pressing Space-4, and the previous item by pressing Space-1. As soon as the dialog box opens, Open with: Word processor will be displayed. In this list, you can select a program, which would be the word processor, media player, or web browser. Pressing Space-4 will select the next program, and Space-1 will select the previous program. Once you have selected the program to open the file type with, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the adopt list. If you have selected the word processor, pressing tab (Space-4-5) will take you to an additional list called Open mode. Using this list, you can specify whether the file will be opened as a Braille file or a text file. Press Space-4 or Space-

1 to select one of the two file types, and then press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Apply to radio button. In this radio button, you can specify whether only the currently selected file or all of the files with the same file extension as the currently selected file will be opened with the specified program. If you have set one of the two, press Enter or tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and then press Enter to apply what you have just set. If you have specified a program that does not support the file type, nothing will be displayed or played after the program has started. In the File manager, if you activate the Open With menu after focusing on folders that have Daisy or media files, you will see the associated program, Daisy or media player. If you activate the Open With menu, and encounter a folder that does not have the Daisy info file

(discinfo.html or ncc.html), you will not be able to see the Daisy player as an associated program. You can play all of the files after selecting either the Daisy or media player. 4.2.4 Send To You can use this option to copy files and folders to different disks such as a flash disk, USB flash drive (also known as USB stick memory), SD card. After selecting files and folders, you can call up the menu with Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to choose the Send To option. Then, when you press Enter on Send To, the Braille Sense U2 will display the list of disks that you can use to send your files or folders to. You can choose a destination disk by using the up and down arrow keys (Space-1 or Space-4) or up and down scroll buttons. Pressing Enter on the desired disk will start copying the selected files and folders into the selected disk. Also, you can send files and folders by pressing Enter-s

(dots 2-3-4) without calling up a menu. 4.2.5 Copy / Move There are some differences between Copy and Move. Copy leaves the original files and folders in their original places, while Move removes original files and folders from their original places. In the File manager, you can use the copy function as follows:

First, you have to select the files and folders you would like to copy. Second, you need to call up the menu, and choose Copy from the list to copy selected files and folders. If you want to move files and folders, you can choose Cut from the menu. When the Copy or Cut command is executed, the Braille Sense U2 will return to the file list. Third, you need to go into the destination folder and call up the menu, and choose Paste. Press Enter on Paste, and your selected files and folders will be copied or moved. If the destination folder is the same folder where the selected files are, the Braille Sense U2 will attach Copy1- to your original file names for copied files. If the same files are copied into the same folder once again, the Braille Sense U2 will attach Copy2- to the original file names for the second copied files. If your destination folder has the same name as the file you are copying, the Braille Sense U2 will say File xxx already exists. Overwrite? Yes. Press Enter if you want to replace the file. However, if you do not want to overwrite the file, select No, and press Enter. When No is selected, the Paste function will be canceled. Example: Copying sample.txt from the root folder to the download folder. 1) Select sample.txt from the root folder by using the navigation keys Space-1 or Space-4. 2) Call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and choose Copy. Then, press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 will return to the file list in the root folder. 3) Move to the download folder, and press Enter. Call up the menu again to choose Paste. Press Enter on Paste, or press v

(dots 1-2-3-6) after calling up the menu to complete the file copy function. You can also use Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) to do the same thing. 4.2.6 Delete Files or Folders To delete files or folders, go to the folders or files you want to delete, and then select them. Call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) to choose the Delete function. Press Enter on Delete to complete the deletion of the selected files and folders. You can also press the letter d (dots 1-4-5) after calling up the menu to have the same result as above. You can delete selected files or folders even without calling the menu by using hot keys. Space-d (dots 1-4-5) and Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) are the hotkeys assigned to perform the delete function. However, Space-d (dots 1-4-5) can be used with in the programs on the Braille Sense U2. Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) can only be used in the File manager. When you delete only one file or one folder, it is not necessary to use the select function. Instead, just use the navigation keys to go to the file or folder you want to delete, and then you can use the delete function from the File manager. 4.2.7 Rename You can change the name of a file or folder by using this function. To change the name of a file or folder, move to the file or folder you desire to rename. Call up the menu by using Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to choose Rename from the menu list. Press r (dots 1-2-3-5) after calling up the menu to activate the rename function quickly. Otherwise, you can use the down arrow (Space-4) until you reach Rename on the list. Press Enter on this menu. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will ask for a new name. On the Braille display, New file (or folder) name: (current file name or folder name) will appear. You must type in a new file name and folder name in ASCII characters. And if you type the file extension, you can change the file extension. Pressing Enter after entering a new file name will complete the process of changing a file or folder name. You cannot use the following characters in a file name or folder: |, \, <, >, ?, :,

*

4.2.8 New Document You can create a new document with this option. There are several ways to access this function. You can utilize the menu by pressing Space-m

(dots 1-3-4), and you can use the down arrow (Space-4) until you reach New Document. Another way to use this function is by pressing n (dots 1-3-4-5) after calling up the menu. The hot key for this option in the File manager is Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5). When the new document function is activated, the Braille Sense U2 will display File type: text

(txt). You can create two types of documents, which are text file and Braille file. When the Braille Sense U2 displays File type: text (txt), you can use the down arrow (Space-4) to select the Braille (brl) file format. When you press Enter on either text (txt) or Braille (brl), the Braille Sense U2 will display New document name: New Document0.txt or New Document0.brl. New Document0.xxx is the default file name based upon the file type you have chosen. The number after the new document will increase by one whenever you create a new document. You can also type in the document name you prefer. Then, the new document you named will be created. |, \, <, >, ?, :, * characters cannot be used when creating a file name. 4.2.9 New Folder You can create a new sub-folder under the current folder by using this option. You need to call up the menu in the File manager by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and select New Folder from the menu list by using the down arrow (Space-4). Press Enter on New Folder to activate this function. The Braille Sense U2 will ask, New folder name:, and wait for your response. Enter your preferable new folder name in ASCII, and press Enter. Finally, your new folder has been created. You can still use the letter f (dots 1-2-4) after calling up the menu to invoke the new folder option. Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) is the hotkey that you use to access this feature quickly without going through the menu. When creating a new folder name, you cannot use the following characters: |, \,

<, >, ?, :, *

4.2.10 File Conversion The File conversion on the Braille Sense U2 is similar to the Save As item in the word processor. This feature converts files to different file formats. The Braille Sense U2 file conversion feature will support the following file formats: Sense Word (hbl), Text (txt), and Braille (brl). The Braille Sense U2 can convert one or more files at the same time to the file format you prefer. Select files using the file selection method. After selecting the files you want to convert, call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Move down to the File Conversion, and press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 will prompt you to choose the preferred file format. Use the up and down arrows (Space-1 or Space-

4) to select the desired file format. When you press Enter on the file format you want, the Braille Sense U2 will start converting files to the file format you have chosen. The Braille Sense U2 will keep the original file names for the files you have converted, except for the file name extension. The Braille Sense U2 will change your file extension to the extension that you have selected. If there is a file with the same file name and format already, date and time will be added to the file name. You can always use the letter t (dots 2-3-4-5) after calling up the menu to invoke the file conversion feature. Also, Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) is the hot key that activates this feature without calling up the menu. 4.2.11 Select All This feature selects all the files and folders in the current path. You can use this feature through the menu, or by using a shortcut key. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. Press the down arrow

(Space-4) to go to Select All. Press Enter to execute the Select All function. You can use the letter a (dot 1) after calling up the menu to use this feature. Enter-a (dot 1) is the hot key to select all of the files and folders in the current path. When Select All is activated, the Braille Sense U2 will say, x objects selected. The Braille Sense U2 will return to the file list in the current path after this brief announcement. You will see * in front of each file name you have selected. You can always cancel your selections by pressing Space after moving to the file you want to cancel. This feature is a convenient way of copying, cutting, and deleting multiple files. 4.2.12 Search for File Search For File is to find out files of the current or other disk. You can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu and move to Search For File, and press Enter or b. Or, you can press Space-f (dot 1-2-

4) without calling the menu. Then, you can see dialog box for file search. The dialog box for file search consists of edit window for file name to search, combo box to select a disk, check box to searching sub-

folder, search button, cancel button and list to be searched file and you can use tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to move to each control. When you perform file search, you will hear File for find: This edit window is edit window for file name to search. You need to input whole or part of the file name and press Enter. Then, it will search all files which contains the word which you inputted in the current disk. After the file search, it is located in list to be searched file automatically. You can press up and down arrow keys (Space-1 and Space-4) to move to each file in list to be searched file. If you press Enter on a file, it moves to the path where a file is stored and dialog box for file search will be closed. You can open the file by pressing Enter on the file name once again. If you want to search a file in another disk, not in current disk, you need to input file name and press tab (Space-4-5) to move to combo box to select disk. Then, you can press up and down arrow keys (Space-1 and Space-4) to move to a disk. If you press Enter on a disk or Search button, it will start to search a file in a disk. In combo box to select disk, you can see the disk list which is linked with Braille Sense U2 now. If there are many files in a disk, it can take some time to search a file and you can see a message of searching. If you want to search in a root of a disk excluding sub-folders, then press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the check box to searching sub-folder, press Space to cancel the selection in the check box and press Enter. The default set-up is to include sub-folders when you search in a disk. 4.2.13 Sort Files By This option is used to specify the order of how files and folders will be displayed within the file list. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to bring up the menu. Then, press Space-4 repeatedly until you reach Sort Files By, and then press Enter. Also, you can access this feature by pressing Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) in the file list, or by pressing g (dots 1-2-4-5) in the menu. Then, you can specify in what order the files and folders in the file list will be sorted. Files and folders can be sorted according to the following: Name, Size, Extension, and Date and Time. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you press Enter after selecting the sorting criterion, files and folders will be displayed in the specified order. If you select Name or Extension, the list will be sorted in ascending order, and if you select Size or Date and Time, the list will be sorted in descending order. By default, files and folders in the file list will be sorted by Name. Once you have chosen how you want your file and folder lists sorted, the option will be kept even after the File manager is closed, so that files and folders can be sorted in the same order when the File manager is opened again later. 4.2.14 Set File Info This item is used to set what kind of information will be displayed in the file list. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Then, press Space-4 repeatedly until you reach Set File Info, and then press Enter. You can also access this feature by pressing Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) in the file list or press l (dots 1-2-3) when you are in the menu. Then, you can select the information to be displayed in a list containing Name, Name, Size, and Name, Size, Date and Time. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you press Enter after selecting the information to be displayed, the file list will be updated, and show all the information you specified. By default, only names are displayed in the file list. If you have selected Name, Size, the name and size of files will be displayed. But, for folders, size will not be displayed. If you have set the Set File Info option, it will be kept even after closing the File manager, and the same information will be displayed when the File manager is started again. 4.2.15 Display Only Files of Type This is used to specify what type of files will be displayed in the file list. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to bring up the menu. Then, press Space-

4 repeatedly until you reach Display Only Files Of Type, and press Enter. You can also access this feature by pressing Enter-w (dots 2-4-

5-6) in the file list, or press w in the menu. Then, you can select one of the following items: All Files, Sense Word Files, MS Word Files, Text Files, Braille files, HTML Files, URL Files, Media Files, and Wave Files. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you press Enter after selecting the file type you want, only the files of the specified type will be displayed in the file list. Folders will be displayed for whatever type you have specified. By default, all files are displayed in the file list. This option setting is not kept after closing the File manager, so all the files will be displayed after starting the File manager again. 4.2.16 Zip With this item you can compress files and folders into a zip file. Compressing a file makes the total file size smaller, which can make it easier to email, or allow you to save space on a storage device or disk. To activate the Zip function, use the following steps:

1) Select the files or folders you want to compress in the file list by using Space or Enter-b (dots 1-2). 2) Open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on Zip. Or, while you are in the menu, press z

(dots 1-3-5-6). You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 3) Then, Zip filename: (default filename.zip) will appear. Default filename is the file name that will be used for the compressed file if you try to compress only one file or folder. If you try to compress several files or folders, the default name is the folder name that contains the files and folders. 4) If you press Enter (or press Enter on Confirm by pressing tab (Space-4-5)), the zip file will be created in the current path. If you want to change the name of the zip file, you can modify the default by using the cursor keys or type in a new name. If you want to cancel, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-

6). Or, move to Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5), and then press Enter on Cancel. 4.2.17 Unzip The Unzip function will allow you to unzip (or decompress) a zip file, regardless of whether it was made in Braille Sense U2 or a PC. To activate the Unzip function, use the following steps:

1) After selecting a zip file, open the menu with Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2, and press Enter on Unzip. Or, press u (dots 1-3-

6) in the menu. You can also activate this function without opening up the menu by pressing Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) after selecting a zip file. 2) Then, Unzip to folder name: (default folder name) will appear. The default folder name is the compressed file name. For example, if you unzip a file called test.zip, you will see unzip folder name: test. 3) Then, press Enter, or move to Confirm by pressing tab

(Space-4-5), and then press Enter on Confirm. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will unzip the files to the default folder. If you want to change the default folder name, you can modify the default folder name by using the cursor keys and editing the folder name. Or, you can type in a new name. If you want to cancel, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). You can also move to the Cancel button by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Then, press Enter on Cancel. 4.2.18 Information The Braille Sense U2 can provide information about files and folders. The information feature in the File manager provides you with information about the file type, file size, the date and time of the file or folders creation, and file attribute. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. Press the down arrow (Space-4) until you reach Information. Press Enter to activate the Information feature. Use the letter I (dots 2-4) to call up the Information feature after opening up the menu. Enter-i (dots 2-4) is the hot key for this option. You can use this hot key without going through the menu. The Braille Sense U2 will display the information about a file or folder in the following order: file type, file size, creation date and time, and attribute. You can review this information by pressing the tab (Space-4-5). You can also press Space-i (dots 2-4), while you are in the file manager or program menu in the Braille Sense U2, to hear how much space is available on the flashdisk. 1. File type: This will give you the file type information, such as brl file, doc file, and txt file. When a folder is selected, it will give you the information indicating that this is a folder containing x number of files and folders. 2. File size: This will show you the size of the selected file or folder. When multiple files or folders are selected, this will give you the total size of the selected files and folders. 3. Date and time: This will show you the time and date when the folder and file was created or modified. 4. Attribute: This will show you whether the file is write protected or not. You can change this attribute by using the up and down arrows

(Space-1 or Space-4) or space. When multiple files or folder are selected, you won't be able to see this attribute. 5. Confirm: In order to change the attribute, press Enter when 6. Cancel: In order to cancel the change, press Enter while Cancel is Confirm is displayed. displayed. 4.3 Using the Address Window This window provides you with the ability to type in the file name you want to open. Also, this window provides you with the opportunity for you to type in the path name you want to go to. This window contains the history list you can use for opening a file or for moving to a directory. The history list contains file names and directory paths you have used recently. 4.3.1 Editing When you are in a file or folder list, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to get into the address window. The Braille Sense U2 will show you the current path including the current disk name, such as flashdisk/download/. When you edit the path, you need to use the cursor routing keys to move the cursor to the place where you can type in the text. The cursor stays at the end of the path name when you first go into the address window. The address window is only valid when you are in a file or folder list. When you are in the disk list, the address window is not available. 4.3.2 Type in Path / File Name When you relocate the cursor by pressing the cursor routing key to the place that you want to edit, the Braille Sense U2 will insert the text from the location where the cursor is. If you know the exact path and file name, you can type in the path and file name to open the file with the appropriate application. For example, if you type in flashdisk/download in the address window and press Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will show you the list of the files in the download folder. If you type flashdisk/My Documents/sample.txt in the address window, and press Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will first load the word processor, and then open the file sample.txt. After the file opens, you can read or edit the file, sample.txt. 4.3.3 Opening the History List The history list contains paths, folders, and files that you have opened previously. You can access this history list within the address window by pressing the down arrow (Space-4). Use the up and down arrows

(Space-1 or Space-4) to review the history list. You can also use the scroll buttons to move around on this list. Simply open or visit the file and path by pressing Enter on the item, which is displayed in Braille. The files that are supported by the Braille Sense U2 will open with the appropriate applications (see section 4.2.3). During the navigation of the history list, you can still type in new path names or file names that you want to access. 4.4 Network share function Network file share is function to share files between computers connected to the network and means commonly using shared files with other computers just like your files. With network files share in File manager, also you can use files like your files, sharing files between Braille Sense U2 other computers connected to the network. In other words, you can access to other shared computers and copy files to the Braille Sense or edit files with word processor and in case of media files, you can play immediately. In addition, you can share folder of Braille Sense connected to the network and then access to the shared files of Braille Sense with other computers. There are 2 ways to use LAN/wireless LAN in order to connect Braille Sense to the network. So you can set connection easily and quickly. In case of using LAN, once you connect LAN to the Braille Sense U2, you can find and access the shared files of other computers connected to the network. But in case of using wireless LAN, it is possible to the access to the shared files, only your computer and the connected computer are in same layer. It means that you cant search for the computer connected to A router, if you are connected to B router wireless LAN which is sub-

connection of A router. If you want detailed LAN/wireless LAN setting, refer to Setup Internet of Utilities in this user manual. 4.4.1 Search for shared computers and add the network list. When you execute File Manager, you will see network list on disk list. Network list consists of the shared folder list of computer registered. On network disk, you can access to the registered computers shared folder or remove the registration. If there are no shared computers registered before, you cant see any other list, entering Network disk. User should search computer name connected to the network and then add the shared folder list to the Network list selectively. In order to search shared computer connected to the network, Search the shared computer via Setup Network connection dialog box. You can execute Setup Network connection dialog box, pressing Backspace-e (dots 1-5) regardless of location, while the File manager is executing. Or Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu and move to Network and then press Enter. You can see menu items of Network. Move to the Setup Network connection dialog box by pressing Space-4 and then press Enter. Setup Network connection is not network menu so it can be executed by pressing F2. The following is the Setup Network connection dialog box control. Remote name ? CEB Remote folder ? LB Add/Remove ? BT Cancel ? BT In order to move to Setup Network connection dialog box control, do the following:

Move to the next control: Tab (F2 or Space-4-5) Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-F2 or Space-1-2) ON the Remote Folder list, Connectable folder list is displayed. The following is the functions. Move to the next list: Space-4 Move to the previous list: Space -1 Select list and Cancel: Space Select all list: Enter-a (dots 1) Using Add buttons control, you can add shared folder list which is selected in the Remote folder list to the File manager network list. In the Remote folder list, enter key execute as Add button. Cancel button cancels the Setup Network connection dialog box. Also, Using Space-

z (dots 1-3-5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5), cancel can be executed. If Setup network connection dialog box is executed using hot key Backspace-e (dots 1-5), you will be focused on Computer name edit box. After checking computer name which you want to search, you should type computer name with or without \\ signal and press Enter. For example, if the computer name which you want to search for is hims, type \\hims or just hims and press Enter. If the shared computer is searched, login box will be displayed according to the shared computer setting. If shared computer is Windows vista or Windows 7, you have to enter folder address as bellow. Ex) \\hims\sharing, hims\music If you separately dont set up network user name and password in the computer searched, type guest on the Login EB and press Enter. If there are specific network user name and password, you have to type correct user name and password. If login information is correct, you will locate on Remote folder list control and the shared folder list appears. In the Remote folder list, all folder lists shared with connected computer appear. Move to the desired folder list and press Enter. Shared folder route add to the file manager network list. You can add more than 1 folder route in Remote folder list. If you want add more than 1 folder to the folder list, you can select list by pressing space and press Enter. Within the list searched, Space key can cancel or select the focused list. In case of adding shared folder, you dont need to search the folder again, if you want to connect to the same network. You can enter network disk in file manager and check and access to the list. If remote folder name exceed 11 characters, Braille Sense U2 cant recognize the folder. If file list does not appear, cancel the sharing of folder or file. And check the item that is displayed as use simple file sharing, execute application to all folders. If the setting is completed, share the corresponded items again. 4.4.2 Remove Remote folder registered There are 2 way to remove remote folder registered on File Managers network list. One is remove this remote folder on network function and the other is using Setup Network connection dialog box. Remove this remote folder on network First execute file manager and enter disk list. Move to the remote folder list which you want to remove and then Press Backspace-d (dots 1-4-

5). After that, Remote folder registered can be removed easily. Also you can execute this function using menu. Press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. And arrow down to the Remove this remote folder on network and then press Enter. The other is as follows. You should execute Setup Network connection dialog box and move to the This Remote folder already registered and then Press Enter or tab. Remove button will be displayed. If you press Enter, the folder will be removed. Remote folder list informs Remote folder already registered, indicating

(*) mark in front of the search list. If you press Tap in registered remote folder list, you can see Add button change Remove button. According to whether the folder is already registered or not, next control is changeable to Add or Remove button. 4.5 Hot Keys in the File Manager Hot Keys for the File Manager 1. Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) 2. Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5) 3. Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 4. Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) 5. Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) 6. Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) 7. Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) 8. Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) 9. Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) 10. Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) 11. New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) 12. New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) 13. File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) 14. Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) 15. Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) 16. Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) 17. Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) 18. Search for file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) 19. Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 20. Setup Network connection: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) 21. Cancel setting of Network connection: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 22. Sharing a folder with other computer: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) 23. Remove remote folder on network: Backspace-u (dots 1-3-6) 24. Setup sharing security: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) 5. Word Processor When you launch the word processor on the Braille Sense U2, the Braille Sense U2 will place you in a new document that is ready for you to write in. The menu can be opened by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Dont worry if you cant remember the exact shortcut keys for each of the menu items, since you can activate various functions of the word processor by activating the word processor menu. The menu in the word processor consists of file, edit, go to, read, and layout. In order to use these menus, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 in the word processor, select a menu item, and press Enter or press Backspace and the corresponding character that represents the menu item name. For example, in order to open the edit menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2 to open the menu, and move to the next menu by pressing up and down arrows (Space-1 and Space-4) to find the Edit menu, and then press Enter. Or, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and press e (dots 1-5), which represents the Edit menu. The Edit menu contains a lower level menu. The right arrow is displayed at the end of the menu name, and it is spoken as pull down after the menu name. If a menu contains a dialog box, ... will be displayed after the name of the menu and it will be spoken as common dialog. Before going in to more detail about the word processor, it is also important to note that while you are anywhere in a document, you can find out your location by pressing Space-1-5-6. Also, if you are editing a document, and turn the Braille Sense U2 off while you are editing a document, the Braille Sense U2 will say the status when you turn the Braille Sense U2 back on. In the next few sections the features of the word processor will be explained in more detail. We will also explain the functions of each of the menu items available in the word processor. 5.1 File Menu The File menu contains the menus that will allow you to create new documents, open documents that were saved to a disk, save any documents that were edited, and print in Braille. It also contains various environment setting menus. In order to select the file menu, press the Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and press f (dots 1-2-4). Or, press Enter on File. 5.1.1 New The new command creates a new document that can be edited. By default, the name of the new document is noname.brl. The extension,

.brl is the extension given to documents that are created in Braille on the Braille Sense U2. It is the same file name that is named automatically when the word processor opens. In order to create a new document, select New on the File menu. Or, press Enter-n (dots 1-3-

4-5). If New is executed while editing another document, Sense Document (s) is displayed first. If you press Space-4 repeatedly, Braille Document (b) and Text Document (t) will appear. Select the document type that you want, and then press Enter. New means that users can create a new document after closing the document that is currently being edited. Closing the document that is currently being edited means that the document is erased from the temporary memory. If a new document is executed without saving the document that is currently being edited, the Braille Sense U2 asks whether it should save the current document, so that changes to the document will not be lost. When Save: Yes is displayed, users can select Yes in order to save the current document or select No in order not to save the changes. If you select Cancel by pressing Space once more, the word processor will cancel the new document, and return to the current document. Note that you can change the Default document type, in the Global options. By changing the Default document type, you can choose to have your default document type as text, sense, or Braille. 5.1.2 Open The open command opens a document that has already been saved on to a disk. Select Open on the File menu, or press Enter-o (dots 1-3-

5). You can access the File menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), or by pressing F2. Then, a dialog box pops up, so that you can open a file. The Open dialog box is a tool that helps you find documents that you want to edit and read. It consists of the file list (which shows the list of files or folders), File name (to type in a file name directly), Type

(which changes the file format when opening a document), a Confirm button (for confirming the selection), and a Cancel button (for canceling the selection). In order to move between these controls, press tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). If the Open dialog box is executed, File name: is displayed first. If File name: is displayed, then type in a file name that you want to open, and press Enter. The file name should be typed in ASCII Braille. The Braille Sense U2 will look for that file in the /flashdisk/My Documents folder. If there are files that you used recently, you can scroll through them by pressing Space-4. The file names that were opened recently are displayed one by one by pressing Space-4. If the file that you want to open is selected press Enter to open it. In order to move to the previous file name in the list, press Space-1. In order to open a file with a different file format, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the file format selection, and then press the up arrow (Space-1) or down arrow (Space-4) to select a desired file format. You can find and open a desired file from the file list without typing in the file name directly in the File name: box. Press tab

(Space-4-5) several times to move to the file list, and then select a desired file. You can also move to the file list by pressing shift-tab

(Space-1-2) when you are at the File name: dialog box. The files in the file list have the file format that was selected in file type. You can select a file that you want by using the up and down scroll buttons, and you can open the file by pressing Enter. If you select a folder and press Enter, you will see the list of files in that folder. If you want to access a file that is on a compact flash card, or USB memory stick, you can access the file in the Open dialog box by first moving to the file list by pressing shift-tab (Space-1-2) or Space-

F3. Then, press Backspace until you hear the USB stick memory or the compact flash card. Then, press Enter to open the memory. The Braille Sense U2 will choose the Braille mode depending upon the file type. For example, if you press Enter to select a file that has the extensions hbl or brl, or if you type in a file name with those extensions and press Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will open the selected file in Grade 2 Braille. You will not be able to change the Braille mode in these documents. If you press Enter to select a file that has the extensions of txt or doc, it will open the file in what is currently set in View/Input grade of Global options. After the file opens, you can switch the Braille mode. In the word processor of the Braille Sense U2, it is possible to open and work simultaneously with up to 10 files at one time. If you already have one document open, and you try to open another document, the Braille Sense U2 will ask you if you want to save changes to the document that is already open. Then, you can save the file. Once you have completed saving the document, an open dialog box will appear. However, you will still have the two files open. It only seems that you closed one without saving it. With the new document open, if you want to go to the previous document, you can press shift-tab (Space-1-2). If you want to go back to the other document again, press tab (Space-4-5). 5.1.3 Save The save command will save a document to a disk drive. If you want to use this option, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the File menu and execute the Save command by pressing Enter on it, or you can press s (dots 2-3-4). Otherwise, you can press Enter-s (dots 2-3-

4) while editing a document. If you created a new document by activating the word processor or by pressing enter on New in the menu; if you execute Save, the Save as dialog box will open. You can refer to section 5.1.4 that explains how to use the Save as dialog box. If you execute Save after you edit a document that was opened using the Open function, the Braille Sense U2 will save the document with the same file name without using a dialog box. After saving a document, it will return to document edit status. When you have several documents open, you can save the current open document, by pressing Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5). This will close the document, save it, and return to the previous document. Note:

1) PDF and Epub file cannot be saved as a same file type. When trying to save, it will execute Save as and needs to be saved different file type. 2) When saving the rtf and doc, the file formatting will be lost and saved. 5.1.4 Save As The Save As option is used to save a document as a different file name, on another disk drive, or as a different file type. If you want to execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and then press Enter when the File menu is displayed. Move to Save As by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Another way is to press Space-s (dots 2-3-4), which executes the Save As command in the word processor. If you execute Save As, the Save as dialog box is displayed. This dialog box is almost the same as the Open dialog box. It consists of file list, File name, Type (representing the file format), a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. If the dialog box is opened, File name: is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). If you execute Save As when you are editing a document that you opened, the displayed file name, file format, and the folder are the same as those of the file that you opened. When executing Save as, PDF and Epub, the formatting will not be kept and will be saved as TXT format. However, if you created a new document by executing the word processor or by executing New, and you execute Save or Save As, the displayed default file name is noname.brl and the file path is flashdisk/My Documents/. If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display, press the cursor routing key where you want to edit the file name, and then modify it. Or, if you want to make a new file name, type in the new file name without pressing any of the cursor routing keys. You cannot use the following characters in a file or folder name. |, \, <, >, ?, :, *

If you want to change the file format, move to Type. In Type, move to the file format that you want by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to save a file with a file name that is in the file list, move to the file list by pressing shift-tab. Note: When saving the rtf and doc, the file formatting will be lost and saved. 5.1.5 Close Current Document The Close Current Document command allows you to close the current document that you are working on without closing the word processor. You can access the Close Current Document command by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Then, press Enter on the File menu. Use the up and down arrows (Space-1 and Space-4) until you find Close Current Document, and then press Enter. Or, you can press q

(dots 1-2-3-4-5) in the File menu. You can also access this function by pressing Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) while you are editing a document. Please note that this function will not work if you only have one document open. You must have at least two or more documents open in order to execute the Close Current Document command. 5.1.6 Print The Print command is used to print the current document in ink or emboss it in Braille. If you want to execute this command, press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on the File menu. Then, move to Print by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or just press p (dots 1-2-3-4). While editing a document, the hot key for printing is Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4). There are two lower level menus for the Print menu. One is for printing with an ink printer, and the other is for embossing in Braille. Remember that you can move between the menu items by using Space-1 or Space-4. 1. Embossing in Braille Open the document that you want to be embossed. Press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) to activate the menu. Locate print in the File menu and select Embosser, or press b (dots 1-2). If you select Embosser (b) above, the Embosser dialog box is opened. Here you can type in the page number where you want the embossing to start, and type in the end page number, where you want the embossing to stop. The following items are in the dialog box. 1) Start page number This is the beginning page number to be embossed. The default page number is set to 1. You can change the value of the page number, by typing in the value that is desired. You can move to the next selection item, which is the End page number by pressing Space-4. 2) End page number This is the ending page number that is to be embossed. The default value is set to 100000. It means that the document will be embossed to the end of the document, unless the document exceeds 100000 pages. In order to change the value, input the number of the ending page. You can move to the next selection item (which is the Number of copies) by pressing Space-4. 3) Number of copies This option designates the number of copies to be embossed. The default value is set to 1. You can change this number by typing in the number that is desired. If you press Space-4 or Space-1, you will be moved to Print method or End page number, respectively. If you want to move to Confirm, press tab (Space-4-5). 4) Set Braille format In this option, you can set whether or not the Braille document layout settings specified in Braille Sense U2 will be used when embossing. If you set this to Yes, the document will be embossed using the Braille document layout setting in Braille Sense U2. If you set it to No, the document will be embossed in the format specified in the original document. 5) Confirm / Cancel In order to emboss as designated above, move to Confirm by pressing tab (Space-4-5), and then press Enter. Or, if you are canceling embossing, move to Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5), and then press Enter. If Enter is pressed on Confirm, Print: Yes is displayed on the Braille display and it is also spoken. If Enter is pressed on Yes, embossing will start. If you do not want to emboss, press Space to select No, and then press Enter. If Save as file is selected by pressing Space, then the current document is saved as a brl file. If there are any problems with the Braille printer, the Braille Sense U2 shows an error message and returns to the open document. 2. Print Text This option is used when you want to print a document on an ink printer. To do so, open the document to be printed and press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on the File menu. Move to Printer by pressing Space-4 repeatedly. Then, press Enter when you are on Printer, or just press p (dots 1-2-3-4). The dialog box for Printer is almost the same as Embosser. After you input the value as in embosser dialog box, press tab (Space-4-5), and then Print: Yes is displayed. If Enter is pressed, printing will start. But, if you press Space to move to No, and press Enter, printing will be canceled, and the Braille Sense U2 will return you to the open document. Note that the Braille Sense U2 will work with all HP printers (level 3 PCL or higher), and with HP-compatible printers. 5.1.7 Settings If you want to change the environment, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on the File menu in order to enter into the File menu. Move to Settings (e) by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter on Settings, or just press e (dots 1-5). While editing a document, pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5) will open the Settings menu. When this menu is opened, a dialog box is displayed, which contains the followings: the settings list, Default folder button, Confirm button and a Cancel button. You can move between controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). And you can move between setting items in list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The following are the setting items that can be changed:

1. View format character (Yes/No): If this option is set to Yes, all of the format characters are displayed. If you want to change this option, use Space to toggle. Formatted characters will be marked with the carriage return ($p), and the mark sign ($pl). 2. Reading unit (Line/Paragraph): It sets the moving unit when Space-

1 or Space-4 is pressed while you are reading a document. If this option is set to Line, Space-1 moves line by line. If this option is set to Paragraph, Space-1 moves paragraph by paragraph. In order to toggle between Line and Paragraph, press Space. 3. Read only (Yes/No): If this option is set to Yes, the document cannot be modified. This setting is used in order to protect the document from any unintentional modifications. If you want to change it to No, press Space. Note that when you choose to select Compressed on the option for reading with the Braille display, you set Read only to Yes. When you are reading a document pressing a cursor routing key, will show a word or character corresponding to the operation of the cursor routing key. This will be displayed at a very left of the 32-cell Braille display. 4. Reading mode (Original/Compressed): This option sets the reading mode. Reading mode Original, will show the document in its original format. If the Reading mode is set to Compressed, The Braille Sense U2 will continue displaying contents even if there exists a carriage return

($p). In order to toggle between Original and Compressed, press Space. 5. Auto scroll speed (1~35): This option sets the duration of displaying one line while you are scrolling in a document. Twenty is the fastest scrolling speed. Pressing Space makes the number increase, and Backspace makes the number decrease. 6. Automatic save interval (Dont save automatically, 10~60): This option sets the automatic save time interval of the file that is currently being edited. The setting time can be increased or decreased by 10 minutes if you press Space or Backspace, respectively. 7. Apply settings to all documents (Yes/No): This option selects the settings only if they are valid for all documents. If Yes is selected, the settings will be kept for all future documents, and if No is selected, the settings will only affect the document that is currently being edited. In order to toggle between Yes and No, press Space. If you want to change the default saving folder, you move to Default folder button by press tab (Space-dots 4-5) and press Enter. And then you will see the file list. In file list, you move to folder or disk that you want by using the moving keys and press Enter after press Space. If you completed the settings, you move to Confirm button by press tab (Space-dots 4-5) and press Enter. If so, you can change the settings and return to the current editing document. If you do not want to save the setting, you press Enter on Cancel button. If so, it will cancel the setting and return to the current editing document. 5.1.8 Exit This command will close the word processor. In order to execute this command, select Exit in the file menu, or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-

6). If the document has been changed (or edited) and Exit is selected without saving the document, a dialog box will ask you if you want to save the current document. You can select (Yes) with the spacebar and press Enter to exit the word processor. 5.2 Edit Menu In the Braille Sense U2, you can edit all files regardless of what the view mode is set to. In the Edit menu, you will find the following items: Start Selection, Copy, Cut, Paste, Delete, Delete Blank Lines, Add To clipboard, Clear Clipboard, Select All, Insert From File, Insert Date, Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode, and Check Spelling. If you want to open the menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit. Or, you can press e (dots 1-5) in the menu. Now, lets explore the edit menu. 5.2.1 Start Selection The Start Selection command allows you to select a certain portion of text that you would like to edit. When you use the Start Selection command, the cursor will appear as blinking dots 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8. The Start Selection command allows you to make changes to only the text that is selected, and the changes will not affect text that has not been selected. The Start Selection command is especially useful for copying, cutting, and pasting. You can select text in a document by placing your cursor on the location where you want to start selecting text. If you want to use this function, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the Edit menu, and then press Enter on Start Selection, or you can press b (dots1-2) in the Edit menu to get to this option. While editing a document, pressing Enter-b (dots 1-2) will activate this command. The end point of the selected text is where you want to place the cursor after setting the starting point. For example, if you have typed the word, mother in a document, and you want to select the word mother, you should place the cursor on the letter m, and then place the cursor directly after the letter r. Then, you will have selected the entire word. 5.2.2 Copy After selecting text in a document, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and move to Edit by pressing Space-4. Press Enter to open the Edit menu. Press Space-4 to move to Copy and then press Enter, or press c (dots 1-4) in the Edit menu. While editing a document, pressing Enter-c (dots 1-4) will activate this command. When you copy the selected text, it will be copied to the clipboard. The clipboard is the virtual space that is used for storing copied data temporarily. However, if you decide to copy new text that you have selected, the data in the clipboard that you copied before will be erased, and the selected text that you have just copied will replace the previously selected text that was on the clipboard. 5.2.3 Cut To cut a selection of text, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Move to Cut by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter on Cut, or press x (dots 1-3-4-6) in the Edit menu (which is the short cut) to cut your selected text. While editing a document, pressing Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-

6) will activate the Cut command. The difference between Cut and Copy is that if you execute the Cut command, the text that has been selected will be moved to the clipboard and the selection in the document will be cut. However, the Copy command will copy the selection to the clipboard, and the text that has been selected will not be erased from the document. 5.2.4 Paste To paste selected text to the clipboard, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Move to Paste by pressing Space-4 repeatedly and then press Enter on Paste, or press v (dots 1-2-3-6) in the Edit menu (which is the short cut) to paste the selected text from the clipboard. While editing a document, press Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) to paste the text from the clipboard. 5.2.5 Delete To delete text that has been selected, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Move to Delete by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter on Delete, or press d (dots 1-4-5) (as a short cut) in the Edit menu to delete the selected text. When you are editing a document, you can press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) to delete text that you have selected. 5.2.6 Delete Blank Lines In order to delete blank lines, you must select the area of the document where you want the blank lines to be deleted from. Once this has been done, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Then, use the up and down arrows

(Space-1 or Space-4), and press Enter on Delete Blank Lines, or press l (dots 1-2-3) as a short cut, while in the Edit menu. If you want to delete an empty line while you are editing a document, press Backspace-e (dots 1-5), which is the hot key for Delete Blank Lines. 5.2.7 Add to Clipboard When you have selected the text you want to select in your document, you should press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Move to Add To Clipboard by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or press p (dots 1-2-3-4). While editing a document, pressing Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) will activate this command. Add To Clipboard is almost the same as the Copy command. However, with the Copy command, the newly selected text will replace the text that was copied before. The Add To Clipboard command however, will not erase the previously data from the clipboard when you use this command to copy the selected text. It will keep the previously selected text, and the new text that you have selected will also be added to the clipboard. 5.2.8 Clear Clipboard To clear the clipboard, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on Edit to select the Edit menu. Move to Clear Clipboard by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter. Or, you can press e (dots 1-5) in the Edit menu as a short cut. Once you have executed the Clear Clipboard command, everything on the clipboard will be erased. When you are editing a document, you can press Enter-

d (dots 1-4-5) to activate this command. 5.2.9 Select All The Select All command will select all text within a document. To activate this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. You can move to Select All by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter on Select All, or press a (dot 1) in the Edit menu (which is the short cut). While editing a document, press Enter-a (dot 1) to activate this function. 5.2.10 Insert from File This command will insert another file in the current document that is being edited. If you want to run this command, press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2, and press Enter on the Edit menu. Move to Insert From File by pressing Space-4 repeatedly. Then, press Enter on Insert From File, or just press I (dots 2-4) in the Edit menu. While editing a document, pressing Enter-i (dots 2-4) will activate this function. When you use this option, an insert dialog box will appear just like the open dialogue box. Select a file that you want to insert in to the current document, and press Enter on the file. Then, the selected file will be inserted at the beginning of the paragraph with your cursor. When you execute Insert From File, the text inserted from the file will be converted to the file format of the current document. Although the saved file that you pasted was in a different formatted document, the same file format will be kept as the current document. For example, if you insert sample.txt in sample.hbl and save it, the saved file will be sample.hbl. Note that if you are going to insert a Braille file in a text file, the Braille document will be translated back into a text document. You can read it in Braille, but on rare occasions you might see differences in the translated text. 5.2.11 Insert Date To insert the date into your document, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Edit to enter into the Edit menu. Move to Insert Date by pressing Space-4 repeatedly. Then, press Enter on Insert Date, or press w (dots 2-4-5-6) (which is the short cut) in the Edit menu. Then, you can insert the current date and time where the cursor is located in your document. If you want to insert part of the current date and time, you can modify what you want to change after completing the Insert Date command. When you are editing a document, you should press Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) to activate this command. 5.2.12 Insert Time To use this function, press space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press enter on edit to enter into the edit menu. Move to insert time by pressing space-4 repeatedly. Then, press enter on insert time, or press t (dots 2-3-4-5) (which is the short cut) in the edit menu. Then, you can insert the current time where the cursor is located. While you are editing a document, press backspace-w (dots 2-4-5-6) to activate this function. 5.2.13 Changing Between Insert and Overwrite Mode There are two ways of editing documents in the Braille Sense U2. The first is to insert your text, which will push back the words behind the cursor. This is called the Insert mode because you are simply inserting text. When you are in Insert mode, the cursor will show up dots 7-8. The second is to overwrite text at the cursor location. This is called the Overwrite mode. In Overwrite mode, the cursor will display as blinking dots 7-8. If you start the word processor (or open a document), the Insert mode is the default. This will write text, while pushing back other words that are already in the document. However, you can overwrite text while erasing the old text by switching to Overwrite mode. You can switch to the Overwrite mode by pressing Space-i (dots 2-4). In the Overwrite mode, you can change the old text into new text at the cursor location. If you want to go back to Insert mode, you should press Space-i (dots 2-

4) again. You can also access this function via the menu. Press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and go to Edit using the up and down arrows

(Space-1 and Space-4). Next, press Enter on Edit to enter in to the Edit menu. Then, use the scroll buttons to scroll to find Toggle Insert/Overwrite Mode, or you can just press m (dots 1-3-4) while you are in the Edit menu. 5.2.14 Check Spelling This option is used to check spelling while you are editing a document. In order to bring up check spelling option, do the following;

1) Call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. 2) Move to the Edit menu by pressing Space-4. 3) Press Enter on the Edit menu. 4) Press Space-4 until Check Spelling is displayed. Or, press k

(dots 1-3) in order to move to Check Spelling directly. 5) Press Enter on the Check Spelling. Or, you can call up the Check Spelling menu by pressing Enter-k (dots 1-3) while you are editing a document. If Check Spelling is executed, a dialog box with the following items will be displayed:

Range combo box Custom dictionary dialog (c) Options dialog (o) Begin button (b) Cancel button You can move from one item to the next by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The following is a detailed explanation for each item:

The Range combo box is used to designate the range that is to be spell checked. 1. Whole document: check throughout the entire current document. 2. Chapter: check the current chapter where the cursor is located. 3. Paragraph: check the current paragraph where the cursor is located. 4. From cursor to bottom: check from the cursor position to the end of the document. 5. Current word: check just the word where the cursor is located. You can move from one item to the next by pressing Space-1 or Space-

4. When you press Enter on the Custom dictionary dialog, the following items will be displayed:

1. List: it shows the words that are registered in the custom dictionary.

(Example: Braille 1/20). If there are no words registered, no items will be displayed. 2. Add word (backspace-a): if Enter is pressed on this button, Add word: will be displayed. If you want to add a word, press Enter after you enter the new word. Then, the new word is added and the Braille Sense U2 exits to the Add word button. 3. Modify word (backspace-m): select the word to be modified on the list and then press Enter. The Modify word: message is displayed. Input the correct word that will replace the selected word and then press Enter in order to modify the selected word. The Modify word button will be displayed again after the Braille Sense U2 modifies the selected word. 4. Delete word (Space-d): select the word to be deleted on your list and press Enter in order to delete the selected word. 5. Close: this command closes the dialog box. You can move from one item to the next item by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). When you press Enter on the Options dialog, the following items will be displayed:

1. Always suggest recommended word: if this option is set to On, the Braille Sense U2 will suggest a word if the word that is encountered is not in the dictionary. The default is set to On. If the option is set to Off, the Braille Sense U2 will not recommend a word. In order to toggle between On and Off, press Space. 2. Use main dictionary only: if this option is set On, the spell checker will not look up any words in the custom dictionary. It will only use the main dictionary. The default value is set to Off, and you can toggle between On and Off by pressing Space. 3. Skip an upper-case word: if this option is set to On, words with only upper-case letters will not be checked. The default is set to On, and you can change it by pressing Space. 4. Skip a word which includes an address: if this option is set to On, the words that contain an address will not be checked. The default is set to On, and you can change it by pressing Space. 5. Skip a word which includes numbers: if this option is set to On, the words that include the numbers will not be checked. The default value is set to Off, and you can change it by pressing Space. 6. Confirm: if you press Enter on Confirm, the changes that you made above will be saved, and the Braille Sense U2 will exit from the Options dialog. 7. Cancel: if you press Enter on Cancel, the changes that you have made above will be canceled and the Braille Sense U2 exit from Options dialog. In order to move between the items 1) through 5), press Space-1 or Space-4. But, in order to move to Confirm or Cancel, press tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). If you press Enter on the Begin button after you set all of the settings, the Braille Sense U2 will start to check spelling. If you press Enter on the Cancel button, the Spell Check will be canceled. Once Spell Check is executed, the following dialog box will be displayed:

1. Window to show the text: it shows the sentence with the word to be checked currently. The cursor will be located at the word that is to be checked currently. 2. Change word edit box: it shows the word to be checked currently. You can input the correct word in edit box directly. 3. Recommendation word list: if the word to be checked is not in the dictionary, the Braille Sense will recommend words. You can move from one recommended word to the next by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 4. Skip once (s): if you press Enter on this button when a word is encountered that is not in the dictionary, the word will not be modified. You can also press the down scroll button in order to skip the word. 5. Skip all (i): if you press Enter on this button, the word that is the same word as the currently focused word will not be modified and skipped throughout the spell check range. 6. Add to custom dictionary (a): if you press Enter on this button, the word that is currently focused is added to your Custom dictionary. 7. Modify once (c): focus on the modified word and select the desired word on the recommendation word list, and then press Enter. Then, the currently focused word that is on your document will be replaced by the recommended word. 8. Modify all (m): focus on the modified word and select the desired word on the recommendation word list, and then press Enter. The same words with the same spelling will be replaced by the new word throughout the document. 9. Cancel: if you press Enter on the Cancel button, the Spell Check will be ended. You can move from one item to the next by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). When the spell check has completed, the Braille Sense U2 will say 00 words checked. 00 misspellings found. 00 words corrected. Also simply, you can check spelling of the current word by press Backspace-k (dots 1-3) when you enter or meet the misspelled word. If you press Backspace-k (dots 1-3), you will hear list of recommended word. You move to word that you want by using the Space-1 or Space-4. And press Enter, so misspelled word will be changed to the correct one. 5.3 Go to Menu If you want to open the Go To menu in the word processor, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Or, you can press g (dots 1-

2-4-5) in the menu. In the Go To menu, you will find the following submenus: Find, Find Again, Replace, Go To Location, Go to Previous Page, Go To Next Page, Set Mark, Go to Mark, Go To Previous Document, and Go To Next Document. 5.3.1 Find The find function allows you to search for text in a document. Once the text is found you will be taken to that position in your document. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4 and press Enter on Go To. Then, select Find. You will be able to navigate the Go To menu with Space-1 or Space-4. Otherwise, you can press f (dots 1-2-4) in the Go To menu, which is the shortcut. While editing a document, pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4) will activate the Find command. If Find is executed, the dialog box is displayed. This dialog box consists of Text to find, Search direction, Match case, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move from one field to the next field by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). 1. Text to find The first field in Find is Text to find. In this window, you can type in the text that you want to find. If you want to find the text immediately, press Enter. However, if you want to set other fields in the dialog box, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. 2. Search direction The next field is Search direction. The default direction is Forward. If you would like to change the search direction, you should press Space. Pressing Space will toggle between Forward and Backward. After you type in the text to be found, and set the searching direction, press Enter if you want to find the text immediately. 3. Match case The next field is Match case. This field display only when you execute the Find command in text file. This field does not display in Braille file. The default value is No. If you want to change the value, press Space. Pressing Space will toggle between No and Yes. 4. Confirm 5. Cancel After you set all of the fields and want to execute Find, press Enter on Confirm. You can also start finding text by pressing Enter on Text to find or Search direction. In order to cancel the Find function, press Enter on Cancel. Or, you can cancel the Find command by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-

5-6). If you have executed the Find command as explained above and it finds the text that you typed in, the sentence with the text is displayed on the Braille display. If there was no text that matched what you typed in, the cursor does not move and the Braille Sense U2 announce the not found. by the voice. This function saves the text that was typed in last, as well as the direction, so you can use it again to search for the next occurrence of text. When using the find command, the current cursor position is very important. If the cursor is located at the beginning of the document, it is better for you to select Forward direction. If the cursor is located at the end of the document, it is better to select Backward as the direction used for searching. 5.3.2 Find Again When you want to run the Find Again command; you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Then move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Find Again by pressing Space-4 to move to Find Again and press Enter, or press h (dots 1-2-5) in the Go To menu. When you are editing a document, you should press Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) to activate this command. When Find Again is executed, Find Again will look for the text that was used in the previous Find. Find again will search in the same direction that was used with the last Find. If you have not yet used the Find command in the current document, and you execute Find Again, it will not work. Find again is used to find the text that you have previously found in the current document. 5.3.3 Replace To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Replace by pressing Space-4 to move to Replace (r), and press Enter, or press r (dots 1-2-3-5) in the Go To menu (which is the short cut). While editing a document, pressing Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-

5) will activate this function. Replace also has a dialog box that consists of the following fields:

Text to find, Replace with, Search direction, Match case, Replace, Confirm and Cancel. You can move between the fields by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The following is a description of each function. 1. Text to find 2. Replace with You can type in the text that you want to be replaced in this field. You can type in new text that will replace the text that is found. After you type in Text to find and Replace with, the Braille Sense U2 will find the text and replace it in the direction that you have specified. If you want to change the direction, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. 3. Search direction The Search direction has the same function as the Search direction explained in section 5.3.1. After you set the searching direction, press Enter to start the replacement of text, or press tab

(Space-4-5) to set the Match case or Replace. 4. Match case This field display only when you execute the Replace command in text file. This field does not display in Braille file. The default value is No. If you want to change the value, press Space. Pressing Space will toggle between No and Yes. 5. Replace You may want to replace only one piece of text. Or, you may want to replace all the texts that coincides with the text that you typed in the Text to find field. You can set it in the Replace field. There are two choices: Once and All. You can toggle between the two choices by pressing Space. 6. Confirm and Cancel Pressing Enter on Confirm will start finding and replacing text. If there is no text that coincides with the text that was typed in, Not found. is displayed, and the function is canceled. Pressing Enter on Cancel will cancel the Replace function. 5.3.4 Go to Location The Go to Location command moves rapidly to a specific location. You can move to a specific page, paragraph, or line. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Location by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. While editing a document, press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) to activate this function. If Go to Location is executed, the word processor says, Move to page number. If you type in a number here, the Braille Sense U2 will take you to the page number that corresponds with the number you have just typed in. You can also type the letter f (dots 1-2-4) before the number. This will tell the Braille Sense U2 that you are looking for a page number, and not a paragraph, or, line number. Type in the number of the page you want to move to without the PLUS sign or minus sign, and then press Enter. The word processor will jump from start of the document to the specific page at once. If you want to move forward from your current location, put the PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move forward five pages, you would type +f5. If you want to move backward from your current location, put the minus sign in front of the number and letter. If you want to move to the previous page, type -f, and if you want to move to the next page, type +f. If the page number you type in is not valid, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Move range error. You can also use this function to move to a specific paragraph. First, select Go To Location in the Go To menu, or just press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3). Then, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Move to page number:

Before you type in the number of the paragraph that you want to go to, type p (dots 1-2-3-4), and then type the number of the paragraph that you want to go to. By typing in the letter p (dots 1-2-3-4), the Braille Sense U2 will know that you are looking for a paragraph, and not a page or line. If you want to move forward from your current location, put the PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. If you want to move backward from your current location, put the minus sign in front of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move backward two paragraphs, you would type, -p2. If you want to move to the previous paragraph, type -p, and if you want to move to the next paragraph, type

+p. If the paragraph number you type in is not valid, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Move range error. You can also use this function to move to a specific line. First, select Go To Location in the Go To menu, or just press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3). Then, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Move to page number: Before you type in the number of the line that you want to go to, type l (dots 1-2-3), and then type the number of the line that you want to go to. By typing in the letter l (dots 1-2-3), the Braille Sense U2 will know that you are looking for a line, and not a page or paragraph. If you want to move forward from your current location, put the PLUS sign in front of the number and letter. If you want to move backward from your current location, put the minus sign in front of the number and letter. For example, if you want to move backward two lines, you would type, -l2. If you want to move to the previous line, type -l, and if you want to move to the next line, type +l. If the line number you type in is not valid, the Braille Sense U2 will say, Move range error. You can also go to a specific line number on a specific page. The Braille Sense U2 enables you to type in this information at the same time. To do this, press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), or you can select Go To Location in the Go To menu. Then, when the Braille Sense U2 says, Move to page number: you can type in the page number followed by the line number. For example, to move to the 3rd line on the 20th page, you would type 20 3, or you could type f20 3. When you use the command of the Go To Location function, you cannot use the + or - sign. You can only go directly to the page and line number. 5.3.5 Go to Previous Page The Go To Previous Page command allows you to move to the page that is located before the page you are currently on. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Previous Page by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or press Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2 while you are in the document. Once you have activated the Go To Previous Page function, the Braille Sense U2 will go directly to the previous page. 5.3.6 Go to Next Page The Go To Next Page command allows you to move to the page that is located after the page you are currently on. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Next Page by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Or, you can press Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4 while you are in the document. Once you have activated the Go To Next Page function, the Braille Sense U2 will go directly to the next page. 5.3.7 Set Mark The Set mark command marks a position in the document that you want to use later. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Set mark by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or press m (dots 1-3-4) in the Go To menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) to activate this command. Move the cursor to the location that you want to mark, and press Enter-

m (dots 1-3-4). Then, the Braille Sense U2 will say Mark name:. To name the mark, use the letters a through z. For example, if you put down the letter a (dot 1), the Braille Sense U2 will move you to that point in the document immediately. If you are in the document, the Braille Sense U2 will not show the mark sign. If you selected View format character in Settings, which was explained in section 5.1.7, you will see the bookmark sign in the document. You can go to marked text by using Space-3 or Space-6, and the bookmark sign will appear, which is $pl

(mark name). If you move the cursor to the mark location in a document, you can see dots 7-8 all through the mark sign. This means that the Braille Sense U2 will deal with the marked text as a chunk, but not with every character one by one. 5.3.8 Go to Mark The Go To Mark command finds a mark that has already been marked. When you want to execute this command, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Mark by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or press j (dots 2-4-5) in the Go To menu, which is the short cut. You can jump to anywhere in a document to marked text with by pressing Enter-j (dots 2-4-5). If you press Enter-j (dots 2-4-5), the Braille Sense U2 will say Move to mark:. If you type in the character of the mark name that you want to locate, the Braille Sense U2 will move the cursor to the marked text with dots 7-8 embossed in the first cell. 5.3.9 Go to Previous Document If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the document that you had opened before the document that you are currently editing. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Previous Document by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Or, you can press shift-tab (space -

1-2) while you are editing a document to go to the previous document. 5.3.10 Go to Next Document If you have multiple documents open, you can go directly to the next document that is open. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter on Go To. Move to Go To Next Document by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Or, you can press tab (Space-4-5) while you are editing a document to go to the next document. 5.4 Read Menu The Read menu reads the document in voice and in Braille when the user has opted to use read in voice and Braille. In order to call up the read menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press r

(dots 1-2-3-5). The submenus of the Read menu are Read Selected Text, Read Beginning Of Selected Text, Read From Beginning To Cursor, Read From Cursor To End, Auto Scroll, and Read Status. 5.4.1 Read Selected Text The Read Selected Text command allows you to have the Braille Sense U2 read text that you have in a selection. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or press r (dots 1-

2-3-5) to call up the Read menu. Press Enter on Read Selected Text in the Read menu. While editing a document, you can press BackSpace-b (dots 1-2) to activate the Read Selected Text function. Although you activate this function, the cursor location will not move to the selected text. The cursor will stay where you have activated Read Selected Text. 5.4.2 Read Beginning of Selected Text The Read Beginning Of Selected Text command will allow you to hear the first line of the selected text, without moving the cursor location. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read Beginning Of Selected Text by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press u (dots 1-3-6) on the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) to activate this function. When you execute Read Beginning Of Selected Text, the cursor will stay in the same position it was at when you executed Read Beginning Of Selected Text. 5.4.3 Read from beginning to cursor Using this function, the Braille Sense U2 will audibly speak a document from the beginning to the position where the cursor is located. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read From Beginning To Cursor by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter or you can press t (dots 2-3-4-5) on the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5) to activate this function. If you want to quit this function before you reach the cursor location, you can press Backspace-Enter. Your cursor will stay where it was when you started this function. That is, the cursor will not move to the position to where you stopped the function. 5.4.4 Read from Cursor to End This command will read a document from where the cursor is located to the end of the document. While the Braille Sense U2 is reading the text, the cursor will stay in the same location that you were, before you started this command. The cursor will not be moved until the reading has been completed. Once the text has been read, the cursor will move to the end of the document. To execute this command, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4), and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. You can move to Read From Cursor To End by pressing Space-4 and press Enter, or you can press g (dots 1-2-4-5) on the Read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) to activate this function. If you stop this command before the end of a document, you can press Backspace-Enter, which will move the cursor to where you stopped the command. 5.4.5 Auto Scroll The Auto Scroll command scrolls automatically. The speed of the Auto Scroll is set in the Settings menu, which is located in the File menu, which was explained in section 5.1.7. The auto scroll mode does not read the document using the voice. It is only displayed on the Braille display. It reads the document line by line automatically. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Auto Scroll by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press a (dot 1) on the read menu, which is the short cut. You can turn the auto scroll feature on and off by pressing the up and down scroll buttons simultaneously. For faster scrolling, press the right Space-6. For slower scrolling, press Space-3. If you want to read a line again that you have already scrolled past, you can read it again by pressing the up scroll button or Space-1 until you can get to what you want to read. Similarly, if you want to skip some lines that you do not wish to read, you can skip them by pressing the down scroll button or Space-4. You can also access this function without opening the menu by pressing both scroll buttons at the same time when in your document. 5.4.6 Read Current Sentence This function will let you know the information of the current sentence. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Press Enter to move to Read Current Sentence by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. Or you can press e (dots 2-5), short cut key in the read menu. While editing a document, you can press Space-1-4-5-6 to activate this function. In order to return to the document that you were editing, press any key. 5.4.7 Read Current Line This function will tell you information about your current line. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read Current Line by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press l (dots 1-2-3) in the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Space-c (dots 1-4) to activate this function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press any key. 5.4.8 Read Current Word This function will tell you information about your current word. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read Current Word by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press w (dots 2-4-5-6) in the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Space-2-5 to activate this function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press any key. 5.4.9 Read Current Character This function will tell you information about your current character. To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read Current Character by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press c (dots 1-4) in the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Space-3-6 to activate this function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press any key. 5.4.10 Read Status This function will tell you information about your current file. If you activate this function, the Braille Sense U2 will tell you the file name, edit mode (insert or overwrite), and file protection(write or read only). To execute this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to the Read menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Read Status by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter, or you can press s (dots 2-3-4) in the read menu, which is the short cut. While editing a document, you can press Space-3-4 to activate this function. In order to return to the document that you are editing, press any key. 5.5 Layout The Layout command sets the layout for printing on an ink printer or embossing on a Braille printer. The Layout menu has the following submenus: Braille Document Layout, Print Document Layout, Braille Paragraph Layout, and Print Paragraph Layout. The changes that are made with the Layout command are not displayed on the Braille display. In order to check the layout, call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and check the layout values one by one. The changed values will be displayed within the menu. 5.5.1 Braille Document Layout While you are editing a document, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and select Layout or press p (dots 1-2-3-4),

(which is the short cut), and then select Braille Document Layout. Or, you can press Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4). Braille Document Layout is used to set the width and height of the paper for embossing as well as the following options. Whenever you change a layout setting while you are editing a document, the setting will be valid on the rest of the document. You can navigate the menu items with Space-1 or Space-4, and you can move to Confirm or Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5 or F3). You can skip an item by pressing Space-4 if you dont want to change the default setting. The following are the items that can be changed:

1. Set characters per line This sets the number of characters (Braille) per line to emboss in Braille. The default value is set to 32. Type in the number of characters per line, if you decide you want to change the value. Then, you can move to the next setting by pressing Space-4. 2. Set lines per page This sets the number of lines per page to be embossed. It includes the line that the page number is printed in. For example, if it is set to 26, the content of the document will be embossed with 25 lines and the page number is printed as the 26th line. If you want to change the value, type in the number of lines that you want to emboss. Then, you can move to the next setting by pressing Space-4. 3. Print type This sets whether the document will be embossed on a single sided or a double sided (both sides). The default value is set to double side embossing. If you want to emboss using single sided embossing, press Space until Print type: Single sided is displayed on the Braille display. Then, the setting will be changed to single side embossing. If you want to go back to double side printing again, press Space again, and Print type: Double sided will be displayed. After setting your preference, move to the next setting by pressing Space-

4. 4. Page numbering type This sets the numbering type for embossing a document. The default type is set to Double sided. It means that the page number will be embossed on every page. The setting values are Double sided, Odd, Even, and None. These settings are changed when you press Space. Pressing Backspace will allow you to move in reverse order. When you have selected your preference, you need to press Space-4 in order to move to the next setting. 5. Set page numbering This sets the position of the page number when embossing. The selections are Upper right and Lower right. The default setting is set to Lower right. Press Space in order to change the setting. Pressing Backspace will allow you to move in reverse order. After selecting your preference, you should press Space-4 in order to move to the next setting. 6. Header 7. Footer This is used to edit the header that will be embossed on the head of every page. Move to Header and type in the text to be embossed as the header. In order to move to the next setting, press Space-4. This is used to edit the footer that will be embossed on the bottom of every page. Move to Footer and type in the text to be embossed as the footer. After you set every field, move to Confirm or Cancel, and press tab (Space-4-5). If you want to change a setting, or check your settings again, press Space-1 to move to the previous fields. 8. Confirm / Cancel In order to apply setting, when Confirm is displayed press Enter. If you do not want to change the setting, you will need to press Enter when Cancel is displayed. 5.5.2 Print Document Layout This option will allow you to set the layout of the document for printing on an ink printer. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are editing a document, and select Layout or press l (dots 1-

2-3) (which is the shortcut), and then select Print Document Layout. Or, press Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5), which is the hot key for print document layout. The settings in this menu are applied to all the paragraphs in the selected document. You can navigate the menu items with Space-1 or Space-4, and you can move to Confirm or Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5 or F3). You can skip an item by pressing Space-4 if you do not want to change the default setting. The following is a detailed explanation of each setting:

1. Set top margin This sets the top margin for ink printing. The top margin is the distance from the top of the paper to the first line of the printed paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it. 2. Set bottom margin This sets the bottom margin for ink printing. The bottom margin is the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last line of a printed paragraph. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it. 3. Set left margin This sets the left margin for ink printing. The left margin is the distance from the left edge of the paper to the first text that is printed. The default value is set to 20 mm (about 0.78 inches). If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it. 4. Set right margin This sets the right margin for ink printing. The right margin is the distance from the right end of the printed text to the right edge of the paper. The default value is set to 20mm (about 0.78 inches). If you are going to change the default setting, you can type in a number, which will make the margin as big as you would like to have it. 5. Set page numbering This sets the position where the page numbers will be printed. The page number positions are Upper left, Upper middle, Upper right, Lower left, Lower middle, and Lower right. To change the setting, press Space. Pressing Backspace will allow you to move in reverse order. After selecting your preference, you should press Space-4 in order to move to the next setting. 6. Header This is used to edit the header that will be printed at the top of each page. Move to Header, and type in the text that you want to be printed. 7. Footer This is used to edit the footer that will be printed at the bottom of each page. Move to Footer, and type in the text that you want to be printed. 8. Distance between lines This sets the distance between the lines that will be printed. The default value is set to 150%. The distance can be anywhere from 100% to 300%. If you type in a value that exceeds this range, the Braille Sense U2 will say Out of range. Value too large, and wait for you to type in another value. 9. Confirm / cancel In order to apply a setting, you need to press Enter when Confirm is displayed. If you do not want to apply a setting, you need to press Enter when Cancel is displayed. If you press Enter on cancel, you will be taken out of the menu. You must press tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to get to the Confirm and Cancel buttons. 5.5.3 Braille Paragraph Layout In order to call up the Braille Paragraph Layout, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 while you are editing a document. Then, press Enter on Layout, or press l (dots 1-2-3) while in the Layout menu (which is the short cut), and then select Braille Paragraph Layout. Or, you can press BackSpace-1-2-4-6. The changed layout will be applied only to the selected paragraph. These settings are not applied to other paragraphs. You can navigate between the menu items by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Move to the Confirm or Cancel by pressing tab (Space-

4-5 or F3). You can skip an item by pressing Space-4 if you do not want to change the default setting. In this setting, you can set the following items:

1. Indent first line This indents the first line of the paragraph as designated by the number of characters. The default value is set to 0. In order to change this setting, type in the number of characters to be indented on the Indent first line setting item. Press the down scroll button or Space-

4 in order to move to the next setting item. 2. Indent all lines except the first line This indents all the lines of the paragraph, except the first line of the paragraph as designated by the number of columns. If you want to indent all of the text, except for the first line, by typing in a number. You can make the indent as big as you want it by changing the number of columns, which will indent all lines, except for the first line. Press tab (Space-4-5) in order to Confirm and Cancel. If you want to change the setting of a previous item, move to it by pressing Space-1, and change it. The default is set to 0.) 3. Confirm / cancel In order to apply changes, you need to press Enter when Confirm is displayed. If you want to exit from a setting without changing it, you should press Enter when Cancel is displayed. You must press tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to get to the Confirm and Cancel buttons. 5.5.4 Print Paragraph Layout You can set the layout of the current paragraph for printing on an ink printer. In order to set print paragraph layout, press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2 while you are editing a document, and select Layout, or press l (dots 1-2-3) (which is the short cut), and select Print Paragraph Layout. Or, press BackSpace-2-3-4-6, which is the hot key for Print Paragraph Layout. This setting applies only to the paragraph that you are on when the setting is changed. This setting change does not apply to other paragraphs. You can navigate the menu items by pressing Space-1 or Space-4, and you can move to Confirm or Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5 or F3). You can skip an item by pressing Space-4 if you do not want to change the default setting. The following is a detailed explanation of the settings for Print Paragraph Layout:

1. Set left margin This sets the left margin for ink printing. The default value is set to 0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in the value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or press Space-4. 2. Set right margin This sets the right margin for ink printing. The default value is set to 0mm. In order to change the setting, you will need to type in the value. Move to the next setting by pressing the down scroll button or press Space-4. 3. Indent first line This sets the indentation of the first line. The first line will be indented by the value that you select, and the other lines will not be indented. This setting is valid for the paragraphs that follow, unless the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In order to change the setting, you should type in the number of characters. Press the down scroll button or press Space-4 in order to move to the next setting. 4. Indent all lines except the first line All the lines in the paragraph, except the first line, are indented if this is set. This setting will be valid for the following paragraphs, unless the setting is changed. The default value is set to 0. In order to change the setting, you should type in the number of characters. 5. Alignment 6. Set style This sets the alignment type. The default type is set to Left justified. The other options are Centered and Right justified. Press Space in order to change the setting. When printing a document through an ink printer, the style of each paragraph can be set to a desired style. Style includes font type, font size, and text shape for text. You can select Text, Title, Sub title, Abstract 1, and Abstract 2 by pressing Space or Backspace. The default fonts for each style are listed below. Text: Times New Roman, Font size 11 Abstract1: Times New Roman, Font size 11, Boldface Abstract2: Times New Roman, Font size 14, Boldface Sub title: Courier New, Font size 16, Italic, Boldface, CEnter-

aligned Title: Times New Roman, Font size 20, Boldface, CEnter-aligned 7. Confirm / cancel In order to apply a setting, press Enter on Confirm. In order to cancel a setting, and move to edit mode, press Enter on Cancel. You must press tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) to get to the confirm and cancel buttons. 5.6 Keys for Text Scrolling and Deleting While reading a document, you can use the following commands to read Braille or hear speech. You can move character by character, word by word, or paragraph by paragraph. The previous character: Left arrow (Space-3) The next character: Right arrow (Space-6) The previous word: Space-2 The next word: Space-5 The beginning of line: Home key (Space-1-3) The end of line: End key (Space-4-6) The previous sentence: Space-2-3-5 The next sentence: Space-2-5-6 The previous line: Up arrow (Space-1) The next line: Down arrow (Space-4) The next paragraph: Space-5-6 or Enter-down scroll button The previous paragraph: Space-2-3 or Backspace-up scroll button The top of document: Control-home (Space-1-2-3 or F1-F2-up scroll button) The bottom of document: Control-end (Space-4-5-6 or F3-F4-

down scroll button) In addition, if you use the following commands, you can read the part of a document where the cursor is. For example, if you activate the read the current paragraph function, you will hear the entire paragraph where the cursor is located. Read the current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6 Read the current sentence: Space-1-4-5-6 Read the current line: Space-1-4 Read the current word: Space-2-5 Read the current character: Space-3-6 If you want to delete a part where the cursor is, you can use the following keys. For example, if you activate the delete the current paragraph function, you can delete the entire paragraph where the cursor is located. Delete the current paragraph: BackSpace-2-3-5-6 Delete the current line: BackSpace-1-4 Delete the current word: BackSpace-2-5 Delete the current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 5.7 Cursor Location While reading a document, you can check the cursor location. To do this, press Space-1-5-6. You will then hear, Page: xx, Line: xx, column: xx, xx%, Paragraph: xx/yy, Line: xx/yy. 5.8 Hot keys in the word processor:

1. File menu New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Settings: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 2. Edit menu Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Delete blank lines: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Select All: Enter-a (dot 1) Insert from file: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Insert time: Backspace-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Toggle insert/overwrite mode: Space-i (dots 2-4) Check spelling : Enter-k (dots 1-3) Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3) 3. Go to menu Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2 Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4 Set mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Go to mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5) Go to previous document: Space-1-2 or Space-F3 Go to next document: Space-4-5 or F3 4. Read menu Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons Read status: Space-3-4 5. Layout menu Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Print document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6 Print paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6 6. Miscellaneous hot keys Move to previous character: Space-3 Move to next character: Space-6 Move to previous word: Space-2 Move to next word: Space-5 Move to the beginning of the line: Home (Space-1-3) Move to the end of the line: End (Space-4-6) Move to previous sentence: Space-2-3-5 Move to next sentence: Space-2-5-6 Move to previous line: Space-1or up scroll button Move to next line: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3 Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6 Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6 Read current sentence: Space-1-4-5-6 Read current line: Space-1-4 Read current word: Space-2-5 Read current character: Space-3-6 Delete current paragraph: Backspace-2-3-5-6 Delete current line: Backspace-1-4 Delete current word: Backspace-2-5 Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6 Set view format character: Space-1-4-6 Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6 Set read only: Space-3-4-6 Set reading mode: Space-1-2-4-6 6. Address Manager 6.1 What is the Address Manager?

The Address manager is a program that you can use to keep track of your contact information and schedule information, such as names, company addresses, home addresses, as well as other information. Address manager has two main dialog boxes: Add Address and Search Address. In the Add Address, dialog you can enter contact information, such as names, company addresses, home addresses and so on. The information that you have entered can be saved for later use. In the Search Address, dialog you can look for information that is stored in the Address manager. You can edit or delete information that you find. You can also select addresses to be printed using an ink or Braille printer. You can also connect to a web site by pressing Enter on a homepage address field if the field contains an address for a web site. In the program menu, you can start Address manager by typing a (dot 1), or by selecting Address manager. Press Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly in the program menu until you arrive at the Address manager, and then press Enter to open it. Before going into the details of how to use the Address manager, let's discuss the structure of address data. The address data that is stored in Address manager consists of a set of records. A record is a collection of contact information about one person or company. Each record contains 23 fields. These 23 fields are:

Last name, First name, Company name, Title, Mobile phone, Home phone, Home fax, Company phone, Company fax, Home street address, Home city, Home state, Home zip code, Home country, Company street address, Company city, Company state, Company zip code, Company country. Home e-mail, Company e-

mail, Home page, and Memo. Thus, one record contains all the information you can keep about a person or company. 6.2 Starting the Address Manager When you press Enter on Address manager in the program menu, the Braille Sense U2 will say Search Address, and display the prompt, Last name:. In other words, when you start the Address manager, the Search Address dialog box will be opened. In Address manager, you can use the menus to conveniently browse and execute all of the available commands. When you cannot remember the exact hot key for the command that you want to execute, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu. 6.3 Using Add Address This dialog box allows you to enter new addresses in the Address manager. In order to use the Add Address function, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the Address manager menu, and then press the Space-1, Space-4 or the up and down scroll button to move to Add Address. Then, press Enter. Or, press Enter-i (dots 2-4)

(which is the hot key) in Address manager. 6.3.1 Adding an Address Add address is a dialog box that contains a list of 22 input fields, the Memo field, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. In the input fields, you can enter the information corresponding to the 22 fields of a record. Confirm is used to save the information entered, and Cancel is used to discard the entry. You can move among the input fields, Memo, Confirm, and Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). Among the 22 input fields, you can move from one field to the next by pressing the Space-1, Space-4 or the up and down scroll button. Here you should type in the appropriate information for each field, and press the down arrow (Space-4) to move to the next field. You do not have to fill in all of the fields. If you want to skip a field, press the down arrow (Space-4), and the field will be left blank. You will then be prompted for the next field. When you have entered information in the desired fields, you can save the information by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2) repeatedly to move to the Confirm button. Then, press Enter. Or, you can press Enter in any field. If you dont want to save the information that you have entered, press tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) repeatedly to move to the Cancel button, and then press Enter. After you cancel the entry, you will be prompted for another record, beginning with the Last name field. You can the use the cursor routing keys to move from one field to the next. In any input field, if you press the first cursor routing key all the way to the left, the first input field (Last name:) will be displayed and you can type in a name there. If you want to enter a mobile phone number without entering other information, press the 5th cursor routing key, and then enter the phone number. In order to jump to the Home e-mail field, which is the 20th field, you should press the 20th cursor routing key. If you have pressed the 23th cursor routing key, or any key to the right of the 23th key is pressed, you will hear a warning sound because there are only 23 fields in a record. You can enter telephone numbers using computer Braille (without a number sign) or regular grade 1 Braille (with or without a number sign). To type in a dash (-) while typing in a telephone number (e.g. 000-000-

0000), you should press Space or dots 3-6. If you want to put an extension number after any phone number, enter the phone number as described above, and then type a comma (,), followed by the extension number, as in 000-000-0000,100. In this case, you should press dot 6 to enter the comma in computer Braille or dot 2 in grade 1 Braille. When you enter a home page address or an e-mail address, you should enter the information using computer Braille. For the @ (at sign), you should press Space-u (dots 1-3-6) and then dot 4. A period or dot (.) in a home page address (or an e-mail address) should be entered as dots 4-6. A colon (:) can be typed in using dots 1-5-6 and a slash (/) can be typed in using dots 3-4. By pressing tab (Space-4-5), you can get to the Memo field. You can type in multiple lines of text in the Memo field. When you want to start a new line of text, you should press Enter. When you are done entering information for a record, you can press tab

(Space-1-2) until you reach the Confirm button. Then, press Enter on Confirm. 6.3.2 Setting Add Address Fields Set Address Fields enables you to select one of the 22 fields to be shown when you enter contact information. There are 22 fields in a record, but you may not want to enter information in every one of the 22 fields. You can use Set Address Fields to select only the fields that you need. To use this function, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the menu, and then select Set Address Field, or press o (dots 1-3-5)

(which is the short cut), and then press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) in the Add Address dialog box. On the right side of each field name, used or unused is displayed. The default value is set to used. In order to toggle the value, press Space. After setting all the fields you want to change, move to the Confirm button or the Cancel button by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2), and then press Enter to save or cancel the changes. Another way you can cancel the changes is by pressing Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 6.3.3 Using Search Address in Add address In Add Address, use the Search Address function to jump to another record. To use the Search Address function, press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2 to call up the menu. Next move to the Search Address, and then press Enter, or press s (dots 2-3-4). You can also press Enter-s

(dots 2-3-4) in the Add Address dialog box. If you have entered any information and execute Search Address, you will be asked Save changes? Yes/No. Once you answer this, the Search Address dialog box will be displayed. 6.4 Searching For an Address 6.4.1 Using search address The Search Address dialog box enables you to search for any information stored in Address manager. If you execute Address manager in the program menu, Search Address is executed automatically. If you want to use Search Address in Add Address, you can either select it from the menu, and press Enter, or press Enter-s

(dots 2-3-4) (which is the hot key). If you press Enter in the Search Address dialog box, without typing any text, when Last name: is displayed, you can browse through all of the records that are stored in Address manager. A record is a collection of information about one person. If more than one record is found, you can move to the next record by pressing Space-4. If you want to move to the previous record, you need to press Space-1. For moving each field and record in the search result list, you can use the following keys. Following are the move keys in the search result list Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2 Move to the next field in a record: Space-5 Move to the first field in a record: Space-1-3 Move to the last field in a record: Space-4-6 Move to the previous record: Space-1 Move to the next record: Space-4 Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 You can also search records using not only name field but also the other fields. If you want to find records with a company name, press Space-4 repeatedly until company name: is heard. Then, type the company name, and press Enter. The first record that has the company name will be displayed. When you enter text to be searched for, you do not have to type the entire content of a field. For example, if you want to find a record about Edward, type in ed in the search name field. Then, all the records whose name field contains ed will be found. 6.4.2 Setting Searching Address Fields This option enables you to select the fields that you want to search. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the menu, and select Set Address Search Fields. Then, press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) (which is the hot key) in the Set Address Search Fields dialog box. If you want to search only the name, mobile phone number, and company telephone number fields, move to those fields that you do not want to search by pressing Space-4 or Space-1, and then press Space to change the value of that field to unused. By pressing Space, you can toggle the value of a field between used and unused. 6.4.3 Using Add Address In Search Address You can use the Add Address command in the Search Address dialog box. To do this, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the menu, and then select Add Address. Then, press Enter. You can also press Enter-i (dots 2-4), which is the hot key for this option. 6.5 Backing up and restoring the address list 6.5.1 Backup Address List If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the address manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you make a backup file every time you make a change to the address list. To go to Backup Address List, open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2. Then, use the up and down arrows (Space-1 or Space-4), and find Backup Address List. Then, press Enter. You can also press u (dots 1-3-6) while you are in the menu to get to Backup Address List. Or, you can press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) to activate this function without calling up the menu. If you already have a backup file, you will see the message Backup file already exists. Continue to backup? Yes. If you have made any changes to your address list, you need to press Enter to create a new backup file. If you want to keep the previous backup file, press Space-4, locate No, and press Enter on it. When you make a backup file in your address list, you will always have a new backup file with the extension DAT, and you will have another file with the extension BAK (which originated from the previous address.dat file). 6.5.2 Restore Address List If you want to restore the address list after a cold reset, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and use the up and down scroll buttons to find Restore Address List. Then, press Enter on Restore Address List. Or, you can press r (dots 1-2-3-5) while you are in the menu to find Restore Address List. You can also press Enter-r (dots 1-

2-3-5) to activate this function, without calling up the menu. If you activate the Restore Address List function, and you already have an address list, you will see the message, Address file already exists. Which do you prefer? Append. If you press Enter, the backup address list will be appended to the current address list. If you press Space-4 once and press Enter on Overwrite, you will install the new backup file, erasing the old backup file. For example, let us assume that you have three records in your address list and you have ten addresses in your backup file. If you select Append, you will have 13 records in your address list. In this case, three addresses could possibly be redundant. If you select Overwrite, you will have 10 addresses backed up, and the three original addresses will be deleted. If you dont want either Append or Overwrite, press Space-4, locate Cancel, and press Enter on it. 6.5.3 Setting Backup Option To backup your address list, you can do it manually using the Backup Address List function. You can also backup your address list automatically by using the Set Backup Options. To activate the Set Backup Options function, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open up the menu. Then press Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly to locate Set Backup Options. Then press Enter on it. Or, you can press e

(dots 1-5) in the menu to go to Set Backup Options. You can also activate the function without opening up the menu by pressing Enter-e

(dots 1-5). If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box has three controls: Backup mode radio button, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can switch between controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). To switch between radio buttons, you can press Space-1, Backspace, Space-4, or Space. The Backup mode has three radio buttons: Always backup changes when exiting, Manual backup, and Prompt backup changes when exiting. 1. If you select the Always backup changes when exiting, a new backup file will be automatically created if you modify the address list or add other information when you exit the address manager. 2. If you select the Manual backup, it will not create a new backup file even though there may be changes in the address list. In this case, you can only make a new backup file by using the backup address list menu. 3. If you select the Prompt backup changes when exiting, you will see the message Backup changes? Yes when you exit the address manager, if you have modified the address list or added other information. If you press Enter on Yes, it will automatically create a new backup file and exit the address manager. If you press Space-4 once and press Enter on No, it will exit without making a new backup file. You can change the backup mode if you press Enter after focusing on one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press Enter on Confirm by moving to it by pressing tab (Space-4-5). The default backup mode is set to Prompt backup changes when exiting. 6.6 Importing and Exporting CSV CSV is the acronym for Comma Separated Value. The CSV file is used for the digital storage of data structured in a table of lists form, where each associated item (member) in a group is in association with others also separated by the commas of its set. It will import CSV file from contacts of MS outlook or contacts of some cell phones. In Address Manager of Braille Sense U2, 1. Import from CSV allows you to import the data of CSV file in Address Manager. 2. Export to CSV allows you to export the data of "address manager"

as CSV file. 6.6.1 Import from CSV You can import the data of CSV file in Address Manger, using this function. You can execute this function, regardless of Add address or Search address. 6.6.1.1 Executing the menu of the Import CSV In order to execute Import from CSV, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on the Address Manager. Or Press a (Dot 1) in 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Press Space-4 move to Import from CSV and press Enter. Or program list. press c (dots 1-4). Without calling up menu, you can move to this menu by pressing Backspace-i (dots 2-4). 6.6.1.2 The Structures of the Import from CSV menu 1. 2. 3. 4. File name ECB Confirm Button Cancel Button Path search list You can move between the controls by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). 6.6.1.3 Importing the CSV file In order to import the CSV file, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on Address Manager. Or press a (dot 1) in program list. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Import from CSV and press Enter. Or press C (dots 1-4). Without calling the menu, you can move to it by pressing Backspace-i (dots 2-4). 4) It shows File name. 5) Typing file name that you want to import. For example, if you want to search the address.CSV, type address or address.CSV in the File name. 6) Pressing Shift-Tab (Space-1-2) to move to Path Search list. Move to the folder that contains CSV file. For example, if the CSV file is located in the download folder under the flashdisk, press Enter on the download folder to get inside. 7) After saving the route, press Enter. Or press Tab (Space-4-5) move to Confirm and press Enter. 8) Importing the CSV file is complete. If you dont know file name of CSV file, 1) Press Tab (Space-4-5) on the File name. 2) Move to Path search list. 3) It shows lists of Flashdisk. If CSV file is inside of a Flashdisk: Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to CSV file and press Enter on the CSV file. If CSV file is inside of an external memory: Press Backspace, move to disk list. Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to CSV file and press Enter on the CSV file. If you want to cancel this function, press Tab (Space-4-5) on Confirm. Move to Cancel and press Enter. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 6.6.1.4 Adding the CSV file in data of Address Manager Once you import the CSV file, Last name: unused 1/xx will be displayed. Structure is like below. 1. 23 filed list of Search address/ Add address 1) unused 2) Field name list of CSV file 2. Allow fields in first record 3. Confirm 4. Cancel By pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2), you can move to 23 list of Search address/Add address, Allow fields in first record SCHB, Confirm button, Cancel Button. By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, you can move to Unused and Field name list of CSV file. In order to add the CSV file in data of Address Manager, follow these steps:

1) In list of Last name: unused 1/xx, press Space-1 or Space-4. Move to field of CSV file that you want to import in the Last name field. For example, there are 5 fields like Name, Company name, title, Company address and Company zip code in CSV file. It shows Last name: unused 1/6. If you want to import the value of Name field in CSV file, press Space-4 and move to Name. Then it shows Last name: Name 2/6 on the LCD and Braille display. If there is no field value from the CSV file that you need to import, you just leave unused. If you set unused in First name and Company name, you will hear Must select one or more of first name and company name. You will select value from the CSV file of First name and Company name. 2) Follow steps the above by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) to move to different field such as Group, Company, and Title etc. 3) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Allow fields in first record. You can change setting, by pressing Space. When you import the fields of first record in CSV file, you select it. When you select in Allow fields in first record: If there is field value of the first record in CSV file, select it. When you unselect in Allow fields in first record: If the field value of the first record is unnecessary, such as field name, unselect it. 4) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm. 5) Press Enter on the Confirm. 6) It shows Address file already exists. Which do you prefer? The default value is Overwrite. The setting values are Overwrite and Add. To change the setting value, press Space. Overwrite: If you want to overwrite when exist record has same data, select it. Add: If you want to add the data, select it. 7) It will return Search Address. 8) Press Enter. It shows data imported of CSV file with existing data of Address manager. If you want to cancel this function, press Tab (Space-4-5) on Confirm. Move to Confirm and press Enter. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 6.6.2 Exporting CSV You can export data of Address Manger as CSV file, using this function. You can execute this function, regardless of Add address or Search address. 6.6.2.1 Executing the menu of the Export To CSV In order to execute the menu of the Export to CSV, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on the Address manager. Or press a (dot 1). 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Press Space-1 or Space 4 and move to Export to CSV. 4) Press Enter. Or press x (dots 1-3-4-6). Without calling menu, you can directly execute this function by pressing Backspace-x (Dots 1-3-4-6). 6.6.2.2 Structure and Move of Export to CSV menu 1. File name ECB 2. Confirm Button 3. Cancel Button 4. File storage list You can move between the controls by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). 6.6.2.3 How to save as CSV file In order to save as CSV file, follow these steps:

1) Execute Address manager. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Export to CSV. 4) Press Enter. Or press X (dots 1-3-4-6). 5) It shows File name. 6) Type the file name. 7) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm. 8) Press Enter. It will save in the Flashdisk. If you want to cancel this function, press Tab (Space-4-5) on Confirm. Move to Cancel and press Enter. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-4-6). 6.6.2.4 How to change storage path In order to change storage path, follow these steps:

1) Execute Address manager. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Export to CSV. 4) Press Enter. Or press x (dots 1-3-4-5). 5) It shows File name. 6) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to File storage list. It shows list of work folder in Flashdisk. When you want to save folder in Flashdisk: Press Enter on folder that you want to save in Flashdisk. When you want to save folder in external memory: Press Backspace, move to disk list. Press Enter on the folder that you want to save in external memory. 7) Press Tab, move to Confirm. 8) Press Enter on the Confirm. It will be saved in the changed path. If you want to cancel this function, press Tab (Space-4-5) on Confirm. Move to Cancel and press Enter. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-4-6). 6.7 Commands in the Found Records 6.7.1 Find again If you want to search for another name, press Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). The prompt, Last name: will be displayed. Now, you can type in the new text that you want to look for. Just as in a new search, you can start the search by pressing Enter. Even if you have canceled a search, you can go back to the Search Address dialog box by pressing Tab (Space-4-5). 6.7.2 Opening a home page If a record has a homepage address or an email address, you can open the homepage or send an email. Move to Home page, Home e-mail or Company e-mail by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Then, press Enter on Home page, Home e-mail or Company e-mail. If you press Enter on a Home page, the Braille Sense U2 will automatically connect to the Web browser program. If you press Enter on an Home e-mail or Company e-mail, the Braille Sense U2 will bring up the E-mail program, so that you can send an email to the email address that you have selected. Before you use this command, please make sure that you are connected to the internet. 6.7.3 Editing Addresses In order to edit a field that is in a record, find the desired address by using the Search Address function, and then move to the field you want to change by using the Space-2 or the Space-5 repeatedly until you arrive at the field that you want to change. Then, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and select Modify Address. Then, press Enter, or you can press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4), which is the hot key. You can now enter new information for that field. After you have finished entering information, press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 will save the changes that have been made, and you will be returned to the first field of the record. To save the changes that have been made, and exit from modify mode, move to Confirm by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2), and then press Enter. In order to exit from modify mode without saving the changes that have been made, move to Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) and press Enter. You can also exit from the Modify Address by pressing Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), which are the hot keys. 6.7.4 Deleting Addresses To delete the record you are currently reading, call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and select Delete Address. Then, press Enter or press d (dots 1-4-5) (which is the short cut) in the menu. Or, you can press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (which is the hot key) while the record is displayed. You can also delete more than one record at a time as follows:

1. Select the records to be deleted and use the Delete command. To select the record that you want to delete, press Space when the record is displayed. Selected records can be deleted by pressing the delete key (Enter-d (dots 1-4-5). If you press Space again on a selected record before you delete it, the selection will be canceled. The records you have selected will show the, * symbol to the left of the last name:, which is the first field of a record. The Braille Sense U2 will say selected. If you cancel a selection by pressing Space on a selected record, the * will disappear, and the Braille Sense U2 will say Canceled selection. 2. Select all and delete If you want to delete all the records in Address manager, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu and select Select All. Then, press Enter. Next, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu again, and then select Delete Address. Then, press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-a (dot 1) (which is the hot key) and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) while you are using the Search Address function. If you select all records by Select All, * will be displayed to the left of Last name: If you press Space-e (dots 1-5), then all of the selections will be canceled and * will disappear. 6.7.5 Printing addresses This option allows you to print the selected records to a Braille printer or an ink printer. First, search the records to be printed with the Search Address command, and then select the records that you want to print. To select a record, press Space on the record to be printed. If you want to select all records in Address manager, press Enter-a (dot 1), or select Select All from the menu, and press Enter. At the beginning of a selected record, * will be displayed on the Braille display. After selecting the records that you want to print, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to bring up the menu, and then select Print Address. Then, press Enter, or press Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4), which is the hot key. The Braille Sense U2 will now prompt you to select a printer. The default selection is Printer. If you press Space once, the selection will be changed to Embosser. And, if you press Space again, Cancel will be selected. Each time when you press Space, the Braille Sense U2 will cycle through Printer, Embosser, and Cancel. You can select one of them by pressing Enter when the option you want to choose is displayed. 6.7.6 Saving Addresses to a File You can save selected records to a file. Regarding how to select records, you can find a detailed explanation in section 6.6.4 and 6.6.5. To save selected records in a document file format, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, select Save addresses As File, and then press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) (which is the hot key) after selecting the desired records. If you execute the Save addresses As File command, the file save dialog box will be displayed and you will be asked to enter the file name and select a file format. After you type in the file name, and select one of the available file formats, you should press Enter on Confirm, which will save the selected record(s) to a file. This dialog box is the same as the Save As dialog box in the Word processor. You should refer to section 5.1.4 to learn about the dialog box Save As in the Word processor. 6.8 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook The Address manager can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on your personal computer to help you keep track of your information. For a more detailed explanation of how to connect the Braille Sense U2 to your computer, and for more information on how to use ActiveSync, please refer to chapter 18. Please take the following steps in order to synchronize the Braille Sense U2 with Microsoft Outlook:

1) Download and install ActiveSync on to your personal computer. 2) Connect the Braille Sense U2 to your personal computer, using a USB cable. 3) If the Partnership dialog box opens on your PC after you connect the Braille Sense U2 to your PC, select Yes, and press the Next button on your PC. 4) Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in BrailleSensePLUS (or whatever you would like to call the Braille Sense U2) 5) Press the Next button. Then, the program list dialog box will be displayed on your PC. Click on the check box that is located next to Contacts. Not that the other check boxes should not be checked. Press the Next button. 6) Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense U2 are complete. You can then check the contacts in Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense U2. 6.9 Hot Keys in the Address Manager 1. Move keys for moving from field to field in add address or in the menu Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow (Space-1) or up scroll button Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow (Space-4) or down scroll button Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) 2. Move Keys For Moving From Record To Record in the search result list Move to a previous field in a record: Space-2 Move to the next field in a record: Space-5 Move to the first field in a record: Home (Space-1-3) Move to the last field in a record: End (Space-4-6) Move to the previous record: Space-1 Move to the next record: Space-4 Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 3. Shortcut keys in the menu Add address: i (dots 2-4) Search address: s (dots 2-3-4) Modify address: m (dots 1-3-4) Delete address: d (dots 1-4-5) Select all: a (dot 1) Save as a file: t (dots 2-3-4-5) Print address: p (dots 1-2-3-4) Backup address list: u (dots 1-3-6) Restore address list: r (dots 1-2-3-5) Set backup options: e (dots 1-5) Set address search fields: o (dots 1-3-5) Import from CSV: c (dots 1-4) Export to CSV: x (dots 1-3-4-6) 4. Hot Keys For The Commands Add address: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Search address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Modify address: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Set backup options: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Set address search fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Import from CSV: Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Export to CSV: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) 5. Miscellaneous hot keys Tab: Space-4-5 Shift-tab: Space-1-2 Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4 Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 7. Schedule Manager 7.1 Overview The Schedule manager is a program that is used to manage important information about appointments, anniversaries, and events. The Schedule manager can also inform you of appointments at a specified time. You can start the Schedule manager from the program menu, by pressing the up or down arrows (Space-1 or Space-4) to move to Schedule manager. Then, press Enter. Or, you can press s (dots 2-

3-4) in the program menu, which is the short cut. The Schedule manager has two main dialog boxes: Add Schedule and Search Schedule. In Add Schedule, you can enter information about a new appointment. Using Search Schedule, you can look for information about a specific appointment stored in the Schedule manager, and you can edit or delete the schedule information that is stored. 7.2 Starting Schedule Manager If you press Enter on Schedule manager, or press s (dots 2-3-4)

(which is the short cut) in the program menu, the Search Schedule dialog box will appear, so that you can search stored information. The first thing you will hear is Find date: followed by the current date. If you want to add new schedule information, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the menu. Then, select Add Schedule, and then press Enter. Or, you can quickly open it by pressing Enter-i (dots 2-4) in the Search Schedule dialog box. As in other programs on the Braille Sense U2, you can use menus and shortcut keys in the Schedule manager. 7.3 Setting time and date When you use Add Schedule, Search Schedule, or Wake up alarm

(which are located in the Utilities menu), you are asked to set the date and time. The Braille Sense U2 provides you with a consistent interface to enter time and date information in these dialog boxes. So before we start talking about using the Schedule manager in this section, we should explain how to enter the date and time. When you are asked to enter a date and time, you can either type in the date and time, or select it using shortcut keys, which are outlined at the end of this section. When you type numbers in date/time, you can use either computer Braille (without a number sign) or regular grade 1 Braille (with or without a number sign). When entering time, use hh mm format, two digits for the hour, and two digits for the minute. For example, use 10 05 to enter 5 minutes past 10. You can use a dash (-) or slash (/) to separate the hour field and minute field, but not a colon (:). You can enter a date in mm dd yyyy format, which uses two digits for the month, two digits for the day, and four digits for the year, as in 09 01 2004 to enter September 01, 2004. Again, you can use a space, dash (-), or slash (/) to separate the month, day, and year. If you want to change AM/PM, press Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6). To set the date and time with shortcut keys, you can use the following commands. 1. Date setting keys Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 2. Time setting keys Move to 1 hour after: Space-4 Move to 1 hour before: Space-1 Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5 Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2 Move to 1 minute after: Space-6 Move to 1 minute before: Space-3 7.4 Adding a Schedule To add a new appointment, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the menu. Select Add Schedule, and press Enter, or press Enter-i

(dots 2-4) in the Search Schedule dialog box. The Add Schedule dialog box has a set of input fields, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. The input fields are Start date, Start time, End date, End time, Subject, Location, Memo, Alarm time, and Set recurrence schedule. Among the input fields, you can move from one field to the next by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). For the Subject and Memo fields, you can type in text, and for the start date, End date, start time, End time fields, you can either type in a date/time, or select it using shortcut key. If you press Enter on the Confirm button, the schedule information will be saved. If you press Enter on Cancel button, the entry will not be saved. 7.4.1 Start date When you start Add Schedule, the Start date edit box is displayed first. If you want to use this date, just press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you want to enter a new date, you want to type month/day/year in this order. After you have entered the date, you should then press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you press Enter by accident right after filling in this field, you will get the message, no subject, and then the focus moves to the Subject field. Note: Start date varies following 2 cases. 1. If you try to add schedule that has not been performed the search mode in schedule manager, the default of Start date is set to the date based on current system. 2. If you try to add schedule that has been performed the search mode in schedule manager, the default of Start date is set to the date which has been searched by specific date. Note: Above 2 cases only apply if you search by date in schedule manager. If you search by subject, the default of Start date is set to the date based on current system. 7.4.2 Start time Start time is the second field in the Add Schedule dialog box. Here you can set the time when your appointment starts. By default, this field shows the current time, which can be changed in the Set Time and Date in the Utilities program. If you set the time format as 12 hour in this option, the time will be displayed in am/pm format. Otherwise, the time will be displayed in 24 hour format. If you have set the time format to 12 hour, you will want to press Space-x (dot 1-3-4-6) to change between am and pm. After you have entered the time, press the tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you press Enter by accident right after entering this field, you will get the message, no subject, and then the focus will move to the Subject field. 7.4.3 End date The End date is the third field in the Add Schedule dialog box, and here you can set the date when the appointment ends. By default, the same date as the date you set in the Start date field is displayed. If you want to use this date, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you want to enter a new date, you should type month/day/year in this order. After you have changed the date, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you press Enter by accident right after entering the date, you will get the message, no subject, and the focus will move to the Subject field. 7.4.4 End time End time is the fourth field in the Add Schedule dialog box. Here you can set the time when the appointment ends. By default, the same time as the time you set in the Start time field is displayed. If you want to change the time, type the time as you would in the Start time. After setting the time, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. If you press Enter by accident right after entering the time, you will get the message, no subject, and then the focus moves to the Subject field. 7.4.5 Subject Subject is the fifth field where you can type in the subject of an appointment. If you do not enter anything in this field, you will not be able to save the record. If you press Enter after typing in the subject, the record will be saved, leaving the Location and Memo field empty, and the Alarm time field set to its default value (Time of appointment). If you want to move to the next field, press tab (Space-4-5), instead of Enter. 7.4.6 Location In the Location field, you can type appointed location. If you press Enter after typing in the location, the record will be saved, leaving the Memo field empty, and the Alarm time field set to its default value

(Time of appointment). If you want to move to the next field, press tab

(Space-4-5), instead of Enter. 7.4.7 Memo In the Memo field, you can enter detailed information about an appointment. Here, you can type in more than one line. You can use most of the editing commands that are used in the Word processor. Press Enter to enter information on a new line. You can leave this field blank if you want to. After you finish writing the information, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. 7.4.8 Alarm Time The Alarm time function allows you to set the time when you will be notified about an appointment. The alarm is set relative to the appointment time. For example, you may want the alarm to sound 30 minutes before your appointment, so that you are not late. The default value for this field is set to Time of appointment. This means that the alarm will sound at the same time as you have set for your appointment. You can set the time in the same way as when you set the appointment time. The time can be set anywhere from one minute to forty-seven hours. To set the time with shortcut keys, you can use the following commands. 1. Time setting keys Move to 1 hour after: Space-4 Move to 1 hour before: Space-1 Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5 Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2 Move to 1 minute after: Space-6 Move to 1 minute before: Space-3 If you attempt to set the time to 0, the Braille Sense U2 will display the message, Time of appointment. If you do not want to set an alarm, press Space-1 when Alarm time is set to Time of appointment. Then, Alarm off will be displayed, and the alarm for this appointment will be turned off. After setting the Alarm time, save this appointment by pressing Enter, or by pressing tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you have set the Alarm time, it will go off at the specified time even if the Braille Sense U2 is turned off. If you want to stop the alarm, press Backspace-Enter. 7.4.9 Setting a recurring Schedule You can set this option when the schedule you are creating currently recurs periodically. If you clear this check box, the schedule will be set to occurring once. You can check or uncheck this option by pressing Space. That is, if you press Space when this box is checked, it will be unchecked, and if you press Space when this box is unchecked, it will be checked. If you have unchecked this, just press Enter, or press tab

(Space-4-5) repeatedly to move to the Confirm button and press Enter, to save the schedule. If you want to set recurrence schedule, you should press Space and then press tab (Space-4-5) or Enter to move to the combo box where you can set the recurrence pattern. In this combo box, you can select one of Daily, Weekly, Monthly and Yearly. We will discuss these options in more detail in the next section. 7.4.9.1 Daily If you select Daily, and press tab (Space-4-5), the focus will move to Recurring interval of day edit box. Here, you can enter the number of days after which the appointment recurs. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If you enter 1, the appointment recurs every day, and if you enter 2, it recurs every other day. One thing you have to be careful when you use this is that the difference between the starting and end date should be shorter than the recurring interval value. For example, suppose that the appointment starts at 09:00, Feb. 1, 2006, and ends at 12:00, Feb. 2, 2006. If you set the recurring interval to 1, you will get an error message The appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring interval. This is because it is logically impossible that the appointment duration is 27 hours, and the appointment recurs 24 hours. This rule is applied in the same way when you set weekly, monthly, or yearly recurring appoints. If you press tab

(Space-4-5) after setting the recurring interval, the Set recurrence end date check box appears. By default, its unchecked, which indicates that there is no apparent end date when the recurrence will stop. If you check this box by pressing Space, and press tab (Space-4-5), the focus will move to the edit combo box that asks for the end date. Enter the date when the recurrence will stop. You can directly type the date, or you can set the date. Once you set the date, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button. 7.4.9.2 Weekly After you set the Recurrence to weekly, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Recurring interval edit box. Here you can set after how many weeks the appointment will recur. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If you set it to 1, the appointment will recur every week, and if you set it to 2, it will recur every other week. The restriction on the recurring interval as in Daily is applied to Weekly. If the recurring interval is one week, the appointment duration should be shorter than one week. Otherwise, you will get an error message, The appointment duration should be shorter than the recurring interval. If you press tab

(Space-4-5) after entering the recurring interval, the focus will move to a list box where you can select the day of the week on which the appointment recurs. You can move between the items in the list box, by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. To select or unselect the current item, press Space. You can make more than one selection. If you dont select any day, it will be set to the todays day of the week. Press tab

(Space-4-5) after selecting the days of the week when the appointments recurs. Then the focus will move to Set recurrence end date check box. 7.4.9.3 Monthly If you press tab (Space-4-5) after setting the Recurrence to monthly, the focus will move to the Recurring type combo box. Here, you can set the recurring type as Date or Day of the week. To move between the two options, you can use Space-1 or Space-4. Date is used when you want to set an appointment recurring on the same day of a month, for example, on the 17th of every month, or every other month. On the other hand, Day of the week is used when you want to set an appointment recurring on the same week and the day of the week of a month, for example, on Wednesday of the second week of every month. After selecting the Recurring type, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Recurring interval. In this field, you set after how many months the appointment will recur. You can type a number between 1 and 999. If you press tab (Space-4-5) after setting Recurring interval, different fields will be shown depending on what you have selected in Recurring type. If you set the Recurring type to Date, an edit box will be shown, where you can type the day of the month when the appointment recurs. By default the date set in the Start date is shown. You can type a number between 1 and 31. If you press tab (Space-4-5) after setting this, the focus will move to Set recurrence end date and you can set the date in the same way. If you have set the Recurring type to Day of the week, you will be asked the Recurring week first. You can set this to First week, Second week, Third week, Fourth week or Last week. This is for setting the week of a month when the appointment recurs. Here if you press tab (Space-4-5), the focus will move to a combo box where you can select the day of the week when the appointment recurs. Since you can select only one of the 7 days, the one shown currently is the selected day. If you press tab (Space-4-5) here, the focus will move to the Set recurrence end date check box, and you can set it. 7.4.9.4 Yearly If you set the Recurrence to Yearly, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Recurring type combo box. You can select either date or day of the week, and you can move between them by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you set the Recurring type to Date, you can set the month and the day of the month when the appointment recurs. If you set it to Day of the week, you can set the month, the week, and the day of the week when the appointment recurs every year. If you press tab

(Space-4-5) after setting Recurring type, the focus will move to the Month for recurrence combo box. You can select one of the 12 months by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you press tab (Space-4-5) here, the focus will move to different fields, depending on what you have set the Recurring type to. If you have set the Recurring type to Date, the focus moves to Day for recurrence edit box. You can type a number between 1 and 31 here. If you press tab (Space-4-5) here, the focus will move to Set recurrence end date check box, using the same way. If you have set the Recurring type to Day of the week, you have to set recurring week and Day of week for recurrence. 7.4.10 Confirm If you press Enter on the Confirm button, the appointment will be saved, and the Add Schedule dialog box will be closed. 7.4.11 Cancel If you press Enter on the Cancel button, the appointment information you entered will be discarded, and you will be asked to enter information about another appointment. You can also cancel the entry by pressing Space-e (dots 1-5). 7.5 Search Schedule Search schedule is used for searching Appointments that you have entered before. When you start Schedule manager, the Search Schedule dialog box will be opened. You can also open this dialog box when you are in the Add Schedule dialog box, by pressing Enter-s

(dots 2-3-4). Or you can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-

3-4), and press Enter on Search Schedule. There are two methods to search for the schedule; searching with subject and searching with date. With the searching with subject, you can find schedule with the keywords in the subject field. With the searching with date, you can find schedules with the specified date. In order to toggle the searching mode, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu and move to Toggle Search Mode and press Enter. Or you can execute it by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) without calling up the menu. Every time you press Enter-f (dots 1-2-4), the Braille Sense U2 will say Search mode: Date or Search mode:

Subject, and the searching mode will be toggled. The latest searching mode will be saved when you will exit the Schedule manager. So if you execute the Schedule manager and search any schedule, the latest searching mode will be displayed. 7.5.1 Searching with date It searches the schedule with the date. If it is executed, the Braille Sense U2 will say Find date: (current date). If you just press Enter here, the appointments occurring today will be searched for. If you want to search for another date, you can type the date in the format mm/dd/yyyy, or use the move by date hotkeys. If you press Enter after entering the date, the appointments occurring on the day will be shown. If there is no appointment on that day, There is no schedule registered. will be announced. Otherwise, the first appointment on that day will be announced in the form of date, time, and subject. If the appointment lasts for more than one day, continuous schedule will be announced. If the appointment recurs, recurring schedule will be announced. If you registered more than one appointment for that day, you can move between the appointments on that day by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to move to the first appointment on a day, you can press Space-1-3, and if you want to move to the last appointment on the day, press Space-4-6. To move to the appointments on another day, press Space-2 or Space-5. Then, the previous/next appointment occurring within four months will be displayed. If you want to move to the first appointment registered in the schedule manager, press Space-1-2-3, and if you want to move to the last appointment registered in the schedule manager, press Space-4-5-

6. If you want to know more about a registered appointment, press Enter on the desired appointment item. Then, if you press Space-1 or Space-4, you can hear the start date, Start time, end date, End time, subject, and memo. 7.5.2 Searching with subject If it is executed, the Braille Sense U2 will say Search subject: Type in the keywords which you are searching. After you type in the keywords and press Enter, then all schedules with the keywords will be displayed. If you press Enter without typing in any word in Search subject: edit box, the Braille Sense U2 will display all schedules in your Braille Sense U2. In order to move to the next or previous schedule, press Space-4 or Space-1, respectively. Pressing Space-1-3 will move to the first item of the schedule list, and pressing Space-4-6 will move to the last item of the schedule list. For the recurring appointment and multiple day appointment, the Braille Sense U2 will show the schedules of the first day only, if you search the schedule with subject. For example, if you registered any appointment on January 1, 2007 and made it recur the first day of every month, the Braille Sense U2 will show this schedule on January 1, 2007 only when you search it with searching with subject. If you want to read the schedule in detail, you can press Enter at the schedule that you want to read in detail. After you read the schedule in detail and return to the schedule list, press Space-e (dots 1-5). And if you want to search with the other keywords, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Search subject edit box. 7.6 Modify Schedule You can modify an appointment that you have scheduled. First, move to the appointment you want to modify in the find result list. Press Enter-m

(dots 1-3-4). Or open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and press Enter on Modify Schedule, or press the shortcut key m (dots 1-3-4) in the menu. Or you can press its hot key, Enter-m

(dots 1-3-4) in the find result list. If the appointment is a recurring schedule, a prompt, displaying Recurrence appointment. Open type?

will appear. This is asking whether you want to modify the recurring schedule or the schedule for a specific day. If you select This occurrence, you will make changes for the appointment of the day, but the recurring appointments on other days will not be changed. If you select The series, you will make changes for all the recurring appointments of the schedule. If you select Cancel, Modify Schedule dialog box will not be opened and go back to the previous status. You can select these values by pressing Space or Backspace. Press Enter to open the Modify Schedule dialog box. This dialog box contains the same controls as in the Add Schedule dialog box. The only difference is that each field has the value entered previously. You can make changes in these fields in the same way as described in 6.4. If you change a recurring schedule, all the instances of the schedule will be changed according to the new values. Once you finish modifying the schedule, the information shown in the find result list will be updated accordingly. 7.7 Deleting a Schedule If you want to delete a schedule, move to the schedule in the find result list. Then, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu, and press Enter on Delete Schedule. Or you can press its hot key, Space-d

(dots 1-4-5) in the find result list. If the selected schedule is a recurring schedule, Recurring appointment. Delete type? will be displayed. This is asking whether you want to delete the recurring schedule, or just the appointment for that day. If you select This occurrence, only the appointment on that day will be deleted. If you select The series, the recurring schedule itself will be deleted. You cannot select and delete multiple schedules at once. You can delete only the appointment currently focused. 7.8 Printing a Schedule After finding an appointment using the Search Schedule command, you can print an appointment that you have found using the Print Schedule command. In the search results list, press Space-p (dots 1-2-

3-4), or call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press p (dots 1-2-3-4), or select Print Schedule. Then, press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 will ask you to specify the beginning date of the appointments to be printed. By default, the current date is displayed. You can specify a date that you want to search for. Refer to section 7.3 for information on how to enter dates. Now, press tab

(Space-4-5) to set the end date of the appointments that you want to be printed. Again, you can enter the dates. If you press Enter or tab

(Space-4-5), you will be asked to select the type of printer you will use. Printer is the default setting. Press Space-1 or Space-4 to move between Embosser and Printer. If you have selected the appropriate printer type, you can press Enter to start printing. Before you press Enter here, please make sure the Braille Sense U2 is connected to the printer correctly. After the printing is finished, the Braille Sense U2 will display the search results list. 7.9 Saving Appointments as a File You can save appointments stored in Schedule manager as a document file. In the search results list, press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), or call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then select Save Schedule As File, and press Enter, or press t (dots 2-3-

4-5) in the menu. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will ask you to specify the beginning and end date of the appointments to be saved just like it did in Print Schedule. After setting the beginning and end dates, press Enter or tab (Space-4-5), and the file save dialog box will be displayed to prompt you to enter the name and the format of the file to be saved. This dialog box is the same as the Save As dialog box in the Word processor. 7.10 Backing Up and Restoring Your Appointments 7.10.1 Backup Schedule If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the schedule manager will be lost. So, it is very important to make a backup file every time you change your schedule. To backup your schedule, go to Backup Schedule, open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2. Then, use the up and down arrows (Space-1 or Space-4), and find Backup Schedule. Then, press Enter. You can also press u

(dots 1-3-6) while you are in the menu to get to Backup Schedule. Or, you can press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) to activate this function without calling up the menu. If you already have a backup file, you will see the message Backup file already exists. Backup anyway? Yes. If you have made any changes to your schedule, press Enter here to create a new backup file. If you want to keep the previous backup file, press Space-4, locate No, and press Enter on it. If you make a backup file again in the schedule manager, you will have a new backup file with the extension DAT, and you will have another file with the extension BAK (which originated from the previous planner.dat.) 7.10.2 Restore Schedule If you want to restore your schedule after a cold reset, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and use the up and down scroll buttons to find Restore Schedule. Then, press Enter on Restore Schedule. Or, you can press r (dots 1-2-3-5) while you are in the menu to find Restore Schedule. You can also press Enter-r (dots 1-2-

3-5) to activate this function, without calling up the menu. If you activate the Restore Schedule function, and you already have an existing schedule, you will see the message Schedule file already exists. Which do you prefer? Append If you press Enter here, you will have a new schedule with the backup file appended. If you press Space-4 once and press Enter on Overwrite, you will have a schedule restored from the backup file. For example, let us assume that you have a schedule for days 1 - 3 in your schedule and you have a schedule for days 1 - 5 in your backup file. If you select Append, you will have a schedule with 8 days. In this case, three days of the schedule could possibly be redundant. If you select Overwrite, you will have days 1 5 from your schedule back-up, and days 1 3 of the original schedule will be deleted. If you don't want to Append or Overwrite, press Space-4 once more, locate Cancel, and press Enter on it. 7.10.3 Setting Backup Option To backup your schedule, you can backup your schedule manually by activating the Backup Schedule function. You can also backup the schedule automatically by activating the Set Backup Options function. To activate the Set Backup Options function, press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2 to open up the menu. Next press Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly to locate Set Backup Options. Then, press Enter on Set Backup Options. Or, while you are in the menu, you can press e (dots 1-5) to jump directly to Set Backup Options. You can also activate the Set Backup Options function without opening up the menu by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). If you activate this function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box has three controls, Backup mode radio button, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can switch between controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). To move between the radio buttons, you can press Space-1, Backspace, Space-4, or Space. The Backup mode has three radio buttons: Always backup changes when exiting, Manual backup, and Prompt backup changes when exiting. 1. If you select the Always backup changes when exiting, a new backup file will be created automatically if you have modified your schedule or added other information before exiting the schedule manager. 2. If you select the Manual backup, a new backup file will not be created, even though there have been changes made to your schedule. If you select this option, you can only make a new backup file by using the Backup Schedule menu. 3. If you select Prompt backup changes when exiting, you will see the message Backup changes? Yes if you have modified your schedule or added other information before exiting the schedule manager. If you press Enter on Yes, a new backup file will be created, and you will exit the schedule manager. If you press Space-4 once, and press Enter on No, you will exit the schedule manager, and a new backup file will not be created. You can change the backup mode if you press Enter after focusing on one of the three radio buttons. Or, press tab (Space-4-5), and press Enter on Confirm. The default backup mode is set to Prompt backup changes when exiting. 7.11 Setting Alarm Option You can open the Set Alarm Options dialog box by pressing Enter-o

(dots 1-3-5), or by pressing Enter on Set Alarm Options in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 in the Schedule manager. This dialog box has a list of alarm option fields, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. Alarm option fields include Alarm duration, Alarm repeat interval and Repeat. You can move between these fields by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can access the Confirm and Cancel buttons by pressing tab (Space-dots 4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-dots 1-2). 7.11.1 Alarm Duration With this option, you can change the duration of the alarm sound. You can set this option to a value that is between 5 and 600 seconds. The default value is set to 30 seconds. You should enter the number in computer Braille or regular grade 1 Braille, without a number sign. Press Enter to save the changes, and exit from the dialog box. If you want to set the Alarm repeat interval in the next field, you should press Space-

4 to move to it. 7.11.2 Alarm Repeat Interval Time When the alarm goes off, if you do not stop it by pressing Backspace-

Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will keep giving you a notice about the appointment after a specified time interval. The Alarm repeat interval option allows you to change this interval. You can set the value anywhere from 1 to 60 minutes, and the default value is set to 5 minutes. When you want to change the value, type in a number between 1 and 60 in computer Braille, or regular grade 1 Braille. You can type these numbers without a number sign. After entering the number, press Enter to save the changes, and exit from the dialog box. Or, if you press tab

(Space-4-5), the Braille Sense U2 will move to the Repeat edit box. 7.11.3 Repetition Times The alarm will make a sound as the amount of time that you changed the alarm duration and it then stops. After a specified time interval, you will hear again the alarm sound. Repeat is a field, which allows you to decide how many times the alarm will sound. You can set the value from 1 time to 10 times, and the default value is set to 3 times. To change the value, you type in a number between 1 and 10. After entering the number, you press tab (Space-4-

5), and press Enter on the Confirm button. Or, if you press Enter on the Repeat edit box, the changed options will be saved, and the dialog box will be closed. An alarm will repeat according to the number of times that you set for this option and will then stop automatically. The Braille display on the Braille Sense U2 will also display the date and subject for the alarm. 7.11.4 Confirm By pressing Enter on the Confirm button, you will save the changed settings, and close the Set Alarm Options dialog box. 7.11.5 Cancel If you press Enter on the Cancel button, or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), the previous global options will be restored and Set Alarm Options dialog box will be closed. 7.12 Synchronizing With Microsoft Outlook The Schedule manager can be synchronized with Microsoft Outlook on your personal computer to help you keep track of your appointments. For a more detailed explanation of how to connect the Braille Sense U2 to your computer, and for more information on how to use ActiveSync, refer to chapter 18. You should take the following steps in order to synchronize the Braille Sense U2 with Microsoft Outlook:

1) Download and install ActiveSync on to your personal computer. 2) Connect the Braille Sense U2 to your personal computer, using a USB cable. 3) If the Partnership dialog box opens on your PC after you connect the Braille Sense U2 to your PC, select Yes, and press the Next button on your PC. 4) Then, you will be asked for a device name. Type in BrailleSensePLUS (or whatever you would like to call the Braille Sense U2). 5) Press the Next button. Then, the program list dialog box will be displayed on your PC. Click on the check box that is located next to calendar. Note that the other check boxes should not be checked. Press the Next button. 6) Then, the synchronization between Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense U2 is complete. Please check the contacts in Microsoft Outlook and the Braille Sense U2. 7.13 Hot Keys for the Schedule Manager 1. Add Schedule Move between fields Move to the next field: Tab (Space-4-5) Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) 2. Hot keys for the Commands Search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 3. Search schedule Hot keys for the commands Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Toggle search mode: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 4. Move keys in the search result list 1) Move from a appointment to another in the schedule list:

Move to the previous a in the same day: up arrow (Space-1) Move to the next appointment in the same day: down arrow (Space-

4) Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3 Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6 2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments registered:

Move to the previous schedule: Space-2 Move to the next schedule: Space-5 Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or Space-1-2-3 Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or Space-4-5-6 3) Hot keys for the commands:

Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) 5. Cancel / Exit 1) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) It cancels the current job or setting like the esc key on a personal computer. 2) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Exit from the schedule manager. It can be used as cancel key for any function. 8. E-mail The e-mail program is used to communicate with others using the Internet. In order to use the e-mail program, you must have your own e-

mail account, which has been provided to you by your Internet service provider. The e-mail account that you have should support POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) and SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). You should check with your Internet service provider to make sure that your provider supports POP3 and SMTP. Before you use the e-mail program, you will need to setup the Braille Sense U2 to use the Internet, which is in the Utilities menu. In order to set the Internet, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on the Utilities program. 2) Move to Internet setup and Press Enter. Or press I(dots 2-4). 3) In Setup internet, you will find LAN, Wireless LAN, Modem, ADSL, and Bluetooth DUN. 4) You can move between the items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 5) Press Enter on the item that you want to connect. 6) Connect to Internet through setting proceed. When checking the inbox in the email program, the menus are different from the menus that are used when you are writing an email. You should read this chapter carefully, before you use the e-mail program on the Braille Sense U2. 8.1 Executing E-mail and E-mail service management To use the e-mail program, you have to add your e-mail service information. The following is a detailed explanation of how to execute e-

mail, how to add e-mail service information, how to check e-mail service information, how to modify e-mail service information and how to delete e-mail service information. 8.1.1 Executing e-mail In order to execute e-mail, follow these steps:

1) Move to the E-mail in program menu, pressing Space-1 and Space-4. 2) Press Enter on the E-mail or press E (dots 1-5). When you launch the e-mail program for the first time, the Braille Sense U2 will say You must create at least 1 mail account from the accounts manager in the Tools menu. Then, the inbox will be opened. The inbox is the main window of the E-mail program. When you run the e-

mail program for the first time, this inbox is empty and the Braille Sense U2 displays no items. Press Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). It shows mailbox lists of e-mail. Mailbox lists 1) Inbox: It is stored received mail. 2) Sent: It is stored sent mail, after sending mail successfully. 3) Outbox: It is stored outbox, when user saves mail in Outbox or sending mail fails. By pressing Space-1 and Space-4, you can move between mailbox lists. If there are any e-mail messages that the Braille Sense U2 has already received, Opening inbox... will be announced in voice and on the LCD display; however, xx% processed will be displayed on the Braille display. Once progress has reached100%, the inbox will be opened and it will show the received e-mail in the list. Move to Sent or Outbox, and press Enter. If there are any e-mail messages in Sent or Outbox, it shows e-mil lists like the inbox. 8.1.2 Management e-mail service information In Accounts manager, you can manage e-mail service information. To execute e-mail service, follow these steps:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in Inbox mail list. 2) Pressing Space-4, move to Tools. Press Enter on Tools. Or press T (dots 2-3-4-5). 3) It shows Accounts manager. 4) Press Enter. 5) It shows Account name: no items. Without calling up menu, you can also move to this menu by pressing Enter-m (dots 1-3-4). The Accounts manager contains the following 6 items. 1. Service list 2. Information 3. Add 4. Modify 5. Delete 6. Close You can move among these items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). You can execute each item by pressing enter on the desired item that is displayed. If you want to exit from the Accounts manager, move to the Close button, and then press enter. Or, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-

z (dots 1-3-5-6). The following is a detailed explanation of each item. 8.1.2.1 Add e-mail service To receive e-mail, you have to add e-mail service preferentially. In order to add e-mail service, follow these steps:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Move to Tools, pressing Space-4. 3) Press Enter on the Tools or press T (dots 2-3-4-5). 4) It shows Accounts manager. Press Enter. 5) It shows Account name: no items. Without calling up the menu, you can move to this menu by pressing Enter-M (dots 1-3-4). 6) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Add. 7) Press Enter on the Add or press A (dot 1). 8) Then, the dialog box will be opened and Account name: will be appeared. Type in the Account name edit box with the Braille keys. (Ex: Braille Sense U2) 9) Press Space-4, move to Display name. Type in the Display name edit box with Braille keys. This name will be shown as senders name to a receiver. 10) Press Space-4, move to Logon username. Type in the Logon username computer edit box using computer Braille. (Ex: Sense or sense@hims-inc.com) 11) Press Space-4, move to Password. Type in the password computer edit box using computer Braille. 12) Press Space-4, move to E-mail address. Type in the E-mail address computer edit box using computer Braille. (Ex: Sense or sense@hims-inc.com) 13) Press Space-4, move to Incoming POP3 server. Type in the Incoming POP3 server computer edit box using computer Braille.

(Ex: mail.hims-inc.com). Check with your Internet service provider or network administrator to find out what you should use as the Incoming POP3 server name. 14) Press Space-4, move to Outgoing SMTP server. Type in the Outgoing SMTP server computer edit box using computer Braille. Check with your Internet service provider or network administrator to find out what you should use as the Outgoing SMTP server name. 15) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm button. 16) Press Enter on the Confirm button. 17) Then, the Braille Sense U2 will exit to Account name list and show the added account name (Ex: Account name: Braille Sense U2 1/1). 18) When you finish adding the services, press Space-z (dots 1-3-

5-6) to exit to the inbox. In order to move from a setting item (Ex: ID, password) to the previous setting item, press Space-1. And, in order to move to the Confirm button or the Cancel button, press Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab

(Space-1-2). If you made a typo in an item such as account name, ID, or password, you can correct the type as follows;

1) In order to delete the letter where the cursor is located, press 2) In order to delete the letter in front of the cursor position, press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). Backspace. 3) In order to delete the current line, press Backspace-c (dots 1-4). Then, the Braille Sense U2 will ask Delete line: Yes. If you press enter, the selected line will be deleted. If you do not want to delete the current line, press Space to change from Yes to No and press enter. When you need to type using computer Braille to type in your ID, password, and address, please use the following computer Braille:

1. Dot (.): dots 4-6 2. At sign (@): Press Space-u and release it, then press dot 4. 3. Under bar (_): dots 4-5-6 4. Dash (-): dots 3-6 8.1.2.1.1 Signature and Advanced While adding your account, you can register signature and set advanced options in Advanced menu. 1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4, move to Tools. 3) Press Enter on the Tools or press T (dots 2-3-4-5). 4) It shows Accounts manager in LCD and Braille display. 5) Press Enter on the Accounts manager. 6) It shows Account name. Without calling up menu, by pressing Enter-M (dots 1-3-4) you can move to this menu. 7) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Add. 8) Press Enter on the Add or press A (dot 1). 9) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Advanced. 10) Press Enter on the Advanced. 11) It shows Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL). The default value of this check box is unselect. If the POP3 server uses the SSL, select the check box by pressing Space. 12) Press Space-4 to move to POP3 port number: 110 by default. Here you can type in another POP3 port number in the computer edit box. 13) Press Space-4 to move to SMTP encryption type. The setting values are None, SSL and TLS. If the type of Outgoing SMTP server uses the SSL or TLS, change the value by pressing Space. 14) Press Space-4 to move to SMTP port number: 25. This is also a computer edit box. Here you can type in another SMTP port number. 15) Press Space-4 to move to SMTP username. Here, you can add another SMTP username if your Internet service provider requires you to use a different SMTP username. You should use ASCII to type this in. 16) Press Space-4 to move to SMTP password. You can type in your password that corresponds to the above ID. It should be typed in using ASCII. 17) Press Space-4 to move to Use as default send-from account If you want to use the above new username and password that were set in steps 7 and 8, select the check box by pressing Space. 18) Press Space-4 to move to Keep mail copies in server. When you download e-mail from your e-mail server, you can set the Braille Sense U2 to keep e-mail messages on the server or not. Press Space to change Yes to No, and press enter if you do not want a copy of the email to remain on the e-mail server. 19) Press Space-4 to move to Save mail copies in sent mailbox. When you send e-mail, you can set the Braille Sense U2 to keep e-mail message in sent mailbox or not. Press Space to change Yes to No, and press Enter. 20) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Use signature. The default value is No. If you want to attach your signature in mail, press Space to change Yes to No. 21) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Signature. 22) Press Enter on the Signature. 23) It will be appeared Signature: multi edit box. You can type your signature in here that you want to use. 24) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm. 25) Press Enter on the Confirm. 26) This will save the signature, and you will be returned to the Signature button. You can cancel by pressing enter on Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-5) after typing-in a signature. 27) Press tab (Space-4-5), and press enter on Confirm. If you execute like the above, you can use signature when you send an email. And also you can use different server when you send or receive emails. 8.1.2.2 Checking added service list The following is the method to check the added service information:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 move to Tools. 3) Press Enter on the Tools or press T (dots 2-3-4-5) 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Enter on the Accounts manager. 6) Press Space-4 or Space-1 to move to the desired service in the service list. 7) If the desired service is displayed, press Enter. Or Tab (Space-

4-5) to move to the Information, and then press enter. 8) The Information dialog box will be opened, and Account name:

(Added account name) will be displayed (Ex: account name:

Braille Sense U2). 9) Press Space-4 or tab (Space-4-5) and check the added information for each item. Pressing enter on the Close will return you to the service list. You can check all added information of e-mail service. The move keys are listed below to move among the items in the dialog box:

Move to the previous item: Space-1 Move to the next item: Space-4 Move to the first item: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3 Move to the last item: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6 Move to the previous control: Space-1-2 Move to the next control: Space-4-5 If the information displayed exceeds 32 Braille cells, the remaining parts can be checked by pressing the down scroll button. 8.1.2.3 Modifying added service list The following is the method to modify the added service information:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 move to Tools. 3) Press Enter on the Tools or press T (dots 2-3-4-5) 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Enter on the Accounts manager. 6) Press Space-4 or Space-1 to move to the desired service in the service list. 7) When the desired service is displayed, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Modify, and then press Enter. Or, just press m

(dots 1-3-4). 8) It shows Account name. In this case, it is a modification, so the Braille Sense U2 will show you the current information. For example, Account name: Braille Sense U2. 9) The Modify dialog box will be opened, and Account name:

(Added account name) will be displayed (Ex: Account name:

Braille Sense U2). You can type in here that you want to modify. 10) Press Space-4, move to Display name. You can type in here 11) Press Space-4, move to Logon username. You can type in that you want to modify. here that you want to modify. 12) Press Space-4, move to Password. Using computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify. 13) Press Space-4, move to E-mail address. Using computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify. 14) Press Space-4, move to Incoming POP3 server. Using computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify. 15) Press Space-4, move to Outgoing SMTP server. Using computer Braille, you can type in here that you want to modify. 16) Press Tab (Space4-5), move to Advanced and press Enter. Also you can modify like the above. 17) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm and press Enter. 18) When the modification is complete, it will return to the service list. You can move among the items (account name, logon username, password) by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can move to the Confirm button or the Cancel button by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). On all of the items, the values that were typed in already will be displayed. If you type in new information, the new information will replace the old information. If you want to modify part of an item, press the cursor routing key at the desired position and type in the new information. If you made a typo in an item (account name, logon username, password), you can modify it using the following process:

1. You can delete the current letter by pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5). 2. Press Backspace in order to delete the previous letter. 3. In order to delete the current line, press BackSpace-1-4. Then, Delete line: yes will be displayed. Press enter in order to delete the line. Otherwise, press Space to change from Yes to No, and then press enter. 8.1.2.4 Deleting added service list The following is the method to delete the added service information:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 move to Tools. 3) Press Enter on the Tools or press T (dots 2-3-4-5). 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Enter on the Accounts manager. 6) Press Space-4 or Space-1 to move to the desired service in the service list. 7) When the desired service is displayed, press Space-d (dots 1-4-

5) or D (dots 1-4-5). Or, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Delete, and then press Enter. 8) Then, Are you sure you want to delete the (added account name) account? Yes will be displayed. 9) Press enter in order to delete it. 10) The Braille Sense U2 will delete it, show Successfully deleted, and return to the service list. If you want to cancel the deletion, press Space when Are you sure you want to delete the (Added account name) account? Yes is displayed in order to change Yes to No, and then press enter. Or, just press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.2 Receiving and Sending E-mail 8.2.1 Receiving E-mail The Braille Sense U2 is capable of receiving plain text email and html email messages. You can receive e-mail messages by doing the following. 1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4, move to Message. 3) Press Enter on the Message and press Enter. Or press M 4) It shows Reply. 5) Press Space-4, move to Check for New Mail. 6) Press Enter on the Check for New Mail. Or press N (dots 1-3-

(dots 1-3-4). 4-5). 7) Then, you will find Account name list. You can move to this dialog box directly by pressing Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5). This dialog box consists of service list, a Confirm, and a Cancel. 8) When Account name: (Added account name x/x) is displayed, press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the desired service. 9) Press enter when the desired service is displayed, or press Tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm, and press enter. 10) Then the Braille Sense U2 will display There are xx messages to receive. Now receiving x/y mail received; Successfully received x out of y message will be displayed. When the e-mail messages are downloaded from the server, the e-mail list is displayed in the inbox (Ex: Subject: (subject of the email received) xx/xx). If the e-mail size is more than the Braille Sense U2 can handle, it announces This message is too large to download. Skipping. and then the Braille Sense U2 will begin downloading the next e-mail message. If you want to cancel the download, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Cancel, and press enter, or you can press Space-e (dots 1-5). 8.2.2 Reading the Received E-mail Messages If you downloaded e-mail from your server, the e-mail messages will be listed in the inbox. Each e-mail in the inbox has the following items. 1. Subject 2. Date 3. From (Sender) 4. CC 5. Message 6. Attach (this will be displayed only for an e-mail that has an attac hed file) You can move from one item to the next item or previous item by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-tab (Space-1-2), respectively. 8.2.2.1 Subject Control Subject shows the title of the e-mail; Subject: (subject of the e-mail) xx/yy. After the subject of the email, you will find xx/yy, which shows the number (xx) of the current e-mail out of the total number (yy) of received e-mail messages. For example, 11/21 means that the e-mail is the 11th e-mail out of a total of 21 e-mail messages. If there is an attached file to the e-mail, a Subject: (subject of the e-mail) xx/yy will be displayed. The symbol a (dot 1) means that the e-mail has an attached file. It is displayed as a (dot 1) on the Braille display, and it is announced as 1 attachment, which indicates the number of the attached files in voice. The Braille Sense U2 also indicates which e-mail messages have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-mail messages that have not yet been read have the - sign placed in front of the subject. For example, lets suppose there is an email with an attachment that has been unread. It would appear as -a Subject: (subject of the e-

mail) xx/yy. You can move from one e-mail message to the next e-mail message when this subject is displayed. You can move by using the following keys;

Move to the next e-mail: Space-4 Move to the previous e-mail: Space-1 Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Space-1-2-3 or Space-1-3 Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Space-4-5-6 or Space-4-6 8.2.2.2 Date Control Date shows the date and time when the e-mail was received; Date:

(date), (time) xx/yy. The date is displayed in the following order: day, month, date, and year. The time is displayed in the following order: hour, minute, and second with the 24 hour system. And, xx/yy shows the current number of the email out of the total number of e-mail messages received. You can also move from one e-mail message to the next e-

mail message when the date is displayed. You can move by using the following keys;

Move to the next e-mail: Space-4 Move to the previous e-mail: Space-1 Move to the first e-mail in the Inbox: Space-1-2-3 or Space-1-3 Move to the last e-mail in the Inbox: Space-4-5-6 or Space-4-6 The Braille Sense U2 also indicates which e-mail messages have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-mail messages that have not yet been read will have the - sign placed in front of the date. For example, lets suppose there is an email that has been unread. It would appear as - Date: (date), (time) xx/yy. 8.2.2.3 Sender Control From shows the sender information; From: (senders e-mail address) xx/yy. The Braille Sense U2 also indicates which e-mail messages have been read, and which e-mail messages have been unread. E-mail messages that have not yet been read will have the - sign placed in front of the sender. For example, lets suppose there is an email that has been unread. It would appear as - From: (senders e-mail address) xx/yy You can save the e-mail id of the sender using the following sequence:

1) Press Enter-i (dots 2-4) when From: (senders e-mail address) xx/yy is displayed. 2) Then, the add address dialog box will be opened, and Name:

(senders user name or e-mail address) will be displayed. 3) Type in the senders name with your Braille keyboard, or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm, and press enter. When you type in the name, you can type it in directly without pressing the cursor key to designate the input position on the Braille cell, if you want to retype the name. But, if you designate a specified position by pressing a corresponding cursor key, you can modify the displayed name. If the address that was typed in is saved, and the dialog box is closed, the Braille Sense U2 will show you the From item again. By saving the e-mail ID using the above method, the name and its e-mail id will be saved in the Braille Sense U2. The saved e-mail ID can be used to send your message. If you want to cancel saving the e-mail ID, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Cancel button, and press enter, or just press Space-e

(dots 1-5). 8.2.2.4 CC Control CC shows the carbon copy recipient. This control will be shown if the email has a "CC". You can save the e-mail id of the carbon copy recipient using the following sequence:

1) Press Enter-i (dots 2-4) when CC: (carbon copy recipients e-

mail address) xx/yy is displayed. 2) Then, the add address dialog box will be opened, and Name:

(senders user name or e-mail address) will be displayed. 3) Type in the carbon copy recipients name with your keyboard, or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm and press enter. When you type in the name, you can type it in Name edit box directly. If the address that was typed in is saved, and the dialog box is closed, the Braille Sense U2 will show you the CC item again. 8.2.2.5 Message Control Message shows the message body of the selected e-mail. You can move to a message by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Or, you can read a message by pressing enter when Subject, Date, or From is displayed. In case of pressing enter on Subject, Date, From controls, you will automatically hear the whole message body, if you want to stop this reading at this time, just press Backspace-enter. If you want to move the Subject while reading the message, press Space-e (dots 1-5). When you read the message, all of the control keys are the same as in the word processor. 8.2.2.6 Attachment Control You can find and download the attached file at Attach. It shows only for the e-mail that has an attached file. Attach is displayed in the form of Attach: (attached file name) xx/yy. The yy is the total number of the attached files to the e-mail and xx is the xxth attached file. The following is the procedure to download attachments;

1) Move to the desired file name in Attach by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 2) Press Space on the file name that you want to download. Then

* will be displayed in front of the file name. 3) Press enter to download that file. Then Attachments will be saved to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to change this location? No will be displayed. Press enter in here. By doing so, the selected file will be saved in the download folder in flashdisk. If you have more than one attachment that you want to download, you can press Enter-a (dot 1). If you want to download only the attached file that is displayed on the Braille display, just press enter without pressing Space. If you want to change the download path, 1) When you download an attached file, if you press enter while Attachments will be saved to /flashdisk/download. Do you want to change this location? Yes is displayed. 2) Press Enter. 3) Then, no items will be displayed when the /flashdisk/download folder is empty. But, if the folder has a lower level folder, (folder name) 1/yy will be displayed. When Save attachment path is executed, the Braille Sense U2 will only show the folder. So, if there is no folder in the download folder, it will show no items. Move to the desired folder by pressing move keys below:

Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Move to the previous item: Space-1 Move to the next item: Space-4 4) When you encounter the desired folder, press Space to select it, and then press enter. If a folder is selected, * will be displayed in front of the selected folder. In this case, if you select a folder, and press enter, the attached file will be downloaded into the selected folder and return to the inbox. 8.2.2.7 Reading HTML type of e-mail If you received the html type of e-mail, follow these below steps:

1) You can open it with the Web browser regardless of anywhere of received e-mail by pressing Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5). 2) Or after calling menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), move to Message and then press enter. You can see menu items of Message. Arrow down to the Open Message In Web Browser and press enter then the Web browser program is launched and you can see html message on the web browser. If you have links on the html type of e-mail, you can visit linked site by pressing enter on it only when your Braille Sense U2 is already connected to internet. 8.2.3 Writing e-mail After executing E-mail program, the following is the procedure to write e-mail. 1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) It shows File menu. 3) Press Enter on the File menu. 4) It shows Write New Message. 5) Press Enter on the Write New Message. 6) Then To: will be displayed on the Braille display. Pressing Enter-

w (dots 2-4-5-6) will take you directly to this stage. 7) Press shift-tab (Space-1-2) to move to Account combo box. Move to account that you want by using Space-1 or Space-4. Press tab (spac-4-5) to move to To:. 8) Type in the e-mail address of the recipient when To: is displayed. Please type in the e-mail address using computer Braille (Ex:

Sense or sense@hims-inc.com). 9) Next, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to CC:. 10) Type in the e-mail address of the other recipient using computer Braille. If you do not need to carbon copy a recipient, you can skip to the next step. 11) Press tab (Space-4-) to move to BCC:. 12) Type in the e-mail address of another recipient using computer Braille. This e-mail address will not be seen by the recipient or the carbon copy recipient. If there is no hidden recipient, you can skip to next step. 13) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Subject:. 14) Type in the subject of the e-mail message at Subject: You can input the subject in ASCII, Grade 1, or Grade 2. You can change the mode by pressing Space-g (dots 1-2-4-5). 15) When you finish typing in the subject, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Message body:

16) You can write an e-mail message. The input method and the editing method are the same as the input and editing method used in the word processor. You can also write the message in ASCII, Grade 1, or Grade 2. 17) When you finish writing the e-mail message, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) to call up the E-mail menu. Then the File menu will be displayed again. 18) Press enter. 19) Press Space-4 to move to Send. 20) Press enter when Send is displayed. You can send mail pressing Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), without calling up the menu. 21) Then, Sending will be displayed, and the e-mail will be sent to the recipients. When the Braille Sense U2 finishes sending e-

mail, Successfully sent new message. will be displayed. If it fails to send the e-mail, the Braille Sense U2 will display Unable to sent message. If this occurs, the e-mail will be saved in the Outbox. If the Braille Sense U2 completed or failed to send the e-mail, it will return to the Inbox. While you execute the above steps, if you want to cancel, press Space-

e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Then it will return to the Inbox. 8.2.3.1 Attaching file While you are writing e-mail, you can attach file. The following is the procedure to attach a file. 1) While you are writing e-mail, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. Then, it shows File menu. 2) Press Enter on the File menu. 3) It shows Attach File. 4) Press Enter on the Attach File. It will be opened File list. You can attach file pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4), without calling up the menu. 5) The default folder for the file list is the upload folder, which is a sub folder of flashdisk. If there are no folders in the upload folder of the Braille Sense U2 due to any reason, no items will be displayed. In this case, you have to make a folder in the File manager, or move to the desired folder with the move keys that are explained below. The move keys in the file list are as follows;

Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Move to previous item: Space-1 Move to next item: Space-4 Move to the beginning of the list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the end of the list: Space-4-5-6 6) Move to the desired file, and press enter. If you want to attach more than one file, move to the desired file, and press Space repeatedly. Then * will be displayed in front of the file names. Press enter if you want to attach the selected files. 7) If the selected files are attached, the Braille Sense U2 will announce xx attached, and then move to the stage before calling the menu. xx is the number of the attached files. If there are any files attached to an e-mail, the Attach item will be displayed after the Message body item like the following: Attach:

(attached file name) xx/yy (file size). yy is the total number of attached files, and xx means the xxth file out of yy files. You can move and check the attached files by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If there is an undesired file in the attached file list, you can delete it from the list by pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5). If you press Space-d (dots 1-4-5), Delete (file name)file? Yes will be displayed. If you press enter, this file will be deleted from the attached file list. If you press Space to switch from Yes to No, and then press enter, your selection will be cancelled, and the file will remain on the attached file list. 8.2.3.2 Sending E-Mail to Multiple Recipients You can type in more than one recipient, carbon copy recipient, or hidden recipient. If you type in more than one e-mail address in those items, the same e-mail will be sent to all of them at the same time. When you input more than one recipient, you should insert a ; or , between the e-mail addresses using the following Braille dots. Semi-colon (;): Dots 5-6 Comma (,): Dot 6 For example, sense@hims-inc.com;hims@hims-inc.com. 8.2.3.3 Searching the Address List You can type in the recipient at To, CC, and BCC from the address list without typing in the e-mail address directly. The following are the steps to search for e-mail addresses:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu at To, CC, or BCC. Then, File will be displayed. 2) Press Enter on the File menu. 3) Press Space-4 to move to Lookup Address. 4) Press Enter on Lookup Address. Then Search for address will be displayed. Pressing Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) will take you to this step directly. 5) Type in the last name of the desired recipient at Search for address, and then press enter. Or, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm, and then press enter. 6) Then, xx addresses are found will be displayed, and the first item of the found addresses is also displayed. Here, xx is the number of the found addresses that have the same name in the address list (Ex: HIMS hims@hims-inc.com 1/xx). 7) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the desired address, and press enter when the desired address is displayed. You can select more than one address by pressing Space. When you have chosen the addresses you want, press enter. 8) Then, the selected addresses are inserted in To, CC or BCC. If you press enter without typing in the desired name, all of the addresses in your address list will be displayed. If there is no matching address that you want to find, then No match. will be announced and Search for address will be displayed again. 8.2.3.4 Saving E-Mail to the Outbox There are two kinds of e-mail messages in the Outbox. 1. The e-mail that the user saved in Outbox. 2. The e-mail that was not sent due to a network error or another reason. The Menu structure and move of Save Mail In Outbox is like below. 1. File name ECB 2. Confirm Button 3. Cancel Button 4. Storage folder List You can move between the menu controls by using Shift-Tab (Space-1-

2) or Tab (Space-4-5). The following describes how to save email in outbox:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 after you write the e-mail message. Then, the File menu will displayed. 2) Press enter. 3) Press Space-4 to move to Save Mail In Outbox. 4) Press Enter. 5) Then, the dialog box for save will be opened. 6) File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt will be displayed. You can jump to this stage by pressing Space-s (dots 2-3-4). 7) Press Enter on File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt, or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button. 8) Then, the message will be saved as (subject of writing e-mail).txt. 9) If you want to name the e-mail message, type in a file name. The detailed procedure is the same as Save As in the Word processor. You can also change the path for saving it. 10) After the Braille Sense U2 saves the e-mail message, it will return to the status it was at before calling the menu. By following the explanation above, the e-mail message will be saved as

(subject of writing e-mail).txt in the flashdisk/email/storagebox. If you do not input the subject in the writing e-mail, it will be displayed as noname on the File name. If you want to save the file in another folder, and not in flashdisk/email/storagebox, you will not find the e-mail message when you execute Send Mail From Outbox. While you are typing in a message, press Space-e (dots 1-5) if you want to cancel writing the e-mail. 1) The Braille Sense U2 will display Current writing mail. Save?

Yes. 2) If you want to return to the inbox without saving the email, press Space to change Yes to No, and then press Enter. If you press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) instead of Space-e (dots 1-5) while you are writing an e-mail message, the Braille Sense U2 will return to the inbox without asking whether it will save the message or not. 8.2.3.5 Saving E-Mail as New Name in the Outbox If you save e-mail in Outbox, you can save it under a different file name. This Save Draft function will save the email as new name, and place it in the outbox. The Menu structure and move of Save Mail In Outbox is like below. 1. File name ECB 2. Confirm Button 3. Cancel Button 4. Storage folder List You can move between the menu controls by using Shift-Tab (Space-1-

2) or Tab (Space-4-5). The following describes how to save e-mail as new name in the Outbox:

1) Press Space-M (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) It shows File menu. 3) Press Enter on the File menu. 4) Press Space-4 move to Save Draft. 5) Press Enter. Or Without calling the menu, Space-s (dots 2-3-4). 6) The dialog box for save will be opened. 7) It will be displayed File name: (subject of writing e-mail).txt. 8) If you want to change file name, type in a file name. 9) Press Enter. Or press Tab (Space-4-5) move to Confirm and press Enter. If you want to cancel, press Tab on the Confirm, move to Cancel. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) regardless of location. If you want to change the path for saving it, press Tab (Space-4-5) on the Cancel move to Storage folder. The default folder is in the flashdisk/email/outbox. 1. If you want to change folder in Flashdisk: By pressing Space, select folder that you want to save. And press Enter. 2. If you want to change folder in external memory: Press Backspace, move to Disk list. Move to mailbox that you want to save and press Space for selecting folder. If you want to save the file in another folder, and not in flashdisk/email/outbox, you will not find the e-mail message when you execute Send Mail From Outbox. If you execute the Save Draft without typing message in Message body, it will hear Message body is empty. And it will return to Message body control. While you are typing in message body if you press Space-z (dots 1-3-

5-6) to cancel writing an e-mail, the Braille Sense U2 will display Currently writing mail. Save? Yes. Pressing Enter, it will save the e-

mail. And it will exit the E-mail program. If you change No to Yes by pressing Space and press Enter, it will exit the E-mail program without saving the e-mail. 8.2.3.6 Sending E-Mail in Outbox You can send saved e-mail in outbox when you saved mail to Outbox or you didnt send mail due to a network error or another reason. The following describes how to send e-mail In Outbox. 1) Execute E-mail program. 2) It shows mail list in Inbox. 3) Press Shift-Tab (Space-1-2), move to Mailbox. 4) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Outbox. 5) Press Enter. 6) It shows mail list in Outbox. 7) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the mail that you want to send. When you want to send all the emails in the list: Press Enter-a

(dot 1). When you want to send an email by selection an item by item in the list: Press Space. When you want to send an email by selection continuously in the list: Press Enter-b (dots 1-2). It shows Start selection. Move to the mail that you want to send. For example, when you send 5 mail in 10 mail lists, press Enter-b

(dots 1-2) from the first list of mail. And press Space-4, move to the 5th mail. 8) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 9) Press Enter on the File menu. 10) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Send menu. 11) Press Enter on the Send menu. 12) It will execute sending mail. Without calling the menu, press Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) on the mail that you want to send of mail lists of the Outbox. After sending the mail of the Outbox, there is no the mail in Outbox. The mail will move to Sent item. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will return to inbox. 8.2.3.7 Setting Default E-mail account You can set default e-mail account when you added two or more e-mail accounts in Braille Sense U2. The following describes how to set default e-mail account. 1) Execute E-mail program. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mailboxes except Outbox. 3) Press Space-4, move to Tools. 4) Press Enter on the Tools menu or press T (dots 2-3-4-5). 5) It shows the Accounts manager. 6) Press Enter on the Accounts manager. 7) It shows Account name lists. 8) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the e-mail account that you want to set the default account. 9) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Modify. 10) Press Enter on the Modify or press m (dots 1-3-4). 11) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Advanced. 12) Press Enter on the Advanced. 13) It shows the Use secure POP3 (POP-SSL). 14) Press Space-4, move to Use as default send-from account SMTP. 15) By pressing Space, you can change SCHB to UCHB. 16) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm and press Enter. 17) It will return to the Advanced. 18) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm and press Enter. 19) It will move to account name list With Successfully modified account message. It shows default on the LCD and Braille display next to the default account. 8.3 Major features of E-mail 8.3.1 Deleting E-mail You can delete e-mail. You can delete an e-mail message that you have selected, or, more than one e-mail by selecting each of them individually. 8.3.1.1 Deleting an e-mail You can delete an e-mail in the mailbox by following the steps below;

1) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the Subject of the e-

mail that you want to delete. 2) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). 3) Then it shows Delete (subject of the selected e-mail) mail? Yes. 4) Press Enter if you want to delete the e-mail. If you want to cancel it, press Space to change Yes to No on the Delete (subject to the selected e-mail) mail?. And Press Enter. By pressing Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), you can cancel deleting e-mail. 8.3.1.2 Deleting Multiple E-mail Messages If you want to delete two or more e-mail, delete the e-mail messages using the following steps:

1) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the e-mail Subject that you want to delete. You can select it in Date control, too. 2) Press Space on the e-mail that you want to delete. 3) It shows * in front of the selected e-mail subject on Braille display. And it shows selected Subject: (subject to the selected e-mail) xx/yy on the LCD. 4) Move to the other e-mail that you want to delete by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. Then, press Space. 5) Once you finish selecting all of the e-mail you want to delete, press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). 6) It shows Delete xx message? Yes. Xx is the total number of deleting e-mail. 7) Press Enter. If you want to cancel this function, press Space to change No on the Delete xx message? Yes. Press Enter. Or you can cancel it by pressing Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.3.1.3 Deleting E-Mail by Making a Selection If you want to delete multiple e-mail by designating a selection, you can delete them as follows:

1) Press Enter-a (dot 1) on the Subject or Date control. 2) Then, all of the e-mail will be selected. 3) It shows * in front of all of the e-mail on the Braille display. 4) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). 5) It shows the Delete xx message? Yes. Xx is the total number of deleting e-mail. 6) Press Enter. 7) All of the selected e-mail will be deleted. If you want to delete the successive e-mail, you can delete them using the following steps:

1) Press Enter-b (dots 1-2) on the first e-mail where you want to start the selection. 2) Press Space-4 to move to the last e-mail that you want to delete. 3) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). 4) It will Delete xx message? Yes. Xx is the total number of deleting e-mail. 5) Press Enter. You can Press Enter-b (dots 1-2) which will make the selection. In front of the e-mail subjects selected, * will be attached. If you have pressed Enter-a (dot 1) or Enter-b (dots 1-2), but you want to cancel it, press Space to change No on the Delete xx message? Yes. And press Enter. Or you can cancel it by pressing Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.3.2 Reply And Reply All to a Received E-Mail. When you reply to an email that was received, you can edit or add a message to the original message or add another recipient. For example, you can reply to an e-mail message that you previously received in your inbox. Lets demonstrate with an example. Suppose you received an email that had the following information:

Senders e-mail address: hims@hims-inc.com Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS You could reply to this e-mail by completing the following steps:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu when you are in Subject, Date, or Message of the Inbox. 2) It shows the File. 3) Press Space-4 to move to the Message. 4) Press Enter. 5) It shows Reply. 6) Press Enter on the Reply. 7) It shows Message body. 8) You can find the original message body of the received email; --

Original Message -- followed by the received email message. You can get to this stage by pressing Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5). 9) Press Shift-Tab (Space-1-2) to move to Subject, BCC, CC, and To. 10) At Subject, it shows Subject: Re: Welcome to HIMS. And, at To, it shows To: hims@hims-inc.com . 11) Press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to Message body. 12) Type in the Message body that you want to add or edit. 13) Press Enter-s (Dots 2-3-4) to send the e-mail. When you reply the e-mail, after you press Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), you can add recipient or attach file as well as write an e-mail. If you want to add another e-mail recipient, press the cursor routing key that is located at the position where you want to add the recipient, and type in the new e-mail address. Use computer Braille when typing in this information. You can also save the e-mail that you are writing as a reply. It will be saved in the Outbox. You can reply to an email by using Reply To All, as well as Reply. Pressing Reply will send en e-mail to only the original sender. Pressing Reply To All will send an email back to the original sender as well as all other recipients to the original email. However, Reply To All will not send an email to you, even though you were a recipient of the original email. To activate the Reply To All function, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) It shows the File. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Message. 4) Press Enter on the Message. 5) It shows the Reply. 6) Press Space-4, move to Reply To All. 7) Press Enter on the Reply To All. You can activate the Reply To All function without calling up the menu by pressing Backspace-r

(dots 1-2-3-5). 8) It shows To: (all email addresses of the original sender and the original recipients) 9) Then, you can use the same steps to send a message as you would when using the Reply function. 8.3.3 Forwarding a Received E-Mail Message Forwarding means that you will send an e-mail that you received to another person. You can also add or edit the message and subject. You can also attach a file to this e-mail. Lets explain how to use Forward with an example. Lets suppose there is an e-mail message that you received as follows:

Senders e-mail address: hims@hims-inc.com Subject of the e-mail: Welcome to HIMS You can forward this e-mail to the others using the following method:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu in the Subject, Date, or Message. 2) It shows the File. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Message. 4) Press Enter on the Message. 5) It shows the Reply. 6) Press Space-4, move to Forward. 7) Press Enter on the Forward. 8) It shows To:. You can move to this stage to this stage by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). Input the e-mail address of the new recipient using computer Braille. 9) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to CC, BCC, and Subject. 10) At Subject, It shows Subject: Fw: Welcome to HIMS. 11) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Message body. 12) You can find the original e-mail message with the following message; ----- Forwarded Message -----. 13) Type in the Message body that you want to add or edit. 14) Press Enter-s (Dots 2-3-4) to send the e-mail. When you forward an e-mail, the method is the same as write an e-mail. So, you can type in additional recipients and attach files to the email that you are forwarding. You can also save the e-mail that you are writing in the Outbox. 8.3.4 Saving a Received E-mail as Document. You may need to save an e-mail as a document when you are reading an e-mail in the Inbox. You can do this by completing the following steps:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) It shows the File. 3) Press Enter on the File. 4) Press Space-4, move to Save As Text. 5) Press Enter on the Save As Text. 6) It will open the save as dialog box. 7) And it shows File name: (subject of e-mail under reading).txt. Without calling up the menu, you can move to this stage directly by pressing Space-s (dots 2-3-4). 8) Press Enter on the File name: (subject of e-mail under reading).txt. Or press tab (Space-4-5), move to the Confirm, and press Enter. You can rename the file. The method is the same as Save as in Word processor. 9) You will return to where you call the menu automatically if the e-

mail is saved. The text file will be saved in flashdisk/My Documents with the file name

(subject of e-mail under reading).txt. You cannot change the file format. You can read the saved text file in the word processor. In order to cancel Save As Text, press Tab (Space-4-5) on the Confirm, move to Cancel. And press Enter. Or, just press Space-e

(dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.3.5 Printing E-Mail Messages You may want to print an email that you received or sent in using either an embosser or an ink printer. In order to print to an ink printer, do the following:

1) Connect the Braille Sense U2 to an ink printer with the printer cable that was provided by the manufacturer of the printer. The printing port must be the same port that was set in the Print port in the Global options. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) It shows File. 4) Press Enter on the File. 5) Press Space-4, move to Print E-mail. 6) Press Enter on the Print E-mil. 7) It shows the Print type. Without calling up the menu, press Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) move to this stage directly. 8) Press Space or Space-4, you change setting value of the Print type. Setting value is Printer and Embosser. 9) After selecting the Print type, press Enter. Or press Tab

(Space-4-5), move to the Confirm and press Enter. 10) Then, the selected e-mail will be printed. If you want to cancel printing, press Tab (Space-4-5) on the Cancel and press Enter. Or you can press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6). 8.4 Additional features of E-mail 8.4.1 Find The Find command is used to find text in the current mailbox. Once you enter text to find, the Find function will look for text that matches in Subject, Date, and/or From. This function only works in Subject, Date, or From control. The Find dialog box consists of a Find:

Find: Edit box for text to search Search radio button Direction radio button Confirm button Cancel button. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. In the Find dialog box, you can move between the five controls by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). The shortcut key is f (dots 1-2-4). You can move to this function without calling up the menu by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4). To activate the Find function, use the following steps:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) It shows the File. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Edit. 4) Press Enter on the Edit. 5) It shows the Select All. 6) Press Space-4 or Space-1, move to Find. 7) Press Enter on the Find. Or press f (dots 1-2-4). 8) It shows the Find: edit box where the user can type the text that they want to find. 9) After typing in the text, press Tab (Space-4-5) , move to the Search. Here you can select between All, Subject, Date, or From. All control means Subject, Date, and From controls together. You can select an item by pressing Space-4 or Space-

1. By selecting a specific control, you can search the control for the text that you want to find. 10) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to the Direction which has two choices, Forward or Backward. Pressing Space-4 or Space-

1 lets you select the searching direction as Forward or Backward. 11) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to the Confirm. 12) Press Enter on the Confirm. If you want to cancel, press Tab (Space-4-5) on the Confirm, move to the Cancel. And press Enter. Or, you can press Space-z (dots 1-3-

5-6) or Space-e (dots 1-5) anywhere in this dialog box to cancel. 8.4.2 Find Again The Find Again command finds the next text according to what you found using Find dialog box, and it will go to the previous text if you set the direction to Backward when you used the Find function before. The Find Again function only works in the Subject, Date, or From control. To activate the Find Again function, use the following steps:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) It shows the File 3) Press Sapce-4, move to the Edit 4) Press Enter on the Edit. 5) It shows the Select All. 6) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Find Again. 7) Press Enter on the Find Again. Or press g (dots 1-2-4-5). To activate this function without calling up the menu, press Backspace-f

(dots 1-2-4). 8.4.3 Move to Next Unread Message The Move To Next Unread Message option allows you to move to the next message that is unread. If you use this function on the last unread message in a list, you will be sent to the first unread message in the list. To activate this function while you are in the Subject, Date, or From control, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) It shows the Find. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Edit. 4) Press Enter on the Edit. 5) It shows the Select all. 6) Press Space-4, move to the Move to Next Unread Message. 7) Press Enter on the Move to Next Unread Message. Or press u

(dots 1-3-6). To use this function without calling up the menu, press Enter-u (dots 1-

3-6). 8.4.4 Copy or Move to Mailbox There are two methods how to copy or move an e-mail to folder. 1. You can copy and move e-mails directly in Mailbox lists except Outbox. In order to copy and move an e-mail to folder, follow there steps:

1) Execute E-mail program. 2) Press Shift-Tab (Space-1-2), move to the Mailbox lists. 3) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the Mailbox including the e-mail that you want to copy and move. 4) Press Enter. 5) It shows e-mail lists. 6) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the e-mail that you want to copy or move. Press Space, Enter-b (dots 1-2) or Enter-a (dot 1), select the e-mail that you want to copy or move. Or you can select the e-mail using the Select All or Start Selection of the Edit menu. 7) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 8) It shows the File. 9) Press Space-4, move to the Edit. 10) Press Enter on the Edit. 11) It shows the Select All. 12) Press Space-4, move to the Copy or Move. 13) Press Enter. Or without calling up the menu, by pressing Enter-c (dots 1-4) or Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6), you can execute functions directly. 14) Press Shift-Tab (Space-1-2), move to the Mailbox lists. 15) Press Enter on the Mailbox that you want to paste the e-mail. 16) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 17) It shows the File. 18) Press Space-4, move to the Edit. 19) Press Enter on the Edit. 20) It shows the Select All. 21) Press Space-4, move to the Paste and press Enter. Or without calling up the menu, press Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). 22) It will be copied or moved the e-mail to mailbox. 2. You can copy and move e-mails using the Copy to Mailbox or Move To Mailbox in the Edit menu. The structure and move of Copy to Mailbox and Move To Mailbox menu is like below. 1. Folder list. 2. Create mailbox Button 3. Delete mailbox Button 4. Rename mailbox Button 5. Confirm Button 6. Cancel Button You can move between the controls by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). And you can move between items in the Folder list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to cancel while you are in these dialog boxes, press Space-

e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). In order to copy and move an e-mail to another folder, follow there steps:

1) You can select the e-mail by pressing Space, Enter-b (Dots 1-2) or Enter-a (dot 1). Or you can select the e-mail using the Select All or Start Selection of the Edit menu. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 3) It shows the File. 4) Press Space-4, move to the Edit. 5) Press Enter on the Edit. 6) It shows the Select All. 7) Press Sapce-4, move to the Copy to Mailbox or Move To Mailbox. 8) Press Enter on the Copy to Mailbox or Move To Mailbox. 9) It shows Folder list. Or without calling up the menu, press Backspace-c (dots 1-4) or Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6). 10) Press Space-4, move to the folder that you want to copy or move. 11) Press Enter. 12) It will be copied or cut the e-mail in the folder. 13) It will return to the Mailbox before calling the menu. 8.4.4.1 Adding Create Mailbox You can add create mailbox in the e-mail folder of the File manager. In order to execute this function, follow these steps:

1) Execute E-mail program. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of 3) It shows File. 4) Press Space-4, move to Edit and Press Enter. Or Press e 5) It shows Select All. 6) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Copy to Mailbox or Move 7) Press Enter. Or press Backspace-c (dots 1-4) or Backspace-x

(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu. 8) It shows Folder lists. 9) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to the Create mailbox. 10) Press Enter on the Create mailbox. 11) It shows Mailbox name:. Type the mailbox name. 12) Press Enter or press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm and press Enter. 13) It shows the create mailbox in Folder list. Also the folder is in Mailbox and in e-mail folder of File manager. 8.4.4.2 Deleting Folder Inbox.

(dots 1-5). To Mailbox. Inbox.

(dots 1-5). To mailbox. You cant delete Inbox, Sent, Outbox. But you can delete the added folders. In order to delete the folder, follow these steps:

1) Execute E-mail program. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of 3) It shows File. 4) Press Space-4, move to Edit and Press Enter. Or Press e 5) It shows Select All. 6) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Copy to Mailbox or Move 7) Press Enter. Or press Backspace-c (dots 1-4) or Backspace-x

(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu. 8) It shows Folder lists. 9) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the folder that you want to delete. 10) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Delete mailbox. 11) Press Enter. 12) It shows Delete (mailbox name) mailbox? Yes. 13) Press Enter. By pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on the folder that you want to delete, you can delete the mailbox. If you want to cancel this function, press Tab (Space-4-5) on the Confirm, move to Cancel. And press Enter. If you attempt to delete the inbox, Sent and storagebox, you will hear the warning sound to notify you of the error. 8.4.4.3 Changing Folder Mailbox You cant change folder mailbox of the Inbox and the Storagebox. Inbox.

(dots 1-5). To Mailbox. In order to change the folder mailbox, follow these steps:

1) Execute E-mail program. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu in mail lists of 3) It shows File. 4) Press Space-4, move to Edit and Press Enter. Or Press e 5) It shows Select All. 6) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Copy to Mailbox or Move 7) Press Enter. Or press Backspace-c (dots 1-4) or Backspace-x

(dots 1-3-4-6), without calling the menu. 8) It shows Folder lists. 9) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to the folder that you want to change. 10) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Rename mailbox. 11) Press Enter. 12) It shows Folder mailbox:

13) Type the folder mailbox that you want to change. 14) Press Enter. Or press Tab (Space-4-5) move to Confirm and press Enter. If you attempt to rename the inbox and storagebox, you will hear the warning sound to notify you of the error. 8.5 Use the Tools Menu You can set path and option of the E-mail. The Tools menu has the following four sub menus:

1. Accounts Manager 2. Set path 3. Set options 4. Set spam Each sub menu except the Accounts manager will be explained in detail in this section. 8.5.1 Set Path Set Path sets the default download path where file attachments and email are stored. You can set the download path using the following method:

Set Path sets the default download path where file attachments and email are stored. You can set the download path using the following method:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu in the Inbox. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Space-4, move to Set Path. 6) Press Enter on Set Path. 7) It shows Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download. You can move to this stage by pressing Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4), without calling the menu. Set Path contains the following three items:

1. Save attachments path 2. Send attachments path 3. Disk to save mail in You can move among these items by pressing Space-4 and Space-1. Each item consists of Path, Modify, and Close. At Path, the default path will be displayed. You can move among this information by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). Set Path will be closed if you press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6). Or, you can close it by pressing enter on the Close button. 8.5.1.1 Set the Save Attachments Path The default path for downloaded attached files is /flashdisk/download. You can set the download path using the following method:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu in the Inbox. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Space-4, move to Set Path. 6) Press Enter on Set Path. 7) It shows Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download. You can move to this stage by pressing Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4), without calling the menu. 8) Press Enter on Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download, or press m (dots 1-3-4). Or, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Modify button, and then press Enter. 9) It shows download folder xx/yy. Move to the desired folder by pressing move keys below:

Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Move to the previous item: Space-1 Move to the next item: Space-4 10) When you encounter the desired folder, press Space to select it, and then press Enter. If a folder is selected, * will be displayed in front of the selected folder. If you press Enter to set the path, the Braille Sense U2 shows the changed path. If you changed the path to the My Documents folder that is one of the lower level folders located in flashdisk, Save attachments path: /flashdisk/My Documents would be displayed. 8.5.1.2 Set the Send Attachments Path Send attachments path is the path where the files to be attached are saved. The default path is /flashdisk/upload. You can change this path to a different path using the following method:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu in the Inbox. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) It shows Accounts manager. 5) Press Space-4, move to Set Path. 6) Press Enter on Set Path. 7) It shows Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download. 8) Press Space-4, move to Send attachments path:

/flashdisk/upload. 9) Press Enter or m (dots 1-3-4) on Send attachments path:

/flashdisk/upload. Or, press Tab (Space-4-5), move to the Modify button and then press Enter. 10) It shows upload folder xx/yy Move to the desired folder by pressing the following keys:

Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Move to previous item: Space-1 Move to next item: Space-4 11) Press Space to select the desired folder, and press Enter. 12) It shows * in front of the selected folder. If you finish setting the path by pressing Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will show the changed path. If you changed path from upload folder to music folder in the flashdisk, it would display Send attachments path:

/flashdisk/music. 8.5.1.3 Set the Disk to save mail The e-mail messages that are downloaded from your network are saved in the Email folder, which is a lower level folder of flashdisk. If the size of an email you are receiving is so large that it cannot be downloaded and stored in the flashdisk, you can change to a different disk using the following method:

1) Connect the external storage disc to the Braille Sense U2. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu in the Inbox. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 4) Press Enter. 5) It shows Accounts manager. 6) Press Space-4, move to Set Path. 7) Press Enter on Set Path. 8) It shows Save attachments path: /flashdisk/download. 9) Press Space-4, move to Disk to save mail in: /flashdisk. 10) Press Enter or m (dots 1-3-4) on Disk to save mail in:

/flashdisk. Or, press Tab (Space-4-5), move to the Modify button, and press Enter. 11) It shows flashdisk. 12) Press Space-4 or Space-1, move to the disk list. If you have connected a USB memory stick, it shows USB. 13) Press Enter on the desired disk name. It will show the disk name if the disc setting is completed by pressing enter. If you changed it to USB, it will show Disk to save mail in:

/USB. If it is changed, the Email folder will be created automatically in the selected disc, and the e-mail messages will be downloaded in this disk. 8.5.2 Set Options In Set Options, you can set the Inbox with default folder when the E-

mail program is started. 8.5.2.1 Using the Inbox with Default Folder If you set the Inbox with default folder, it will move to list of Inbox whenever the E-mail program is started. In order to use the Inbox with default folder, follow these stets:

1) Execute E-mail. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the E-mail menu in the Inbox. 3) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 4) Press Enter. 5) 6) Press Space-4, move to Set Options. 7) Press Enter on the Set Options. Or without calling the menu, It shows Accounts manager. press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5). 8) It shows Use inbox as default mailbox when starting: Yes. If you dont Use inbox as default mailbox, press Space. 9) Press Enter. If you want to cancel this function, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6). 8.5.3 Spam Settings When the Braille Sense U2 downloads e-mail from the e-mail server, there may be a lot of e-mail messages that are spam. In this case, you can avoid downloading these spam e-mail messages by registering specified words in the subject or the specified e-mail address. The spam e-mail messages that are set at Spam Settings will not be downloaded into the Braille Sense U2, and will remain on the e-mail server. Use the following steps to set up spam e-mail:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. It shows Accounts manager. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). Now, you are in the Spam Settings menu. Spam Settings contains the following 6 items;

1. Type 2. List 3. Add 4. Modify 5. Delete 6. Close You can move among the items by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-

Tab (Space-1-2). In order to exit from Spam Settings, move to the Close button and press enter, or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Type consists of 3 sub items; Subject, E-mail address string, and Host. You can move among these sub items by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The list will be displayed in a different form according to the sub item of the Type. If you have selected Subject, the list will be displayed as Subject:

(Registered word) 1/xx. If you selected E-mail address string, it will be displayed as E-mail address string: (Registered e-mail address string) 1/xx. It will be displayed as no items if there is no registered word or e-

mail address string. Now we will explain how to register, modify, and delete the spam settings. 8.5.3.1 Add As Spam E-Mail First, we will explain how to set the e-mail program to sort out spam by setting any specified words in the e-mail subject. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. It shows Accounts manager. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). 8) Press a (dot 1) when Type: Subject 1/3 is displayed. Or, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add button, and then press enter. 9) Then, the add dialog box will be opened and Subject add: will be displayed. 10) Type in the words, and press Enter. Or, press Tab (Space-4-

5) to move to the Confirm, and then press enter after you type in the words. 11) Then, Successfully added spam data. will be announced and you will be returned to the list. Then, Subject: (registered word) 1/1 will be displayed. If there is more than one registered word, you can check it by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. By adding the word as explained above, if there are any e-mail messages that include the words you entered in the subject of the message, the Braille Sense U2 will download those e-mails from the e-

mail server, but will delete them automatically. So those e-mails will not be in the inbox. You can also avoid receiving e-mail messages from a specific sender or host by registering it. The following are the steps to register a senders e-mail address:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. It shows Accounts manager. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). 8) Press Space-4 when Type: Subject 1/3 is displayed. Then, Type: E-mail address string 2/3 will be displayed. 9) Press a (dot 1) or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add button, and press enter. 10) Then, the Add dialog box will be opened, and E-mail address string: (e-mail address) will be displayed. The (e-mail address) is the senders e-mail address that was focused. 11) Press Enter on E-mail address sting: (e-mail address). Or, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm, and then press Enter. 12) Then, Successfully added spam data will be announced and E-mail address string: (Registered e-mail address) 1/1 will be displayed. If you set it once, the e-mails with the e-mail ids will be downloaded from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense U2 will delete those e-mails automatically. So those e-mails will not be found in the inbox. You can add an additional e-mail address by modifying the e-mail address that you have typed in. If you type in a new e-mail address at E-mail address string: (e-mail address), the displayed e-mail address will be erased, and the new e-mail address will be displayed. But, if you press the cursor routing key at the position where you want to modify the displayed address, that address will be modified as you type in the modifications. When E-mail address string: (registered e-mail address) 1/1 is displayed, you can add it by pressing a (dot 1) or pressing Tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Add, and press Enter. You can check the registered e-mail addresses by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to register a specific host as a spam sender, do the following:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. It shows Accounts manager. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). 8) Press Space-4 when Type: Subject 1/3 is displayed in order to move to Type: Host 3/3. 9) Press a (dot 1) on Type: Host 3/3, or press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add button, and then press Enter. 10) Then, the Add dialog box will be opened, and Host add: (host address) will be displayed. Here, host address is the host address that was focused on when you executed this command. 11) Press Enter on Host add: (host address). Or, press tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and then press enter. 12) Then, the Braille Sense U2 will say Successfully added spam data and it will show Host: (registered host address) 1/1. If you add the host address as above, the e-mails from the registered host will be downloaded from the e-mail server, but the Braille Sense U2 will delete them automatically. So those e-mails will not be found in the inbox. At step 5 above, you can add the additional host address by modifying the host address that you have typed in. If you type in a new host address at Host add: (host address), the displayed host address will be erased, and the new host address will be displayed. But, if you press the cursor routing key at the position where you want to modify the displayed address, that address will be modified where you modify it. When Host: (registered host address) 1/1 is displayed, you can add it by pressing a (dot 1) or pressing Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add button, and then press Enter. You can check the registered host addresses by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. When you register a subject, e-mail address, or host as spam e-mail, you may make a mistake while you are typing in a subject, e-mail address, or host. In this case, you need to modify the subject while typing them in. Please refer to the following correction methods:

1. In order to delete the current letter, press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 2. In order to delete the previous letter, press Backspace. 3. In order to delete the current line, press BackSpace-1-4. Then, Delete line: yes will be displayed. Press enter to delete the line. Or, if you do not want to delete the line, press Space to toggle Yes to No, and then press enter. If you want to cancel setting spam at the Add dialog box, press Tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. Or, just press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.5.3.2 Modifying Spam Registration In order to modify a Subject that has been registered, do the following:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. It shows Accounts manager. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). 8) Move to list by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Then, Subject:

(Registered word) 1/xx will be displayed. 9) Press Space-4 or Space-1 to move to the word to be modified. 10) Press m (dots 1-3-4) on the word to be modified. Or, press tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Modify button, and press enter. 11) Then, the modify dialog box will be opened, and Subject modify:

(selected word) will be displayed. 12) If you type in a new word directly, the displayed word will be erased, and the new word will be displayed. If you want to modify a part of the displayed word, press the cursor routing key at the position where you want to modify the word, and type in the letters that you want to modify. 13) Press enter after you type in the new word. Or, press tab

(Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and then press enter. 14) Then Successfully modified spam data. will be announced, and you will be returned to the list. If there is more than one word in the list, you can look them up by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you want to modify the e-mail addresses or host addresses that have been registered, execute step 1 above. Press Space-4 to move to Type: E-mail address string 2/3 and Type: Host 3/3. You can modify them with the same method as explained above. If you want to cancel registration, press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Cancel button, and press enter. Or, you can press Space-e (dots 1-

5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 8.5.3.3 Deleting Spam You can delete an item that has been registered in the spam list. Lets start our explanation from Subject. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu while you are in the inbox. It shows Accounts manager. 2) Press Space-4, move to the Tools. 3) Press Enter. 4) 5) Press Space-4, move to Spam Settings. 6) Press Enter. 7) It shows Type: Subject 1/3. Without calling the menu, you can also execute to this stage directly by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-5). 8) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the list. Then, Subject:

(Registered word) 1/xx will be displayed. 9) Press Space-4 or Space-1 to delete the registered word. 10) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) to delete the selected word. Or, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Delete button, and press enter. 11) Then, Successfully deleted will be announced and list will show again. You can check the remaining words by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. You may delete an E-mail address string or Host in the spam list, too. Press Space-4 to move to Type: E-mail address string 2/3 or Type:

Host 3/3, and execute. The method is the same as explained above. 8.6. Hot Keys for E-Mail 8.6.1 Hot Keys That Are Used in the Inbox Call accounts manager: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Check for New Mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Write New Message: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Call up set path: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Call up set option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Call up set spam: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4) Move to mailbox: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy to Mailbox: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Add a sender to the address list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) (This is valid only at the from item of the inbox). Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the Subject and date item in the inbox). Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 8.6.2 Hot Keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the Mail Outbox Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Save in mail outbox: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 8.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mail Messages or Writing an E-mail Message Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the inbox). Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the inbox) Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the inbox) Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5) 9. Media Player The Media Player on the Braille Sense U2 is a program which you can use to play audio files. The Media Player will play the following formats, flac, mid, avi, wma, wmv, aac, asf, Audible(aa, aax), asx, m3u, m4a, mp2, mp3, mp4, ogg, pls, wav, wax and asx. Note that you will not be able to see the video with avi and wmv files. You can control the playing of audio files using either the Braille keyboard commands or audio keys that are on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. The Media Player can play back recorded voices as well as music files. 9.1 Using the Audio Buttons There are a series of buttons on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. These buttons can be used to control the Media Player. You will find five buttons on the Braille Sense U2. Starting from the left, and going to the right, the buttons are called: previous, record, stop, play/pause, and next.These buttons are used for playing and recording music or voice quickly and easily. If the play/pause button is pressed while you are using a program other than the Media Player, the Braille Sense U2 will play the files in the play list. If there are no files in the play list, the Braille Sense U2 says, There are no items to display. The other buttons, previous, stop, and next are available after you start playing audio by pressing the play/pause button. Even if the Media Player starts when you press the play/pause button while you are using another program, the Braille Sense U2 will not stop the program that is currently running. 9.1.1 Play/Pause Button The play/pause button has a long, rectangle shape. To locate the play/pause button, find the button that is furthest to the right on the front panel. Then, move one button to the left. This is the play/pause button. With the play/pause button, you can easily play audio files registered in the play list. If there are no files that have been registered in the play list, the Braille Sense U2 will display the message, There are no items to display. You have to add a file to the play list before it can be played. If there is more than one file in the play list when you press the play/pause button, the Braille Sense U2 will start playing all the files in the list one after another. If you press the play/pause button again while a file is being played, the playback will be paused. If you want to resume playing, press the button again. If you press the play/pause button while you are in the record dialog box, the sound that was recorded most recently will be played back to you. 9.1.2 Next button and previous button These buttons have a triangular shape. The previous button is the first button from the left on the front panel, and it points to the left. The next button is the button that is farthest to the right on the front panel, and it points to the right. If you press the next button, the next file in the play list will be played, and pressing the previous button will play the previous file. If you press one of these buttons while an audio file is being played, the Braille Sense U2 will stop playing the current file, and jump to the previous or next file (depending on which button you press) in the play list, and start playing it. If you press the next button (while the last file in the list is being played), or the previous button (while the first file in the list is being played), it will have no effect, as the Braille Sense U2 will not stop playing the current file. 9.1.3 Record Button The record button has a circular shape, and is used to record sound using the built-in or an external microphone. The record button is located directly to the right of the previous button. To use this button to record sound, you should be either in the Media Player, or in the program menu. If you press the record button once, the Braille Sense U2 will open the record dialog box. If you press the record button again, the Braille Sense U2 will resume recording. When you press the record button while you are recording, the Braille Sense U2 will pause your recording. You can resume the recording by pressing the record button again. The recorded sound will be stored in a file, and placed in the flashdisk/media/record folder. 9.1.4 Stop Button The stop button has a square shape, and is used to stop playing. If you press the stop button while an audio file is being played, the Braille Sense U2 will stop playing. The next time the Braille Sense U2 starts playing, it will start from the first file in the play list. If you press this button while recording, the Braille Sense U2 will stop recording. If you press the stop button in record dialog box while the Braille Sense U2 is not recording, the dialog box will close. 9.1.5 Using the Audio buttons in file open dialog box You can open Open File dialog box by long pressing stop button in the Media player dialog box. And if you long press the stop button again, this dialog box will close. And then return to the Media player dialog box. play/pause button is same function as Enter in Open File dialog box. Also stop button, record button, previous button and next button is same function as Backspace, Space, Space-1 and Space-4 in Open File dialog box. Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing previous and next button in file list. And you can select and unselect by pressing record button. If you press stop button, you can move to upper folder. And if you press play/pause button, you can play the selected file in file list of Open File dialog box. In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to media mode. 9.2 Braille Keyboard and Extended Keys You can use more of the features in the Media player with the Braille keyboard than with the audio buttons. You can use the Braille keyboard commands to control the player in the Media player dialog box. To open the Media player, press Enter on Media player, or press m in the program menu. The Media player is also opened when you play audio files by pressing the play/pause button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. This dialog box contains two information tabs:

playback information and play list. Press Space-4-5 or Space-1-2 to move between these tabs. 9.2.1 Playback Information Tab The playback information tab displays the track number, the file name, and the current playback status such as (play, pause, or stop). If there are no files in the play list, the Braille Sense U2 will display Title: There are no items to display. If you press Space-4, the Braille Sense U2 will display playback time information. First, the elapsed or remaining time will be displayed. You can set whether the elapsed time or remaining time will be displayed, using the playback settings dialog box. If you have selected the Remaining time with this option, the - (minus sign), will be displayed before the time. Next to the elapsed/remaining time, the Braille Sense U2 will display the total playback time of the currently selected file. If there are no files in the play list, Time: There are no items to display will be displayed. 9.2.2 Play List Tab The play list tab displays all the files in the play list. For each file in the play list, it displays the track number, file name, the current place of the file in the list, and the total number of files in the list. If there is no file in the play list, the Braille Sense U2 will display the message no items. For example, if you had the following track on the Braille Sense U2:

Track 1 Chopin Fantasie Impromptu 1/10, then Track 1 means this file is the first item in the play list. Chopin Fantasie Impromptu is the file name. 1/10 means the file is the first of ten files in the play list. Whenever you register an audio file using the File, the file is added to the play list. 9.2.3 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab and the Play List Tab The hot keys that can be used in the playback information and the play list tabs are as follows:

1) Hot keys in the Play Information Tab Hot key Space-4 Space-1 Space Enter Backspace Dot 6 Dot 3 Dots 4-6 Dots 1-3 Dots 5-6 Dots 2-3 Dot 4 Dot 1 Dot 2 or Dot 5 Dots 3-4-5 Dots 1-2-6 Function Move to the next information Move to the previous information Pause when it is play state and play when it is pause state. Start playing Stop playing Play the next file Play the previous file Play the last file Play the first file Play the fifth file after the current file Play the fifth file before the current file Move to next position by time index and play Move to previous position by time index and play Change time index Speed up Slow down Space-up scroll button Space-down scroll button Space-1-3-4 Space-1-2-5 Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Space-1-3-5-6 Volume up Volume down Open menu Open help Move to play list tab Exit Media player 2) Hot Keys in the Play List Tab Hot key Space-4 Space-1 Space-4-6 Space-1-3 Space Enter-1-2 Enter Backspace Space-1-4-5 Dot 6 Dot 3 Dots 4-6 Dots 1-3 Dots 5-6 Dots 2-3 Dot 4 Dot 1 Dot 2 or Dot 5 Dots 3-4-5 Dots 1-2-6 Space-up scroll button Space-down scroll button Space-1-3-4 Space-1-2-5 Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Function Move to the next file Move to the previous file Move to the last file Move to the first file Select/resume current file

(while playing, it is used as play/pause) Start selecting files Start playing the selected files Stop playing Delete the selected files in the play list Play the next file Play the previous file Play the last file Play the first file Play the fifth file after the current file Play the fifth file before the current file Move to next position by time index and play Move to previous position by time index and play Change time index Speed up Slow down Volume up Volume down Open menu Open help Move to playback information tab Space-1-3-5-6 Exit Media player 9.3 How to Use the Media Player Menu When you want to open the Media player menu, you can press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4). You can also F2 while in the Media player dialog box. This menu contains five items: File, Play, Record, Position, Mark and Settings. Using the File menu, you can add or delete files in the play list. The Play menu lists all of the commands related to playing files. The Record menu opens the Record dialog box in which allows you to record sound and play it. The Position menu contains commands related to bookmark and go to position. The Settings menu allows you to set various Media Player options. 9.3.1 File When you want to use the File menu, you can press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) to call up the Media player menu, and then press Enter on File, or press f (dots 1-2-4). A submenu will appear, which contains Open File, Open Folder, Add File, Add Folder, Save Playlist, Save As Playlist, Delete Item, Open URL and Exit. You can move between these items by pressing spaece-4 or Space-1. Press Enter on the item you want to execute. If you want to go back to the menu that is one level up, you can press Space-e (dots 1-5). Then press, Space-

z (dots 1-3-5-6). which will close the menu, and take you back to the Media player dialog box. 9.3.1.1 Open File You can use the Open File menu item to add files to the play list and start playing. If you press Enter on Open File, a dialog box will open, just like the file list in the File manager. You can navigate through the file list just like you do in the file list in the File manager. The audio files that can be played in the Media player are files that have the extensions, ac3, asf, asx, m3u, mp2, mp3, ogg, pls, wav, wax, wma, flac, midi and wmv. If you select all the files you want to play, and press Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will register the files in the play list, and start playing the first file. You can select more than one file in the Open File dialog box by pressing Space on the file you want to play, and then move to another file to be played, and press Space. Once you finish selecting all the files you want, press Enter. When you open the Open File dialog box, files in the default folder will be displayed. The default folder is set to /flashdisk/media. You can also open the Open File dialog box by pressing Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.1.2 Open Folder This Open Folder menu item is used to select all of the audio files in the selected folders to the play list and play them one after another. If you press Enter on Open Folder in File menu, or press Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) in the Media player dialog box, the Open Folder dialog box will be opened. The Open Folder dialog box is almost the same as the Open File dialog box. The difference is that only folder names, and not file names will be displayed in the Open Folder dialog box. When you open the Open Folder dialog box, the default folder name will be displayed. The default folder is set to flashdisk. Press Enter to display all of the folders in flashdisk, and press Space-1 or Space-4 to move between the folder names. If you want to move into the folder that you are currently pointed at (and list all the files in it) press Enter on the folder name. Press Backspace if you want to go up to the parent folder. If you want to select a folder, press Space on the folder name. You can select more than one folder. Once you have selected all of the folders you want, press Enter. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will add all of the audio files, with the extensions, wav, mp3, and wma, from the selected folders to the play list and start playing the first file. 9.3.1.3 Add File The Add File menu item is used to add audio files to the play list. If you press Enter on Add File in the File menu, or press BackSpace-o

(dots 1-3-5) in the Media player dialog box, the same dialog box that is used for Open File will be displayed. If you select all of the files that you want, and press Enter (as in the Open File dialog box), then the Braille Sense U2 will add the selected files to the play list. However, the Braille Sense U2 will not start playing these files. If you want to start playing the files in the play list, press the play/pause button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. Or, you can press Enter on play in the play menu. A detailed explanation of the play menu can be found in section 9.3.2. 9.3.1.4 Add Folder The Add Folder menu item is used to add all of the audio files in a selected folder to the play list. If you press Enter on Add Folder in the File menu (or press Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) in the Media player dialog box), the same dialog box that is used for Open Folder will be displayed. If you select all of the folders, and press Enter, the Braille Sense U2 will add all of the audio files in the selected folders to the play list. However, it will not start playing any files. You can start playing the files in the play list by pressing the play/pause button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2, or press Enter on play in the play menu. 9.3.1.5 Save play list The Save Playlist menu item is used to save the play list to a disk drive. If you want to use this function, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the File menu and execute the Save Playlist command by pressing Enter on it, or you can press s (dots 2-3-4). Otherwise, you can press Enter-i (dots 2-4) in the Media player dialog box. If you activate the Media player program and first execute Save Playlist, the Save As Playlist dialog box will open. If you execute Save Playlist after you save the play list for once, the Braille Sense U2 will save the play list with the same file name without using a dialog box. After saving a play list, it will return to Media player dialog box. 9.3.1.6 Save as play list The Save As Playlist menu item is used to save the play list as a different file or on another disk drive. If you want to use this function, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the File menu and execute the Save As Playlist command by pressing Enter on it, or you can press l (dots 1-2-3). Otherwise, you can press Space-s (dots 2-3-4) in the Media player dialog box. If you execute Save As Playlist, Save As Playlist dialog box is displayed. This dialog box consists of file list, File name, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. If the dialog box is opened, File name: is displayed. You can move from one tab to the other tab by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The file format of saved play list is always the m3u. By default, file is saved in /flashdisk/media. If you want to make a new file name, type in the new file name. You cannot use the following characters in a file mane. |, \, <, >, ?, :, *. If you want to change the saving location, move to the file list by pressing shift-tab (Space-1-2). And you move to location that you want to save by using the navigation keys in File manager program. 9.3.1.7 Delete Item If you want to delete a file from the play list, first, locate the file you want to delete in the play list tab by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly. Then, bring up the Media player menu by pressing Space-

m (dots 1-3-4), and press Enter on File. Now, move to Delete Item by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and then press Enter. Or, you can press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on the file to be deleted in the play list tab. You can select more than one file in the play list tab by pressing Space on each file to be deleted. * will be displayed before each selected item. If you press Space on a selected item, the selection will be canceled and the * will disappear. Now, lets explain how to delete multiple files in a block from the play list. Press Enter-b (dots 1-2) on the first file to be deleted. Enter-b (dots 1-2) is the start of the block. Next, if you press Space-4 or Space-1, the displayed files will be selected. After selecting the files you want to delete, press Space-d

(dots 1-4-5) in order to delete them. 9.3.1.8 Open URL The Open URL menu item is used to play the audio stream in web page. In order to use Open URL, Braille Sense U2 should be connected to Internet. If you press Enter on Open URL in the File menu, or press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) in the Media player dialog box. The dialog box will be displayed. In this dialog box, type the link address of audio stream and press Enter, the audio stream will be automatically played. 9.3.1.9 Exit You can exit from the Media player by selecting Exit in the File menu, or by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) in the Media player dialog box. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will stop playing (if it is playing a file), and exit from Media player to the program menu. 9.3.2 Play The Play submenu has all of the commands that can be used to control playback. To use this menu, first, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the Media player menu. Next, press Space-4. The Braille Sense U2 will then display Play (p)->. Then, press Enter, and the Play submenu will be displayed. You can move to any menu item in this menu by pressing Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly. To go back to the top level in the Media player menu, press Space-e (dots 1-5). Press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) if you want to close the menu and go back to the Media player dialog box. All of the commands that can be used in this menu will be explained in this section. 9.3.2.1 Play If you press Enter on Play, the Braille Sense U2 will start playing the files in the play list. Also, if you press Enter in the Media player dialog box, the Braille Sense U2 will start playing. 9.3.2.2 Previous Track Previous Track is used to play the previous file, while a file is being played. You can also do this by pressing dot 3 in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.2.3 Next Track This item is used to play the next file in the play list, while a file is being played. You can also press dot 6 in the Media player dialog box to do this. 9.3.2.4 Back 5 Tracks This is used to play the fifth file before the file that is currently being played. You can also press dots 2-3 in the Media player dialog box to do this. 9.3.2.5 Forward 5 Tracks This is used to play the fifth file after the file that is currently being played. You can also do this by pressing dots 5-6 in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.2.6 First Track This is used to play the first file in the play list. You can also do this by pressing dots 1-3 in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.2.7 Last Track This is used to play the last file in the play list. You can also do this by pressing dots 4-6 in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.2.8 Volume Up and Volume Down These options are used to adjust the audio playback volume. Here, the volume level ranges from 0 to 10. You can also adjust the volume level by pressing Space-up scroll button (up) or Space-down scroll button

(down) in the Media player dialog box. The actual volume level depends on the value of voice volume that is set in the Global options as explained in section 3. For example, if voice volume is set to 5, and the volume level in the Media player is set to its maximum 10, the actual volume is 5. If the volume level in the Media player is set to 5, the actual volume level is 2.5. 9.3.2.9 Speed Up and Slow Down You can use these controls to adjust the audio playback speed. The speed level ranges from 1 to 10. You can also adjust the speed level by pressing dot 3-4-5 or dot 1-2-6 in the Media player dialog box. Dot 3-4-5 can increase the audio playback speed, and dot 1-2-6 can decrease the audio playback speed. 9.3.2.10 Pause This item is for pausing playback while you are playing a file. If you use this command again, the Braille Sense U2 will start playing again from the position where it stopped playing. You can also do this by pressing Space in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.2.11 Stop This is used to stop playing the file that is currently being played. You can also do this by pressing Backspace in the Media player dialog box. 9.3.3 Record This menu item is used to open the Record dialog box. To open the Record dialog box, first, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to bring up the Media player menu. Press Space-4 twice to move to record

(r), and then press Enter, or you can press r (dots 1-2-3-5). Then, the Braille Sense U2 will display the Record dialog box. You can also open this dialog box by pressing Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) in the Media player dialog box. The Record dialog box contains an information tab and five buttons. You can move between these by pressing Space-4-5 or Space-1-2. You can press the buttons in this dialog box by pressing Enter on the button you want to use. You can also press the buttons by typing the character displayed after the button name. 9.3.3.1 Record/Playback Information Tab This tab is displayed only when the Braille Sense U2 is recording, or when there is a file that has just been recorded. It means that the dialog box does not show any information when the Braille Sense U2 is not recording, or if you exit from the dialog box. The information displayed in this tab includes: a file name, the current status, and two pieces of time information. The file name is the name of the file containing the sound that is currently being recorded or played. The current status can be one of the following: recording, playing, pause, or stop. The time information that is displayed first is the elapsed time while recording, and the elapsed or remaining time while playing, (depending on the Display time setting that is in the Playback Settings dialog box, which is explained in section 9.3.6.2). The time information that is displayed last, when you are recording, is the remaining time. The remaining time is limited by the remaining space on your flashdisk. While playing, the total length of the file in time will be displayed. You can move between time information and other information by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 9.3.3.2 Record This is used to start recording. You can also start recording by pressing the Record button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. While recording, the Braille Sense U2 will display the recording information tab. Whenever you start recording the Braille Sense U2 will create a file. The file will be named record01.mp3, or record02.mp3 etc. The recorded sound will be saved to that file. These files are stored in a special folder. By default, these files are saved in

/flashdisk/media/record. You can change the saving folder and recoding file type by using the Record Settings option, which is explained in section 9.3.6.3. When recording, you can pause the recording by pressing space 4-5 to move to the Pause button, and then press Enter. You can also pause by pressing the record button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. If you want to resume recording, press Enter on the Continue button, or press the record button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2 again. To stop recording, press Space-4-5 repeatedly on Record to move to the Stop button, and then press Enter. 9.3.3.3 Play This button is used to play the file that has just been recorded. You can also start playing the recorded sound by pressing the play button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. If you have not yet recorded a file after opening the Record dialog box, pressing Enter on the Play button will not do anything. While playing, the playback information tab will be displayed. If you want to pause or stop playing, press Enter after moving to the Pause or Stop button by pressing Space-4-5 repeatedly. 9.3.3.4 Stop This is used to stop recording or playing. If you press Enter on Stop while recording, the Braille Sense U2 will stop recording and show the recording information tab. If you press Enter on the Stop button while playing, the Braille Sense U2 will stop playing and show the playback information tab. You can also stop recording or playing by pressing the stop button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2. 9.3.3.5 Pause This item is used to pause the recording or playing a file while in the Media Player. If you press Enter on Pause, or press the play/pause button on the front panel of the Braille Sense U2, recording or playing will be paused, and the recording information or playback information tab will be displayed. 9.3.3.6 Continue If you press Enter on Continue while the current status is pause, the Braille Sense U2 will resume recording or playing. 9.3.3.7 Cancel If you press Enter on Cancel, the Braille Sense U2 will stop recording or playing, close the Record dialog box, and return to the Media player dialog box. If you press Enter on Cancel while recording, the recorded file will not be saved. If you want to save the recorded sound to a file, and exit from this dialog box; press Enter on Stop, and then move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. You can also use Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to cancel. 9.3.4 Position Menu If you want to set a bookmark and delete a bookmark when you are listening to music or an audio file, you can execute the Position menu. This menu will also let you jump to the time you want to go to in an audio file. The Position menu has four submenus:

1. Mark Position 2. Delete Marked Position 3. Jump To Marked Position 4. Go To Time 5. Go To Percent 6. Set Start Point 7. Release Point You can move between the menus by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. To execute this menu, press Enter. 9.3.4.1 Mark Position If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is paused, a bookmark will be set. A bookmark will mark a specific location, so that you can come back directly to the spot where you placed the bookmark. To execute this function, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by pressing Space-4. 2) Press Enter on Position. 3) Move to Mark Position by pressing Space-4, and press 4) Or, press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) when playing a file, or when a Enter. file is paused. If you exit the Media player after setting a bookmark, the Braille Sense U2 asks if you want to save the bookmark. If you select Yes, the Braille Sense U2 will save the bookmark, at your current position, and play from the bookmark position the next time that you execute the Media Player. If you select No, the Braille Sense U2 will save the bookmark that is already set. If you select erase, the Braille Sense U2 will delete the bookmark that is already set. 9.3.4.2 Delete Marked Position If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is paused, it will delete the bookmark that was created before. To execute this function, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by pressing Space-4. 2) Press Enter on Position. 3) Move to Delete Marked Position by pressing Space-4, and 4) Or, you can press Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) when playing a file, or press Enter. when a file is paused. If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the Braille Sense U2 will display There is no bookmark in selected file. 9.3.4.3 Jump to Marked Position If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is paused, it will find a bookmark that has already been created. To execute this function, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by 2) Press Enter on Position. 3) Move to Jump To Marked Position by pressing Space-4, and 4) Or, you can press Enter-j (dots 2-4-5) when playing a file, or pressing Space-4. press Enter. when a file is paused. If you execute this function in a file that does not have a bookmark, the Braille Sense U2 will display There is no bookmark in selected file. 9.3.4.4 Go to Time If you execute this function when you are playing a file, or when a file is paused, it will move to a time that you specify, and begin playing the file. To execute this function, 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by pressing Space-4. 2) Press Enter on Position. 3) Move to Go To Time by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. 4) Or, you can press Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) when playing a file, or when a file is paused. 5) The Braille Sense U2 will display Go to position: 0 minute. 6) Type in time that you want to go, and press Enter. If you want to jump to more than an hour, you can use Space or :

characters to distinguish minute from hour. For example, if you wish to type 1 hour and 20 minutes, type the 1, Space or :, 20 sequentially. Also you can input 80 minutes by just typing 80. If there is no Space or :, the input value is dealt with the minute. If you type in a longer time than the total playback time, the Braille Sense U2 will display invalid time, and play from the paused location. 9.3.4.5 Go To Percent While playing or in a pause status of file, you can move to the location via a percent in a file. 1) While playing or in a pause status of file, press Space-M (dots 1-

3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, move to Position menu. 3) Press Enter. Or press a (dot 1) 4) By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, move to Go to percent menu. 5) Press Enter. Or without calling up the menu, press Backspace-p

(dots 1-2-3-4) while playing or in a pause status of file. 6) Then it will find the edit box asking Go to percent: XX. 7) Enter the percent that you want to move to. Enter the number range from 0 to 99. 8) Press Enter. 9) It will move to the point of the percent has been entered. 9.3.4.6 Set Start Point A B repeat mode allows you to play a specific part of an audio file as many times as you wish. This can be useful when learning a new language, and you need to hear the same information in a file over and over again. A B repeat mode requires setting start and end point. To execute set start point, follow these steps:

1) To set start point, press the Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) at the point where you want to start the section while playing. 2) Also, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by pressing Space-4. Press Enter on Position. Move to Set start point by pressing Space-4 and press Enter". 3) You will hear Set start point and the file will keep playing. 4) To set end point, press Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) at the point where you want to end the section. Also you can execute A B repeat mode by using Record button while playing. 1) Press Record button at the point where you want to start the 2) To set end point, press Record button at the point where you section while playing. want to end the section. But it executes record when you press Record button while pause and stop. After Set end point message, A B repeat mode allows you to play a specific part of an audio file as many times as you wish. To set how many times a specified region, go to "playback settings" under the

"settings" menu. 9.3.4.7 Release Point To release point, press Space-e. Also, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 and move to Position by pressing Space-4. Press Enter on Position. Move to Release point by pressing Space-4 and press Enter". After stop playing specified region, the file will keep playing. 9.3.5 Mark You can insert a mark while listening to music or an audio file. The mark function is stored, when you exit the program or play another content. If you wish to use the mark function, after calling the menu by press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and move to Mark by press Space-4. And then press Enter on Mark. The Mark menu has following submenus. 9.4.5.1 Set Mark If you set to mark while listening to audio file, after calling the menu and press Enter on Mark. And then move to Set Mark and press Enter. Also you can run this function by press Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) without calling the menu. Mark can be inserted up to 1000. The number of the mark will be automatically identified. 9.3.5.2 Move to Mark You can move to next or previous mark by pressing Backspace-dot 6 or Backspace-dot 3. You can also move to a mark by using menu. Call up the menu by press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and move to Mark. And then press Enter on Mark. And move to the Previous Mark or the Next Mark and press Enter. You can also move to a mark by the mark number. 1) Call up the menu and press Enter on Mark. And then move to Move To Mark. 2) Press Enter on Move To Mark. Or press Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5) without calling the menu. Input the mark number in the edit box of Move to mark: and If you input non-existing mark number, the edit box of Move to mark: will be displayed again after Mark x does not exist message. 3) 4) press Enter. 9.3.5.3 Delete Mark You can delete a mark. 1) Call up the menu and press Enter on Mark. And then move to Delete mark. 2) Press Enter on Delete Mark. Or press Backspace-d (dots 1-

4-5) without calling the menu. 3) 4) Input the mark number which will be deleted in the edit box of Enter mark name to delete: and press Enter. If you input non-existing mark number, the edit box of Enter mark name to delete: will be displayed again after input error. message. 9.3.5.4 Mark Manager You can open mark manager dialog box to check mark information of the current audio file by pressing Backspace-k (dots 1-3). You can also open dialog box by using the menu. Call up the menu by press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) and move to Mark. And then press Enter on Mark. And move to Mark Manager and press Enter. The dialog box consists of mark list, Move button, Delete button, Close button. You can go to each control by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). There are all marks of the current file in the mark list with information of name of mark: setting time of mark. You can go to the other information in the list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can delete a mark in the list by pressing Enter or Space-d (dots 1-

4-5) after going to Delete button by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Also, you can play the contents from the specific mark by pressing Enter on the mark name or by pressing Enter after going to Move button by pressing tab (Space-4-5). The mark dialog box is closed after playing the contents. If you want to close the mark manager dialog box, press Enter on Close button or press Space-e (dots 1-5). 9.3.6 Settings Through this menu, you can change settings about recording, playing, and general Media player options. To use the Settings menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the Media player menu. Press Space-4 three times to reach Settings, and then press Enter. Or, you can press s in the Media player menu. Then, the Settings submenu will appear, which contains three items: Configuration, Playback Settings, Record Settings, and Effect settings. 9.3.6.1 Configuration Dialog Box If you press Enter on the first item, Configuration, or press Backspace-c (dots 1-4) in the Media player dialog box, the Configuration dialog box will be displayed, which contains the following: the Display title option, the Store position of file if longer than:, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2). And you can move between options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The Display title option allows you to set whether or not you can hear the track title when you move to previous/next track or transfer to next track automatically. If this is set to On, you can hear the track title. The default value is set to Off, namely you cant hear the track title when move to previous/next track. You can change the on or off by pressing Space. The Store position of file if longer than: option allows you to set the last position of audio file which have playing time more than you designated. The default is set to Off and it means the last position will not be saved. You can set the value to 5, 10, 30, 60 minutes. If you set the value to 30 minutes, when you move to another audio file or you exit the Media program, you can save the last position of currently playing audio file if the audio has playing time over 30 minutes. Sometimes when you dont want to save the position of music but want to save the position of audio books, this option is very useful. Once the last position is saved, from that time, you can play the audio from the last position. To save the changed settings and exit, press Enter after you change an option, or move to the Confirm button by pressing Space-4-5 repeatedly. If you want to cancel the changes you made, and exit this dialog box, press Space-e (dots 1-5), or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). You can also press Enter on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without changing any options. The options set in this dialog box only have an effect in Media player. If hold is set to Off, you can call up the program menu by pressing F1, and you can use another program. 9.3.6.2 Playback Settings Dialog Box If you press Enter on Playback Settings, or press p (dots 1-2-3-4) on the Settings menu, the Playback Settings dialog box will be displayed. In this dialog box, pressing Space-4-5 or Space-1-2 will circulate among setting options, Confirm and Cancel. The setting options are the Display time option, the Repeat option, the Playlist option, the Shuffle, the Times to repeat the specified track, the Set speed option and Time index option. Press Space-4 or Space-1 to move from one option to the next or previous option. You can also open this dialog box by pressing Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) in the Media player dialog box. The Display time option allows you to set which type of time messages will be displayed in the playback information tab. You can set it to either Elapsed time or Remaining time. You can change its value by pressing Space on time. The Repeat option allows you to set whether all files in the play list will be played repeatedly. If it this option is set to Yes, all files in the play list will be played repeatedly, and if it is set to No, the Braille Sense U2 will stop playing after playing the last file in the play list. Again, you can change the value of this option by pressing Space on Repeat. The next option is Playlist option. When you want to play audio files from File Manager, you can select multiple files by pressing Space and then play files by pressing Enter. At this time, if the play list has had a list of audio files, you will be asked if you want to overwrite the play list or you want to append the selected files into the play list. The default value is Overwrite and it means the play list will be filled with the selected files. And if you press Space then the value will be set to Append and the play list will be appended with the selected files. The Shuffle option allows you to set the audio playback order. The default value is set to Off and you can play audio files in the playlist in order but if you set Shuffle to On, The playlist is reorganized in random. If you have just one audio file in the playlist and you switch the option to On, you will encounter message saying Shuffle mode not available. Times to repeat the specified track allow you to set how many times you wish to repeat, when you execute section repetition. Times to repeat the specified track can be selected the value from 1 to 10 or unlimited. The default setting is 3. Pressing Space increases the times to repeat the specified track and Backspace decreases the times to repeat the specified track. The Set speed option allows you to set the audio playback speed. The speed level ranges from 1 to 10. The default setting is the 5. If you change the value, press Space or Backspace. The higher the number, audio playback speed is fast. The Time index option allows you to set time to jump. The default value is set to 1 minute. The values are 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes and 1 hour. You can change the value by Space or Backspace. Also you can change the value of time index by pressing dot 2 or dot 5 without calling this option. And if you press dots 2-5, you can hear the current time index. After changing time index, if you press dot 1 or dot 4, you can jump to previous or next position by time index. For example, time index is set to 1 minute. And if you press dot 1, you can jump to previous position by 1 minute. And if you press dot 4, you can jump to next position by 1 minute and then listen to audio file. To save the changed settings and exit from this dialog box, press Enter after you change all the options you want to change, or move to the Confirm button by pressing Space-4-5 or Space-1-2 repeatedly, and then press Enter. If you want to cancel the changes, and exit from this dialog box, press enter on the Cancel button, or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 9.3.6.3 Record Settings Dialog Box If you press enter on Record Settings in the Settings menu, or press Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) in the Media player dialog box, the Braille Sense U2 will display the Record Settings dialog box, which contains Recording type, Sample rate option, Bitrate option(only when recording type is mp3), Bits per channel option(only when recording type is wav), Line in mode option, Set folder, Confirm button and a Cancel button. You can move between controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). And you can move between options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The Recoding type allows you to set the default file type of recording file. Its default value is set to mp3. You can select between wav and mp3 the value by pressing Space. The three options are used to control the quality of recorded sound. Higher values in Sample rate, Bitrate and Bits per channel means a better quality of recorded sound, as well as a larger file size of recorded files. In other words, if you want to record high quality sound, the total time the Braille Sense U2 can record will be shortened. On the other hand, if you set the lower values of these options, the Braille Sense U2 can record sound longer, although the sound quality may not be as good as when these options are set to higher values. You can change these values by pressing Space. When you record the file using the line-in-cable, you must set Line in mode option to On. The Set folder allows you to set the default folder where the recorded files will be saved. Its default value is set to /flashdisk/media/record. To specify a different folder, press Enter on Set folder, and the same dialog box as the Open Folder dialog box will be displayed. Select a folder in the same way as in the Open Folder dialog box. If you save the changed settings, and exit from this dialog box, press Enter after changing all of the options you want to change, or move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you want to cancel the changes you made, press Enter on the Cancel button, or press Space-e (dots 1-5). 9.3.6.4 Effect Settings Dialog Box Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4)or F2 in media player program, move to Settings menu and press Enter. By pressing Space-4, move to Effect settings. Press Enter on Effect settings or press E. Or press Enter-e (dots 1-5) in Play list tab or Playback information tab. Effect settings dialog box will be displayed, which contains the following: the Equalizer option, BassBoost option, Surround option, 3D effect option, Reverb option, Echo option, Confirm button, and Cancel button. You can move between controls by pressing Tab

(Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). And you can move between options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The Equalizer option is used to adjust playing type such as rock, pop, soul, classical, Dance, Heavy, Disco, Soft, 3D and Hall. The Bassboost option is used to emphasize bass sound. The value can be entered from 0 to 20 that you want to enter the value in edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger bass sound you will hear. The Surround option is used to hear ambient sound more efficiently. The value can be entered from 0 to 100 that you want to enter the value in edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger surround sound you will hear. The 3D Effect option is used to hear surround effect more efficiently. The value can be entered from 0 to 100 that you want to enter the value in edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger 3D sound you will hear. The Reverb option is used to hear reverberation sound more efficiently. The value can be entered from 0 to 100 that you want to enter the value in edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger reverb sound you will hear. The Echo option is used to hear echo sound more efficiently. The value can be entered from 0 to 100 that you want to enter the value in edit box. The higher value you enter, the stronger echo sound you will hear. To save the changed settings and exit from this dialog box, press Enter after you change all the options you want to change, or move to the Confirm button by pressing Tab(Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab(Space-1-2) repeatedly, and then press Enter. If you want to cancel the changes, and exit from this dialog box, press enter on the Cancel button, or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 9.4 Additional features 9.4.1 Moving features using the cursor keys While playing an audio file, pressing cursor key in Playback information tab will move to the specific region which divides 32 sections within an audio file and play. If you press number 1 cursor key, it will play from the beginning of the file. And if you press number 32 cursor key, it will play from the end of the file. 9.5 Hot Keys in the Media Player 1) Hot Keys for the Commands for the File Menu Open file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Open folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) 2) Hot Keys for Commands While in the Playback menu Play: Enter, Play button Previous track: Dot 3, Previous button Next track: Dot 6, Next button Back 5 track: Dots 2-3 Forward 5 track: Dots 5-6 First track: Dots 1-3 Last track: Dots 4-6 Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button Speed up: Dots 3-4-5 Slow down: Dots 1-2-6 Pause/continue: Space, Play button Stop: Backspace, Stop button Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5 Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4 Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1 Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 3) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Record Dialog Box Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record button Record: Record button Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button Play: Play button Pause/continue play: Space, Play button Stop: Backspace, Stop button 4) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Position Menu Set bookmark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete bookmark: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Jump to bookmark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5) Go to position: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) 5) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Mark Set mark: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Move to mark: Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5) Move to previous mark: Backspace-dot 3 Move to next mark: Backspace-dot 6 Delete mark: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5) Mark manager: Backspace-k (dots 1-3) 6) Hot Keys for the Commands in the Setting Menu Configuration dialog box: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) Effect settings dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5) 7) Hot keys for toggling options. Toggle display time between elapsed time and remaining time: t

(dots 2-3-4-5) Toggle repeat between Yes and No: r (dots 1-2-3-5) Toggle shuffle between On and Off: s (dots 2-3-4) 10. FM Radio In order to use FM Radio program in the Braille Sense U2, please connect the headphone to the headphone jack of the Braille Sense U2. The headphone connected to the Braille Sense U2 will work as a radio antenna. In the program menu, please press scroll buttons to move to the FM Radio and press Enter, or just press r (dots 1-2-3-5) in order to execute FM Radio program. Once the FM Radio program is executed, your Braille Sense U2 will announce the radio frequency. If you had executed the FM Radio program, the Braille Sense U2 will tune to the frequency that you listened to and announce the frequency. For your reference, the frequency range of the Braille Sense U2 is from 87.5MHz to 108MHz. 10.1 Listening to FM Radio via internal speakers When you execute FM Radio program after connecting the headphone to the headphone jack, sound from the radio will output through the headphone. If you want to listen to the radio through not only the headphone but also internal speakers, please set as follows;

1) Press Space-X (dots 1-3-4-6) or X (dots 1-3-4-6) while outputting sound from the radio, it enables to output through the internal speakers. To set enabling the internal speaker using Menu as follows. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call the FM Radio menu and press Enter at File menu and then press Enter at Settings. 2) Or without calling menu, press Enter-e (dots 1-5) in order to 3) Then the dialog box will be opened and Internal speaker: No is 4) Press Space once to switch from No to Yes and press call the dialog box. announced in voice. Enter. Then you can hear the radio sound from both headphone and internal speakers. This setting is valid only in the FM Radio program. If you exit from FM Radio program and hear the sound through speakers, you have to unplug the headphone. If the external speakers are selected in the Settings dialog box and Space-4 is pressed, the Braille Sense U2 will announce Volume. You can adjust the radio volume by pressing Space. Radio volume can be adjusted without calling dialog box. Space-down scroll button will decrease the volume and Space-up scroll button will increase the radio volume. 10.2 Frequency control During listening to the radio, if you want to tune to the other frequency, please press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. Move to Frequency and press Enter. Frequency menu consists of as follows. 1) Previous Frequency 2) Next Frequency 3) Auto Scan Backward 4) Auto Scan Forward 5) Go to Frequency To navigate between these items, press Space-1 or Space-4. Pressing Enter will execute. Without calling the menu, if you press dot 2, your Braille Sense U2 will search the next frequency. If you press dot 5, your Braille Sense U2 will search the previous frequency. If you press dot 6, the frequency will increase by 0.1MHz. If you press dot 3, the frequency will decrease by 0.1MHz. You can input the frequency directly by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4). If you press Space-f (dots 1-2-4), then the dialog box will be opened. You can input the frequency in numbers and press Enter to move to that frequency. Besides using the Braille keys on the top panel, you can use audio buttons on the front panel. In order to use the audio buttons on the front panel, the audio mode switch should be moved to FM that is the left side of the switch. After setting the audio mode switch, pressing previous button will search the previous frequency and pressing next button will search the next frequency. 10.3 Add of the channel and move among channels During listening to the radio, you can add the frequency which you are listening to. Please do as follows;

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu and press 2) And then press Enter at Add Preset or press Enter-s (dots 2-

Enter at Presets. 3-4) without calling menu. 3) Then add preset dialog box will be opened and Frequency:

(current frequency) will be announced. 4) Press Space-4-5. 5) Then Label: is announced. Please input the name of the channel to be added. 6) Press Space-4-5 to move to Confirm and press Enter. If you want to add the frequency other than the frequency which you are listening to, input the frequency when Frequency: (The current frequency is displayed in the dialog box.) After you add all the desired channels, you can move to the previous channel by pressing dot 1, and move to the next channel by pressing dot 4. In order to delete any channel, move to the channel to be deleted and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). If Space-d (dots 1-2-4) is pressed, the selected channel will be deleted without any warning message. You can add and delete channels in the presets manager dialog box. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call menu, press Enter at Presets, move to the Preset Manager and press Enter. Or you can press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) without calling menu to open the preset manager dialog box. Preset manager dialog box consist of added preset list, Add button, Delete button, Modify button and Close button. You can move from one control to the next control by pressing tab (Space-4-5 or F3) or shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3). If you press Add button, Add dialog box that was explained above is opened. You can add the channels as explained above. And if you want to change the label of the added channel, move to the desired channel item in the added channel list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4, and press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Modify button and press Enter. Then the Modify dialog box will be opened. The structure of the Modify dialog box is almost the same as that of Add dialog box. The difference between these two dialog boxes is that the channel label and frequency are displayed on the Modify dialog box. If you want to delete any channel from the added channels, select the desired channel in the channel list and move to Delete button by pressing tab (Space-1-2) and press Enter. In order to exit from the preset manager dialog box, press Enter at the Close button, or just press Space-e (dots 1-5). Adding the channel and move among the added channels are available using audio buttons on the front panel, too. In order to use the audio buttons, audio mode switch should be set to FM radio. If you press record button more than 2 seconds, Add dialog box will be opened. In order to move to the previous channel to be added, press previous button for more than 2 seconds. Pressing next button for more than 2 seconds will move to the next channel to be added. Pressing stop button for more than 2 seconds will delete the selected channel. 10.4 Recording FM Radio sound If you want to record the radio, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call menu, move to Record (r) and press Enter. Or just press Enter-r

(dots 1-2-3-5) without calling menu. Then the record dialog box will be opened and the Braille Sense U2 starts recording. The record dialog box consists of as follows. 1. Record status status bar 2. Pause/Continue button 3. Stop button 4. Cancel button You can move among these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5 or F3) or shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3). While recording the radio, if you press Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) and press Enter on Pause button or press a (dot 1), recording will pause. And the name of button is changed to Continue. If you press Continue button or press g (dots 1-2-4-5), recording will be continued. While recording the radio, if you want to stop the recording, press s

(dots 2-3-4). Or press Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) and press Enter on Stop button. To check time information while recording the radio, press Space-4. It will announce the current recording run time and total possible recording time. Recorded files will be saved in the flashdisk/media/radio folder. The file name will be added channel label (frequency)-xx.mp3. xx will start from 01 and increased by one when recording the radio sound. If unregistered channel is recorded, Radio will be used as a file name instead of added channel label. If you stop recording, the record dialog box will be exited automatically. If you press Enter at Cancel button or press c (dots 1-4), the recorded file will not be saved and exit the dialog box. During recording, you cannot change the channel and frequency. During listening to the radio, you can record without calling the record dialog box by pressing the record button on the front panel. Before you use the record button out of the audio buttons on the front panel, please set the audio mode switch to the FM radio mode. If you press the record button, the record dialog box will be opened and recording will start. If you press stop button on the front panel during recording, recording will stop and the recorded audio file will be saved. If you press the pause button during recording, the pause button will be changed to the continue button. Please press the continue button to continue recording. Pressing previous button or next button will move among controls in the record dialog box. 10.4.1 Recording Setting Dialog Box If you press enter on Record Settings in the File menu, or press Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) , the Braille Sense U2 will display the Record Settings dialog box, which contains Recording type, Sample rate option, Bitrate option(only when recording type is mp3), Bits per channel option(only when recording type is wav), Preset option, Record folder, Confirm button and a Cancel button. You can move between controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2). And you can move between options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. The Recoding type allows you to set the default file type of recording file. Its default value is set to mp3. You can select between wav and mp3 the value by pressing Space. Please do as follows;

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call menu and press Enter at File. 2) Press Enter at Record Settings. Or press BackSpace-s (dots 2-3-4) without calling menu. 3) Then the record dialog box will be opened and Recoding type:

mp3 is announced. There are three options such as mp3

(16000Hz~22050Hz), mp3 (32000Hz, 44100Hz), Wav. The three options are used to control the quality of recorded sound. You can change these values by pressing Space. The three options are used to control the quality of recorded sound. Higher values in Sample rate, Bitrate and Bits per channel means a better quality of recorded sound, as well as a larger file size of recorded files. In other words, if you want to record high quality sound, the total time the Braille Sense U2 can record will be shortened. On the other hand, if you set the lower values of these options, the Braille Sense U2 can record sound longer, although the sound quality may not be as good as when these options are set to higher values. You can change these values by pressing Space. Below are available options:

- Sample rate: 16000Hz, 22050Hz, 24000Hz (mp3) 8000Hz, 11025Hz, 22050Hz, 44100Hz (wav)

- Bitrate: 64k, 80k, 96k, 112k,128k,160k

- Bits per channel:8 bits, 16 bits Also Preset option allows you to choose Stereo or Mono as recording type. The Record folder allows you to set the default folder where the recorded files will be saved. Its default value is set to

/flashdisk/media/radio. When Record folder: /flashdisk/media/radio/ is displayed, press Enter Then the list in the radio folder will be displayed. Press Backspace to move to upper level folder, and press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to desired folder. Press Space at the desired folder and press Enter. Then Record folder: (Changed folder) is announced. Press Tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm button and press Enter. 10.5 Additional features 1. Sensitivity adjustment When you activate the FM Radio program, if the Braille Sense U2 cannot tune to the broadcasting frequency, please adjust the sensitivity. In order to adjust the sensitivity, call Settings dialog box as explained in the Section 9.1. And press Space-4 to move to Sensitivity and press Space or Backspace to adjust the sensitivity. Higher value will make the Braille Sense U2 radio be more sensitive. If the sensitivity is increased, you can tune to more frequencies. 2. Mute During listening to the radio, if you want to make it silent for a while, press Space. This is mute function. Pressing Space once again will cancel mute mode. Or you can use mute function by pressing stop button on the front panel and cancel mute mode by pressing play button on the front panel. If mute mode is activated, radio sound will not be heard but TTS (text to speech) sound will be heard. 10.6 Hot Keys in the FM Radio Call up the sets dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Call up the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6) or X (dots 1-3-4-6) Move to next frequency: dot 6 Move to previous frequency: dot 3 Auto previous frequency: dot 2 or short press previous button Auto next frequency: dot 5 or short press next button Go to frequency: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to previous preset: dot 1 or long press previous button Move to next preset: dot 4 or long press next button Registry preset: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) or long press record button Delete the preset: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) or long press stop button Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Record start/pause: short press record button Record stop: short press stop button Mute on: short press stop button or Space Mute off: short press play button or Space Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button 11. Web Browser You can use the Web browser on the Braille Sense U2 to read pages on the Internet, as well as reading html books that you have saved to disk. In addition, you can download and read books from places such as Web Braille, and BookShare. Note that you will need to have setup an account in order to access many of the books on these sites. When you want to launch the Web browser, press Enter on the Web browser in the program menu. Or, you can press b (dots 1-2) in the program menu. You can also launch the Web browser by pressing Space-w (dots 2-4-5-6) while you are in the program menu. When you press these keys, the Braille Sense U2, will open up a computer edit box. You can then type in the URL that you want to go to. After you type in youre the web page address, press Enter, to open the web page. Then, the Web browser will open, and take you to the specific URL that you typed in. The Braille Sense U2 will connect to the web page that is registered as the home page in the Web browser. Please note that the Web browser supports SSL 1.0 to 3.0. A more detailed explanation of the Web browser can be found within this chapter. 11.1 File The File menu can be executed by selecting File after pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, which calls up the Web browser menu. File will appear on the Braille display. When you press Enter on File, you can enter into the File menu. To move from one submenu to another submenu, press the up arrow (Space-1) or the down arrow

(Space-4). The following is a detailed explanation of the Web browser File menu. 11.1.1 Open URL Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the Web browser menu. Then, move to File, and press Enter. The first item that is displayed on the Braille display is Open URL. Press Enter to get into the Open URL edit window, or press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) while the Web browser is open. When Open URL is executed, the edit window for an address will be displayed. On the Braille display, you will see the address of the current page. You can enter a new web page address that you want to connect to. You need to enter the new address in computer Braille such as www.google.com. Then, press Enter. You can check the addresses that have been entered previously by pressing the down arrow (Space-4). Move to the address that you want to open using the up arrow (Space-1) or the down arrow (Space-4), and press Enter when the desired URL is displayed on the Braille display. You can go to a specific web page either by typing in a new address, or by selecting one of the previously entered addresses. If the Braille Sense U2 cannot connect to the desired web page, and it only shows progress on the Braille display, press BackSpace-enter to stop connecting, and call up Open URL again. You can type in the address and try to connect again. You can stop the Web browser from connecting by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Sometimes, this can happen due to network or Internet problems. 11.1.2 Open In order to enter into Open, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and press Enter on File. Go to Open by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) when the Web browser is active. Then the Open dialog box will show up. Open dialog box consists of file list, File name, Type, Confirm button and Cancel button. You can move among those controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). When the Open dialog box is opened, File name will be focused. Type in a file name, and press Enter, or press shift-tab (Space-1-2) to move to the file list. Select the desired file name, and press Enter. The default folder is /flashdisk/download, and it can be changed by the same method as explained in the File manager. There are three types of files in Type; *.*, htm, html. Default is *.*

and it means that all types of files will be shown in the file list. At the Type, press Space-1 or Space-4 to select the file type. In order to check the current path, press Space-3-4. You can use this command in the following dialog boxes: Save As, Add To Favorites, and the Favorites List. 11.1.3 Save As In order to execute Save As, call up the menu by pressing Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on File. Move to Save As by pressing Space-4 and press Enter, or press Space-s (dots 2-3-4) while the Web browser is activated. When you press Enter on Save As, the Save As dialog box will appear. Here you can type in a new file name, and press Enter to save the file as a new file. Save As will give you the opportunity to save html files with different file names. This is similar to Save As in the word processor. In this dialog box, there are File name edit combo box, Type combo box, Confirm button, Cancel button and file list. You can move among these items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2). The first item to be displayed when Save As is executed is File name edit combo box. You can type in the file name to be saved in this edit box. If you want to edit the file name that is displayed on the Braille display, press the cursor routing key that corresponds with the text that you want to edit. Please remember that : cannot be used in file names. You have to delete : if there is one in your file name. If you want to select the file name from the existing file name, press shift-tab (Space-1-2) to move to file list. The default folder is

/flashdisk/download. In order to move to upper level, press Backspace and if you want to enter the selected folder or select a file, press Enter on the folder or file that you want to select. And press Space-4 or Space-1 in order to move next or previous folder or file. There is a Type option combo box that is the next item of File name edit combo box. You can move from File name to Type by pressing Space-4-5. The available file types are htm, html, brl, brf and txt file format. Use Space-4 or Space-1 to select the file type that you want. Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm and press Enter to save as the file name and type as selected. Or, press tab again to move to Cancel and press Enter to cancel Save As. If you do not want to save with a new file name, press escape (Space-

e) or exit (Space-z). 11.1.4 Page Information Page Information shows how many tables, forms, and controls are in the current page. In order to enter into Page Information, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and press Enter on File. Move to Page Information by pressing Space-4 a few times, and then press Enter. Or, you can press the letter I (dots 2-4). Page Information can be shown in one line. However, if there are too many characters to be displayed, you will need to press the scroll button to read the additional lines. 11.1.5 Exit This command terminates the Web Browser, and returns the Braille Sense U2 to the program list. You can exit from the Web browser by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), or by selecting Exit from the Web browser file menu. 11.2 Read The Read menu can read the page generally. In order to call up the Read menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and press Enter on Read or press r. The Read menu has three submenus:

1. Read From Beginning To Cursor 2. Read From Cursor To End 3. Auto Scroll You can move between the menus by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. To execute the menu, press Enter. 11.2.1 Read from Beginning to Cursor This function will read the current page from the beginning to the cursor location. To execute this function, press Enter on Read From Beginning To Cursor in the Read menu. Or, you can press BackSpace-g (1-2-4-5) when you open a web page. If you want to quit this function before the cursor location, press BackSpace-enter. If you execute this function, the Braille display and LCD change to correspond with the voice output. 11.2.2 Read from Cursor to End This function will read the current page from the cursor to the end of the current page. To execute it, press Enter on Read From Cursor To End in the Read menu. Or you can press Enter-g (1-2-4-5) when you open a web page. If you want to quit this function before the end of the current page, press BackSpace-enter. If you execute this function, the Braille display and LCD change to correspond with the voice output. 11.2.3 Auto Scroll This function will scroll the current page from the cursor to the end of the current page. To execute the Auto Scroll function, press Enter on Auto Scroll in the Read menu. Or, you can press the up and down scroll buttons simultaneously when you open a web page. If you quit this function before the end of current page, you can press Backspace-enter. If you execute this function, the Braille display and LCD change to correspond with the voice output. For a faster scroll during scrolling, press Space-6. For a slower scroll during scrolling, press the Space-3. 11.3 Edit Edit menu is used to copy any part of the web page or add it to the clipboard. In order to call up the Edit menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and press Enter on Edit or press e (dots 1-5). 11.3.1 Start selection This command cannot be used on the controls in the web page, but can be used on the text or on the edit box. This means that it cannot be used on the links when setting the block, but it can be used to make selection to make a block on the text or on the edit box of the bulletin board. In order to use this command, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), move to Edit menu by pressing Space-4 and press Enter at the starting point of selection. And press Enter on the Start Selection. Then move to the end of selection that you want to select. You can also set the starting point of the block by pressing Enter-b

(dots 1-2) without calling up the menu. 11.3.2 Copy The selected part of the web page can be copied to the edit box in the web page, word documents or the edit box of the other programs. To copy the selected part of the web page, press Space-m (dots 1-3-

4), move to the Edit menu by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. And move to Copy by pressing Space-4 and press Enter on Copy. Or you can copy the selected part by pressing Enter-c (dots 1-4) without calling up the menu. 11.3.3 Add to clipboard You can copy various parts of the web page to the clipboard, and then you can copy them to the edit box or the other program at once. In order to add the selected parts of the web page by pressing Space-m

(dots 1-3-4), move to Edit menu by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. And press Space-4 to move to the Add To Clipboard and press Enter. Or you can add to the clipboard by pressing Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) without calling up the menu. 11.3.4 Copy URL When you use the Copy URL function you can copy the address of the web page that you are on. In order to copy the address of web page, you press the Space-m (dots 1-3-4), move to Edit menu by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. And press Space-4 to move to the Copy URL and press Enter. Or you can copy to URL by pressing Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5) without calling up the menu. The web address of the page will then be placed on the clipboard. You can paste it to a document, or wherever you can paste text on the Braille Sense U2. 11.3.5 Copy Link The Copy Link function allows you to copy a link in the web page that you are on. For example, if you tab (space 4-5) to a link, and select the Copy Link function, then the link will be copied to the clipboard. In order to copy a link in the web page, you press the Space-m (dots 1-

3-4), move to Edit menu by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. And press Space-4 to move to the Copy Link and press Enter. Or you can copy to link by pressing Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) without calling up the menu. The link will then be placed on the clipboard, so that you can paste it to a document, or wherever you can paste text in the Braille Sense U2. 11.4 Go To In order to enter into the Go To menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and go to Go To by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. The sub menus are explained in the following sections. 11.4.1 Go to Home Page The first page that your Web browser loads when the Web browser opens is called the home page. You can set your favorite site as your home page. As soon as your home page is set, your Web browser will show you the same home page every time you start the Web Browser. The default home page is www.Hims-inc.com. In order to move to default home page while you are reading another web page, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. The first sub menu in the Go To menu is Go To Home Page. You can activate Go To Home Page by pressing Enter, or by pressing Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5) while your Web browser is opened. 11.4.2 Go to Previous Page The previous page is the page shown just before the current page. For example, when the Web browser is activated, the first page that opens is the home page that is set as the default home page on the Braille Sense U2. You can search and load the web page of google, which is www.google.com. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will connect to the Yahoo web page. When Go To Previous Page is activated, the Braille Sense U2 will show you the last position in the previous page (the home page) that was displayed before the current page. In order to move to the previous page, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Go to Go To Previous Page by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Or, you can press Backspace-p

(dots 1-2-3-4) or Backspace with Space-3. This command does not work on the first page in the Braille Sense U2 because there is no previous page when you first open the Web Browser. 11.4.3 Go to Next Page When you have opened multiple web pages, you can go back and forth from the current page to the previous page, or to the next page. For example, when you first open the Web Browser, you connect to your home page. Then, you connect to the web site of Google, and next, you connect to the Lycos web site. In this case, the next page from the Google web site is the Lycos web site. In order to move to the next page, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and then go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Go to the Go To Next Page by pressing Space-4, and press Enter, or you can press Backspace-n

(dots 1-3-4-5) or Backspace with Space-6. This command does not work on the last page because there is no page after the last page. 11.4.4 Go to Previous Heading If you activate the Go To Previous Heading function, you can go to a heading that is located before your current location. To execute the Go To Previous Heading function, open the menu by pressing Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Space-4 repeatedly to move to the Go To menu. Press Enter on Go To. Then, use Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Go To Previous Heading, and press Enter. Or, press u

(dots 1-3-6) in the submenu. To activate this function without opening up the menu, press Backspace-b (dots 1-2) while in a web page. 11.4.5 Go to Next Heading If you activate the Go To Next Heading function, you can go forward to a heading from your current location. To execute the Go To Next Heading function, open up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2, and press Space-4 repeatedly to move to the Go To menu. Press Enter on Go To. Then, use Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Go To Next Heading. Then, press Enter on Go To Next Heading. Or, just press d (dots 1-4-5) in the submenu. You can also activate this function without opening up the menu by pressing Backspace-f (dots 1-

2-4) while you are in a web page. 11.4.6 Go to Previous/Next Text This menu can be used to go to the next text or the previous text while you are reading the web page. In order to execute the Go To Next Text menu, do the following:

1) Call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. 2) Move to Go To by pressing Space-4. 3) Press Enter on the Go To menu 4) Press Space-4 until Go To Next Text will be displayed. Or, you can press a (dots 1) in order to move to Go To Next Text directly. 5) Press Enter on Go To Next Text. Or you can call up the Go To Next Text menu by pressing Space-1-2-

4-5-6 while the web page is being read. In order to execute Go To Previous Text menu, do the following:

1) Call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. 2) Move to Go To by pressing Space-4. 3) Press Enter on the Go To menu. 4) Press Space-4 until Go To Previous Text is displayed. Or, you can press b (dot 1-2) in order to move to Go To Previous Text directly. 5) Press Enter on Go To Previous Text. Or, you can call up the Go To Previous Text menu by pressing Space-

2-4-6 while a web page is being read. 11.4.7 Refresh If a web page opens incorrectly due to a network problem, or if you want to refresh the current page, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Go to Refresh by pressing Space-4, and press Enter, or you can press Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) without calling up the menu. 11.4.8 History The History is the list of the web page addresses (and their titles) that have been visited either by clicking on a link or by typing in the address directly. When History is executed, the Braille Sense U2 will display the titles of the web pages in the history list. If you have visited a web page such as www.google.com previously, the history list on the Braille Sense U2 will show you the title of the page as, Google. In order to visit the Yahoo web site by using the history list, first, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Go to History by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. You can always open the history list by pressing Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) while the Web browser is running. The Braille Sense U2 will show the history list. Move to the title of the web site that you want to select by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you want the History list to show the web address, instead of the title, of the website, you can press Space-i (dots 2-4). If you press Space-

4, the display will show the title again, instead of the address. After you move to the desired web site, you should then press Enter to connect to that web site. In order to delete an undesired item from the history list, select that item on the history list, and press the del key (Space-d (dots 1-4-5)). And if you want to delete the all file in history list, press the Enter-a (dot 1) and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). The maximum number of items in the history list is 300. If the list exceeds 300 items, the oldest item will be deleted automatically from the history list, and the new item will be added as the first item on the list. 11.4.9 Find This feature is similar to the function of Find in the word processor. The Find dialog box will allow you to find text on the current web page. In order to execute the Find menu, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Go to Find by pressing Space-4, and press Enter, or you can press Space-f (dots 1-2-4) while the Web browser is loaded. When Find is executed, the dialog box that contains the edit window for entering text and the searching direction will appear. As in any other dialog box, you can press the tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2) to move from one control to another. Enter the text to search for, and select the search direction. Then, press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 will then find the text, and move the cursor position to the text. The default search direction is set to Forward. This means that the Braille Sense U2 will search for the specified text from the current cursor position to the end of the page. If you want to change the search direction, select Backward, and then press Enter. The selected search direction will remain until the Web browser is closed, unless you choose the other direction. 11.4.10 Find Again The Find Again function searches the text again in the direction that you have selected. In order to enter into Find Again, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2, and go to the Go To menu by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to Find Again by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-f (dots 1-2-4), which is the hot key for Find Again while the Web browser is running. Find Again finds the text that you have entered in Find. There is no edit box in Find Again. 11.4.11 Links list This function will list all the links in the current page. If you want to activate it, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and press Enter on Links list in Go To menu. Or without calling up the menu, press BackSpace-i

(dots 2-4). Then you will see Links list dialog box. In the dialog box, you can find the following controls: links list, Focus link button, Activate link button, and Cancel button. You can move control by control by pressing Space-4-5 or Space-1-2. In the links list, you can move by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to move to the selected page in links list, press Enter on the link of focus in links list. Or move to Activate link button by pressing Space-4-5 or Space-1-2 and press Enter there. If you want to go to the link position selected in links list, move to Focus link button by pressing Space-4-5, and press Enter there. To close the dialog box, move to Cancel button, and press Enter there. Or just press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or press Space-e (dots 1-

5). 11.5 Favorites In order to enter into Favorites, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Favorites by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. If there are web sites that you frequently visit, it would be very inconvenient to enter the long address every time. In such a case, you can add these web site addresses in the Favorites list. Then, you can visit the web sites that are stored in your Favorites list by simply selecting the address in the Favorites list. 11.5.1 Set Current As Your Home Page The home page is the web site that you connect to automatically when the Web browser is opened. The user can set any web site as the home page. In order to set the home page, you have to go to the web page that you want to register as the home page. While the web page is displayed, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Favorites by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Then Set Current As Your Home Page will be displayed on the Braille display and press Enter. Then, the current web site will be registered as your home page automatically, and the Braille Sense U2 will say Saved as home page, and it displays the current web page. Or, you can press Enter-s (dots 2-

3-4) without calling up menu. 11.5.2 Add to Favorites You can add the web page that you are reading now to the Favorites list. In order to add the web page to the Favorites list, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2, and move to Favorites by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Then, move to Add To Favorites by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. You can activate Add To Favorites by pressing Backspace-a (dot 1) when the Web browser is running. Add To Favorites is a dialog box that contains the following: a list box that shows the current favorites list (including the folders and files of your favorites), an edit window for the web page address where you can enter, type, confirm, and cancel. You can move from one item to the next by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). When you open Add To Favorites, the edit window will appear first. In this edit window, you can type in the title of the current web page that you are reading. The extension name (.URL) will be attached automatically to the title name that you have written. If you want to edit only a part of the current title name, press the cursor routing key that is furthest to the left. Then, the current title name will be displayed on the Braille display. You can press the cursor routing key where you want to edit the text, and then modify it. Make sure that you do not use : in the title name. The favorites list will be saved in the /flashdisk/favorites folder. This folder is the default folder, and you cannot make your desired folder above this folder (a higher level folder). If you want to add your Favorites list to the folder you made, rather than the default folder, press shift-tab (Space-1-2), and select the desired folder by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Then, press Enter. 11.5.3 Favorites List You can check the list of the web sites that are saved in Add To Favorites. The user can copy, delete, or rename the title of the sites in the favorites list. In order to open the Favorites list, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and move to Favorites by pressing Space-4. Then, press Enter. Move to the Favorites List by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) while the Web browser is running. When you press these keys, the Braille Sense U2, will display the favorites list dialog box. This dialog box contains the following: the favorites list, an edit window for the title, a type combo box, a confirm button, and a cancel button. You can move from one item to the next by pressing the tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). When the Favorites List is open, an edit window will appear first. The edit window will display the message, Name:. You can enter one of the titles that you have entered previously. You can open the web page by pressing Enter after entering the title. If there are no titles that match the one you entered, the Braille Sense U2 will say invalid name and return to the edit window. If there is a title in the Favorites list, the Braille Sense U2 will connect to the web page. If you do not remember the exact title, you can find it from the Favorites list, using the method that is outlined below. When the edit window appears, press shift-tab (Space-1-2) in order to move to the Favorites list. Then the Braille Sense U2 will display the file list. You can move between folders and files by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Press Enter on the title of the web site that you want to visit. On this list, folders are enclosed by quotation marks. When you press Enter on the folder, you can get into the folder. In the favorite list, you can find only the files with the file format that was selected in the Type combo box. Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Type combo box. In the type combo box, there are two kinds of file formats; *.* and url. Press Space-1 or Space-4 select one out of these two file formats. If you select *.* then all types of files will be shown. 11.6 Options Using the Options menu, you can set the type that is gets the web page and change default download folder. Also you can clear cookie in the Options menu. In order to execute the Options menu, 1) Press Enter on Web browser. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Move to Options pressing Space-4. 4) Press Enter. Or you can press Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) while the Web browser is executing. 11.6.1 The Structure and Movement When you execute the Options menu, the below components consist of the structure. 1) User agent list 2) Show visited links 3) Default download folder 4) Clear cookies 5) Confirm button 6) Cancel button By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, you can move to option items: User agent, Show visited links, Default download folder and Clear cookies. And by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2), you can move among controls. 11.6.2 Set User Agent 1) Press Enter on Web browser. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Move to Options, by pressing Space-4. 4) Press Enter. Or you can press Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) while the Web browser is executing. 5) It will find User agent: Windows CE on the LCD and Braille display. 6) Using Space, you can select one in the Windows XP, Windows CE and Pocket PC. 7) After you select the value that you want, press Enter. It will open the web page which you chosen type. 11.6.3 Show visited links Visited link is the option displaying the link once user visited web site. The default setting is On and it toggles between On and Off by pressing Space. This option is set to Onand Off as follows:

1) Execute Web browser by pressing Enter on Web browser or simply pressing hot key b (dots-1-2) from the main menu. 2) Once the Web browser executes, press Backspace-o (dots-1-3-

5) and then it will say option dialog box. 3) Move to Show visited links by pressing Space-4. 4) Show visited links: On will be displayed. If the setting is On, Visited link will be displayed. 11.6.4 Changing the Default Download Folder You can change default download folder in Web browser. To change the default download folder, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on Web browser. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Move to Options by pressing Space-4. 4) Press Enter. Or you can press Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) while the Web browser is executing. 5) Pressing Space-4, move to Default download folder 6) It will find list of Flashdisk.

When you change the different folder in Flashdisk: Using Space, select the folder that you want.

When you change the different folder of External memory:

Using the Backspace, move to disk. Move to folder that you want to change and select it using Space. 7) Press Enter. 8) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm button. 9) Press Enter. If you want to cancel the change, press Enter on Cancel button. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), regardless of location. 11.6.5 Clear cookies Cookie contains information which can be read in web application whenever user visits the web site. You can clear cookie in Options menu in Braille Sense U2. To clear cookie, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter on Web browser. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 3) Move to Options, by pressing Space-4. 4) Press Enter. Or you can press Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) while the Web browser is executing. 5) Pressing Space-4, move to Clear cookies 6) Press Enter on Clear cookie. 7) It will announce Successfully cleared cookies and clear cookies. Without calling menu, pressing Enter-d (dots 1-4-5), it will clear cookies in web page. If you want to cancel to clear cookie, press Enter on Cancel button. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), regardless of location. 11.7 Read Page On the web page, there are links, controls, and other various elements, as well as text. In order to read web pages properly, the Web browser should classify each element, and notify the user with its information. When reading a web page by moving with Space-4 or Space-1, one element will be displayed on one line. The links and controls will be displayed with their respective symbols for the user to distinguish each element. There is a more detailed explanation of this feature within this section. 11.7.1 Moving Between Controls A control is a link, an edit box, a radio button, or a combo box. These same controls are found in Windows on a personal computer. Web pages also use various kinds of controls for user input. Each control has different purposes. Therefore, the user has to know exactly what type of control is being used. For example, in an edit box, the user enters a text string. In a combo box and list box, the user should select one of the items listed in the combo box or list box. The Braille Sense U2 Web browser uses symbols to identify what type of control is being used. In order to move from one control to another without reading the text in between controls, the Braille Sense U2 provides the following move to control methods:

1. Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2). This command moves to the nearest previous control from the current position. If there are no more previous controls, the warning sound will be played. 2. Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5) This command moves to the next control from the current position. If there are no more controls, the warning sound will be played. When you find controls in web pages, the Braille Sense U2 will show control symbols ahead of the contents of the control. The followings are a list of control symbols. Symbol LN LNV ANC EB MEB LB CB Control name Link Visited link Anchor Edit box Multi edit box List Box Combo box Radio button select SRB Radio button URB unselect SCHB Check box check Check box uncheck UCHB Button BT 1. Link: If you press Enter on link, you will move to the page that the link is referencing. 2. Visited link: It is the link that you visited last time. 3. Anchor: If you press Enter on anchor, you will move to the referenced part of the web page. 4. Edit box: You can start entering the text at the cursor position. After you finish entering the text, press Space-4 to move to the next item. If there is any text in the edit box, it will be spoken and displayed on the Braille display. 5. Multi edit box: This is similar to the edit box. It is an edit box that allows you to enter plural lines in one edit box. You can start a new line by pressing Enter. After you finish entering the text, press tab

(Space-4-5) in order to move to the next item. 6. List box, combo box: In order to change a selection in the combo box, press Backspace-Space-4 or Backspace-Space-1. You can move to the next item by pressing Space-4. Also it will renew a page automatically when you change combo box in combo box. 7. Radio button, check box: In order to select or cancel the selection, 8. Button: If you press Enter on a button, you will move to the press Enter. referenced page. 11.7.2 Moving to a Form A form is a page that has all of the controls, except the link control. The edit windows, buttons, and combo boxes are included in a form. When you navigate some web pages, if there are many links, it would be very cumbersome to navigate to a form because you would have to push too many tab or shift-tab keys to get to a form. In this case, you can use the moving to the form function. 1. Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6 You can move to the previous form by pressing this key. If there are no previous forms, the Braille Sense U2 will play the warning sound. 2. Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6 You can move to the next form by pressing this key. If there are no more forms. The Braille Sense U2 will play the warning sound. If there are no forms on a web page, the Braille Sense U2 will say, no control. 11.7.3 Table At the beginning position of the table, the Braille Sense U2 shows the table number, and the number of rows and columns on the table. For example, there are two big tables (we call these upper level tables) on one web page. Each table has 3 sub tables (we call these lower level tables) with 3 rows and 2 columns on each. In this case, when the Braille Sense U2 shows the first sub table on the second big table, it displays table 2-1 3 rows, 2 columns. At the end of the sub table, the Braille Sense U2 will display table 2-1. If the table consists of only 1 row and 1 column, or empty space that has only border or background, such tables are not considered tables in the Braille Sense U2. The Braille Sense U2 provides a way to move table by table, and cell by cell, in order for the user to comprehend the structure of the table. In order to move cell by cell, the cell position and contents of the cell will be displayed. However, the position information will only be announced in voice. For example, if you have move to a cell that is positioned on the second row and third column, and the content of the cell is news, the Braille Sense U2 will announce, row 2 cell 3 news. In this case, row 2 cell 3 will be announced in voice only, while news will be displayed in Braille. If a table is included in the cell, the Braille Sense U2 will announce table cell. If there is not a table in the cell, you will hear empty cell. In the table cell, if you want to move to any cell within the lower level table, press Space-4 to move to the starting line of the lower level table. Moving by cell is only valid in the table. If this command is executed outside of the table, a warning sound will be played. 1. Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6 It moves to the starting position of the previous table. If there are no previous tables, the warning sound will be played. 2. Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6 It moves to the starting position of the next table. If there are no more tables, the warning sound will be played. 3. Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3 It moves to the previous cell. If the current cell is the first cell, it will move to the starting line of the table. If this command is pressed on the starting line of the table, the warning sound will be played. 4. Move to next cell: Space-5-6 It moves to the next cell. If the current cell is the last cell, it moves to the end line of the table. If it is pressed on the end line of the table, the warning sound will be played. 5. Move to upper cell: Space-3-5 It moves to the cell in the previous row within the same column. If the current cell is on the first row, the warning sound will be played. 6. Move to lower cell: Space-2-6 It moves to the cell in the next line, within the same column. If the current cell is on the last row, the warning sound will be played. 7. Current cell: Space-2-3-5-6 It announces and displays the content of the current cell again. 8. Move to the previous cell in the upper level table: BackSpace-2-3 It moves to the previous cell from the current cell that contains the current table. If the current table cell is the first cell of the highest level table, it will show the starting line of the table. It does not work on the highest level table. 9. Move to the next cell of the upper level table: BackSpace-5-6 It moves to the next cell from the current cell that contains the current table. If the current table cell is the last cell in the highest level table, it moves to the end line of the table. It does not work on the highest level table. 10. Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: BackSpace-3-5 It moves to the previous row, within the same column, to the table cell that contains current table. If the cell that contains the current table is located on the first row of the upper level table, the warning sound will be played. It does not work on the highest level table. 11. Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: BackSpace-2-6 It moves to the next row, within the same column, to the table cell that contains the current table. If the table cell that contains current table is at the last row of the upper level table, the warning sound will be played. It does not work on the highest level table. 12. Check the position: Space-1-5-6 It announces the position of the current cell in the table. It shows the position in both Braille and voice, such as table 2-3 row 3, cell 4. 11.7.4 Move to the Frame 1. Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6 It moves to the starting position of the previous frame. If there are no previous frames, the warning sound will be played. 2. Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6 It moves to the starting position of the next frame. If there are no more frames, the warning sound will be played. 11.7.5 Playback of Streaming Audio Files While you navigate any web page, if you come across a link for streaming audio file, you can simply press Enter on it. Then the Media player program will be launched or activated with lists of address inside of the streaming file and the streaming audio file on the first address will be played. The possible formats of streaming file are m3u, pls, asf, asx. For other formats besides above 4 formats, if you press Enter on it, the Web browser program will play the streaming audio file directly. When you play the streaming audio file in the Web browser, the Add To Favorites dialog box will be appeared in order to quickly play the file later through the File Manager or Web browser program. You can then add the streaming address into Favorite list and the streaming file will be saved with ASF- at the begging of file name. ASF denotes that the link is a streaming audio file. While you play a streaming audio file in the Web Browser, if you exit the Web browser program or you lost the internet connection, the streaming audio file will be stopped playing. You can use following playback commands in Web browser while playing any streaming audio file. 1. Play: play button on the front panel 2. Stop: stop button on the front panel 3. Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button 4. Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button Playback of a streaming audio file does not stop if you switch to another program, until you press the stop button on the front panel after you come back to Web browser. You can download real audio files but not play them in the Web Browser. 11.8 Hot keys in the Web Browser File Menu Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Read Menu Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Auto scroll: Up scroll button-down scroll button Edit menu Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5) Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Go to menu Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5) Go to the previous page: Backspace-Space-3 or Backspace-p (dots 1-2-

3-4) Go to the next page: Backspace-Space-6 or Backspace-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6 Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6 Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-i (dots 2-

4) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Links list: Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Favorites Set current as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1) Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Options setting: BackSpace-o (dots 1-3-5) Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in the Web Browser Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button Play: play button of the front panel Stop: stop button of the front panel Reading Web Pages Move between controls Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5) Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-4 Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-1 Moving to the form Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6 Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6 Table navigation hot keys Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6 Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6 Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3 Move to the next cell: Space-5-6 Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5 Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6 Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6 Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3 Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6 Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5 Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6 Check the current position: Space-1-5-6 Move to frame Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6 Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6 Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5) 11.9 What the Web browser Does Not Support 1. Images are not supported. 2. Any executable files on web sites cannot be executed. It is because the operating system on the Braille Sense U2 is different from the operating system on a personal computer. 3. A web page using flash can be opened, but the flash content may not be read. 4. Some web pages that use JavaScript cannot be opened. 12. DAISY Player Using the Daisy player, on the Braille Sense U2, you can listen to files and read books that use the DAISY format. DAISY is an acronym for

(DIGITAL ACCESSIBLE INFORMATION SYSTEM). One advantage to DAISY books is that you can listen to the audio as well as read the associated text with the audio in books where both text and audio are present. The Braille Sense U2 supports DAISY books that are version 3.0 or earlier. The DAISY player also supports DAISY content from specialized service providers, such as books from NLS, BookShare, and the Open library. The DAISY Player supports the following book types:

- DAISY 2.0/2.02/3.0, DAISY XML/Digital Talking Book.

- ANSI/NISO Z39.86 2002, 2005.

- NLS contents. (3gp, AMR-WB+)

- Bookshare.org DAISY contents.

- NIMAS 1.1

- DRM: supports 2006 PDTB2 authentication.

- Archive (open library) Note: To access content from services such as BookShare and the National Library Service, you must sign up for these services, meet all eligibility requirements, and pay any associated fees if applicable. Registering your Braille Sense U2 with NLS:

As of firmware version 6.2, the Braille Sense DAISY Player supports playback of digital talking books from the National Library Service for the Blind and Physically Handicapped (NLS) as well as protected DAISY content from the Open library (openlibrary.org/archive.org). In order to play content from these services, you must register your Braille Sense U2 with the National library Service. Note: the following instructions assume you already have an account with the NLS Braille and Audio Reading Download service (BARD). If you do not currently have a BARD account, please contact your regional NLS lending library or visit:

https://nlsbard.loc.gov/ApplicationInstructions.html To register your Braille Sense U2 with NLS BARD, follow these steps:

1. Log in to your account on the BARD main page. 2. Choose the Update Account Settings link. 3. Choose the Add a purchased player link. 4. Fill out the form as requested; choose Sense Notetaker as the 5. You will receive an email confirming your request to add a player type. purchased player. 6. If there are no problems with your eligibility, within a couple of days, you will receive another email confirming your eligibility to add the Sense Notetaker to your account. This message also informs you that an email has been sent to HIMS to confirm your eligibility. 7. When HIMS receives the email confirmation of your eligibility, we will send an email requesting your key number and notetaker model, including instructions for obtaining your key number. 8. When we receive your key number and and notetaker model, we will send the key file via email. (The key file is a small file with a .kxo extension.) 9. Save the attachment, and copy it to the root of your notetakers flashdisk. (Please be sure to copy the .kxo file to the root of the flashdisk. It must not be contained in a folder, but must reside at the top level of the flashdisk directory.) 10. Play an NLS book. The key file installs itself on a special protected area of the flashdisk. To obtain your key number, follow these steps:

1. Press f1 to bring up the main menu. 2. Press h to access the Help Menu. 3. Press I to bring up the Information Dialog. 4. Navigate below Mac Address for wireless LAN. After the words Key Number a 5 or 6 digit number is displayed. When you want to execute the player, follow these steps:

(1) Press Enter on Daisy player in the program menu.

(2) Or press the shortcut key d (dots 1-4-5) in the Braille Sense U2 program menu.

(3) When you execute the Daisy player, you will see all of the disks available on the Braille Sense U2 (regardless of whether each disk has DAISY-formatted files or not).

(4) You can navigate through the list with Space-1 or Space-4. You can open a disk containing DAISY-formatted files by pressing Enter on the name of the disk.

(5) After opening the disk, you will find all of the folders that are on the disk, and any DAISY file titles that are on the disk that you have opened.

(6) Once you find a DAISY file that you want to open, press Space to select it.

(7) Then, press Enter to play the file. If you have DAISY files in a folder on a disk, you can go in to the folder by pressing Enter on the folder. Make sure that you do not press Space on the folder. You will find all of the folders on the disk, and you can navigate through the disk by using the same navigation keys that are used in the file manager. Then, you can go to the folder that has the DAISY files that you want to read or listen to. Press Space to select the folder, and press Enter to play the DAISY file. If you only have one DAISY file, it will automatically start playing after showing the title. You can play the DAISY file by pressing Enter on the selected file after navigating the file list with Space-1 or Space-4. If you replay a file that you have listened to before, you can start listening to the file at the location where you stopped earlier. While playing Text Daisy with voice off, Read from cursor to end won't work. To stop playing a file, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), which will move you to the prompt box. Once there, you can select Yes or No with Space or Backspace. When you want to exit from the Daisy player, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), which will move you to the prompt box. Once in the prompt box, you can select Yes or No with Space or Backspace. You can open the Daisy player menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 when you are in the Daisy player. In the menu, you will find File, Document, Mark, and Heading. You can move between these menu items with Space-1 or Space-4, and press Enter when you want to activate the selected menu item. You can also play the DAISY contents using the audio buttons on the front panel. In order to use the audio buttons to control the Daisy player, the audio mode switch that was explained in the Section 2.11 (Switching Audio mode) should be set to DAISY mode that is the center of the audio mode switch. Once the audio mode is set to DAISY mode, you can play the DAISY contents by pressing play button on the front panel. Also you can pause the Daisy player by pressing play button on the front panel when playing the DAISY contents. How to use the audio buttons to control the Daisy player is explained in the following sections. 12.1 Components of the DAISY Player While playing the Daisy, you will find four controls components:

1) heading 2) Information 3) Play 4) Pause You can move between the controls with tab (F3 or Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-F3 or Space-1-2). While playing a file in the Daisy player, you will find a heading, which will show you a prefixed heading or affixed text if one has been prepared. In information, you can find the current page, level, phrase, elapsed time, and running time. You can move between these items with Space-1 or Space-4. You can press Enter on Pause or Play, which will let you pause or play the audio. If you are anywhere in the four control components, you can play or pause by pressing Space. 12.2 File When in the File menu, you can open a new DAISY file, check file information on the file that is currently open, and set voice parameters. You can open the File menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on File. Or, you can press f (dots 1-2-4). In the File menu, you will find items such as, 1) Open DAISY 2) Voice Settings 3) Book-Info 4) Exit You can move between these items with Space-1 or Space-4. You can activate the selected item by pressing Enter. 12.2.1 Open DAISY You can open another DAISY file with using Open DAISY. To get to Open DAISY, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and then press tab (Space-4-5) until you hear Open DAISY. Or, you can use the hot key Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) without pressing Space-m (dots1-

3-4). When you activate Open DAISY, you can see the disk list while pausing or playing a file. You can open Open DAISY dialog box by long pressing stop button when play or pause the DAISY contents. And if you long press the stop button again, this dialog box will be closed. And then return to the previous position. Play button is same function as Enter in Open DAISY dialog box. Also stop button, record button, previous button and next button is same function as Backspace, Space, Space-1 and Space-4 in open DAISY dialog box. Namely, you can move to up and down by pressing previous and next button in list of Open DAISY dialog box. And you can select and unselect by pressing record button. If you press stop button, you can move to upper folder. And if you press play button, you can play the selected file in file list of Open DAISY dialog box. In order to use this function, you must set the audio mode switch to DAISY mode. 12.2.2 Voice Settings In the Voice Settings, you can set the Daisy player voice parameters. To execute voice settings, follow these steps:

(1) Press Space-m (dots1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu.

(2) Move to Voice Settings, which is located under the File menu and press Enter. Or press s (dots 2-3-4).

(3) Also you can directly activate the Voice Settings by pressing Enter-s (dots 2-3-4). It will open the Voice Settings dialog box. In the dialog box, 1) DAISY play type(It will show while playing text+audio DAISY) 2) Voice control

- Set speed

- Set volume

- Set to control information of contents 3) Confirm 4) Cancel You can move between the four controls with Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). In voice control, you can move between Set speed, Set volume and Set to control information of contents with Space-1 or Space-4. If you cancel this function, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 12.2.2.1 DAISY play type It will show while playing text+audio DAISY. You can use this function when you play the text+audio DAISY. Without calling the menu, you can directly this function by pressing Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5). The default setting is Audio. It will play with audio in text+audio Daisy. If you set the Text, it will play with text in text+audio Daisy. To change the setting value, press Space-1 or Space-4.After changing the setting value, press Enter. Or press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Confirm and press Enter. 12.2.2.2 Volume and Speed You can increase the levels of speed and volume with Space, and decrease them with Backspace. After setting the levels, press Enter to confirm your choice. Without using the Voice Settings menu, you can increase or decrease the speed and volume. 1) Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5 2) Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6 3) Increase the volume: Space-Up scroll button 4) Decrease the volume: Space-Down scroll button 12.2.2.3 Set to control information of contents You can use this function when you play the NIMAS Daisy. The default setting value is On. To change the setting value, press Space or Backspace. If you set On, it shows symbol of controls and information while playing NIMAS Daisy. NIMAS Daisy control includes image, description, caption, prodnote, table. image is displayed on the braille display as img. desc is for description and prodnote. cap is for caption. tdt is for table. 12.2.3 Book-Info Using Book-Info, you can check the information on the file that is currently playing. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and press Enter on File. Press Space-

4 repeatedly to move to Book-Info and press Enter on Book-Info. Without calling the menu, you can activate Book-Info by pressing Enter-i (dots 2-4). Activating Book-Info will open the Book-Info dialog box. In the dialog box, you will find one state box that contains running time and pages, another state box that contains the mark information, and Close. You can move between the three controls with tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). In the first state box, you will find Total time, Read time, Remaining time, Total pages, Current page, and Remaining pages. In the other state box, you will find the Total marks and Mark page. You can move between the items with Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to close the dialog box, press Enter on Close, which will return you to the current file. 12.2.4 Exit When you want to quit the Daisy player, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on File. And press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Exit and press Enter on Exit. Or, you can press Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6) without using the Exit menu. While exiting, you will hear the message Exit DAISY player. Are you sure? Then, press Enter on Yes, which is the default; or if you do not want to exit, you can select No by pressing Space, and then press Enter. 12.3 Document When in the Document menu, you can move by phrase or level while playing. If you want to activate the Document menu, press Space-m

(dots1-3-4) and then press d (dots 1-4-5). In this menu, you will find items such as, 1) Play/Pause 2) Previous Phrase 3) Next Phrase 4) Previous Page 5) Next Page 6) Go To Page 7) Move down 8) Move up 9) Set To Prior Level 10) Set To Next Level. You can move between these items with Space-1 or Space-4. To activate a menu item, select the menu item, and then press Enter. 12.3.1 Play and Pause You can access Play/Pause in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Document. Then, use Space-4 to move to Play/Pause, and press Enter. You can also activate Play/Pause without calling up the menu by pressing Space. While playing, you can move to the beginning of a document by pressing Space-1-2-3 or Space-1-3. You can move to the last phrase by pressing Space-4-5-6 or Space-4-6. 12.3.2 Move by Phrase You can access this command in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Document. Then, use Space-4 to move to Previous Phrase or Next Phrase, and press Enter. You can move to the next, previous, next fifth, or previous fifth phrase without calling up the menu by pressing dot 6, dot 3, dot 4, or dot 1, respectively. Also you can move to the previous or next phrase without calling up the menu by a short pressing previous button or next button in the front panel. In order to move by phrase with previous or next button, you must set the audio mode switch to daisy mode. 12.3.3 Move by Page You can access this item in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-

4) or F2, and then press Enter on Document. Then, use Space-4 to move to Previous Page, Next Page, or Go To Page, and press Enter. You can move to the next or previous page without calling up the menu by pressing Space-3-4-5 or Space-1-2-6 during play or pause. You can jump to whatever page you want to go to by pressing Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5). If you activate Go To Page, you will find an edit box asking Move to page number Here you can type in the page number that you want to move to. Press Enter, and the Braille Sense U2 will move you to that page. 12.3.4 Move by Level You can access this function in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) or F2, and then press Enter on Document. Then, use Space-

4 to move to Move up or Move down, and press Enter. Or, you can move up and down without calling up the menu by pressing dot 2 or dot 5. You can set the level by pressing dots 5-6 or dots 2-3. Namely, if the level is set to 3, you can move through the level 1, 2 and 3 and if the level is set to 1, you can move through the level 1 only. 12.3.5 Move by Time Index You can use this function as follows. 1. While playing audio DAISY file or in pause status. 2. While playing with audio in audio+text DAISY or in pause status. The setting values are 5 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes and 1 hour. To set previous time index, follow these steps:

1) Press dots 1-2. Every time you press the dots 1-2, Braille Sense U2 toggles between 30, 10, or 5 seconds; 1 hour and 30 minutes. 2) Choose the setting value you want. To set next time index, follow these steps:

1) Press dots 4-5. Every time you press the dot s 1-2, Braille Sense U2 toggles between 5, 10, or 30 seconds: 1 minute, 3 minutes and 5 minutes. 2) Choose the setting value you want. The moving mode to move by a specified amount of time is as follows. 1. Move to previous time: Press dots 2-3-6. If you set 5 minutes, it will move to previous position by 5 minutes. 2. Move to next time: Press dots 3-5-6. If you set 5 minutes, it will move to next position by 5 minutes. 12.3.6 Move by Text Index You can use this function as follows. 1. While playing text DAISY file or in pause status. 2. While playing with text in audio+text DAISY or in pause status. The setting values are Phonetic, Character, Word and Sentence. To set previous text index, follow these steps:

1) Press dots 1-2. Every time you press the dots 1-2, Braille Sense U2 toggles between Sentence, Word, Character or Phonetic. 2) Choose the setting value you want. To set next text index, follow these steps:

1) Press dots 4-5. Every time you press dots 4-5, Braille Sense U2 toggles between Phonetic, Character, Word and Sentence. 2) Choose the setting value you want. When you set the value, to move by the setting value, follow these steps:

1. Move to previous text: Press dots 2-3-6. If you set Sentence, it will move to previous position by sentence. 2. Move to next text: Press dots 3-5-6. If you set Sentence, it will move to next position by sentence. 12.4 Mark When you are in the Mark menu, you can put in a mark or jump to a mark while you are playing a file. Mark can be inserted up to 1000. You can open the Mark menu by pressing Space-m (dots1-3-4) or F2, and then m (dots 1-3-4). When you are in the Mark menu, you will find the following sub-menus:

1) Previous Mark 2) Next Mark 3) Set Mark 4) Move To Mark 5) Delete Mark You can move between the sub-menus with Space-1 or Space-4. 12.4.1 Previous Mark The Previous Mark function will allow you to move to a location where you have placed a mark. If you have passed a mark while listening to a DAISY Player file, you can move to that mark by using the previous mark function. You can access the Previous Mark function by pressing Enter on Mark, and then move to previous mark by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. Or just press p (dots 1-2-3-4) to execute Previous Mark. Then, press Enter on Previous Mark. You can also move to the previous mark by pressing Space-3 during reading DAISY contents. 12.4.2 Next Mark The Next Mark function will allow you to move to a location where you have placed a mark. If you have placed a mark in a DAISY Player file, and you have not yet passed it, you can move to that mark by using the Next Mark function. You can access the Next Mark function by pressing Enter on Mark, and then move to Next Mark by pressing Space-4 and press Enter. Or just press n (dots 1-3-4-5) to execute Next Mark. Then, press Enter on Next Mark. You can also move to the previous mark by pressing Space-6 during reading DAISY contents. 12.4.3 Set Mark You can set a mark anywhere you want while playing a file. You can set a mark in the Set Mark menu. Otherwise, you can set a mark by pressing Enter-m (dots 1-3-4). You can also activate this function by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Then, press Enter on Mark. Use Space-4 to move to Set Mark, and then press Enter. Or press m (dots 1-3-4) when you are in the Mark menu. The Set Mark dialog box will then open, which will ask you to Enter mark name:. Enter the number of the mark that you want to insert between 1~1,000. 12.4.4 Move to Mark Without using the menu, you can move to the next or previous mark by pressing Space-6 or Space-3 during play/pause. You can also move to the mark you want by pressing Enter-j (dots 2-4-5). You can also access this feature in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or by pressing F2. You can then, use Space-4 to move to Mark, and press Enter. Or, you can press j (dots 2-4-5) when you are in the Mark menu. If you activate the Move To Mark function, you will find the edit box asking Mark name to move to:. Here you can type in the mark name that you want to go to. Make sure that you have already set a mark. Otherwise, you will not be able to move to a mark. 12.4.5 Deleting a Mark Without using the menu, you can activate the Delete Mark function by pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5). You can also activate this function by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Then use, Space-4 to move to Mark, and press Enter. Then, use Space-4 to move to Delete Mark, and press Enter on Delete Mark. If you activate the Delete Mark function, an edit box will appear asking, Enter mark name to delete:. Make certain that you want to delete the mark that you have entered. If you type in a mark in this edit box, the mark name will be deleted without pressing Enter. When you type mark name which is not registered, The mark does not exist message appears. 12.5 Heading When in the Heading menu, you can move in a document by your text heading, or you can search a heading while the DAISY Player is playing. You can open the Heading menu by pressing Space-m (dots1-3-4) or F2, and then press h (dots 1-2-5). Then, you can see the sub-menu:

1) Previous Heading 2) Next Heading 3) Scan Heading 4) Read Heading 5) First Heading 6) Last Heading 7) Find Heading 8) Find Again You can move between the sub-menu items with Space-1 or Space-

4. 12.5.1 Move by Heading While playing a DAISY file, you can move heading by heading without using the Heading menu. You can move to the next, previous, first, and last heading by pressing Space-5, Space-2, Space-2-3, and Space-5-6, respectively. Also you can move to the previous or next heading without calling up the menu using audio buttons on the front panel. Before you use this feature, you have to set the audio mode button on the front panel to daisy mode. In order to move to previous or next heading, press previous or next button for about 2 seconds and release it. Then it will move to the previous or next heading. 12.5.2 Move to Specific Heading While playing a DAISY file, you can move specific heading without calling the menu. In order to move to specific heading, follow these steps:

1) Press Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) while playing a DAISY file. 2) It shows Current Heading: xx Total heading: yy. Enter the heading number to move to:. 3) Type heading number that you want to move. 4) Press Enter. 5) It will move to the selected heading and the DAISY file will start playing. 12.5.2 Find Heading You can find any heading you want while playing a DAISY file. Without using the Find Heading menu, you can activate Find Heading by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4). When you have pressed this hot key, you will see a dialog box that shows the message, Heading to find: You will also see a Search direction:, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between the four items with tab (Space-dots 4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-dots 1-2). At the Heading to find: edit box, you can input the mark name that you want to find. And select the searching direction to Previous or Next at Search direction prompt by pressing Space. 12.5.3 Scan Heading and Read Heading While playing a DAISY Player file, you can check your current heading

(or heading list) from your current location to the last heading. You can scan them by activating the Read Heading or Scan Heading in the Heading menu. Without using the menu (pressing Space-m (dots1-3-4) and then h

(dots 1-2-5)), you can check the current heading (in the file that is currently being played) by pressing Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6). If you activate this function, you will see the current heading name and level. By pressing Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5), you can scan the heading list from the present to the end. If you activate the Scan Heading menu, you will see the heading list from the present to the end. In the list, if you find one that you want to listen to, press Enter or Space to play it. Using this method, you are able to skip other headings and play what you want. If you want to cancel the scan heading function, press Space-e (dots 1-

5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Then, you will be returned to where you were before. 12.5.4 Find Phrase You can find phrase that you want to move while playing a DAISY file or in a pause status. To execute this function, follow these steps:

1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu. 2) It shows File. 3) Press Space-4, move to Heading. 4) Press Enter on the Heading. Or press h (dots 1-2-5). 5) It shows Previous heading. 6) Press Space-4, move to Find Phrase. 7) Press Enter on the Find Phrase. Or press s (dots 2-3-4). Without calling the menu, you can execute directly it by pressing Space-

s (dots 2-3-4). While executing the Find Phrase, it will open Find Phrase dialog box. The Find Phrase dialog box consists of as follows. 1) Phrase to find 2) Search direction 3) Confirm 4) Cancel You can move between 4 controls by pressing Tab (Space-4-5) and Shift-Tab (Space-1-2). To find Phrase, follow these steps:

(1) You can type phrase that you want to find in Phrase to find edit box. You don't need to type whole phrase. If there is no phrase that you want to find, it will hear No more phrases found.

(2) Press Tab (Space-4-5), move to Search direction. The default setting is Next. The options that you can choose from for this setting are, Next and Previous. To change setting value, press Space. Next: It will find phrase from the next direction of current location. Previous: It will find phrase from the previous direction of current location.

(3) After setting the Search direction, press Enter. Or press Tab

(Space-4-5), move to Confirm. Press Enter on the Confirm.

(4) It will play from the searched phrase. If you want to cancel the Find Phrase, press Enter on the Cancel. Or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 12.6 Hot Keys in the DAISY Player Play Play/Pause: Space Move to the beginning of document: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3 Move to the last phrase: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6 Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5 Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6 Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button Move by Phrase Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press next button Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press previous button Move to the next fifth phrase: dot 4 Move to the previous fifth phrase: dot 1 Move by page Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6 Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Move by level Move up: dot 2 Move down: dot 5 Set To Prior Level: dots 2-3 Set To Next Level: dots 5-6 Move by heading Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press next button Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press previous button Move to the last heading: Space-5-6 Move to the first heading: Space-2-3 Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Move to Specific Heading: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Find Phrase: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Heading Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Scan heading: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Read heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Set mark Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Move to the next mark: Space-6 Move to the previous mark: Space-3 Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Miscellaneous Hot Keys Move to the title list: Space-1-2-5-6 Open DAISY file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Set DAISY play type: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Check the book-info: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 13. Bluetooth Manager The Braille Sense U2 is Bluetooth capable. Bluetooth is the latest in wireless technology that allows for a Personal Area Network (PAN). Unlike a traditional Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), these networks are limited to approximately 30 feet or less. Bluetooth enables users to exchange various types of information. In order to use Bluetooth with the Braille Sense U2, you must change the Bluetooth option to On in the option menu. Bluetooth on the Braille Sense U2 allows you to transfer files from the Braille Sense U2 to a computer, use the Internet connection your computer is using, or use the Braille Sense U2 as a wireless Braille display. To use the Braille Sense U2 as a wireless Braille display, you must be running the screen readers; Window-Eyes, Supernova or JAWS. Please note that Bluetooth is currently an evolving standard, and you may experience different functionality, depending on the operating system that you are using. The Braille Sense U2 uses the built-in Bluetooth manager program to allow the user to use the Bluetooth functionality in the Braille Sense U2. You can access the Bluetooth manager in several ways. To access Bluetooth manager from the program menu, you can either press Space-1 or Space-4 until you hear Bluetooth manager, or press Space until you get to Bluetooth manager. When you hear Bluetooth manager, press Enter to activate it. Or, you can press l (dots 1-2-3) to open the Bluetooth manager from the program menu without having to press Enter on it. 13.1 Bluetooth Device List After the Bluetooth manager has been activated, it will begin scanning for other Bluetooth devices that are in range, and for the services available from the other Bluetooth devices. For example, if you have a computer with Bluetooth enabled nearby, then the Braille Sense U2 will attempt to find it. It may take a while to find all of the Bluetooth devices in range, so expect to wait about 30 to 40 seconds for this process to complete. You will hear Scanning for devices. Please wait message and beep sound when this process begins. And when the Bluetooth device is detected, the Braille Sense U2 announces find (Bluetooth device name). Until the end of scanning all devices, any keys on the Braille Sense U2 will not work, and you cannot stop scanning the device. You have to wait until the completion of the scanning devices. If Bluetooth option in Option menu set to Off, or if the Braille Sense U2 does not recognize it, the Braille Sense U2 will say the message, Bluetooth not activated. Then, the Braille Sense U2 will automatically exit the Bluetooth Manager. Once the Braille Sense U2 has found other Bluetooth devices that are in range, they will be displayed as device name (untrusted (or trusted)) xx/yy where xx is the number where the device appears in the list, and yy is the total number of devices. And trusted means that the service has been authenticated, and untrusted means that the service has not been authenticated. This part of the Bluetooth Manager is known as the Bluetooth Device List, and thus, the menu for this section is called the Bluetooth Device List menu. If there are no other Bluetooth devices in range, the Braille Sense U2 will say no items. You can press Space-1 or Space-4 to move through the list. To select the device from the list, press Enter on the device name. If the Bluetooth device trusted, the device setting will be automatically saved in the memory of the Braille Sense U2. If you want to delete this setting, you press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on Bluetooth device name in the Bluetooth Device List. The Braille Sense U2 will say Device settings removed. Removing this setting will apply only to the current device. Once the Braille Sense U2 has finished searching for other Bluetooth devices, you can access the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or by pressing F2. The Bluetooth Device List menu has the Rescan For Devices, Device Name, Delete Pair Information, and Exit. You can navigate the menu items with Space-1 or Space-4. The first menu item is Rescan For Device. This item allows you to rescan for other Bluetooth devices. To activate this item, press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) for F2 and then press Enter on Rescan For Device. You can also access this option by pressing r (dots 1-2-3-5) while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it directly without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5). You can access the next item in the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and then Space-1 or Space-4 until you get to Device Name, and press Enter. You can also press n (dots 1-3-4-5) while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu to activate Device Name. This item allows you to give the Braille Sense U2 a specific name. The default name for the Bluetooth device name is BrailleSensePLUS. You can activate this item by pressing Enter on it, or you can access it without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5). After you activate this item, you will find a computer edit box that contains your current device name. To modify the name, type the new name and then press Enter. Once you have entered the new name, you should close all programs and reset the Braille Sense U2 by pressing the reset button with your finger on the rear panel. To cancel your changes, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Device List. The next menu item is Delete Pair Information. This item allows you to remove the device setting. To activate this item, press Space-m (dots 1-

3-4) for F2 and then press Enter on Delete Pair Information. You can also access this option by pressing d (dots 1-4-5) while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or you can activate it directly without calling up the menu by pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5). The next item in the Bluetooth Device List menu is the Exit item. This item will exit the Bluetooth manager program. To activate this item, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and then press Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to Exit. Then, press Enter on Exit. You can also access the item while in the menu by pressing z (dots 1-3-5-6) while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu or at any time without calling up the menu by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 13.2 Bluetooth Service List Once you know which remote Bluetooth device you want to connect to, press Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to the device you want to connect to in the Bluetooth Device List, and then press Enter on the device name. You will then hear, Scanning for service. Please wait Please note that no keys will work during scanning the devices. The Braille Sense U2 will begin scanning services that are available from the remote Bluetooth device. The Braille Sense U2 supports the services:

LAN, FTP, ActiveSync, Serial port, Headset and Bluetooth DUN. In order to access all of these functions, you must make sure that the remote Bluetooth device is in Discoverable mode, and that all services are enabled. It is possible to have certain services enabled on your remote Bluetooth device, while having other services that are disabled. For example, you could have LAN and FTP enabled, while having ActiveSync and Serial Port disabled. If this is the case, then the Braille Sense U2 will only display LAN and FTP. Once the Braille Sense U2 has found all of the available services, it will display the services in a list in the following format: service name xx/yy where xx is the number of the service that you are on, and yy is the number of total available services. You can move through the available services by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can press Backspace to return to the Bluetooth Device List. Once the Braille Sense U2 has finished searching service, you can access the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or by pressing F2. The Bluetooth Service List menu has the Device Name, Open FTP, Disconnect and Exit. You can navigate the menu items with Space-1 or Space-4. How to use Device Name and Exit in the Bluetooth Service List menu are the same as how to use them in the Bluetooth Device List menu. The Open FTP menu item allows you to open a direct FTP connection with a remote Bluetooth device without having to select the device and then the service. However, you must have connected the service first before the Braille Sense U2 will allow you to transfer files. If you have not connected the FTP service already, and you activate this function, you will hear, FTP service disconnected. You can access Open FTP by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and then Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to Open FTP. Once you are at Open FTP, press Enter to activate it, and the Braille Sense U2 will say, Connecting service. You can also activate it by pressing t (dots 2-3-4-5) while you are in the Bluetooth Device List menu, or by pressing Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) without calling up the menu. This chapter will cover connecting various Bluetooth services later in more detail. The Disconnect menu item will allow you to disconnect services that are connected to other Bluetooth devices. You can access this item by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and then Space-1 or Space-4. Then, press Enter to activate it. You can also activate this item while you are in the Bluetooth Service List menu by pressing d (dots 1-4-5), or you can activate it without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-d (dots 1-

4-5). In order to disconnect any service, press Space-1 or Space-4 at the Bluetooth Service List to move to the service that you want to disconnect, and execute the Disconnect command. You can disconnect the currently focused service only. This means that you can disconnect only one service at one time. You cannot disconnect plural services at once. If there are no services connected to other Bluetooth devices, and you activate this function, you will hear, There is no service connected. 13.2.1 Connecting Service To authenticate a service and connect to it, press Enter on the service. Once you have pressed Enter on the service, you will hear Connecting service. Then, you will hear PIN code: You must use ASCII characters when you type in this edit box. On the Braille display, you will see PIN code: This edit box will only appear when you have pressed enter on a service that not say Connected after the service name. You can exit the edit box or cancel any text you have typed in by pressing Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6). You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Service List. If you have typed in a pin code, and have pressed Enter, you will hear, Please wait for authentication. If the remote device is setup correctly, and has not been set up to allow this device to always connect, then the remote device will ask for a pin code. If the remote Bluetooth device pin code matches the pin code that was typed in the Braille Sense U2, then the service will authenticate. If this occurs, you will hear, PIN code authentication accepted. Then, while the service connects, you will hear, Please wait. Access permission. If the remote Bluetooth device does not give access permission, then you will hear, Connection failed, and you will be returned to the Bluetooth Services List. If the remote Bluetooth device gives you access permission, then the Braille Sense U2 will say Connection succeeded. If the connection succeeds, then you will see Connected after the services that have successfully connected. Some of the service may be connected without inputting pin code depending on the Remote Bluetooth device settings. After you have connected to a service, you can press Enter-d (dots 1-4-

5) to disconnect the service, and the Braille Sense U2 will say Service disconnected. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Service List. If you disconnect a service, Connected will disappear from the Bluetooth Service List. If you connect to the FTP service, you will see a list of files and folders that are on the remote Bluetooth device. The rest of this chapter will discuss each service in detail. 13.2.2 LAN Service With the LAN service, you can connect to the Internet through your computer. If you connect this service, you can use the Web browser and email program, just like if you were connected to the Internet via a dial-

up modem or wireless LAN card. However, you must setup Internet Connection Sharing (ICS) on your remote Bluetooth device. Without ICS properly setup, you will not be able to connect to the Internet using the LAN service. For information on how to setup ICS for your remote Bluetooth device, please refer to the documentation that came with your Bluetooth adapter. Setting up ICS requires knowledge of network architecture, so it may be a good idea to contact a local network technician or your network administrator for help to set up ICS. 13.2.3 FTP Service This service will work similar to using FTP on the Internet. It will allow you to transfer folders and files to and from the Braille Sense U2 between it and the remote Bluetooth device. When referring to the FTP service, we will refer to the file/folder list in the remote Bluetooth device as remote folder list and the file/folder list of the Braille Sense U2 as the local folder list. After you have successfully connected to the FTP service, the Bluetooth Manager will take you to the remote folder list. The remote folder list that you are taken to is determined by the remote Bluetooth device. Typically, this folder is called the Bluetooth Exchange Folder on the remote Bluetooth device, but you should check your remote Bluetooth device for information on this folder. The remote folder list is very similar to the File Manager. With the FTP service, you can perform the following functions:

1. 2. 3. 4. Copy Paste Send To Retrieve File 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. New Folder Delete File/Folder Open Local Folder. If you press Enter on this, you will be taken to the local folder list. If you are in the local folder list, this menu will be changed to move remote folder. Select All Information In the next few sections, we will discuss the various FTP functions. Please note that while sending data to and from the remote Bluetooth device, the remote Bluetooth device may still need to give access permission to the Braille Sense U2. Please consult the documentation for the remote Bluetooth device for details. 13.2.3.1 Copy and Paste These functions will allow you to copy and paste files between the local folder and the remote folder. You can use the following steps to move files from a local folder to the remote folder:

1) After you connect to the FTP service, you will be in the remote folder list. While in the remote folder list, you should press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the FTP menu. Then, you should press Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to Open Local Folder, and press Enter. You can also press o (dots 1-3-5) while in the menu, or you can press Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) without having to call up the menu. After activating this function, you will hear, Open Local Folder. Then, you will be taken to the Disk list that appears in file manager. You will be taken to flashdisk by default, but if you have a SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to them by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 2) Just like navigating in the File manager, you can access a disk by pressing Enter on it. Use the exact same navigation keys as the File manager to navigate the local folder. Note that you cannot select folders. You can only select files. If you try to select a folder, the Braille Sense U2 will say Deactivated. 3) Once you have selected files by pressing the Space, you can copy them by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and then navigate to Copy by pressing Space-1 or Space-4, and press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-c (dots 1-4) to activate the function without calling up the menu. 4) After you have activated the copy function, you will hear, Copying and then Open Remote Folder. You will then be moved to the remote folder list. 5) In the remote folder list, you can navigate to the folder where you want to paste the file. Once you are in the folder where you want to paste the file, press Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). Or, you can press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and then use Space-1 or Space-

4 to get to the Paste function, and press Enter. If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. 6) When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the message, xxx file pasted, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is not pasted successfully, you will hear, xxx file not pasted. After the file is pasted successfully, you will also hear, Paste completed, and you will be returned to the remote folder list. The following steps should be used to copy a file from the remote folder list to the local folder list:

1) After the FTP service has connected, you can navigate through the remote folder, just like in the file manager. If you need to reference the navigation keys for the File manager, please refer to chapter 3 in this manual. 2) Once you have selected the files that you want to copy by pressing the Space, you can open the FTP menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and then use Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to Copy, and press Enter. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-c (dots 1-

4). Note that you cannot copy folders to send to the local folder. 3) After you have activated this function, you will see the Disk list, just like when you open the file manager. You will be taken to flashdisk by default. However, if you have SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to those disks by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 4) After entering a disk, open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Then, move to Paste with Space-1 or Space-4, and press Enter. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. 5) When the file has been pasted successfully, you will see the message, xxx file pasted, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file is not pasted successfully, you will hear, xxx file not pasted. After the file is pasted successfully, you will also hear, Paste completed, and you will be returned to the local folder list. 13.2.3.2 Send To This function will allow you to send files from the local folder list to the remote folder list. It is only available in the local folder list. This is very similar to the copy and paste function. The difference is that you do not have to paste the file to the remote folder. It is done as soon as you activate the Send To function. When you activate this function, the file can only be sent to the root of the remote folder list. To activate the Send To function, perform the following steps:

1) After the FTP service is connected, you can press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) while you are in the remote folder list to open the menu. Then, press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Open Local Folder, and press Enter. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-o (dots 1-3-5). 2) After you have activated this function, you will see the disk list, just like when you open the file manager. You will be taken to flashdisk by default. However, if you have a SD card or USB memory stick inserted, you can navigate to those disks by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Please refer to chapter 3 in this manual regarding navigation keys in the File manager. 3) Then, select a file by pressing Space on the file. You can only select files and not folders. 4) After you have selected a file, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4), and then press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Send To, and press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) to activate the Send To function without having to call up the menu. 5) Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense U2 is working. If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. When the transfer has completed, you will hear, xxx file sent, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you will hear, xxx file not sent. Once all of the files have been transferred completely, you will hear, Successfully sent, and you will be returned to the remote folder list. 13.2.3.3 Retrieve File The Retrieve File function will allow you to retrieve a file from the remote folder list, and move it to the local folder. This function is available while in the remote folder list. You can only save files to the flashdisk/download folder with this function. Perform the following steps to activate the Retrieve File function:

1) After you have connected the FTP service, you will be connected to the remote folder list. You can navigate through the list using the same commands as in the File manager. You can reference these commands by referring to chapter 3 of this manual. 2) Select the file that you want to retrieve by pressing Space on it. Note that you cannot select folders. 3) After you have selected the file, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu, and then use Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Retrieve File, and press Enter. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by press Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-

5). 4) Just like copying and pasting, you will hear a sound that indicates that the Braille Sense U2 is working. If the file is larger than 300 KB, you will also hear the progress meter each time an additional 10% has been completed. If the file is less than 300 KB, then you will only hear the sound, and not the progress meter. When the transfer has completed, you will hear, xxx file retrieved, where xxx is the name of the file. If the file does not transfer, you will hear, xxx file not retrieved. Once all of the files have been transferred completely, you will hear, Retrieve completed, and you will be returned to the remote folder list. 13.2.3.4 New Folder The New Folder function will allow you to create a new folder in the local folder list or the remote folder list. To create a new folder, perform the following steps:

1) After the FTP service has connected, navigate to the local or remote folder list and move to the folder where you want to make new folder. You can move between the remote folder list and local folder list by pressing Enter-o (dots 1-3-5). And how to move among the items in the folder list is the same as how to move in the File manager. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu, and then use Space-1 or Space-4 to navigate to New Folder, and press Enter. Or, you can activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). 3) You will then see an edit box that says, New folder name:. Type in the new folder name using ASCII characters, and then press Enter. If the folder is created successfully, you will hear, xxx folder created, where xxx is the name of the folder. You will then be automatically returned to the list that you were in, whether it was the remote or local folder list. 4) To cancel any changes that you made, press Space-z (dots 1-

3-5-6), and you will be returned to the previous list. 13.2.3.5 Delete File/Folder This function will allow you to delete files or folders in the remote or local folder list. Note that if a folder contains folders, you will not be able to delete the folder. To activate this function, perform the following steps:

1) After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local or remote folder list, and select the file(s) or folder(s) that you want to delete by pressing Space on them. The navigation keys are exactly the same as when using the file manager. To reference these keys, please refer to chapter 4 of this manual. You can move to between remote folder list and local folder list by pressing Enter-o (dots 1-3-5). 2) Once you have selected the file(s) or folder(s), press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4), and then use Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Delete File/Folder, and press Enter. You can also activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Space-d (dots 1-

4-5). 3) If the file(s) or folder(s) is/are deleted successfully, you will hear, Delete completed. 13.2.3.6 Information This function will allow you to check information regarding files or folders that are located in the remote or local folder list. You can activate this function by performing the following steps:

1) After you have connected to the FTP service, navigate to the local or remote folder list, and select the file or folder that you want to know information about. The navigation keys are exactly the same as when using the file manager. To reference these keys, please refer to chapter 4 in this manual. 2) Then, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu, and then use Space-1 or Space-4 to move to Information, and press Enter. Or, you can activate this function without calling up the menu by pressing Enter-i (dots 2-4). 3) After you have activated the function, you will see the Information dialog box, which consists of Type, Size, Date, Attribute (except folder), and Close. You can move between these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2). If you select multiple files, the Information function will display the number of selected files and size. 13.2.4 ActiveSync Service This service works the same way as when you connect the Braille Sense U2 to a computer via a USB cable, and use ActiveSync. If the connection succeeds when activating it by pressing Enter on ActiveSync, you will hear the sound that ActiveSync makes when there is a successful connection. Just as with all of the Bluetooth services, the remote Bluetooth device may need to authorize the Braille Sense U2. You will then be returned to the Bluetooth Service list. Just like using ActiveSync via USB, you can copy and paste files from the Braille Sense U2 from the remote Bluetooth device to the Braille Sense U2 and visa versa. If you want to disconnect the service, you can press Enter-d (dots 1-4-

5) while in the Bluetooth Manager, and the Braille Sense U2 will say, Service disconnected, and you will be returned to the Bluetooth Service list. You will no longer see the word Connected after ActiveSync in the Bluetooth Service List. You cannot use ActiveSync via USB and Bluetooth at the same time. If the remote Bluetooth device is connected via USB and using ActiveSync, you must disconnect the remote Bluetooth device in order to use the ActiveSync service via Bluetooth. 13.2.5 Serial Port If you connect this service, you should not connect the other services. The Serial Port service will allow you to use your Braille Sense U2 as a wireless Braille display via Bluetooth. In order to use the Braille Sense U2 as a wireless Bluetooth display, please reference the following sections. Note that you must be using Window-Eyes in order to use the Braille Sense U2 as a wireless Braille display. Note that following explanation is how to use the Bluetooth serial port when the Window-

Eyes is installed as a screen reader program in PC. If you are using Supernova or JAWS as a screen reader, please contact HIMS by e-mail. The e-mail id of HIMS is hims@hims-inc.com. 13.2.5.1 Setting up the Braille Sense U2 to Work as a Bluetooth Braille Display The following steps will walk you through setting up the Braille Sense U2 to work as a Bluetooth Braille display. These instructions assume that you already have Bluetooth installed on your computer. The following instructions assume that you are running Window-Eyes 5.5, or greater, and at least Windows XP, Service Pack 2. Before starting, make sure that your Braille Sense U2 is turned on. Although it may not be necessary, you should close all applications that are running on the Braille Sense U2, and be in the Program menu for best performance. If you have more than one Braille Sense U2, make sure that only the Braille Sense U2 that you want to configure is turned on. 13.2.5.2 Setting up the Computer 1) Navigate to the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray. You may do this in Windows XP by pressing windows key-b, and then use the Right or Left Arrow Keys until you reach the Bluetooth icon. Then, press the context menu key. Note that if you dont have the Bluetooth icon in the System Tray, you may have to change the settings for the Bluetooth icon to appear. Go to the Windows Control Panel, Bluetooth Devices, Options, and then check the check box that says Show the Bluetooth Icon in the Notification Area. 2) Press the up or down arrow keys until you get to Open Bluetooth settings. 3) Press Enter. 4) Select the Device tab control. You may need to press Ctrl-Tab in order to select this tab control. 5) Tab to the Add button. 6) Press Enter. 7) Press Space to check the checkbox for My device is setup and ready to be found. 8) Press enter. 9) The XP machine will find the Braille Sense U2, and it will be called Windows CE. Remember that the Braille Sense U2 must be turned on in order to be found as mentioned above. If you forgot to turn the Braille Sense U2 on, leave it turned on, exit the Bluetooth settings, and start at step number 1 above. 10) Press the down arrow key to focus Windows CE. 11) Tab to the Next button. 12) Press Enter. 13) Press down arrow to focus the radio button, Let me choose my own passkey. Focus will automatically be put in the edit box, and you may hear a tool tip that says, We recommend using a passkey that is 8 to 16 digits long. You should type your passkey here. For example, you might type, 1111. 14) Press Enter. Windows will then begin exchanging the passkeys, and a new dialog will appear on the computer. 15) The Braille Sense U2 will then ask for the passkey by saying, Computer Edit Box PIN code: Using the same passkey that was typed in to the computer, type in the same passkey on the Braille Sense U2 and press Enter on the Braille Sense U2. 16) The computer will say the message, Found new hardware and the final dialog should appear on the computer. Remember that you can press ctrl-shift-w to have the entire dialog read using Window-Eyes. The dialog should display that the Bluetooth device was successfully set up. It is very important to note the COM ports for the outgoing COM port and the incoming COM port. For example, the outgoing COM port may be COM 5, and the incoming COM port may be COM 6. Do not be surprised if your COM ports are not set to COM 5 and COM 6. The COM ports used can vary from computer to computer. 17) Press tab to get to the Finish button, and press Enter to activate it. 18) You will then be taken back to the Bluetooth devices setting dialog. Press Ctrl-Tab twice to focus the COM ports tab control. 19) Press tab to get to the list of COM ports, and then press the Down Arrow to move through the list of COM ports to make sure that they match the COM ports that were mentioned when you completed the Bluetooth device wizard. You should hear your first COM port, then the direction, and then the name. After you press down Arrow again, you should hear the next COM port, the direction, and name. For example, when you press the down arrow key the first time, you might hear, COM 5 Outgoing Windows CE Bluetooth Serial. When you press the down arrow key a second time, you might hear, COM 6 Incoming WindowsCE. 20) Tab to the OK button, and press Enter. You have now setup the Braille Sense U2 and the computer. However, you must properly setup Window-Eyes in order to use the Braille Sense U2 as a Bluetooth Braille display. 13.2.5.3 Setting up Window-Eyes 1) Press ctrl-backslash to open the Window-Eyes Control Panel. 2) Press alt-f to open the File menu. 3) Press the up arrow, or down arrow to move to Select Braille Display, and press Enter. Or, just press B to open the Select Braille Display dialog without using the Arrow Keys. 4) Press the down arrow or the letter b until you hear Braille Sense U2. 5) Press tab to get to the COM port list box 6) Select the COM port that was given as the outgoing COM port when you setup the computer to interact with the Braille Sense U2 via Bluetooth. 7) Press Enter Now that you have set up Window-Eyes, you need to finish the setup on the Braille Sense U2. 13.2.5.4 Setting up the Braille Sense U2 1) Press F1 to get to the Program menu. 2) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to get to the Utilities menu, or just press the letter u. 3) Press Enter. 4) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to get to Terminal for screen reader, and press enter. 5) Press Space-1 or Space-4 to get to Bluetooth Serial Port, and press Enter. The Braille Sense U2 should be connected as a Bluetooth Braille display. To exit this mode from the Braille Sense U2, press Backspace-Space-

z. Please note that F1 on the Braille Sense U2 will still take you to the Program menu. This is to allow you to use the applications on the Braille Sense U2 at the same time, and be able to switch back to using the Braille Sense U2 as a Bluetooth Braille display. 13.2.6 Bluetooth keyboard service If you use this service, you can connect a Bluetooth keyboard. In order to use this service, you must turn on the Bluetooth keyboard. You can connect a Bluetooth keyboard by doing the following. 1) Move to Bluetooth keyboard and press Enter in device list. 2) And then Keyboard service will displayed. 3) Press Enter on Keyboard service. 4) And then you will be prompted to input PIN code if Bluetooth keyboard require you to input PIN code. Otherwise, you dont need to input PIN code. 5) Input PIN code on the Braille Sense U2 and press Enter. And then you need to input PIN code on the Bluetooth Keyboard. (The PIN code of Bluetooth keyboard may be referred to the Bluetooth keyboard manual.) 13.2.7 Bluetooth Printer service You can print the documents connecting the printer to Braille Sense U2 through the Bluetooth. To use this function, you need to use the printer that supports Bluetooth or has a capability connecting Bluetooth receiver. To set, follow these steps below:

1) Press Backspace-3-4-5-6 to turn on the Bluetooth. 2) Execute Bluetooth program. 3) Bluetooth device has been detected. 4) By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, move to Bluetooth printer device 5) Press Enter. 6) It will show Service list, after scanning service. 7) By pressing Space-1 or Space-4, move to Printer. 8) Press Enter 9) Then the printer will have been connected to Braille Sense U2. 13.2.8 Using Multiple Services Simultaneously You can use the LAN, FTP, and ActiveSync Bluetooth services all at the same time. However, if you plan to use any of these services at the same time, you should connect the FTP service before connecting the LAN and ActiveSync services. Otherwise, you may experience problems. However, if you want to connect to the Serial Port, you should not connect to any of the other Bluetooth services in the Bluetooth Service list. 13.3 Hot keys in Bluetooth Manager Scanning Bluetooth device: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Connecting device: Enter on the device name Connecting service: Enter on the service name Disconnect service in Bluetooth service list: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 1) FTP service Open local folder/move remote folder: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Send to: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Retrieve file: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Delete file/folder: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 14. Database Manager The Database manager is a program that can be used to create a database in the form that you specify. You can use the Database manager to add records and search for data in your records. A table contains at least one record, and a record consists of at least one field. You can specify attributes for each of the fields. In other words, a record is made up of a group of one or more fields. When the Database manager is started, it will check whether or not a table has been registered or created already. If no table has been registered yet, a Table Manager dialog box will appear to help you to register a new table. If there is at least one table already registered, a Search Records dialog box will appear and the Search edit box will be focused, so that you can search for data records in the tables. If you want to close the program while you are adding or searching a table, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Or you can use the menu. Press Space-

m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu. Move to Exit by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 (or Left or down scroll button) repeatedly, and press Enter. Or you can type z (dots 1-3-5-6) in the menu. The major navigation keys that can be used in this program are as follows. 1. Moving by controls Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2) or Space-F3 Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5) or F3 2. Moving in a list box Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button 3. Changing the selection in a prompt box Select the next value: Space-4, Space or down scroll button Select the previous value: Space-1, Backspace or up scroll button The menu in the database manager consists of the following items. You can open this menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. 1. Table manager: Here you can create, delete, and modify tables, records, and their fields. When you run the database manager for the first time, the table manager dialog box will appear. 2. Add record: You can add records to the current table. 3. Search records: You can search records in the current table. You can also search each field in the table. 4. List of records found: You can use this menu item to go through a list of records found in the table by the previous search. Here, you can delete or modify each record in the list. If you didnt search for anything before you use this function, the message, no items, will be displayed. 5. Setting backup option: You can select the method to back up the 6. Backup database: You can backup all database files that are used in 7. Restore database: You can restore the database files that are backed database. the database manager. up already. 8. Exit: It is used to close the database manager. Each of these menu items will be discussed in the following sections below. 14.1 Table Manager The Table Manager dialog box is where you can create, delete, or modify a table. This dialog box contains the following controls. 1. Table name list: It displays the name of registered tables, and their order in the list. 2. Add table button: Using this option, you can create a new table. 3. Modify table button: Using this option, you can change the name of a table, or modify the structure of the table, by adding or deleting fields. 4. Delete table button: Using this option, you can delete the table that you have selected in the table name list. 5. Set default table button: Using this option, you can set the table that opens by default when you run the program. 6. Close button: After closing the Table Manager dialog box, it will take you back to where you were before you started the Table Manager dialog box. When there is no registered table, if you press Enter at the Close button, the database manager program will be closed. You can move between each of these controls by pressing tab (Space-

4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). 14.1.1 Add Table Add table is a dialog box where you can create a new table. This dialog box contains Table name edit box, registered fields list, Add field button, Modify field button, Delete field button, Previous field button, Next field button, Confirm button and Cancel button. You can move between these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). Suppose you want to create a table called addressbook which contains 4 fields: name, telephone, address, and memo. You can create this table as follows. 1) In the Table Manager dialog box, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add table button, and press Enter. Or you can just press a (dot 1) in the dialog box. 2) Then, the Add Table dialog box will appear, and the Table name edit box will be focused. 3) Type addressbook and then press tab (Space-4-5). 4) Then, the registered fields list will be focused. At first, no items will be displayed in the list. As you add fields to this table, they will be added to this list box. 5) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Add field button, and press Enter. Or you can just press its shortcut key, a (dot 1). 6) Then the Add field dialog box will be opened, and the Field name edit box will be focused. 7) Type name here, and then press tab (Space-4-5). 8) Then, the Field type combo box will be focused. Press Space-

4 or Space-1 to move to edit box, and press tab (Space-4-5). 9) The Set primary key check box will be focused. If you want to set the current field as the primary key, press Space in order to check it. 10) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. Now, the name field has been added to the addressbook table. If you want to cancel adding the field, press tab (Space-4-5) once more to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. If you have added a new field, you will get a message saying that a new field has been added. Then, the registered fields list will be shown again. Now, name field appears in the list, with the form, name (edit box, pri) 1/1. Since only one primary key exists in a table, if you have set a field as the primary key, the Set primary key check box will not be shown in the Add field dialog box when you add another field. Add the telephone, address, and memo fields by repeating the step 5 through 10 above. Note that you may want to set the Field type of telephone field to number, address to edit box, and memo to multi line edit box. Once you have added all of the fields you want, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a field name that you want to change on a registered fields list. Then press m

(dots 1-3-4) or tab (Space-4-5), and enter on a Modify field. It appears as Field name: (selected filed name), here you type the Name you want, and press Enter. Even though you can change a name of a field, it is not possible to change the property of that field. If you want to delete an already registered field, press Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly in the registered fields list to move to the name of the field you want to delete. And then press tab (Space-4-5) repeatedly move to Delete field button and press enter or press d (dots 1-4-5), the shortcut key for the Delete field button. Or you can also press tab

(Space-4-5) repeatedly to move to the Delete field button and press Enter. To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in the registered fields list. Once you are on the field, press p (dots 1-2-3-4) or n (dots 1-3-4-5). Or you press tab (Space-4-5) and enter on a Previous field button or Next field button. Then, the Add Table dialog box will be closed, and the table name list box will be shown again. The newly created table will be added to this list, and address book 1/1 will be shown in the list. To close the Table Manager dialog box, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Close button, and press Enter. Or you can just press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to close the dialog box. Then, the Search Records dialog box will be opened, and the name field, the first field of the address book table, will be shown. Here, you can type the name you want to search for. 14.1.2 Modify Table Modify table is used to modify the name or structure of a registered table. It contains the same controls as in the Add Table dialog box. To modify a table, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and press Enter on Table Manager. Or you can just press the hotkey for Table Manager, Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5). The table name list will be focused when the Table Manager dialog box is opened. Press Space-

1 or Space-4 to move to the table that you want to modify, and press m (dots 1-3-4), the shortcut key for the Modify table button. Or you can press tab (Space-4-5) repeatedly to move to the Modify table button, and press Enter. Then, a dialog box where you can modify the table will appear. This table is same as the Add Table dialog box. The only difference is that the Table name edit box, and registered fields list contain the information already stored in the table. You can not change the name of table. If you want to add additional fields, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Add field and press Enter. And then type in the new field name and press Enter. If you want to delete an already registered field, press Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly in the registered fields list to move to the name of the field you want to delete. And then press tab (Space-

4-5) repeatedly move to Delete field button and press enter or press d

(dots 1-4-5), the shortcut key for the Delete field button. Or you can also press tab (Space-4-5) repeatedly to move to the Delete field button and press Enter. To change the order of a field, which is in your table, you can move to the field that you want to change. This can be done when you are in the registered fields list. Once you are on the field, press p (dots 1-2-3-4) or n (dots 1-3-4-5). Or you press tab (Space-4-5) and enter on a Previous field button or Next field button. If you need to change a name of a field that is registered, move to a field name that you want to change on a registered fields list. Then press m

(dots 1-3-4) or tab (Space-4-5), and enter on a Modify field. It appears as Field name: (selected filed name), here you type the Name you want, and press Enter. Even though you can change a name of a field, it is not possible to change the property of that field. 14.1.3 Delete table This option is used when you want to delete a table. To delete a table, Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and press Enter on Table Manager. Or you can press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), the hotkey for Table Manager. When the Table Manager dialog box is opened, the Table name edit box will be focused. In this list box, you can move to the name of the table you want to delete by pressing Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly, and press d (dots 1-4-5), the shortcut key for the Delete table button. Or you can press tab (Space-

4-5) repeatedly to move to the Delete table button, and press Enter. Then, Delete table? Yes will be displayed. If you want to delete, press Enter, and if you want to cancel, press Space to select No, and press Enter. 14.1.4 Set Default Table When you set a table as the default table, whenever the database manager is started, the table will be activated and you will be placed in the search dialog. You can search and add fields on this table. If you have registered more than one table and there is a table you use more frequently than the others, it may be convenient for you to set this table as the default table. However, if no table has been set as the default table, the table that was used the last time will be activated when the database manager is started. To set a table as the default table, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and press Enter on table manager. Or you can also press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), the hotkey for Table Manager. Then, the Table Manager dialog box will appear, and the table name list will be focused. In this list, press Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly to move to the name of the table you want to set as the default table. Then press s (dots 2-3-4), the shortcut key for the Set default table, or press tab (Space-4-5) repeatedly to move to the Set default table button and press Enter. Or you can press Enter on the name of the table in the table name list. Then, you will get a message saying that the table is set as the default table, and the Table Manager dialog box will be closed. 14.2 Add Record You can use this option to add information to a table that you have created. When the database manager is started, the Search Records dialog box will be opened at first. To open the Insert a New Record dialog box, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu, and press Enter on Insert a New Record. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press Enter-i (dots 2-4). You can think of a record as a collection of information (fields) for an object (record). Lets consider the addressbook table you created in the previous section. Adding records to this table can be performed as follows. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and press Enter on Insert a New Record. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-i (dots 2-4). 2) Then the name field, the first field in the addressbook table, will be shown. Here, you type the name you want to add, and press tab (Space-4-5). 3) Then, the telephone field will be focused. Here, type the phone number. Since this field is of number type, you can type only a limited set of characters such as numbers and hyphen. You can enter a number without the leading number sign. If you press Space instead of (hyphen), the hyphen will be entered. 4) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the address field. Type the address. 5) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the memo field. Since this field is of multi edit box type, you can type multiple lines. To start a new line, press Enter. 6) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button. If you press Enter here, the one record that you have just entered will be added to the table. If you do not want to save the record you have just typed in, press tab (Space-4-5) once more to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. Or you can just press Space-e (dots 1-5). If you have added a record, the name field will be focused again so that you can add another record. If you press shift-tab (Space-1-2) at a field, the focus will be moved to the previous field. To go back to the Search Records dialog box, press Enter-s (dots 2-3-

4). To open the Table Manager dialog box, press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-

5). If you open these dialog boxes while you are entering a record, you will be asked if you want to save the record. Select Yes or No by pressing Space or Backspace, and press Enter. If you select Yes, the record will be saved, and if you select No, it will not be saved and open the specified dialog box. If you select Cancel, the dialog box will not be opened. 14.3 Search Records After you have added your records, if you want to search for information that is in your records, you can use the Search Records dialog box. To open the Search Records dialog box, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) and press Enter on Search Records. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-s (dots 2-3-4). Then, the Search Records dialog box will be opened, and the first field of the table will be focused. Here, you can type the text that you want to search for. If you want to search for records using content from more than one field, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to another field. Type the text to search for, and press Enter. Then, the List of Records Found will be opened and the search result will be shown in the List of Records Found. Being able to search in more than one field can be useful if you are searching for those who have the same first and last name. In the List of Records Found, each record will be shown in the following form. (the name of the first field) : (other information in the record) xx/yy. yy is the total number of records found, and xx is the order of the current record in the list. If no record has been found, you will get the message No records found, and the current field will be shown again, so that you can type another text to search for. You can move through the List of Records Found as follows. 1. Move by records Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 2. Move between the fields in a record Move to the next field: Space-5 Move to the previous field: Space-2 Move to the last field: Space-4-6 Move to the first field: Space-1-3 In the List of Records Found, if you want to search for different text, you can press Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) again to open the Search Records dialog box. Then, type the new text that you want to search for. If you want to delete a record found, press Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the record, and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) in any of the fields in the record. Then, you will be asked if you really want to delete the record. Here, you can select Yes or No by pressing Space or Backspace. If you press Enter after selecting Yes, the record will be deleted, and if you select No, the deletion will be canceled. If you want to search for records in another table, press Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) to open the Table Manager dialog box, and press Enter on the name of the table that you want to activate. If you want to change the content of a record, select the record by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly. And press Enter-m (dots 1-

3-4) at any field in the record. Then, the same dialog box as the Insert a New Record dialog box will be opened. To change the content of some fields, move to the fields by pressing tab (Space-4-5), type the new content of the fields, and press Enter. To save the modified content of a record, press Enter after typing the contents of all the fields that you want to change. Or you can move to the Confirm button by pressing tab (Space-4-5) repeatedly, and press Enter. If you want to cancel modifying the record, press tab (Space-4-5) once more to move to the Cancel button and press Enter. 14.4 List of Records Found The List of Records Found will appear when the Search Records was performed successfully. While you are using the Insert a New Record or Search Records dialog box, if you want to go to the List of Records Found, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu, and press Enter on List of Records Found. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5). 14.5 Setting Backup Option To backup your database file, you can do it manually using the Backup Database function. You can also backup your database file automatically by using the Set Backup Option. To activate the Set Backup Option function, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open up the menu. Then press Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly to move Set Backup Option. Then press Enter on it. Or, you can press e (dots 1-5) in the menu to go to Set Backup Option. You can also activate the function without opening up the menu by pressing Enter-e (dots 1-

5). If you activate the function, you will see a dialog box. The dialog box has three controls: Backup mode radio button, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can switch between controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). To switch between radio buttons, you can press Space-1, Backspace, Space-4, or Space. The Backup mode has three radio buttons: Manual backup, Always backup changes when exiting, and prompt to backup changes when exiting. 1. If you select the Manual backup, it will not create a new backup file even though there may be changes in the database. In this case, you can only make a new backup file by using the Backup Database menu. 2. If you select the Always backup changes when exiting, a new backup file will be automatically created if you modify the database or add other information when you exit the Database manager. 3. If you select the Prompt to backup changes when exiting, you will see the message Backup changes? Yes when you exit the database manager, if you have modified the database or added other information. If you press Enter on Yes, it will automatically create a new backup file and exit the database manager. If you press Space-

4 once and press Enter on No, it will exit without making a new backup file. You can change the backup mode if you press Enter after focusing on one of the three radio buttons. Or, you can press Enter on Confirm by moving to it by pressing tab (Space-4-5). The default backup mode is set to Prompt to backup changes when exiting. 14.6 Backup Database If a cold reset occurs, or if your battery goes dead, all of the data in the Database manager will be lost. So, it is very important that you make a backup file every time you make a change to the Database file. To go to Backup Database, open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2. Then, use the Space-1 or Space-4, and find Backup Database. Then, press Enter. You can also press u (dots 1-3-6) while you are in the menu to get to Backup Database. Or, you can press Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) to activate this function without calling up the menu. If you already have a backup file, you will hear the message Backup changes? Yes. If you have made any changes to your database file, press Enter to create a new backup file. If you want to keep the previous backup file, press Space, locate No, and press Enter on it. When you make a backup file in your database manager, you will always have a new backup file with the extension SDF. The name of backup file is UserDatabase.sdf 14.7 Restore Database If you want to restore the database file after a cold reset, press Space-m

(dots 1-3-4) or F2 to call up the menu, and use the up and down scroll buttons to find Restore Database. Then, press Enter on Restore Database. Or, you can press r (dots 1-2-3-5) while you are in the menu to find restore database. You can also press Enter-o (dots 1-3-

5) to activate this function, without calling up the menu. If you activate the Restore Database function, and you already have an database file, you will hear the message, Database file already exists. Restore? Yes. If you press Enter, the backup database file will be restored to the current database file. If you want to cancel, you press Space and press Enter. 14.8 Hot Keys for Database Manager Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Table manager: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) 1. Move by controls Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) 2. Move in a list box Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button 3. Select your answer in the prompt box Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll button 4. Move in the list of records found Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 Move to the next field: Space-5 Move to the previous field: Space-2 Move to the last field: Space-4-6 Move to the first field: Space-1-3 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 15. EXTRAS 15.1 Games 15.1.1 Sense Dice game You dont need to bring dice anymore. Use Braille Sense U2!

Anyone can play Dice game anywhere, anytime. 15.1.1.1 Execute 1) Dice game is in Extras from the main menu. Press Enter on Extras or press X (dots 1-3-4-6) from the main menu. 2) Press X (dots 1-3-4-6) or move to sense dice game by pressing dot 4 with space and then press Enter to start game. 15.1.1.2 How it works You can hear opening sound when you start game and dice(s) list will show up. You can select the number of dices up to 3. 1) Press Enter on the number of dices by pressing space-1 or space-4 to select that you want to play. 2) It will announce the number of dices that you selected with 3) When you press Enter, you can hear a rolling sound of dices and 4) Press space bar to play another game after the message Press 5) Press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to exit the game. It will go back to message and sound. it displays the result. space to go on follows. Extras menu. 15.1.1.3 Changing the number of dices You can change the number of dices while playing game. 1) Press space-e (dot s 1-5) or F4 when the message Press space 2) And select the number of dices that you want to play when the list to go on announces. displays. Press Enter on the list that you want to change playing. 15.1.1.4 Exit Press space-z to exit the game. It will go back to Extras menu. 15.1.2 Sense Brain Game There are 4 games in Sense brain game. You can play everywhere, every time. It will help train your brain. Have fun and be smarter. 15.1.2.1 Execute 1) Sense brain game is in Extras menu. To enter Extras menu, press Enter on Extras menu or press c (dots 1-4). 2) To start Sense brain game, press Enter on Sense brain game or press r (dots 1-2-3-5). 15.1.2.2 Game menu There are 5 menus in Sense brain game: 4 game menus (Memory game, Reverse game, Chase a criminal, and Multiplication table) and View ranking menu. To start game, press Enter on a game you want. You can see your record in View ranking menu. 15.1.2.3 Playing game When you start each game, you can hear opening sound and instruction. Press Enter to start game or press space to listen to the instruction again. 15.1.2.4 Memory game When the game is started, you can hear numbers or alphabets one by one. Take stage 1 For instance, it will say 3 numbers one by one. Memorize these numbers. When it says Type the answer, write the numbers in the order and press Enter. If the answer is correct, you can go next question. If the answer is incorrect or time is over, you can hear a beep sound and the game will be over. Answering time is 10 seconds. When the game is over, it will say your score. If your score is between rank 1 and 5, it will say Type your ID. Write your name and press Enter to record. (You can check your record in View ranking menu) Or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to skip it. Finally, it will ask Do you want to play again? Press Enter on Yes to play game again. Or press Enter on No to back to game menu. 15.1.2.5 Reverse game When the game is started, you can hear numbers or alphabets one by one. Take stage 1 For instance, it will say 3 numbers one by one. Memorize these numbers. When it says Type the answer, write the numbers in reverse order and press Enter. If the answer is correct, you can go next question. If the answer is incorrect or time is over, you can hear a beep sound and the game will be over. Answering time is 10 seconds. When the game is over, it will say your score. If your score is between rank 1 and 5, it will say Type your ID. Write your name and press Enter to record. (You can check your record in View ranking menu) Or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to skip it. Afterwards, it will ask Do you want to play again? Press Enter on Yes to play game again. Or press Enter on No to back to game menu. 15.1.2.6 Chase a criminal When the game is started, you can hear a sound of footsteps. A thief hid in a 10-story building. A police will say on which floor the thief hided. After a while, the thief will run away to the up and down stairs. It will say Up and down repeatedly. Listen carefully and you need to find on which floor the thief finally hided. When it will say Type the answer, write the number of floor the thief hided and press Enter. If the answer is correct, you can go next question. If the answer is incorrect or time is over, you can hear a beep sound and the game will be over. Answering time is 10 seconds. When the game is over, it will say your score. If your score is between rank 1 and 5, it will say Type your ID. Write your name and press Enter to record. (You can check your record in View ranking menu) Or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to skip it. Finally, it will ask Do you want to play again? Press Enter on Yes to play game again. Or press Enter on No to back to game menu. 15.1.2.7 Multiplication table When the game is started, you can hear numbers one by one. Take stage 1 for instance, it will say 2 1-digit numbers one by one. Multiply these numbers. When it says Type the answer, write the multiplied number and press Enter. If the answer is correct, you can go next question. If the answer is incorrect or time is over, you can hear a beep sound and the game will be over. Answering time is 10 seconds. When the game is over, it will say your score. If your score is between rank 1 and 5, it will say Type your ID. Write your name and press Enter to record. (You can check your record in View ranking menu) Or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) to skip it. Finally, it will ask Do you want to play again? Press Enter on Yes to play game again. Or press Enter on No to back to game menu. 15.1.2.8 View ranking You can see your record in this menu. Press Enter on View ranking menu. Press dot-1 with space or dot-4 with space and press Enter on the game name you want to check. The ranking list will show up. It shows rank, name and score. Press space to see next record. To go back to View ranking menu, press Enter. 15.2 Hot Keys in Extras 1. Games Skip record: space-e/space-z 16. Social Networking A social networking service is an online service, platform, or site that focuses on building and reflecting of social networks or social relations among people who share interests and/or activities. To execute the Social networking service, follow these steps:

(1) The Braille Sense U2 needs to be connected to the internet using Setup internet of the Utilities.

(2) Press the short cut key, c (dots 1-4) form the program menu. Or using the navigation key to move to the social networking and press Enter. 16.1 The component of the Social networking service Social networking consists of following services. 1) Twitter (t) 2) Google talk (g) 3) Msn messenger (n) Each account should be created through the web before using the service in the Braille Sense U2. To navigate between each program, you need to press Space-1 or Space-4. Executing each service, press Enter on the program or shortcut key. 16.2 Twitter

"Twitter" is one of the social networking services that allow users to communicate with other users in real time. Using "Twitter", you can post and read other mentions. Also you can send and receive mention or message conveniently and search tweets quickly, after adding to favorite with Add to Favorite function. The following is how to launch Twitter. 1) Within the main menu, press "c (dots 1-4)" or move to the Social Networking" using Space-4" and press "Enter". And then you can enter sub menu of Social Networking". 2) Press "t (dots 2-3-4-5)" or move to the "Twitter" and then press

"Enter". 16.2.1 Main Terms

1) Tweet: It is a message posted in Twitter. It is similar to posting on the message board. But, the difference is there is no space to write title, compared to common posting. 2) Tweets allow you to post 140 characters regardless of language. It can contain URL. 3) Mention: It allows you to send more than one person tweets.Reply belongs to Mention type. 4) Reply: This is to answer on a mention to specific user. 5) Follow: This is to follow other users. You can subscribe other users tweets which you are following. 6) Followers: This means other users following you, in other words, who subscribe your tweets. 7) Unfollow: This means to stop following other users. 8) Retweet: This is to delivery other users tweet to your Follower. It is similar to recommendation used in general message. Also,

"RT" is abbreviation. 9) Friend: This is users who follow each other. In other words, you follow A user and also A user follows you. 10) DM: DM is Direct Message which allows you to send and receive Direct Message with just one person. You can only send a Direct Message to Follower. 11) Also only users who exchange message can see Direct Message. Other users cant see their Direct Message. 12) Timeline: This appears tweets which your follows posted in 13) the newest registration order. 16.2.2 Launch Twitter

In order to use "Twitter" program, you need a "Twitter" account. Visit

"Twitter" web site and create "Twitter" account. If you have a "Twitter"

account, you can use "Twitter" program after login. If you want to use "Twitter", the Braille Sense U2 needs to be connected to Internet. 16.2.2.1 Sign In If you launch "Twitter", Sign In dialog box appears. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). Sign In dialog box consists of as follows. 1) ID: As a computer edit box, you should type a "Twitter" account Id. 2) Password: As a computer edit box, type Twitter password. 3) Automatically set the time from the Internet: As a check box, It can set whether Braille Sense U2 Time is equivalent to Internet Time Server or not. The default is Select". 4) Remember me: As a check box, you can choose whether you save ID or not. The default is "Uncheck". 5) Save password: As a check box, you can choose whether you save password or not. The default is "Uncheck". 6) Auto Sign In: As a check box, you can choose whether you automatically sign in Twitter. The default is Uncheck. If you select Check, you can automatically sign in without displaying Sign-in dialog box. But, in order to use Auto Sign In function, Remember me check box and Save Password check box are set to Check. One of these check boxes is set to Uncheck, Auto Sign In function will not work. 7) Sign In: You can access to the twitter. 8) Cancel: You can cancel access and close Twitter program. The followings are the way to sign in "Twitter". 1) When the Sign In dialog box appears you will be placed in the

"ID" computer edit box. Here, you should type the ID that you have registered for your "Twitter". Note that the ID should be typed using computer Braille. 2) Press "Tab (F3 buttons or Space-4-5)" to move to the "Password"

computer edit box. On this box, type the password that you have setup for your "Twitter" account. Again, you should use computer Braille for this. 3) If you want to save ID and password, press Space key to set to check on both Remember me check box and Save password check. 4) Also, if you want to automatically sign in Twitter, press Space key to set to check on Auto Sign In check box. 5) Press "Enter". Or after moving to the "Sign In" button using "Tab

(Space-4-5)" and then press "Enter"

6) With a "Connecting" message, Braille Sense U2 will try to sign in Twitter. If sign-in is successful, a "Refreshing Home Timeline"

message will be displayed. After a little moment, Tweet Window appears. If the Braille Sense U2 is not connected to the Internet, Please check your internet connection message will be displayed and back to the ID computer edit box. 16.2.2.2 Sign out and Exit

Sign Out is a function to close Twitter program launched with current account and return to Sign In dialog box. In order to launch Sign Out functions, press hot key, Enter-g(dots 1-2-4-5) or press Enter on Sign out menu located on the sub-menu of File by calling up the menu. If you want to exit Twitter program, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or press Exit menu located on the sub-menu of File by calling up the menu. 16.2.3 Twitter window If you successfully sign in, first Twitter window will appear. Twitter window consists of 10 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). The followings are compositions of Twitter Window. 1) Timeline: This represents tweet or retweet of your follows in the newest registration order. Timeline appears A writer Id: Tweet as follows. himsintl: Hello. This is HIMS International. In case of Mention, it appears Sender ID: @ receiver Id, Tweet as follows. Kimjk:@himsintl Hello. In case of Retweet, it appears "recommender Id: RT @ writer Id:

Tweet" as follows. Bill:RT:@robin: Happy birthday!!. The followings are movement keys used in Timeline.

- Move to the next tweet: Space-4

- Move to the previous tweet: Space-1

- Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Space-1-23

- Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Space-4-5-6

- Move to the previous 32 list: Space-1-2-6

- Move to the next 32 list: Space-3-4-5 2) Time list: This is a list to display date and time of tweets focused. Time list is displayed as below. Friday, January 1, 2011, 3:00 pm 3) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 tweets. You can launch this function pressing hot key, "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on this button. 4) Refresh button: This refreshes Timeline. You can launch "Refresh"

by pressing "Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)" or "Enter" key on the button. 5) Tweet button: Using this button, you can write tweet. You can launch the function by pressing "Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on the button. 6) Reply button: you can write reply on the focused tweets. You can launch the function pressing "Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6)" or "Enter" key on the button. 7) Remove button: You can delete tweet that you posted. You can launch the function pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5)" or "Enter" key on the button. This button appears, only when focus is on tweet which you posted. If others tweet is focused, this button cant appear. 8) Retweet button: You can repost another user's tweet. You can launch the function by pressing "Enter-e (dots 1-5)" or "Enter" key on the button. Retweet button cant appear when focus is on your tweets. 9) Add to Favorite button: You can add focused tweet to the Favorite list. You can launch the function by pressing "Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6)"

or "Enter" key on the button. 10) Tweet Information: You can view detailed information of the focused tweet. You can execute this function by pressing Enter on Tweet Information button or Backspace-i (dots 2-4). 16.2.4 Timeline

Braille Sense Twitter Program assists a variety of Timeline list. On Twitter Window', Timeline displays tweets corresponded to each timeline. With hot key, you can display the desired tweets, switching Timelines quickly. In other words, it is possible to display given mentions and specific users tweets. 16.2.4.1 A kinds of Timeline 1) Home Timeline: Home Timeline is displayed when you sign in

"Twitter" at first. 2) All tweets which your follows posted appear. The hot key for Home Timeline is "Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)". No matter what Timeline is displayed, if you press "Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)", refreshing Home Timeline will represent. 3) Friend Timeline: This will display all tweets, except for Retweet. 4) The hot key for Friend Timeline is "Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)". No matter what Timeline is displayed, if you press "Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)", refreshing Friend Timeline will represent. 5) User Time line: It displays only the tweets which specified user posted. 6) Hot key is "Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)". You need to specify a user, because User Timeline displays only specific users tweets. 7) If you press the hot key, "Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)", edit box to type user ID will appear. On this edit box, you can type user Id and then press

"Enter". After refreshing tweets that specific user posted, it appears. 8) Current User Timeline: It displays current user timeline. The hot key is Backspace-u (dots1-3-6). No matter what Timeline is displayed, if you press "Backspace-u (dots 1-3-6)", Current User Time line will represent. 9) Mention Timeline: It displays your mention received. 10) The hot key is "Enter-m (dots 1-3-4). Regardless of any Timeline, if you press "Enter-m (dots 1-3-4)" on the "Twitter window", Mention Timeline will be displayed after refreshing. 11) Retweet By Me: Only other users tweets which you recommend are displayed. 12) The hot key is "Backspace-b (dots 1-2). Regardless of any timeline, if you press "Backspace-b (dots 1-2)" on the "Twitter window", Retweet By me will be displayed after refreshing. 13) Retweet To Me: This displays only tweets recommended by your follows. followers. 14) The hot key is "Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5). Regardless of any timeline, if you press "Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) on the "Twitter window" Retweet To Me will be displayed after refreshing. 15) Retweet Of Me: It displays only your tweet recommended by your 16) The hot key is "Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5). Regardless of any timeline, if you press "Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) on the "Twitter window", Retweet Of Me will be displayed after refreshing. 17) Also you can see "Timeline", when you call up menu and move to the "Timeline" menu, pressing Space-4". After executing each

"Timeline" menu, Timeline will be displayed. 16.2.4.2. Refresh

Refresh is a function to renew tweet list indicated in Timeline. Once executing the function, Braille Sense U2 will access to the twitter server and load new posted tweets. And then new posted tweets are rearranged in chronological order. You can launch Refresh function by pressing the hot key "Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5)". Or Press "Tab" on the Twitter window and move to the

"Refresh" button and press "Enter". 16.2.4.3 Load next list

This is a function to load next tweet list by 32 tweets, whenever you launch the function. The tweets list is accumulated in Timeline until executing Refresh. In order to load next list, you have to press hot key, "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-

5)" or move to the "Next list" button pressing "Tab" and press "Enter". 16.2.5. Manage "Tweet"

16.2.5.1 Tweet

This is a function to post writing to "Twitter" server. To call up "Tweet" dialog box, press hot key, "Enter-t" on the "Twitter"

window or move to the "Tweet" dialog box, using "Tab" and then press

"Enter". Or Select "Tweet" on the sub menu of "Tweets", after calling up the menu.

"Tweet" dialog box consists of 4 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Tweet? : As edit box, you can write tweet. 2) Characters: As a status bar, it displays current characters and maximum characters like Characters: 0/140T. 3) Tweet: You can post tweet using this button. 4) Cancel: you can cancel posting of tweet using this button. To post tweet, follow these steps.

(1) Once "Tweet" dialog box is launched, "Tweet?" edit box appears.

(2) If you have typed tweet, press "Enter"

(3) If posting of tweet is successful, "Tweet completed" message represents. 16.2.5.2 Remove Tweet

This is a function to delete tweet which you posted but you are not able to delete tweet which other users posted. The followings are the way to delete tweets.

(1) Move to your tweet which you want to delete in Timeline.

(2) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). Or move to the "Remove" button, Using "Tab" key and press "Enter". Or call up the menu, enter sub menu of "Tweets" and launch "Remove Tweet".

(3) "Do you want to delete? Yes" message appears. Once you press

"Enter", tweet will be removed. If you want to cancel removing the tweet, you have to press Space" to change the button to "No" and press "Enter". Or Press "F4" or Space-e (dots 1-5). After canceling delete, you will go to the Timeline. 16.2.5.3 Retweet

Retweet is a function to deliver tweets which your follow posted to your followers. It is used on the tweets such as notification and sympathizing tweet. You cant recommend tweet you posted. The followings are how to retweet.

(1) Within Timeline, move to the tweet you want to repost.

(2) Press "Enter-e (1-5)". If retweet is successful, Successfully retweet" message will appear and you will go to the Timeline. 16.2.5.4 Send Mention

Mention is tweets which would be sent to more than one specified user. You can use "Mention" function when you want to communicate with specific users intensively. How to send mentions is similar to way to post tweet. Just, enter at sign

(@) in front of User Id and type mention you want to send. The following examples show the way to send mention.

(1) Launch "Tweet" dialog box, pressing "Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)" on the Timeline.

(2) If "Tweet" dialog box is launched, "Tweet?" message is displayed.

(3) As following examples, enter at sign (@) in front of the "User ID"

and type your message. Example 1: @Robin Hello, teacher. Example 2: @Bill @Robin lets have dinner together this evening.

"Example 1" sends "Hello, teacher" mention to "Robin".

"Example 2" sends Lets have dinner together this evening mention to

"Bill" and "Robin".

(4) Press "Enter"

(5) If sending is successful, "Tweet Completed" message will be displayed. 16.2.5.5 Reply

Reply is a function to answer received mention or tweet which other users posted. Reply is sent to as a mention type. If you want to open "Reply" dialog box, on the tweet which you want to answer, press "Enter-y(1-3-4-5-6)" or move to the "Reply" dialog box by pressing "Tab" and then press "Enter. Or After calling up the Menu, you can select "Reply" located on the sub menu of "Tweets".

"Reply" dialog box contains 4 controls as the same as "Tweet" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-

2"). 1) Tweet? : This is edit box. You can write answer on this box. 2) Characters: This is status bar. It displays current characters and maximum characters like Characters: 0/140T. 3) Tweet: As a button, if you press "Enter", reply will be posted. 4) Cancel: As a button, you can cancel posting reply. The followings are how to post reply.

(1) Within Timeline, move to the tweet which you want to reply and then press "Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6)".

(2) "Reply" dialog box is launched and "Tweet?" edit box appears. On the edit box, User ID who receives reply is already input as below. Tweet? @robin

(3) If you have type message, press "Enter".

(4) If posting reply is successful, "Tweet Completed" message will appear. 16.2.5.6 Tweet Information

Tweet Information provides 2 functions. One is a function to connect URL to web browser, if tweets contain URL address. The other is a function to copy tweets content. In order to call up the "Tweet Information" press "Enter" on the desired tweet.

"Tweet from User Id dialog box consists of 3 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control by pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Content: As a status control, this represents message content. 2) URL: As a list, this represents URL address contained in tweet. Using Space-4" or Space-1", select URL as you desire and press "Enter". And then web browser is launched to access to the URL address. 3) Close: As a button, this closes "Tweet from User Id dialog box and go back to the Timeline. Also you can use "F4" or Space-e (dots 1-5)"

key in order to close. The followings are editing hot keys used in Contents box. 1) Start selection: "Enter-b (dots 1-2)"

2) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) 3) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) 16.2.5.7 Add to Favorite

Add to Favorite is a function to add specific tweet to Favorite List and it is similar to Favorites function. You can add tweets as favorite. Later you can see the tweets quickly, calling up the Favorite list. The followings are how to add tweets to favorite.

(1) In Timeline, move to the tweet which you want to add to favorite.

(2) Press "Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). Or using "Tab" key, move to Add to Favorite button and press "Enter". Or you can launch "Add to Favorite" menu located on the sub menu of "Tweets", after calling up the menu.

(3) If addition is successful, "Completed" message will be displayed and then Braille Sense U2 will return to "Timeline". 16.2.5.8 Favorite List

You can check your favorites calling up the Favorite list dialog box. In order to call up Favorite List dialog box, press "Enter-l (dots 1-2-3)" or launch Favorite List located on the sub menu of "Tweets", after calling up menu. Favorite List dialog box contains 4 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Favorite list: This is a list to appear your favorite. It is arranged in the newest registration order. 2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 favorites. Press "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on this button. 3) Remove: As a button, you can delete focused favorite. If you press Space-d (dots 1-4-5)" or move to the button and press "Enter", the favorite will be deleted. 4) Close: This will close Favorite List dialog box and go to the previous status. Or you can use "F4" or Space-e (1-5)". 16.2.6. Manage Follow 16.2.6.1 Follow User

This is a function to follow user. In order to call up Follower User dialog box, press "Backspace-a (dot 1)". Or after calling up the menu, you can launch "Follow User" on the sub menu of "Follow".

"Follow User" dialog box consists of 3 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Follow User id?: As a edit box, you can type the desired User Id. 2) Confirm: As a button, you can follow the user. 3) Cancel: As a button, you will go to the status right before calling up the menu. The followings are how to follow the user.

(1) Once "Follow User" dialog box is launched, "Follow User id?" edit box appears.

"Enter". to follow.

(2) On this box, you can input the desired User Id and then press

(3) "Adding Follow" message is displayed and Braille Sense U2 tries

(4) If following is successful, "Follow complete" message will be displayed and you will go to the status right before calling up the menu. 16.2.6.2 Following

Following represents your follows. In order to call up "Following" dialog box, press "Backspace-l (dots 1-2-

3)". Or launch "Following" on the sub menu of "Follow", after calling up the menu.

"Following" consists of 5 controls. You can move to the next control by pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control by pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Following: As a list, it lists your follows. 2) About me: As a status box, it displays self- introduction of focused user. 3) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 follows. This function is launched when you press "Enter-n (dots 1-3-

4-5)"or "Enter" key on this button. 4) Remove Follow: As a button, this will delete focused follow. (unfollow). 5) Close: As a button, you can close "Following" dialog box and will go to the previous status. Or you can use "F4" or Space-e (dots 1-5)". 16.2.6.3 Remove Follow

Remove Follow is a function to make your follow unfollow. Remove Follow can be launched when "Following" is called up. The followings are how to delete follow.

(1) Press "Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3)" on "Tweet Window. Following appears. Space-1".

(2) Move to the follow which you want to delete using Space-4" or

(3) Press hot key, Space-d (dots 1-4-5)". Or move to the "Remove Follow" button using "Tab" and press "Enter".

(4) "Do you want to delete? Yes" message appears. If you press

"Enter", selected follow will be deleted. (Unfollow). If you want to cancel to remove follow, change "Yes" button to "No"

button, by pressing Space" key. Or press "F4" or Space-e (dots 1-5)". After canceling the delete, it is located in following. 16.2.6.4 Followers

Followers indicates Users who follow you. In order to call up Followers, press hot key, "Backspace-e (dots 1-5)". Or by calling up menu and moving to sub menu of "Follow", you can launch "Followers". Followers dialog box consists of 5 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Followers: As a list, it lists your followers. 2) About me: As a status box, it displays self- introduction of focused user. 3) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 followers. This function is launched when you press "Enter-n (dots 1-

3-4-5)"or "Enter" key on this button. 4) Follow User: As a button, you can follow focused user. 5) Close: As a button, you can close "Followers" dialog box and return to previous status. Also you can launch Close with "F4" or Space-e

(dots 1-5)". 16.2.7. Use Direct Message

Direct Message allows you to send and receive Direct Message with just one person. Only users who exchange message can see Direct Message. Other users cant see their Direct Message. Also, you can only send a Direct Message to follower. 16.2.7.1 Send Direct Message

Send Direct Message" is a function to send Direct Message (DM) to one of the followers. In order to call up Send Direct Message dialog box, press "Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)" or launch Send Direct Message" menu located on sub menu of "Tweets", after calling up the menu. Send Direct Message" dialog box consists of 6 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Followers: Your followers appear. And then select follower who you want to send Direct Message. 2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 followers. Press "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on this button 3) Message: As edit box, you can type message on this box. 4) Characters: As a status bar, it displays current characters and maximum characters like Characters: 0/140T. 5) Send: You can send "Direct Message" by this button. Press "Enter-s

(dots 2-3-4)" or "Enter" key on this button. 6) Close: You can close Send Direct Message" dialog box and go to the previous status. Or you can use "F4" or Space-e (1-5)". The followings are way to send "Direct Message".

(1) If you launch Send Direct Message" dialog box, followers is displayed. Within in followers, you can select follower using Space-4" or Space-1".

(2) When there is no follower which you want on the list, if you call up the next list pressing "Enter-n (1-3-4-5)", you can find the desired follower.

(3) Move to the "Message" edit box by pressing "Tab".

(4) Write a message and press "Enter".

(5) Sending a Message" message is displayed and Direct Message is sent.

(6) If send is successful, "Message transfer is completed" message will be displayed and you will go to the followers within Send Direct Message" dialog box. 16.2.7.2 Received Direct Message

This function allows you to view Direct Message. In order to call up the menu, press "Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) or launch "Received Direct Message" menu located on the sub menu of

"Tweets", after calling up the menu.

"Received Direct Message" dialog box consists of 4 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Received Direct Message: This is a list. Direct Message represents in the newest registration order. Message is displayed as "ID:

message"

2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 messages. Press "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on the button. 3) Reply: You can write a reply on the focused Direct Message. You can launch this function pressing "Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6)" or "Enter"

key on the button. 4) Close: As a button, you can close "Received Direct Message" dialog box and go back to the status right before calling up the function. Or you can use "F4 or space-e (dots 1-5)"

16.2.7.3 Sent Direct Message

Sent Direct Message" is a function to view Direct Message which I send. In order to call up the Sent Direct Message" dialog box, press

"Backspace-m(dots 1-3-4)" or launch Sent Direct Message" menu located on the sub menu of "Tweets", after calling up the menu. Sent Direct Message" dialog box contains 3 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Sent Direct Message: As a list, it indicates Direct Message which I sended in the newest registration order. Direct Message is displayed as Sender Id: Message". 2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 32 messages. Press "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)" or "Enter" key on this button. 3) Close: As a button, you can close Sent Direct Message" dialog box and go back to the status right before calling up the function. Or you can use "F4 or space-e (dots 1-5)". 16.2.8. Use Search function

"Twitter" program allows you to search registered users and words contained in tweets with Search function. Also, it provides Save Search function in order to save words used frequently. 16.2.8.1 Global Search

"Global Search" launches search for entered word among all "Twitter"

Timelines and shows the result. Also you can follow user with "Global Search" function. In order to call up the "Global Search" dialog box, you have to press Space-f (dots 1-2-4)" or launch "Global Search" menu in sub menu of Search", after calling up the menu. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Search word?: This is edit box and you can enter word which you want to search. 2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 20 results. You can launch "Next list" by pressing "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)"

or "Enter" key on the button. 3) Search result: In the list, search results appear such as "User Id: Self-

introduction". Search result button represents only when there are search results. 4) Follow User: As a button you can follow the focused user with this button. Follow User button represents only when there are search results. 5) Confirm: As a button, you can execute search. 6) Cancel: As a button, you can close Global Search dialog box and return the status right before calling up the Menu. Or you can cancel by pressing "F4" or Space-e (1-5). The followings are the way to follow user.

(1) If "Global search" dialog box is launched, Search word" edit box appears. You can type the desired word on this edit box.

(2) If you press "Enter", searching tweet starts with Searching"

message.

(3) If search is successful, immediately search results appear. When there is no search result, "No search results" message will be displayed and you will go to the Search word" edit box.

(4) In the search result list, you can move to user whom you want to follow, by pressing Space-4" or Space-1".

(5) Press "Backspace-a (dots 1)" and then you can follow focused user. 16.2.8.2 User search

"User search" is a function to search for entered words among users profile, id and name registered in Twitter. In order to call up the "User Search" dialog menu, press "Backspace-f

(dots 1-2-4)" or launch "User Search" menu located on the sub menu of Search" menu, after calling up the menu. It is similar to "Global search"

dialog box.

"User Search" dialog box consists of 5 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Search word?: As a edit box, you can enter word which you want to search. 2) Next list: Whenever you launch this function, it can load lists by 20 results. You can launch "Next list" by pressing "Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5)"

or "Enter" key on this button. 3) Search result: In the list, search results appear such as "User Id:

About me". Search result button represents only when there are search results. 4) Follow User: As a button, you can follow the focused user with this button. Follow User button represents only when there are search results. Or press "Backspace-a (dots 1)" and then you can follow focused user. 5) Confirm: As a button, you can execute search. 6) Cancel: As a button, you can close User Search dialog box and return to the status right before calling up the Menu. Or you can use

"F4" or Space-e (1-5)". The followings are way to follow User, using "User Search" dialog box.

(1) If "Global search" dialog box is launched, Search word" edit box appears. You can type the desired User Id or name on this edit box.

(2) If you press "Enter", searching tweet starts with Searching"

message.

(3) If search is successful, immediately search results appear. When there is no search result, "No search results" message will be displayed and you will go to the Search word" edit box.

(4) In the search result list, you can move to user whom you want to follow, by pressing Space-4" or Space-1".

(5) Press "Backspace-a and then you can follow focused user. 167.2.8.3 Use Search word list" dialog box

Search word list saves search word used frequently and help you search tweets and User Id quickly. To call up the Search word list" dialog box, press "Backspace-w(dots 2-

4-5-6)" or call up the menu, enter sub menu of Search, move to the Search word list" and press "Enter". Search word list" dialog box consists of 6 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Word list: It displays search words saved. 2) Global search: You can search tweets with focused words using this 3) User search: You can search user with focused words. 4) Add search word: You can add new word using this button. 5) Remove search word: You can delete the focused word using this button. button. 6) Close: Using this button, you can close Search word list" dialog box and go back to the status right before calling up the function. Or you can use "F4 or space-e (dots 1-5)". You can save words in the Search word list as follows.

(1) If you have launched Search word list" dialog box, press "Enter-

(2) Save Search?" edit box appears.

(3) Type the desired word and press "Enter".

(4) Once entered word is saved, save completed message will be a"

displayed. The followings are the way to delete words saved in search word list.

(1) Move to the word which you want to delete in word list using Space-4" or Space-1".

(2) Press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). Or move to the "Remove Search word" button by pressing "Tab" and press "Enter".

(3) When "Do you want to delete? Yes" message appears, if you press "Enter", the word will be deleted. If you want to cancel to delete the word, change the button to "No" with Space" key and then press "Enter". Or press "F4" or Space-e (dots 1-5)". After you cancel to remove, you will go the Search word list". 16.2.9. Additional Function 16.2.9.1 Viewing Personal Information and Edit Personal Information dialog box provides functions to check and edit personal account information. To open Personal Information dialog box, press "Enter-I (dots 2-4)" or move to the "Personal Information" on the sub-menu of File and then press "Enter". The followings are the information you can check in Personal Information dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing

"Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-

Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) Name 2) ID 3) Homepage 4) About me 5) Follow count 6) Follower count 7) Edit 8) Close

"Personal Information" dialog box can edit name, homepage, a self-

introduction. The followings are way to modify personal information.

(1) After executing Personal Information dialog box, move to the Edit button by pressing "Tab".

(2) Press "Enter" and then control box appears. It contains Name EB, Homepage CEB, About me EB, Save BT, Close BT.

(3) Type the desired information on Name EB, Homepage CEB, About me EB. Type Homepage information, using computer Braille.

(4) Press Save button and then a "Refreshing user information"

message is displayed. It tries to refresh information.

(5) If the refreshing is successful, Save complete" message will be displayed and you will go to the status right before pressing "Edit"

button. 16.2.9.2 Save Current Timeline

Save Current Timeline is a function to save all current timeline lists as text file. In order to call up Save Current Timeline dialog box, press Space-s(dots 2-3-4) on the Tweet Window or press Enter on the Save Current Timeline menu located on the sub menu of File. Save Current Timeline dialog box consists of 4 controls. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing Shift-Tab"(Space-F3" or Space-1-2"). 1) File name: As a combo edit box, you can enter file name as you desire. The default is Timeline name current date like Home Timeline 20110310. 2) Confirm: As a button, you can execute Save Current Timeline 3) Cancel: As a button, you can exit Save Current Timeline dialog box and return to the Tweet Window, the previous status right before calling up the menu. 4) File List: As a list, you can change the storage path. The followings are move keys used in file list. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace The following is how to save current timeline.

(1) Press Space-s (dots 2-3-4) on the Tweet window. File name edit box will appear.

(2) Type the desired file name and press Enter.

(3) If you dont change the folder, current timeline will be saved in the

"/flashdisk/My Documents" folder. 16.2.10 Hot Keys for Twitter Sign Out: Enter-g(dots 1-2-4-5) Personal Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4) Save Current Timeline: Space-s(dots 2-3-4) Home Timeline: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Friend Timeline: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) User Timeline: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Current User Timeline: Backspace-u (dots1-3-6) Mention Timeline: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Retweet By Me: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Retweet To Me: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Retweet Of Me: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Tweet: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Remove Tweet: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Retweet: Enter-e (dots 1-5)"

Reply: Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6) Add To Favorite: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Favorite List: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Send Direct Message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sent Direct Message: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Received Direct Message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Follow User: Backspace-a (dot 1) Following: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Followers: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Global Search: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) User Search: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Search Word List: Backspace-w(dots 2-4-5-6) Next List: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Move to the next tweet: Space-4 Move to the previous tweet: Space-1 Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Space-4-5-6 Move to the previous 32 list: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32 list: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 16.3 Google talk Google Talk is one of the messengers to assist functions such as text chat, voice chat and sending/receiving files. And it has functions that similar to MSNs. Google Talk allows you to exchange text messages in real time with people registered online and chat to voice conversation. Also, with sending/receiving file functions, you can exchange files conveniently. The following is how to launch Google Talk. 1) Within the main menu, press "c (dots 1-4)" or move to the "Social Networking" using "Space-4" and press "Enter." And then you can enter sub menu of "Social Networking."

2) Press "g (dots 1-2-4-5)" or move to the "Google Talk" and then press "Enter."

16.3.1 Launch the Google Talk In order to launch Google Talk on the Braille Sense U2, you need a Gmail account. Visit Gmail website (http://gmail.google.com) and create a Gmail account. If you have a Gmail account registered, you can use Google Talk. Also, if you want to launch Google Talk, Braille Sense U2 needs to be connected to Internet. 16.3.1.1 Sign In If you launch Google Talk, "Login" dialog box will appear. "Login" dialog box consists of as followings. 1) E-mail: Computer Edit Control 2) Password: Computer Edit Control 3) Remember me: Check Box Control 4) Save password: Check Box Control 5) Auto Sign In: Check Box Control 6) Sign In: Button Control 7) Cancel: Button Control The Following is detailed explanations of "Login" dialog box. You can move to the next controls with "Tab" key (F3 or "Space-4-5") and to the previous controls with "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) E-mail: As a computer edit box, you can input your Gmail 2) Password: As a computer edit box, you can input the password account as a user ID. of your Gmail account. 3) Remember me: It is a check box. You can choose whether you save user ID or not. The default is set to "Uncheck, pressing space, you can change the default to Check. 4) Save password: It is a check box. You can choose whether you save the password or not. The default is set to "Uncheck, pressing space, you can change the default to Check. 5) Auto Sign In: it is a check box. You can choose whether you sign in automatically or not. 6) If you choose Check, you can sign in automatically with registered e-mail account without log in dialog box, when you execute Google talk program. But if you want to use this function, you have to choose Check on Remember me, Save password dialog box. If you choose Uncheck, Auto Sign in function is not executes. 7) Sign in: As a button, you can log in the Google. 8) Cancel: As a button, you can cancel login and close Google Talk. How to log in Google Talk is as follows. 1) If Google Talk is launched, "Login" dialog box will appear and it is focused on the "E-mail?" computer edit box. You can input your Gmail account on this box using the computer Braille. 2) If you have inputted E-mail, press "Tab" key and move to the

"Password" computer edit box. You can input the password using the computer Braille. 3) In order to log in Google Talk, pressing "Enter" or "Tab" to move to the "Login" button and press "Enter" on the button. 4) With a "Signing in, please wait" message, Braille Sense U2 tries to log in. If login is successful, "Building contact list..."

message will appear and after a little moment contact list will be displayed. If the Braille Sense U2 isnt connected to Internet,

"Connection failed. Check network status." Message will appear and you will return to the "Sign In button of login dialog box. If you log in Google Talk, contact list will appear. The contact list is displayed as "(Status) ID XX/YY" with Braille and "chat name, status, XX/YY" with voice. "YY" means total number of contacts and "xx" shows the current turn of the total contact. In case of online, current status is displayed as "NLN" with Braille and "Online" with voice. While, in case of offline, status is displayed as "FLN" with Braille and "offline" with voice. And if you are Idle, your status will be displayed as "idle" with Braille and

"Idle" with voice. The move keys on the dialog box are as follows. Move to the previous contact: Space-1 Move to the next contact: Space-4 Move to the previous 32-items of the contact list: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32-item of the contact list: Space-3-4-5 Move to the first item of the contact list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last item of the contact list: Space-4-5-6 16.3.1.2 Sign Out & Exit Sign Out is the function that close the account currently sign-in, return to the Sign in dialog box. If you execute Sign Out, press the Enter-l

(dots 1-2-3) or press "Enter" on the "Sign Out" after entering sub-menu of "File" menu by calling up menu. If you want to exit the Google Talk, press "Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6)" or call up the menu by pressing F2, enter into sub menu of "File" menu and press "Enter" on the "Exit" menu. 16.3.2 Manage Contact If you log in Google Talk, contact list will appear. If you use Google Talk for the first time, there will be no contact list. You will get a detailed explanation about "Manage Contact" for example, adding, deleting and manage block list from this chapter. 16.3.2.1 Add Contact

"Add Contact" is a function to add new contact to the contact list. In order to call up the "Add Contact" dialog box, press "Backspace-q

(dots 1-2-3-4-5) or call up the menu by pressing F2, enter into sub menu of "Contact" and press "Enter" on the "Add Contact" menu.

"Add Contact" dialog box consists of 3 controls. 1) E-mail: Computer Edit Control 2) Confirm: Button Control 3) Cancel: Button Control You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab" ("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). The followings are "Add Contact" dialog box composition. 1) E-mail: As an edit box, you can input user ID which you want to 2) Confirm: As a button, you can save new contact into the add. contact list. 3) Cancel: As a button, if you enter this button, the contact list that right before calling up Add Contact dialog box will be displayed. The following is how to add contact. 1) Press "Backspace-q (1-2-3-4-5)" on the contact list. Computer Edit Box to enter E-mail is displayed. 2) After typing user ID which you want to add using computer Braille, press "Enter". 3) With the user ID typed, adding contact is executed. If you add a contact, the contact will remain "off-line" until the contact accepting your request adding contact After the contact accepting your request, the status will be turn "on-line". 16.3.2.2 Delete Contact

"Delete Contact" is a function to delete any contact registered in the contact list. The Deleted Contact cant send a message to you and see whether youre online or not. The following is how to delete a contact. 1) Move to the contact which you want to delete on the contact list. 2) Press "Space-d(1-4-5)" or press "Enter" on the "Delete Contact"

after entering into sub menu of "Contact", by calling up the menu using F2. 3) "Do you want to delete XXX in the contact list? Yes" message appear. XXX is user ID to delete. If you press "Enter", the contact will be deleted. If you want to cancel deleting contact, change to "No" by pressing

"Space" key or press F4 or "Space-e (dots 1-5)." After canceling deletion, it is located on the contact list. 16.3.2.3 Block Contact

"Block Contact" is a function to block contact registered in the "Contact list", in order not to send a message to you and see your access status. It is different from "Delete" that after blocking contact, contact ID remains in the Block list. But if you delete contact, the contact ID will disappear permanently in the contact list.

The way to block contact is as follows. 1) Move to the contact which you want to block in the contact list. 2) Press "back space-b (dots 1-2)" or press "Enter" on the "Block Contact" after entering sub-menu of "Contact", by calling up the menu. 3) "Block XXX? Yes" message appears. XXX is user ID to block. If you press "Enter", the contact will be blocked. If you want to cancel blocking contact, change "Yes" button to "No"

button, pressing "Space" key or press "F4" or "Space-e (dots 1-5)". After canceling the delete, it is located in the contact list. 16.3.2.4 Manage Block List Block list displays the contact list you have blocked. In this list, you are able to unblock contact that you have blocked. In order to call up the Manage Block list dialog box, press "Backspace-

m (dots 1-3-4)" or press "Enter" on the "Manage Block list" menu after entering sub-menu of "Contact", by calling up the menu.

"Manage Block list" dialog box consists of 3 controls. 1) E-mail: List control 2) Unblock: Button control 3) Cancel: Button control Here, you can get a detailed explanation about each control of "Manage Block list" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing

"Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-

Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) E-mail: As a list, this displays blocked contact E-mail. 2) Unblock: As a button, this unblocks focused E-mail. 3) Cancel: As a button, if it is executed, you will go to the contact list, the status right before calling up the menu. The way to unblock contact, using "Manage Block list" is as follows. 1) Press "Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4)" on the contact list. The Blocked E-mails are displayed. 2) Move to the E-mail which you want to unblock using "Space-4" or

"Space-1" and press "Enter."

3) The contact will be unblocked. 16.3.2.5 Contact Information

"Contact Information" is a function to show on-line ID and E-mail of selected contact and adding contact status. In order to call up "Contact Information" dialog box, move to the contact list which you want to view using "Space-1" or "Space-4" and the press "Enter-I (dots 2-4)." Or call up the menu and enter sub-menu of "Contact" and press "Enter" on

"Contact Information" menu.

"Contact Information" dialog box consists of 2 controls. 1) Contact Information: Status bar Control 2) Close: Button Control Here, you will get a detailed explanation of "Contact Information" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-

2"). 1) Contact Information: As a Status bar, this shows information respectively. You can move to each item using "Space-1" or

"Space-4."

"Contact Information" contains information as follows. 2) Display name: It displays on-line ID set on the "My Status Options."

3) E-mail: It displays E-mail account. 4) Chat: It displays whether chat is possible or not as "Enable" or 5) File sharing: It displays whether it is able to send/receive file or

"Disable". not as "Enable" or "Disable". as "Enable" or "Disable". acceptance or standby. 6) Voice Chat: It displays whether voice chatting is possible or not, 7) Status contact: It displays current contact relation status such as 8) Close: As a button, once you execute this function, it will close the

"View Contact Information" dialog box and you will go to the contact list, the status right before calling up the menu. 16.3.2.6 Manage Block List When you log in with on-line status, if some people request you to add as contact, dialog box asking whether you accept addition or not will appear. If some people request you to add as contact, when youre "Off-

line" status, request adding information will be saved in server. Then when you execute Google Talk Program, request adding information will appear on the "Manage Contact List" menu. "Manage Contact List" is a function to accept or reject contact requesting for adding contact. In order to call up the "Manage Contact List" dialog box, Press "Enter-p

(dots 1-2-3-4)" or Press "Enter" on the "Manage Contact Invite" after entering sub-menu of "Contact" menu, calling up the menu.

"Manage Contact List" dialog box consists of 4 controls. 1) E-mail: List control 2) Accept: Button control 3) Reject: Button control 4) Close: Button control You will get detailed explanation about "Manage Contact Invite" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-

2"). 1) E-mail: As a list, this displays user ID requesting you to add as 2) Accept: As a button, you can accept focused user ID as contact. contact. 3) Reject: As a button, you can reject focused user ID as contact. 4) Close: As a button, once you execute a function, you will go to the "Contact list", the previous status right before calling up the menu. The following is the way to accept or reject "Add contact" on the

"Manage Contact List" dialog box. 1) Press "Enter-p(dots 1-2-3-4)." You can see user ID requesting 2) Move to the user ID which you want to accept or reject, using you to add as contact.

"Space-1" or "Space-4"

3) Move to the "Accept" button, with "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") and press "Enter." And then you can accept user ID as a contact. 4) Move to the "Reject" button, with "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") and press "Enter." And then you can reject user ID as a contact. 16.3.3 Start Chat

"Start Chat" is a function to send and receive text message with registered contact. Chat is possible to converse with only one person or many persons. But, chat with "off-line" contact is impossible. If you want to send a message to contact, press "Enter-s (dots 2-3-4)" or move to the user ID as you desire, using "Space-1" or "Space-4" and press "Enter." Or call up the menu, enter sub-menu of "Action" and press

"Enter" on the "Start Chat" menu. And then, "Chat" will appear.

"Chat" consists of as follows. 1) Input: Edit control 2) History: Edit control You will get detailed explanation about each control of "Chat." You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) Input: As a edit box, you can type message to send. 2) History: As a read only edit box, you can see messages sent and received in chronological order. Messages are displayed as "Writer ID: message content."

The followings are move keys used in "History" control. Move to the previous message: "Sapce-1"

Move to the next message: "Space-4"

Move to the first message: "Space-1-2-3"

Move to the last message: "Space-4-5-6"

In order to move "Contact list" on the "Chat", press "Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-

5)." Or call up the menu, enter sub-menu of "Action" and press "Enter"

on the "Contact List." If you select other contact on the "Contact list" and press "Enter", new "Chat" window will appear. You can chat with other contact in new "Chat" window. In case of 2 "Chat" windows opened, you can transfer "Chat" windows using following hot-key. Move to previous "Chat" window: "Space-2-3"

Move to next "Chat" window: "Space-5-6"

Or you can move to other "Chat" window, if you press "Enter" on the

"Move to Next Chat" or "Move to Previous Chat." after entering sub-

menu of "Action", calling up the menu. While youre in "Contact list", if you press "Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5)", you will go "Chat" window where you exchange message recently. Or press

"Enter" on "Move to Recently Chat" menu, after entering sub-menu of

"Action", calling up the menu. If you want to exit "Chat" windows, press "Space-z(dots 1-3-5-6-)" or

"Space-e(dots 1-5)." Or you can exit "Chat" windows, if you press

"Enter" on "Exit" menu after entering sub-menu of "File"

16.3.4 Start Voice Chat Start voice chat is a function to send and receive voice message with registered contact in real time like using phone. Voice chat is possible to converse with only one person. Chat with "off-line" user is impossible. Also, in the midst of voice chat, you can send and receive message. The following is the way to request voice chat.

(1) After you move to the user ID as you desire voice chat using

"Space-1" or "Space-4", press "Enter-h (dots 1-2-5)." Or press

"Enter" on the "Start Voice Chat" after entering sub-menu of

"Action" by calling up the menu.

(2) Then, "Chat" window is open, a "Calling" message is displayed and it requests voice chat to contact. The Voice Chat starts immediately, as soon as the Contact who received your request accepts it. You can request voice chat on the "Chat" window as well as on the contact list. In the midst of voice chat, once you press "Enter-h

(dots 1-2-5)", you can request voice chat to the contact chatting with you. If you press Enter on Cancel (Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4 while the calling message is displayed, you return to the right before executes this function. And the request voice chat is canceled. When you are requested to start voice chat, you can accept or reject as follows.

(1) When you are requested to start voice chat, "calling from XXX?

Accept question button" message is displayed. "XX" means user ID requesting voice chat.

(2) If you press "Enter", you will accept voice chat. But, if you want to reject voice chat, change the button to "Reject" using "Space" key and press "Enter." After rejecting, you will go to the "Contact list". In the midst of voice chat, you can exchange messages on the

"Chat" window. 16.3.5 Send/Receive a file Google Talk program of Braille Sense U2 supports a function to receive and send file. With this function, you can send your files to other person and save files from other person in Braille Sense U2 16.3.5.1 Send file

"Send File" is a function to send your files to other contact. It allows you to send a lot of files at one time, and exchange messages on the "Chat"

dialog box in the middle of sending files. The following is how to send files.

(1) Move to the user ID as you desire send file using "Space-1" or

"Space-4" and press "Enter." And then "Chat" window appears. Or press "Enter" on the "Send file" menu located on sub menu of

"Action" by calling up the menu. Press hot key, "Enter-f (dots 1-2-4)". Or call up the menu, enter sub-menu of "Action" and press "Enter" on the "Send File." You can see File list to select.

(2) Using following move key, move to the file which you want to send. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home

(Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-

6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace

(3) Select file and press "Enter" using hot key for Start selection. When you send one file, focus on file which you want and press

"Enter."

Select item by item: Space Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1)

(4) Control to display Sending File Information appears. It is a list located on the next control of "Received message" on the chat-

window. It is displayed like "Send: Pending acceptance XX File, file name." "XX" represents the number of files which request-to-

send.

(5) If other user accepts sending file, sending will starts. Once sending starts, progress rate and file name is displayed on the

"Sending/receiving file information" list.

(6) If sending file is completed, you will return to the Sending/Receiving File Information list. It is displayed like "Send:

complete XX File, file name."

If you want to cancel in the middle of sending, move to the desired file on the "Sending/Receiving File Information list" and press "Space-e

(dots 1-5)" or F4 key. Then file transmission is canceled and "Sending File Information list" is displayed like "Send: Me canceled. XX, file name". If contact wants to cancel receiving files in the middle of sending,

"Sending File Information list" is displayed like "Send: To canceled. XX, file name". 16.3.5.2 Receive file

"Receive File" is a function to receive file from other contact to your Braille Sense. It allows you to receive a lot of files at one time, and exchange messages on the "Chat" dialog box in the middle of receiving files. The following is how to receive files.

(1) If contact requests to send file, "XXX send to file" message will be displayed, "Chat" window will be activated and "Receiving File Information list" is focused on.

(2) "Receiving File Information list" shows "Receiving: Pending acceptance XX file name". "XX" means the number of files which request to receive.

(3) If you want to accept file transmission, press Enter key. And Receiving File will start. Once sending starts, progress rate and file name is displayed on the "receiving file information" list.

(4) If Receiving File is completed, you will return to the Receiving File Information list. It is displayed like "Receive: complete XX File, file name."

If you want to cancel in the middle of receiving, move to the desired file on the "Receiving File Information list" and press "Space-e (dots 1-5)" or F4 key. Then file transmission is canceled and "Receiving File Information list" is displayed like "Receive: Me canceled. XX, file name". If contact wants to cancel sending files in the middle of receiving,

"Receiving File Information list" is displayed like "Receive: To canceled. XX, File name". 16.3.6 Other functions Braille Sense Talk Program supports additional features such as Save conversation and Export/ Import Contact list and so on. The following is a detailed explanation of additional features. 16.3.6.1 Save Conversation

"Save Conversation" is a function to save messages exchanged with contact as text file. In order to execute this function, press "Space-s (dots 2-3-4)" within the

"Chat" window or press "Enter" on the "Save Conversation" menu located on sub menu of "File" by calling up the menu.

"Save Conversation" dialog box consists of 4 controls. 1) File Name: Edit combo box Control 2) Confirm: Button Control 3) Cancel: Button Control 4) File List: List Item Control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Save Conversation" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing

"Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-

Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) File Name: It is a combo edit box. You can type in the file name to be saved in this edit box. 2) Confirm: It is a button. You can save conversation using this button. 3) Cancel: It is a button. You will not save conversation and return to the

"Chat" window, the previous status right before calling up the menu. 4) File list: It is a list. You can set path to save conversation. The followings are move keys used in file list. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace The Following is how to save conversation. 1) When Chat window is activated, Press "Space-s (dots 2-3-4)". Edit to type file name box will appear. 2) Type the desired file name and press "Enter". 3) If you dont change folder, conversation will be saved in the "/flash disk/My Documents" folder. This folder is the default folder. 16.3.6.2 Manage Chat

"Manage Chat" supports a function to view information of chat window opened and to move directly to the selected case of opening 2 chat-

windows you can switch to other chat-window using this function and check status sending/receiving of file. In order to call up "Manage Chat"

press "Enter-m(dots 1-3-4) on the contact list or press "Enter" on the

"Manage Chat" after entering sub-menu of "Action" menu by calling up menu.

"Manage Chat" consists of 5 controls. 1) Chat list: List control 2) Status of sending File: Status control 3) Move to the chat: Button Control 4) Close chat: Button Control 5) Cancel: Button Control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Manage Chat" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or

"Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3"

or "Space-1-2"). 1) Chat list: This is a list and arranges chat window opened currently. You can select chat window using "Space-1" or

"Space-4" and press "Enter". And then you will move to the corresponded chat window. 2) Status of sending File: This is a status bar status of sending/receiving file. This bar is valid only when you send/receive file. 3) Move to the Chat: Using this button, if you press "Enter", you can move to the chat window selected on the chat list right away. 4) Close chat: Using this button, you can close selected chat window on the chat list. 5) Cancel: Using this button, you can exit "Manage Chat Window"

dialog box and return to the "Contact list". 16.3.6.3 Find Find supports a function to search for input word in History edit box of chat window. It is useful in the situation that a lot of messages are exchanged. In order to call up "Find" press "Space-f(dots 1-2-4) on the chat window or press "Enter" on the "Find" after entering sub-menu of "Edit" menu by calling up menu.

"Find" consists of 4 controls. 1) Text to find: Edit control. 2) Search direction: Prompt button. 3) Confirm: Button. 4) Cancel: Button The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Find"

dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or

"Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3"

or "Space-1-2"). 1) Text to find: This is edit box and you can enter the word that you want to find. 2) Search direction: This is a prompt button. You can choose the direction of searching to Forward or Backward by current status. If you choose Forward, the searching executes from current status to the top of the chat. And if you choose Backward, the searching executes from current status to the end of the chat. You can change the prompt button pressing Space or Backspace key. 3) Confirm: This is a button, using this button you can execute Find. 4) Cancel: This is a button, using this button you can exit Find dialog box, and the chat window that right before calling Find menu will be displayed. The Following is how to find the message in chat window. 1) Press "Space-f (dots 1-2-4)". Edit to type Text to find box will appear. 2) Type the desired letter, word, and sentence, press "Enter". 3) If you press Enter, the searching executes toward the end of chat targeting Text to find. You can change the direction of searching by pressing "Tab"(F3 or

"Space-4-5"), after then you move to Search direction box. Also, you can search toward the top of chat by pressing space key, After then the input is changed to Forward. 16.3.6.4 Export Contact List

"Export Contact list" is a function to save "Contact list" which you registered as CSV file. In order to call up the "Export Contact list" dialog box, press "Backspace-

x (dots 1-3-4-6)" on the "Contact list" or press "Enter" on the "Export Contact list" menu, after entering sub-menu of "File" by calling up the menu.

"Export Contact list" consists of 4 controls. 1) File name: Combo Edit control. 2) Confirm: Button control 3) Cancel: Button control 4) File list: List control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Export Contact list" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing

"Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-

Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) File name: It is a combo edit box. You can type in the file name to be saved in this edit box. 2) Confirm: It is a button. You can execute "Export Contact list". 3) Cancel: It is a button. You can exit "Export Contact list" dialog box and return to the "Contact list", the previous status right before calling up the menu. 4) File list: It is a list. You can set path to save "Contact list". The followings are move keys used in file list. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace The following is how to export contact list.

(1) Press "Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) on the contact list.

(2) Type the desired file name and press "Enter".

(3) If you dont change the folder, contact list will be saved in the

"/flash disk/My Documents" folder. This folder is the default folder. 16.3.6.5 Import Contact List

"Import Contact List" is a function to import contact list saved in the

"export contact list". In order to call up the "Import Contact List" dialog box, press

"Backspace-I (dots 2-4)" on the "Contact list" or press "Enter" on the

"Import Contact list" menu, after entering sub-menu of "File" by calling up the menu.

"Import Contact List" consists of 4 controls. 1) File name: Combo Edit control. 2) Confirm: Button control 3) Cancel: Button control 4) File list: List control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Import Contact list" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing

"Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-

Tab"("Space-F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) File name: It is a combo edit box. You can type file name which you want to import. 2) Confirm: It is a button. You can execute "Import Contact list". 3) Cancel: It is a button. You can exit "Import Contact list" dialog box and return to the "Contact list", the previous status right before calling up the menu. 4) File list: It is a list. You can select the desired contact list file

(CSV). The followings are move keys used in file list. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace The following is how to import contact list.

(1) Press "Backspace-i(dots 2-4)" on the contact list.

(2) Move to the file list by pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3" or space and dot1-2).

(3) Select the import contact list, press "Enter".

(4) You can add the contact to contact list by importing contact. 16.3.7 Setup Options Braille Sense U2 Google Talk Program supports options setting such as

"My status options", "on-line ID", "auto-reply" notification and sound". You will get detailed information of each option setting from this chapter. 16.3.7.1 My status Options This menu will allow you to setup your status and on-line ID to be shown to other contact. In order to call up the "My status options" dialog box, press "Backspace-

u(dots 1-3-6)" on the contact list or press "Enter" on the "My Status Options" after entering sub-menu of "Setup" by calling up the menu.

"My Status Options" dialog box consists of 3 controls. 1) My Status: List control 2) Confirm: Button control 3) Cancel: Buttons control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "My Status Options" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-

F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) My Status: It is a list. You can select one of the 6 statuses, for example On-line, Away, Idle, DND, Chat by using "Space-1" or

"Space-4". 2) Confirm: It is a button. You can save setting. 3) Cancel: It is a button. If you execute cancel, you will go to the

"Contact list", the status right before calling up the menu. 16.3.7.2 Action Options

"Action Options" Allows you to setup auto-reply, idle time Display Contact List and so on. In order to call up "Action Options" dialog box, press "Backspace-a (dot 1)" on the contact list or press "Enter" on the "Action Options" menu after entering sub-menu of "Setup" by calling up the menu.

"Action Options" dialog box consists of 5 controls. 1) Action setting: List control 2) Auto-reply message: Edit control 3) Absent Time: Edit control 4) Confirm: Button control 5) Cancel: Button control The following is a detailed explanation about each control of "Action Options" dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or "Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-

F3" or "Space-1-2"). 1) Action setting: It is a list. You can set up these functions. Using the Space-1 or Space-4, the movement among the list is possible. Display contact list: You can choose whether contact list displays all contacts or only contact connected. For example, you have to choose between "All" and "Display only online contacts." If you choose "All", contact list will display both on-

line contact and off-line contact. If you choose "Display only connected contact", contact list will display all contact except for off-line contact. You are able to change the setting by using

"Space" or "Backspace". Contact request: You can setup how to act when you are requested to add contact. You can choose one of the 3 items such as "notification", "accept" and "reject". If you choose

"notification", you will be notified of adding contact and question to choose "accept" or "reject" will appear. If you choose "accept", the contact who requested you to add contact will be accepted automatically. If you choose "reject", the contact will be rejected automatically. You are able to change the setting by using "Space" or "Backspace". Incoming chat request: You can setup you move to chat-

window immediately or to be still at contact list, when someone wants to talk with you. You can choose one between "Move to the chat" and "Dont move". If you select "Move to the chat", chat window will be focused on immediately when you are requested chat. If you select "Dont move", your current focus will be kept, although you are requested chat. You are able to change the setting by using "Space" or "Backspace". File transfer request: You can setup how to act when other user requests to receive file. You can choose one of the 3 items such as "Alerts", "accept" and "reject". If you choose Alerts," you will be notified of requesting to receive file and question to choose "Accept" or "Reject" will appear. If you choose "Accept", request will be accepted automatically. If you choose "Reject", the request will be rejected automatically. You are able to change the setting by using "Space" or

"Backspace."

Incoming voice chat request: You can setup how to act when other user request voice chat. You can choose one of the 3 items such as "Alerts", "accept" and "reject". If you choose

"Alerts", you will be notified of requesting voice chat and question to choose "accept" or "reject" will appear. If you choose "accept", the voice-chat request will be accepted automatically. If you choose "reject", the voice chat request will be rejected automatically. You are able to change the setting by using "Space" or "Backspace."

Auto reply to incoming chat request: You can setup whether you send auto-reply message or not, when other user request chat. You can choose between "Yes" and "No." If you select

"Yes", you will send auto-reply message always when you are requested chat. If you select "No", you will not send auto-reply message, when you are requested chat. You are able to change the setting by using "Space" or "Backspace."

2) Auto-reply message: It is edit box. You can type message when using auto reply function. 3) Show me as "Away" when I'm inactive for: When there is no input during the setting time, your status will be displayed as

"Idle". You can enter time by the minute. 4) Confirm: It is a button. You can save the setting 5) Cancel: It is a button. If you execute cancel, you will go to the

"Contact list", the previous status, right before calling up the menu. 16.3.7.3 Alert Options

"Alter Options" menu will allow you to setup whether you use Message Sound Notification While in Current Window and play keyboard sound or not. In order to call up the "Alert Options" dialog box, press "Backspace-

o (dots 1-3-5)" within the contact list or press "Enter" on the "Alert Options" menu, after entering sub-menu of "Setup" by calling up the menu.

"Alert Options" dialog box consists of 3 controls. 1) Setting list: List control 2) Confirm: Button control 3) Cancel: Button Control The following is a detailed explanation of each control on "Alert Options"

dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or

"Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3"

or "Space-1-2"). 1) Setting list: The followings are items which you can setup. You can move among list using "Space-1" or "Space-4."

Play keyboard sound: You can select whether your message input is converted into the sound or not when you are writing your message to a person in chat-window. You can choose between "Yes" and "No." If you choose "Yes", what you are typing will be announced in voice. If you choose "No", what you are typing will not be announced in voice. If you set to "No", when you are typing message, you can view received message immediately. You are able to change the setting by pressing "Space" or "Backspace."

Message Sound Notification While Messenger is In the Background: You can setup whether notification sound like chat, voice-chat, requests for send file and login/logout is output or not, while Google Talk is executed in the background. You can choose between "Yes" or "No". If you select "Yes", although Google Talk is executed in the background, notification sound will be output. If you select "No", when Google Talk is executed in the background, notification sound will not be output. Message sound Notification: You can setup whether all notification sounds are output or not. You can choose between

"Yes" and "No." If you select "Yes", all notification sounds used in Google Talk are output. If you select "No", all notifications are not output. 2) Confirm: As a button, you can save setting. 3) Cancel: As a button, if you execute cancel, you will go to the

"Contact list", the previous status right before calling up the menu. 16.3.7.4 Path Options

"Path Options" Allows you to setup the path of saving message and download and temporarily saving. In order to call up "path options"

dialog box, press "Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4)" or press "Enter" on the

"Path Options" after entering submenu of "Setup" by calling up the menu.

"Path Options" dialog box consists of 5 controls. 1) Set download path: Button Control 2) Set temporary path: Button Control 3) Set save conversation path: Button Control 4) Confirm: Buttons Control 5) Cancel: Button Control The following is a detailed explanation of each control on "Path options"

dialog box. You can move to the next control pressing "Tab"(F3 or

"Space-4-5") or to the previous control pressing "Shift-Tab"("Space-F3"

or "Space-1-2"). 1) Set download path: As a button, you can set path saving message corresponded. If you press "Enter" on the button,

"Set path" dialog box will appear. If you move to folder as you desire and press "Enter", setting will be completed. Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home

(Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End

(Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 2) Set temporary path: As a button, you can set path saving temporary files. If you press "Enter" on the button, "Set path"

dialog box will appear. If you move to folder as you desire and press "Enter", setting will be completed. 3) Saving download path: As a button, you can set path saving files transmitted. If you press "Enter" on the button, "Set path"

dialog box will appear. If you move to folder as you desire using following move keys and press "Enter", setting will be completed. 4) Confirm: As a button, you can save setting. 5) Cancel: As a button, if you execute cancel, you will go to the

"Contact list", the previous status right before calling up the menu. 16.3.8 Hot keys in the Google Talk File (F) Menu Commands Sign out (L): ENTER-l (dots 1-2-3) Export Contact Lists(X): BACKSPACE-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Import Contact Lists (I): BACKSPACE-I (dots 2-4) Exit (Z): SPACE-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Action (A) Menu Commands Start Chat (S): ENTER-s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat: ENTER-h (dots 1-2-5) Send File (F): ENTER-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to Recently Chat (R): ENTER-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (M): ENTER-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact (B) Menu Commands Add Contact (Q): BACKSPACE-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Delete Contact (D): SPACE-d (dots 1-4-5) Block Contact (B): BACKSPACE-b (dots 1-2) Manage Block List (M): BACKSPACE-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact Information (I): ENTER-I (dots 2-4) Manage Contact List (P): ENTER-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Option (s) Menu Commands My Status Options (U): BACKSPACE-u (dots 1-3-6) Action Options (A): BACKSPACE-a (dot 1) Alert Options (O): BACKSPACE-o (dots 1-3-5) Path Options (P): BACKSPACE-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Chat Window Menus File (F) Menu Commands Save Conversation (E): SPACE-e (dots 1-5) Close Chat (Z): SPACE-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Edit (E) Menu Commands Cut (X): ENTER-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy (C): ENTER-c (dots 1-4) Delete (D): SPACE-d (dots 1-4-5) Paste (V): ENTER-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Start Selection (B): ENTER-b (dots 1-2) Select All (A): ENTER-a (dot 1) Find (F): SPACE-f (dots 1-2-4) Find Again (G): BACKSPACE-f (dots 1-2-4) Action (A) Menu Commands Start Chat (S): ENTER-s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat: ENTER-h (dots 1-2-5) Stop Voice Chat: SPACE-e (dots 1-5) Send File (F): ENTER-f (dots 1-2-4) View Contact List (R): ENTER-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (M): ENTER-m (dots 1-3-4) Move to Previous Chat (P): SPACE-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Move to Next Chat (N): SPACE-n (dots 1-3-4-5) The move keys in Google Talk. Move to the previous Contents: Space-1 Move to the next Contents: Space-4 Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Space-3-4-5 Move to the first item of the Contents: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last item of the Contents: Space-4-5-6 16.4 MSN messenger The MSN messenger program on the Braille Sense U2 is very similar in its operation to that which runs on a Personal computer. This is because we have made every attempt to keep the structure and features the same as those that are found in the MSN messenger program that runs on a PC. Using MSN messenger, you can chat online with other registered users of MSN messenger. Note that you will need to setup your MSN messenger account with Microsoft before using this service. To start MSN messenger, executing the social networking and press the short cut key, n (dots 1-3-4-5). Or pressing Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the MSN messenger and press Enter. 16.4.1 Getting Started with MSN Messenger When you first launch MSN messenger a log-in dialog box will be displayed. 1) When the log-in dialog box appears, you will be placed in the E-

mail computer edit box. Here, you should type the email address that you have registered for your MSN passport. Note that the e-

mail address should be typed using computer Braille. 2) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Password computer edit box. Now, Type the password that you have setup for your MSN messenger account. Again, you will want to use computer Braille for this. 3) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Remember me check box. By default, this check box is unchecked. You can check the check box by pressing space. Next time when you run the messenger program, the email address will be displayed automatically for you. 4) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Save password check box. By default, this will be unchecked. You can check this option by pressing space. Then, next time you run the messenger program, the password will be entered automatically, and it will be displayed in the password edit box as ****. To use this feature, you should also check the Remember me check box. Otherwise, the password will not be stored even if you have checked the Save password check box. 5) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Auto Sign In check box. The default is Uncheck. If you want to automatic log in when executing MSN messenger, press Space to change to setting. 6) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button. Pressing Enter here will log you in to your Messenger account. Once you are logged in, a contact list will appear. If you want to cancel logging in, press tab (Space-4-5) once more at the Confirm button, to move to the Cancel button. Then press Enter. Or you can also press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). Then the messenger program will close. If you have successfully logged in and checked Remember me and Save password check boxes, you can log in by just pressing Enter when you are at the email edit box the next time you want to log in. When the Braille Sense U2 is not connected to the Internet, if you execute the MSN messenger and try to log in, the Braille Sense U2 will announce Connection failed. Display Network Status. and return to the log-in dialog box. 16.4.2 Using a Contact List If you have successfully logged in, a list box containing your contact list will appear. In this list, the contact information for those who are online and for those who are offline will be grouped together. You can move through the entire list by pressing Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly. When this list box appears, the number of people who are online will be displayed first. Then, the list of people who are online will be shown in the format, (current status) nickname xx/yy in Braille, and nickname, current status, xx/yy in speech. Where yy is the number of people who are online or offline, and xx is the order of the current item in the online or offline group. In Braille, the current status, online, is displayed as nln, and offline as fln. In speech, they are announced as online and offline, respectively. When the status is idle, it is displayed as idl in Braille, and idle in speech. If the status of a person changes after you log in, you will hear different sound depending on their status. The hotkeys you can use in this list box is as follows. 1. Move to the previous item : Space-1 or up scroll button 2. Move to the next item : Space-4 or down scroll button 3. Move between online and offline groups : Space-5-6 You can have the received message stay on the Braille display until you are done reading it. When in the Contacts list box you can press Enter-l

(dots 1-2-3). When you are asked to Confirm the received message:

No, select Yes by press the space. When a message is received the message will stay on the Braille display until you close it with Space-e

(dots 1-5). If you want to close the messenger program, press Enter on Close in the file menu. Or you can press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 16.4.1 Instant Messaging When you want to have a conversation with a person in your list of contacts, move to the list item corresponding to the person you want to contact, and press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Move to Actions and press Enter. Press Enter again on Send Instant Message. Or instead of using the menu, you can press Enter or Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) at the contact item. Then, the Instant message dialog box will appear, where you can have a conversation with your contact online. 16.4.2 Adding, Deleting, or Viewing Contact Information You can add a contact by doing the following. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu. Move to Contacts by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Press Enter on Add Contact. You could also press Enter-a (dot 1) instead of using the menu. 2) Then, the Add Contact dialog box will be displayed, and you will be placed in the E-mail address edit box. Type the email address of the person you want to add, in computer Braille. 3) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. Then, the contact information will be stored and you will be placed back in the contact list box. If you want to cancel adding the contact information, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Cancel button, and press Enter. The added contact will be displayed as offline until the person accepts your request for adding him or her to your contact list. As soon as the request is accepted, their status will be changed to online. You can delete a contact that you have registered by doing the following. 1) Move to the contact you want to delete, by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Space-

4 to move to Contacts, and press Enter. Move to Delete Contact by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-d (dots 1-4-5). 3) Then, the Delete Contact dialog box will be displayed, showing the email address of the person to be deleted in the E-mail address edit box. Make sure that the address is correct, and if not, make a change to it. 4) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. Then, the item will be deleted and the contact list box will appear again. If you want to cancel deleting, press tab

(Space-4-5) once more at the Confirm button, to move to the Cancel button. Then press Enter. You can delete a contact regardless of whether he/she is online or offline. You can view information of a contact by doing the following. 1) Move to the item whose information you want to know, by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 2) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Space-

4 to move to Contacts, and press Enter. Move to Contact Information by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). 3) Then, you will be placed the Contact Information dialog box. First, Nickname is focused. Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the email address of the contact. Press tab (Space-4-5) again to move to his/her status. 4) After you have read all the information about the contact, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Close button, and press Enter. Or you can just press Space-e (dots 1-5). Then, the dialog box will be closed and the contact list box will appear again. 16.4.3 Changing Your Nickname, Status and Viewing Your Information You can change your nickname as follows. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu. Press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Tools, and press Enter. Press Enter on Nickname. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4). 2) Then, the Change Nickname dialog box will appear, and the Nickname edit box will be focused. Type the nickname you like. You can use alphabets, numbers, and other symbols in the nickname. 3) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. Then your nickname will be changed and you will be placed back in the contact list box. To view your nickname or email address, you can use my status as follows. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Enter on File. Then, move to My Status by pressing Space-4, and then press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4). 2) Then, the dialog box will appear, and your nickname will be displayed. Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to your email address, and tab (Space-4-5) again to move to Status, and so on. 3) When you have read through all of the information, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Close button, and then press Enter. Or you can just press Space-e (dots 1-5). Then, the information dialog box will be closed and you will be placed in the contact list box. You can change your status by doing the following. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 to open the menu. Press Enter on File. Move to Set My Status by pressing Space-4, and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, just press Enter-

t (dots 2-3-4-5). 2) Then, the Set My Status dialog box will appear, and the Status combo box will have focus. Move to the status item that you want by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 3) Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the Confirm button, and press Enter. Then your online status will be changed and you will be placed in the contact list box. 16.4.4 Additional Features 1. Sign out When you are logged in and you want to log in to another account, you will need to log out first, and then log in to the other account. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Enter on File. Press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Sign Out and press Enter. Then, you are logged out, and the Sign In dialog box will appear again. In the E-mail address and Password edit box, the email address and password used in the previous login will be displayed by default. To log in to another account, you first need to delete the log in information from the first account, and type the log in information of the other account. 2. Save account If you did not check the Remember me and Save password check boxes in the Sign In dialog box, later, you may want to save the account information once you are logged in. You can use the Save Account option for this. It is exactly the same as checking the two check boxes in the login dialog box. To use Save Account, you should press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Tools, and press Enter. Press Space-4 to move to Save account, and press Enter. Then, you will hear Save account? Yes. In here, you press Enter and then you will be placed back in the contact list box. 3. View chat and last message When you are having a conversation with more than one person simultaneously, you can view a list of messages that you have received previously. You can use the Last Message option, or when using View Chat go back to the instant message dialog box which you have used recently in the current instant message dialog box. To use View Chat, you should press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu and press Enter on File menu. Press Space-4 to move to View Chat, and press Enter. Or you press Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-

5) without call up menu. To use Last Message, you should press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Actions, and press Enter. Press Space-4 to move to Last Message, and press Enter. Or you press BackSpace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) without call up menu. When executing Last Message you can see the list of messages. In this list, you can move through the messages by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly. If you press Enter on a message, then the focus will move to the corresponding instant message dialog box. 4. Play keyboard sound You can select whether your message input is converted into the sound or not to use Play Keyboard Sound when you are writing your message to a person in the instant message dialog box. In other words, you can choose whether you will hear a persons message input while inputting your message or your message input continuously when a person send you a message. You need to take the following steps for this function. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 to move to the Tools and press Enter. 3) Press Space-4 to move to the Play Keyboard Sound and press Enter. Or, you can press Enter-k (dots 1-3) to move to the Play Keyboard Sound directly. Then, you can see Play keyboard sound: Yes message. 4) If you press Enter, you can hear your input message even if a person send you a message. If you press Space-4 first and then press Enter, you can hear a persons input message even if you are writing your message. 5. Message sound notification while in current window You can select whether you use beep sound for the messages or not to use Message Sound Notification While In Current Window when you are communicating with a person in the instant message dialog box. You need to take the following steps for this function. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 to move to the Tools and press Enter. 3) Press Space-4 to move to the Message Sound Notification While In Current Window and press Enter. Or, you can press Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) to move to the Message Sound Notification While In Current Window directly. Then, you can see Play message sound notification while in current window: Yes message. 4) If you press Enter, you can hear beep sound when you communicate with a person. 5) If you press Space-4 first and then press Enter, you cant hear beep sound when you communicate with a person. However, if you are not in instant message dialog box, but in contact list, you will hear beep sound even if you selected no option of notify message sound in current window because it is applied for current messaging window only. 6. Message sound notification while messenger is in the background You can select whether you use beep sound for receipt of the messages or not to use message sound notification while messenger is in the background when you are using another program like as word processor. You need to take the following steps for this function. 1) Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu. 2) Press Space-4 to move to the Tools and press Enter. 3) Press Space-4 to move to the Message Sound Notification While Messenger Is In The Background and press Enter. Or, you can press Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) to move to the Message Sound Notification While Messenger Is In The Background directly. Then, you can see Play message sound notification while messenger is in the background: Yes message. 4) If you press Enter, you can hear beep sound when a person send you a message. If you press Space-4 first and then press Enter, there is no beep sound and you cant find out new message before you check messenger program. 16.4.3 Instant Message Dialog Box If you press Enter on an item in the contact list box, the instant message dialog box will appear. The instant message dialog box consists of history window, input edit box, Send and Close buttons. The history window lists all the messages that have been sent to and from other contacts. In the input edit box, you can type your message to be sent to another person. You can move between these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). When you are sending an instant message, the input edit box will be focused when the dialog box appears. On the other hand, if the dialog box was opened to read received messages, the history window will be focused. In the input edit box, you can type one line, and by pressing Enter, you can send the message. You can also move to the Send button, and press Enter to send the message. Then the message will also be added to the history window. In the history window, for each message, the nickname of the person who wrote the message will be displayed first, and then the content of the message will be displayed. Each message is considered as a paragraph. When you are in the instant message dialog box, if the other person sends a message, the message will be displayed in Braille and announced in speech immediately. If you receive a message while the focus is at the input edit box, the focus will not be changed. If the focus is at the history window, the content of the window will not be updated until you move to another control and go back to the history window. While you are in the instant message dialog box, you can move to the contact list box by pressing Space-1-2-6 (or F1-F2) or Space-3-4-5

(or F3-F4). If you press the key again, you will go back to the instant message dialog box. More than one instant message dialog box can be opened at the same time. For example, while you are in an instant message dialog box, if you go to the contact list box by pressing Space-

1-2-6, and press Enter on another contact, another instant message dialog box will be opened. If you want to close the instant message dialog box, press Enter on the Close button, or press Space-e (dots 1-5). Then, the dialog box will be closed, and you will be placed back in the contact list box. 16.4.1 Inviting Others to Start a Conversation You can invite others to have a conversation together at the same time. That is, you can have a conversation with more than one person in one instant message dialog box. You can invite or add another participant as follows. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Move to Actions by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and press Enter. Press Enter on Invite A Contact. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press Enter-i (dots 2-4). Then, the list of people who are online will be displayed. Press Space-1 or Space-4 repeatedly to move to the contact you want to invite. Press Enter. Then you will get a message that says the person has been invited, and you will be placed back in the current instant message dialog box. Now, you are able to have a conversation with more than one person in one dialog box. 16.4.2 Saving and Printing Your Messages You can save or print the messages that are shown in the history window. If you want to save the messages, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Enter on File. Move to Save As and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press Space-s (dots 2-3-4). Then, the save dialog box will appear and the File name edit box will be focused. This dialog box has the same controls, and you can use it in the same way as the Save As dialog box in Word processor. If you want to print the messages, first, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Then, press Enter on File. Move to Print by pressing Space-4 repeatedly, and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, you can just press Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4). Then, the Print dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box is the same as the Print dialog box in the Word processor. The messages can be printed or embossed in Braille. 16.4.3 Copying and Pasting Instant Messages You can copy, paste, and delete the messages in the history window or input edit box, as you can do in the Word processor. However, since the history window is read only, you cannot paste, cut, and delete the messages in the history window. To select a block of text, move the cursor to the starting point, and press Enter-b (dots 1-2). Then, move to the end point of the text to be selected. Press Enter-c (dots 1-4) to copy, Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) to cut. Then, move the cursor to the place where you want to insert the copied text (the input edit box, or an edit box of another program), and press Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) to paste the text. If you press Enter-a (dot 1), you can select all the text in the current control. You can perform these functions using the Edit menu. 16.4.4 Searching Messages You can search the messages in the history window for text. This is very useful especially when you have exchanged a lot of messages. The Find dialog box is used for this, and it works the same as the one in the Word processor. Press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to open the menu. Press Space-4 to move to Edit, and press Enter. Press Space-4 repeatedly to move to Find, and press Enter. Or instead of using the menu, just press Space-f (dots 1-2-4). Then, the Find dialog box will appear, and the Text to find edit box will be focused. Type the string to look for and set the searching direction, and then press Enter. Then, the focus will move to the message that contains the text. If you want to find it again in the same direction, press Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). If the text is not found, you will get the message, Not found, and the cursor will be located where you invoked the Find dialog box. 16.5 Hot Keys in Social Networking 16.5.1 Twitter Sign Out: Enter-g(dots 1-2-3) Personal Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4) Save Current Timeline: Space-s(dots 2-3-4) Home Timeline: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Friend Timeline: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) User Timeline: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Current User Timeline: Backspace-u (dots1-3-6) Mention Timeline: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Retweet By Me: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Retweet To Me: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Retweet Of Me: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Tweet: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Remove Tweet: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Retweet: Enter-e (dots 1-5)"

Reply: Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6) Add To Favorite: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Favorite List: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Send Direct Message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sent Direct Message: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Received Direct Message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Follow User: Backspace-a (dot 1) Following: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Followers: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Global Search: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) User Search: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Search Word List: Backspace-w(dots 2-4-5-6) Next List: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Move to the next tweet: Space-4 Move to the previous tweet: Space-1 Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Space-4-5-6 Move to the previous 32 list: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32 list: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 16.5.2 Google talk File (f) Menu Commands Sign out (l): Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Export Contact Lists(x): Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Import Contact Lists (i): Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Exit (z): Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Action (a) Menu Commands Start Chat (s): Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Send File (f): Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to Recently Chat (r): Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (m): Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact (b) Menu Commands Add Contact (q): Backspace-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Delete Contact (d): Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Block Contact (b): Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Manage Block List (m): Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact Information (i): Enter-i (dots 2-4) Manage Contact List (p): Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Option (s) Menu Commands My Status Options (u): Backspace-u (dots 1-3-6) Action Options (a): Backspace-a (dot 1) Alert Options (o): Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Path Options (p): Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Chat Window Menus File (f) Menu Commands Save Conversation (s): Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Close Chat (z): Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Edit (e) Menu Commands Cut (x): Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy (c): Enter-c (dots 1-4) Delete (d): Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Paste (v): Enter -v (dots 1-2-3-6) Start Selection (b): Enter -b (dots 1-2) Select All (a): Enter-a (dot 1) Find (f): Enter -f (dots 1-2-4) Find Again (g): Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Action (a) Menu Commands Start Chat (s): Enter -s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat (v): Enter-h (dots1-2-5) Stop Voice Chat (v): Space -e (dots 1-5) Send File (f): Enter -f (dots 1-2-4) View Contact List (r): Enter -t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (m): Enter -m (dots 1-3-4) Move to Previous Chat (p): Space-2-3 Move to Next Chat (n): Space-5-6 The move keys in Google Talk. Move to the previous Contents: Space-1 Move to the next Contents: Space-4 Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Space-3-4-5 Move to the first item of the Contents: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last item of the Contents: Space-4-5-6 16.5.3 MSN messenger 1) Log-in dialog box Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Check or uncheck a check box: Space 2) The contact list box Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6 Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 Sign out: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Close: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1) Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3) Message sound notification while in current window: BackSpace-s

(dots 2-3-4) Message sound notification while messenger is in the background:

Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4) Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Confirm the received message: Enter-l (Dots 1-2-3) 3) Instant message dialog box Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space- F3) Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact list box: Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2, or F3-F4 Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Close: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Invitation: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 17. Utilities The Utilities menu provides several special functions for use with the Braille Sense U2. The Utilities menu has the following items:

1) Calculator (where you can do simple math equations as well as 2) Set Time and Date (where you can set the Braille Sense U2 scientific calculations) internal clock) 3) Display Time and Date (where you can check the date and time) 4) Wake up alarm (where you can set the alarm) 5) Calendar (where you can check the calendar) 6) Pronunciation Dictionary (where you can set the pronunciation that you want to hear) 7) Stopwatch (where you can set stopwatch) 8) Terminal for screen reader (which allows you to connect the Braille Sense U2 to your PC for use as a Braille display, external speaker, as well as many other useful functions) 9) Setup internet (where you can adjust your internet settings) 10) Display Network Status (where you can display network status) 11) Display power status (where you can Display power status) 12) Backup/ Restore personalized settings (where you can backup/restore the personalized settings for each program in the Braille Sense U2 all at once) 13) Menu manager 14) Format (where you can format the flashdisk, SD card and USB 15) Set Sleep Timer 16) Upgrade Braille Sense Firmware (where you can upgrade memory.) Firmware) To access the menu items, 1) Press Space-1 or Space-4 in the program menu. 2) Press Enter on the Utilities menu. Or, you can press u (dots 1-

3-6) in the program menu to open the utility menu. 3) The Utilities menu has several submenus under each of the menu items. The following sections will discuss each of these menu options and their functions in greater detail. 17.1 Calculator Using the calculator on the Braille Sense U2 you can do simple math equations as well as complex scientific calculations. The results and formulas will be displayed in Braille, and spoken by the Braille Sense U2. While using the calculator, you can refer to the help menu by pressing Space-h (dots 1-2-5). The help menu is very useful as you can quickly access hot key information for the various programs on the Braille Sense U2. When you want to use the calculator you can press c (dots 1-4) from within the Utilities menu. When using the calculator on the Braille Sense U2, you need to type using computer Braille when calculating or inserting your formulas. You can initialize your calculation line by pressing Backspace-c (dots 1-4). If you insert numbers or a function into a result, the result will disappear; and if you put in operators, you can get to the next step. In addition, you can keep your result in the calculators memory, and you can recall it when you need the result. You can use the function and operators via the calculator menu or you can use the hot keys depending on which method works best for you. All of these functions are explained in greater detail below. 17.1.1 General Functions General functions is a dialog box that contains the general function list, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. In the dialog box, you can navigate through the items with tab (Space-4-5) and shift-tab

(Space-1-2). In the general function list, you can navigate the operators using Space-1 or Space-4. Or, in the list, you can press the first letter of the operator that you want to go to. In the Calculator, you can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2, and press Enter on General Functions. Or, you can press g (dots 1-2-4-

5) in the menu to access General Functions. After starting the calculation, 0 will be displayed in computer Braille. On the calculation line, you can access the General Functions by pressing Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5). If the dialog box pops up first, you will be placed on the general function list. Once in the list, you can select what you want, and press Enter on it to run the operator since the default is set to the Confirm button in the dialog. In the dialog box, you can cancel the operator selection by pressing Enter on Cancel, Space-z (dots 1-3-5-

6), or Space-e (dots 1-5). You can use hot keys of the operators for convenient access. The hot keys of the operators are as follows:

PLUS: dots 3-4-6 Minus: dots 3-6 Divided by: dots 3-4 Multiply by: dots 1-6 Percent: dots 1-4-6 Power: BackSpace-4-5 Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Decimal point: dots 4-6 Left parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6 Right parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6 PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Exponential: Enter-e (dots 1-5) If you want to enter in negative numbers, you should type in minus (dots 3-6) and the number together in parentheses. For example, you should type in minus 2 in the following manner: (-2). For the percent operation, you can get the result when you put in the numbers first and the percent sign (%) just after typing in the numbers. Immediately after you have typed in the percent sign (%), the number that you have typed in will be converted into a percent value. For example, 90 + 20% equals 90 + 18. You will see the number 18 on pressing the % sign since 18 is 20% of 90. So, you get 108 for your answer. 17.1.2 Memory Functions The Memory Functions will keep your resulting answers and calculations in the memory. The Memory Functions menu has four submenu items: Recall Item, Delete All Saved Items, Save Item, and Statistics Functions. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1 repeatedly, and then press Enter on the desired feature. To access these menu items, press Space-m (dots 1-3-4) to call up the menu, and press Enter on Memory Functions. Or, you can press v (dots 1-2-3-6) when you are in the menu. 17.1.2.1 Recall Items Recall Items is a dialog box, that has the following items list, Delete, Display detail, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can navigate through each of these items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). You can access Recall Items by pressing r

(dots 1-2-3-5) in the Memory Functions menu. Otherwise, you can access the dialog box by pressing Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) in the calculation line. The item list displays an item name: the result value, and you can move in the item name list by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can insert the items result into your calculation if you press Enter on the item name. You can also copy each item in the item list. Press Space key to select an item in the item list. Then, press Enter-i (dots 2-4) to copy the selected items to the clipboard. The Display detail shows the item name and its result with the default set to No. If you want to review the detailed information, press Space to switch to Yes. Then, it will display item name: the formula = its result value in Braille. Delete is used to get rid of your registered item. If you want to delete an item, first, you should select the item that you want to be deleted, and then press Enter on Delete. You can find the deleted item in item list by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Or, you can press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on what you want to delete in the item name list. If you want to delete all of the items, you can select all of them by pressing Enter-a (dot 1), and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). If you only want to delete some of them, you can select the items by pressing Space, and press Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on the selected items. 17.1.2.2 Delete All Saved Items When you use this function, you can delete all of the saved items that are stored in the Recall Items. To activate it, you can call up the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or press F2. Then, use the Space-

1 or Space-4 to get to the Memory Functions menu, and press Enter. Next, use the up and down arrows to go to Delete All Saved Items, and press Enter. You can also press Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) while you are in the calculation line. 17.1.2.3 Save Items Save Items is a dialog box that has an edit window for typing in the item name, a Confirm button and a Cancel button. You can move between the control items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). In the Memory Functions menu, you can access Save Items by pressing s (dots 2-3-5). When you are in the calculation line, you can press Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) to open the save items dialog box. When you are on the calculation line if you type in the item name, and formula, a=2+sin(30), followed by pressing Enter, the calculation will be saved automatically. In your calculating result, you can access Save Items to type in an item name in the edit box, and then you can save it by pressing Enter directly or by pressing Enter on the Confirm button. If you type in function names like sin, cos, or pi as an item name, you will see the message Invalid item name, and if you type in names that have already been saved, you will see a message that says, Replace variable xx with current value? Yes. If you want to change the value, press Enter on Yes. And if you do not want to change the value, press Enter on No. Press Space to toggle between Yes and No. 17.1.2.4 Statistics Function If you select this menu item, a dialog box opens, which consists of a list box containing all the stored variables, a list box displaying the results of several functions, and a Close button. You can move between these elements by pressing tab (Space-4-5), or shift-tab (Space-1-2). You can bring up this dialog box by pressing Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) in the calculator line, or by pressing t (dots 2-3-4-5) in the Memory Functions menu. In the variable list, the variable names and their current values are displayed. You can move between these variables by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. In order to select a variable to be used in the calculation, press Space on it. This list is the same as the one in the Recall Items dialog box. The only difference is that this dialog box always displays variable names and values, regardless of the value of Detail display option. After you select all of the variables to be used in the calculation, you can press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the result list. The result list displays the sum, average, variance, and standard deviation of selected variables. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you want to copy some results in the list to the clipboard, first press Space on the items to be copied, and then press Enter-i (dots 2-4). (However, Copy To Clipboard in the menu cannot be used. Only this hotkey will work.) Once they are copied to the clipboard, they can be pasted in the Word processor or other programs. To close the dialog box, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) or press Enter on the Close button. To get the statistics about another set of variables after reading the result, press shift-tab (Space-1-2) to go back to the variable list. Then, press Space-e (dots 1-5) to cancel all the selections. Now, select all the variables to be calculated in the same way as you did before, and press tab (Space-4-5) to read the result. 17.1.3 Sine Functions The Sine Functions menu will be activated when you press Enter on Sine Functions, or press s (dots 2-3-4) in the menu. You can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, you can activate the Sine Functions menu by pressing Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) in your calculation line. The sine function list consists of Sine, Arc sine, and Hyperbolic sine. If you press Enter on one of the three functions while moving with Space-1 or Space-4, or if you press Enter on Confirm on one of the functions while moving with tab (Space-4-5), you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting one of the sine functions. Or, you can insert one of the three sine functions by pressing the first letter of each in the list. 17.1.4 Cosine Functions You can activate the Cosine Functions by pressing Enter on Cosine Functions, or if you press i (dots 2-4) in the menu. You can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line, you can open the Cosine Functions by pressing Enter-i (dots 2-4). The cosine function list consists of Cosine, Arc cosine, and Hyperbolic cosine. If you press Enter on one of the three functions while moving with Space-1 or Space-4, or if you press Enter on Confirm while moving with tab (Space-4-5), you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting one of the three cosine functions. Or, you can insert one of the three cosine functions by pressing the first letter of each in the list. 17.1.5 Tangent Functions You can activate the Tangent Functions when you press Enter on Tangent Functions, or if you press t (dots 2-3-4-5) in the menu. You can also open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line, you can open the Tangent Functions by pressing Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5). The tangent functions list consists of Tangent, Arc tangent, and Hyperbolic tangent. If you press Enter on one of the three functions while moving with Space-1 or Space-4, or if you press Enter on Confirm on one of the functions while moving with tab

(Space-4-5), you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting one of the three tangent functions. Or you can insert one of the three tangent functions by pressing the first letter of each in the list. 17.1.6 Logarithm Functions The Logarithm Functions is a dialog box, which contains the following:

function list, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between the three items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). The function list consists of Common logarithm and Natural logarithm, in which you can move by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can activate the Logarithm Functions menu by pressing Enter on Logarithm Functions, or if you press l (dots 1-2-3) in the menu. Of course, you can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line, you can activate the Logarithm Functions by pressing Enter-l (dots 1-2-3). When running the Logarithm Functions, If you press Enter on one of the functions while moving with Space-1 or Space-4, or if you press Enter on Confirm on one of the functions while moving with tab

(Space-4-5), you can insert it into your calculation line after selecting one of the logarithm functions. Or, you can insert Natural logarithm by pressing n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the list. You can insert Common logarithm by pressing c (dots 1-4). 17.1.7 Copy to Clipboard The Copy To Clipboard function is used to copy your formula or result into the clipboard for pasting your formula or result in a document of the word processor. You can activate it by pressing Enter on the Copy To Clipboard, or by pressing c(dots 1-4) in the menu. You can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4) while running the calculator. Or, in the calculation line, you can press Enter-c (dots 1-4) for the quick copy of your calculation into the clipboard directly. After copying, you can paste it in your document of the word processor. When you activate Copy To Clipboard, you will hear Copy completed, and the Braille Sense U2 will return to your calculation line. 17.1.8 Option Settings Option Settings is a dialog box, which contains the following: setting list, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between the three items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-

2). The setting list consists of Radian and Degree, in which you can move by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you select Radian, you can get the PI value while using the trigonometric function. If you select Degree and activate PI, you will get a wrong answer. You can activate the Option Settings if you press Enter on it, or if you press o (dots 1-3-5) in the menu. Of course, you can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line, you can activate the Option Settings by pressing Enter-o (dots 1-3-5). When running the Option Settings, if you press Enter on what you want in the setting list while moving with Space-1 or Space-4, or if you press Enter on Confirm on what you want in the setting list, while moving with tab (Space-4-5), you will set the option. 17.1.9 Exit This is used to exit the calculator. You can quit a calculation if you press Enter on Exit Calculator, or if you press z in the menu. Of course, you can open the menu by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Or, in your calculation line, you can exit by pressing Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 17.1.10 Sample Math Calculations The following are examples for each of the math functions that you can perform when using the calculator on the Braille Sense U2. General functions:

1. Addition PLUS For PLUS press dots 3-4-6. For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, you would enter: 10+20. The result is displayed as 30. 2. Subtraction Minus For Minus, press dots 3-6. For example, to add the numbers 10 and 20, and then subtract 5, you would enter: 10+20-5. The result is displayed as 25. 3. Multiplication For multiplication, press dots 1-6. For example, to multiply 10 by 20, you would enter: 10*20. The result is displayed as 200. 4. Division For Division, press dots 1-4. For example, to divide 20 by 10, you would enter: 20/10. The result is displayed as 2. 5. Percent For Percent, press dots 1-4-6. If you want to calculate, what a 10 percent mark-up of 20 would be, enter the following, 20+10% which gives you the result 22. You get this answer because, 2 is 10percent of 20. To calculate a 10 percent mark-down on 20, press: 20-10% which gives the result 18. You get this answer because, 2 is 10 percent of 20. To calculate what percentage 20 is of 10, press: 20/10% which gives you the result 200. To calculate 10 percent of 20, press: 20*10% which gives the result 2. That is, 10 percent is 0.1. 20*0.1 = 2. 6. Power For Power, press Backspace with dots 4-5. For example, to calculate 2 to the power of 10, you would press: 2^10. The answer will be given as 1024. 7. Calculating Square Root To perform the Square root function, you can press Enter with dots 1-2-3-4-5. For example, to calculate the square root of 16, you press: Enter with dots 1-2-3-4-5, 16 ). Then, press enter. Your answer will be given as 4. 8. Exponential For Exponential you can press Enter with dots 1-5. For example, to calculate the Exponential of 2, you would press:

Enter with dots 1-5 then 2, followed by the ) and Enter. That is, exp

(2) which gives the result 7.3890561. 9. Trigonometric Functions Sine Functions:

For Sine, press Enter with dots 2-3-4, and then s. This is shown on the Braille display as, sin(. For Arc Sine, press Enter with dots 2-3-4, then a. This is displayed as asin(. For Hyperbolic sine, press Enter with dots 2-3-4, then h. This is displayed as sinh(. In order to calculate the sine of a 30 degree angle you would type the following: Enter with dots 2-3-4, then s, 30 and then ). Press Enter and your answer is displayed as 0.5. Cosine Functions:

For Cosine, you would press Enter with dots 2-4, and then you would press i. This is displayed as cos(. For Arc cosine, press Enter, with dots 2-4, then, a. This is displayed as acos(. For Hyperbolic cosine, press Enter with dots 2-4, then, h. This is displayed as cosh(. For example, to calculate the cosine of the 30 degree angles, you press:

Enter with dots 2-4, C, 30 and then ). Then, press Enter. Your answer will be given as 0.8660254. Tangent Functions:

For Tangent, press Enter with dots 2-3-4-5 and then t. This is displayed as tan(. For Arc tangent, press Enter with dots 2-3-4-5 then a. This is displayed as atan(. For Hyperbolic tangent, press Enter, with dots 2-3-4-5, then, h. This is displayed as tanh(. For example, to calculate the tangent of the 30 degree angles, you press: Enter with dots 2-3-4-5, T, 30 and then ). That is, tan(30) which gives you the result of 0.57735027. Logarithm Functions:

Common logarithm For Common logarithm, press Enter with dots 1-2-3, and then n. This is displayed as log(. For example, to calculate the common logarithm of the 100, you press:

Enter with dots 1-2-3, N, 100 and then ). That is, log(100) which gives the result 2. Natural Logarithm For Natural logarithm, press Enter with dots 1-2-3, and then, e. This is displayed as ln(. For example, to calculate the natural logarithm of the 100, you press:

Enter with dots 1-2-3, E, 100 and then ). That is, ln(100) which gives the result 4.60517019. 17.2 Display Compass Heading You can display compass in Braille Sense OnHand. You can execute this function regardless of location. In order to display compass, follow these steps:

(1) Press Enter-5-6, regardless of location.

(2) It will show current status of compass. Also you can execute this function in the Utilities program.

(1) Press Enter on the Utilities program or simply press b (dots 1-

2) from the main menu.

(2) Move to Display Compass Heading by pressing Space-4.

(3) Press Enter on the Display Compass Heading or simply press h (dots 1-2-5). If you want to check current compass, press Space. You will hear current compass. To exit this function, press Space-e (dots 1-5) or Space-z (dots 1-3-5-

6). Note: It will take about 15 minutes to initialize the unit as following cases:

(1) Far away from the original location with the unit being discharged.

(2) Leave the unit being discharged for more than a month 17.2.1 Options of gyrocompass There are 2 options in gyrocompass. 1) Refreshing time 2) Compass display type

- Refreshing time You can set the interval of announcement. To set, follow these steps:

(1) Execute the Display Compass Heading.

(2) It will show current status of compass.

(3) Press Tab (Space-4-5).

(4) It will show Refreshing time edit box. By default, it is set to 0. You can set from 0 to 120. Please enter the value for seconds.

- Compass display type You can set the type of the compass display. To set, follow these steps:

(1) Execute the Display Compass Heading.

(2) It will show current status of compass.

(3) Press Tab (Space-4-5) and move to Compass display type. By default, it is set to cardinal and degrees. The setting values are cardinal and degrees, cardinal only and degrees only. By pressing Space, you can change setting value. 17.3 Set Time and Date If you want to set the Braille Sense U2 internal clock, you can set it by pressing Enter on Set Time and Date in the Utilities menu. In the Utilities menu, you can locate the set time and date by pressing t (dots 2-3-4-5), or you can find it by navigating the Utilities menu with Space-1 or Space-4. The set time and date is a dialog box, which consists of Time zone, Use Daylight Saving, Time format, Time, Date, Synchronize with time server, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between each of these items by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab

(Space-1-2). If you activate Set Time and Date for the first time, you may see Time zone? Pacific Time (US & Canada); Tijuana (GMPT-08:00) which is set as the default. In Time zone, you can review the time zone list by pressing Space-4 or Space-1, or by typing in the first letter of represented cities. If you selected one of the time zones, you can move to the next item by pressing tab (Space-4-5), or you can move to the previous item by pressing shift-tab (Space-1-2). The Use Daylight Saving will display according to Time zone. Namely if daylight saving time is used in selected time zone, this item will display. If not so, this item is not display. You can check and uncheck this item by using Space. The next item is Time format, where you can switch between 12 hour and 24 hour time. You can toggle between which time to use with Space-1 or Space-4. Once you select a time, you can move to the next Time by pressing tab (Space-4-5). In Time, you can set your time. If you select 12 hour clock in the Time format, you can see A.M. or P.M. after the hour and minute. In the 12 hour clock, you can set the time after selecting A.M. or P.M. by pressing Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6). In the 24 hour clock setting, you can type in a 24-hour-system number regardless of A.M. or P.M. When you put numbers in the time, you need to put a Space or :

(colon) between the hour and the minute. To set your data, you can move to the Date by pressing tab (Space-4-5). In the Date, you should put in the month, date, and year in that order. You should use a 2-digit number for the month, a 2-digit number for the date, and a 4-digit number for the year while typing in a Space or / (slash) between them. The next item is Synchronize with time server, where you can synchronize time and date. This function is extremely useful when the date and time of Braille Sense U2 is faster or slower than current time. First of all, to execute this function, you have to connect the internet to your Braille Sense U2. Once the internet is connected, press Enter on Synchronize with time server button. After the synchronizing, it shows synchronized time in Time edit combo box. Also when you press Tab

(Space-4-5), it shows synchronized date in Data edit combo box. After you have completed the necessary information, you can press Enter on Confirm by moving with tab (Space-4-5), and then you will return to Set Time and Date. Or, you can press Enter when you have completed entering all of the information because the default is set to Confirm. 17.4 Display Time and Date You can check the current date and time here. To activate this function, press Space-4 or Space-1 in the Utilities menu, and then press Enter on Display Time and Date. Or, you can activate this function by pressing d in the menu. Anywhere in the Braille Sense U2, you can press Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) to check the time. If you press Space-t

(dots 2-3-4-5), the Braille Sense U2 will say the time, and the Braille Sense U2 will display the current time in Braille. Then, if you press tab

(Space-4-5), the Braille Sense U2 will say and display todays date. 17.5 Wake up alarm If you have set up the Wake up alarm function, an alarm will sound on the Braille Sense U2 at the specified time every day. If you want to open Wake up alarm, go to the program menu, move to Utilities, and then press Enter. Then, use the Space-1 or Space-4 to find Wake up alarm, and then press Enter on Wake up alarm. If this is the first time you have opened Wake up alarm, and you have not yet set the time or date in the Braille Sense U2, the Braille Sense U2 will then say, Set time: After you set the time, the Braille Sense U2 will display the Wake up alarm dialog box. The Braille Sense U2 will then say, Set time: The Wake up alarm dialog box contains the following: Set time, Bell, Term, Alarm duration, Repeat interval, Wake up call times a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move among these by pressing tab (Space-4-5) and shift-tab (Space-1-2). If you want to check the wakeup call settings, open this dialog box again. It will show you the current wakeup call settings. When the alarm sounds, the Braille display on the Braille Sense U2 will also display the message Wake up call. Press Backspace-enter to stop the alarm. If you want to stop the alarm, press Backspace-enter. After you press Backspace-enter, the Braille Sense U2 will remain on. In order to turn the Braille Sense U2 off, you have to move power switch to Right and hit Backspace-enter and then move power switch to Right again. Then the Braille Sense U2 will be turned off, and the alarm will not sound again until you set it again. If you do not plan on being able to turn the unit off and on, you should turn on the Power saving mode in the Global options (as explained in section 3.2.30) to avoid draining the battery. 17.5.1 Set Time When you open the Wake up alarm dialog box, the Braille Sense U2 will display the Set time field. The value is set to the current time or the time specified previously. Here you can directly type in the time, or set the time using the shortcut keys, as explained in section 6.3. If you want to change AM/PM, press Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6). After you set the time, you should press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. While you are anywhere in the Braille Sense U2, you can check the time by pressing Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) to check the time. 17.5.2 Alarm Sound You can select an alarm sound for the wake up alarm. If you press tab

(Space-4-5) on Set time, you will hear the alarm sound that is currently set. Press Space-1 or Space-4 to change the alarm sound, and you will hear the different alarm sounds. Select one of the three alarm sounds that are available. If you have selected the sound that you want, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. 17.5.3 Term In this field, you can set which day of the week the alarm will go off. There are four options: Off, Once, Week days, and Every day. Move between these options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If Term is set to Off, the alarm will not go off at the specified time at all. If Term is set to Once, the alarm will go off only once. If Term is set to Week day, the alarm will go off at the same time every weekday, Monday through Friday. If Term is set to Everyday, the alarm will go off at the specified time 7 days a week, even on weekends. When you have selected the option you like, press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next field. 17.5.4 Ringing Duration This option sets the amount of time that the alarm will sound. The options are 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes. Move between these options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you set the ringing duration to 1 minute, the alarm will sound for one minute, and then the alarm will be silent. To stop the alarm, press BackSpace-enter. 17.5.5 Repeat Interval This option sets the amount of time that will be between the times that the alarm sounds. For example, after the alarm has stopped sounding, it will ring again in 3 minutes, if you set the repeat interval to three minutes. The available settings are 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes. Move between these options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 17.5.6 Wakeup Call Times This option allows you to decide how many times the alarm will sound. The available settings are anywhere from 1 to 10 times. For example, if the alarm is not turned off by pressing BackSpace-enter, it will repeat according to the number of times that you set for this option. Move between these options by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 17.5.7 Confirm/Cancel If you press Enter on the Confirm button, the changed options will be saved, and the dialog box will be closed. If you do not want to save the changes you have made, press Enter on the Cancel button. The Braille Sense U2 will keep the previous wakeup call settings, and close the dialog box. 17.6 Calendar You can activate the calendar by pressing Enter on Calendar in the Utilities menu, or by pressing l (dots 1-2-3). The following options will be available when you are using the calendar. Solar calendar, and Lunar calendar. In the calendar, you can check the three kinds of information starting from the year 1841 to the year 2043. If you type in a date that is not in the range and press Enter, you will get the message, Invalid date, and return to where you where you were typing in the date. 17.6.1 Using the Calendar The Calendar is composed of the Solar calendar, Lunar calendar, and Day of week. In the Lunar calendar, a leap month will display the month with l (dots 1-2-3). The calendar works according to a date unit. The default is the date that the Braille Sense U2 was set to the last time the date was set. You can check the date in two ways. The following is an explanation of how to check the dates. 1. Moving items 2. Typing in date You can switch between Solar calendar, Lunar calendar, and Day of week by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). In the calendar, you can type in a month, date, and year. For the year, you should type in a 4-digit number, and for the month and date, you should type in 2-digit numbers. It is possible to type these numbers in using computer Braille and regular grade 1 Braille without using the number sign. You can put Space or / (slash) between the month, date, and year. If you press Enter after typing in a date, you can hear the date once, and go to the next item. For example, if you put the date in the Solar calendar, you will be on the Lunar calendar. 3. Hotkeys for switching dates After putting in a date, you can check the Solar calendar, Lunar calendar, and Day of week by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-

tab (Space-1-2). Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 17.7 Pronunciation Dictionary The Pronunciation dictionary is used to register or modify the Braille Sense U2s pronunciation while it is speaking. You can activate it by pressing p (dots 1-2-3-4) in the Utilities menu. The Pronunciation dictionary is composed of the list, Add Word button, Modify Word button, Delete Word button and Close button. You can move through those controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The list will be shown as word: xx yy where xx is the original word and yy is the word you wanted to hear instead of the original word. For example, if you wanted to hear world health organization for the original word WHO and added the word, the list will be listed as word: WHO world health organization. If there are many items on the list, you can move up or down through lists by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Also you can click the cursor routing key corresponding to the item position you want to focus. For example, if there are 10 items in the list and you want to focus the 5th item, you can just click the 5th cursor routing key and you will focus on the 5th item on the list. The list will not be listed by the alphabetical order and it will be listed by the sequential order to be added. If you want to add new word, you can add the word by pressing Enter on Add Word button or you can press Space-i (dots 2-4). Then you will meet Add entry: Here you can type in the word you want to change its pronunciation and press tab (Space-4-5) then you will meet Replacement: Here you can type in the word you want to hear the pronunciation and then press Enter or press tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm button and then press Enter. The word will be added completely and the focus will be returned to Add Word button. In case of adding the word by pressing Space-i (dots 2-4), newly added word will be displayed. If you want to cancel this modification, you can press Enter on Cancel button or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). If you want to modify the registered word, in the list, you can move up or down by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 so that you focus the item you want to modify. And after moving to Modify Word button by pressing tab (Space-4-5), press Enter. Or on the item you want to modify, just press Space-m (dots 1-3-4). Then you will meet Modify entry: (focused word). At this time, if you press tab (Space-4-5) once, you will meet Replacement: (new pronunciation). Here you can type in the pronunciation you want to change and then press Enter. Or press tab

(Space-4-5) again to move to Confirm button and then press Enter. Then the word will be modified completely and the focus will be returned to Modify Word button. In case of modifying the word by pressing Space-m (dots 1-3-4), the modified word will be displayed. If you want to cancel this modification, you can press Enter on Cancel button or press Space-e (dots 1-5) or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). If you want to delete the registered word, in the list, you can move up or down by pressing Space-1 or Space-4 so that you focus the item you want to delete. And after moving to Delete Word button by pressing tab (Space-4-5), press Enter. Or on the item you want to delete, just press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). Then you will meet the prompt, Delete?

Yes. If you are sure to delete the item, press Enter. Otherwise press Space to switch to No and then press Enter. If you want to exit Pronunciation dictionary, you can press Enter on Close button or press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6). 17.8 Stopwatch When you press Enter on the Stopwatch, you will show 00:00:00. If you press Enter, the stopwatch will start. If you press Enter again, it will pause, and the Braille Sense U2 will say the elapsed time, and display it in Braille. Pressing Enter again will restart the stopwatch from where it paused. If you press Backspace on work or pause, it will let you know the elapsed time and will clear into 00:00:00. While the stopwatch is working, pressing Space will make the Braille Sense U2 say the elapsed time at the moment. In this case, the Braille display is still just displaying the clock. While the stopwatch is running, pressing Space-F2 will stop displaying the time while the stopwatch is still running. If you press Space-F2, the time will be displayed again. If you press tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) before the start of the stopwatch or while it is running, you can switch to the Countdown timer. If you activate the Countdown timer, you will be asked to put in hours, minutes, and seconds. When typing in the hours, minutes, and seconds, you should type in a two-digit number for the hour, minute and the second, regardless of whether you are using computer Braille or regular grade 1 Braille without using a number sign. Also you can setup the time with the following keys. 1) Movement key Move to the previous one hour: Space-1 Move to the next one hour: Space-4 Move to the previous 10 minutes: Space-2 Move to the next 10 minutes: Space-5 Move to the previous one minute: Space-3 Move to the next one minute: Space-6 Move to the previous one second: Space-2-3 Move to the next one second: Space-5-6 If you press Enter without typing in any numbers, the Countdown timer will start with the default, which is set to one minute. When started, the Countdown timer will display count down xx minute, and it will start running. If you press Enter in the Countdown timer, the Braille Sense U2 will tell you the remaining time, and then it will pause. If you press Enter again, it will restart. Pressing Backspace will clear the Countdown timer. If the timer reaches zero, you will hear a 10-second alarm, and the Countdown timer will clear. If you press Backspace-

enter while the alarm is sounding, the alarm will stop and your timer will clear, and will be ready to accept a new time. If you press tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) again anywhere in the count down timer, the stopwatch will be ready. If you want to exit the Stopwatch or Countdown timer, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) anywhere within the Stopwatch or Countdown timer, and you will return to the Stopwatch menu. 17.9 Terminal for Screen reader The Terminal for screen reader function allows the Braille Sense U2 to be used as a Braille display when hooked up to a computer that uses a compatible screen reader such as Window-Eyes or Supernova Window-

Eyes, Supernova or JAWS. Before using this function, make sure that the Braille Sense U2 is connected to your personal computer via a Bluetooth serial or to the USB client port. To turn on this function, go to the Utilities menu, and press Enter. Then, press Space-4, until you hear Terminal for screen reader. Then, press Enter. If you activate terminal for screen reader, you will see the list of connection methods. In the list, you will see Bluetooth serial port and USB port. Press Space-1 or Space-4 until you reach what you want to select. If you have selected one, press Enter and you will hear terminal mode. The Braille Sense U2 will no longer say anything, as it is now simply acting as a Braille display for your computer. If you fail to connect, you will be returned to the list of connection methods. Followings are instructions for paring with I-Phone. 1. Set up on the Braille Sense U2:

1) Turn Bluetooth on using Backspace with 3-4-5-6. 2) Execute Terminal for Screen reader on the Utilities menu. 3) Choose "Bluetooth Serial port" and then pres Enter. 4) Braille Sense U2 will display "Terminal Mode"

2. Set up on the I-Phone:

1) Go to Settings/General/Accessibility/VoiceOver/Braille. 2) If Bluetooth is not trned on the I-Phone, it will prompt you to do this. Then, I-Phone will search for devices. 3) If everything goes to plan, it will find the Braille Sense U2. 4) Double tap on the I-Phone. 5) You will be asked for a pin code. 6) Enter any 4 number code of your choosing. 7) Double tap the "Pair" button. The Braille Sense U2 will ask for a pin code. Enter the same pin code and press Enter. If all goes to plan, you should be paired. To exit the Terminal for Screen reader press the Backspace-Space-z

(dots 1-3-5-6). 17.10 Setup Internet The Setup internet function is used to set up your IP configuration. In Setup internet, you will find LAN, Wireless LAN, Modem, ADSL, and Bluetooth DUN. You can move between the four items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. The LAN setup should be used if you are connecting to the Internet via a network or router. The Modem setup should be used if you are connecting to the Internet via a dial-up modem. The ADSL setup should be used if you are connecting to the Internet via a DSL modem. To connect to the Internet via a wireless network, use the Wireless LAN function. If you want to activate Setup internet, press Enter on Setup internet in the Utilities menu, or press I (dots 2-4) in the Utilities menu. You can move through the Utilities menu items with Space-1 or Space-4. If you want to access to Internet with the Braille Sense U2, you must set the Internet settings at Setup internet that is one of the submenus of Utilities menu. Or, if the PC in which the Active Sync program is installed is connected to Internet and the Braille Sense U2 is connected to that PC, then you can connect the Braille Sense U2 to Internet. The functions of this menu are explained in greater detail in the following sections. 17.10.1 LAN Setup If you are going to set up a LAN, you should first connect a LAN cable to the Braille Sense U2. In this setup, you can decide whether you will use the automatic or manual setup to setup your IP configuration. If you want to set it up automatically, press Enter on Setup IP: Automatic. Then, it will be set up automatically. For the automatic setup, your host server should provide DHCP service (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If you want to set up your IP configuration manually, move to Manual by pressing Space-1 from the setup IP: Automatic, and press Enter. Then, you will find the following: IP, Subnet mask, Gateway, and Primary DNS. These settings require specific information. Please contact your Internet service provider for the right information. To type in the information, you should use computer Braille, and after typing in the information, you can move to the next item by pressing Space-4. Finally after completing the Primary DNS, press Enter. Then, you will see the message setting completed. You will be returned to Setup internet with your information saved. You can then use E-mail, MSN messenger or the Web browser. 17.10.2 Setup Wireless LAN If you want to connect to a wireless network, you should use the setup wireless LAN function. In order to use the setup wireless LAN function, you must change the wireless option to On in the option menu. Go to the Utilities menu that is located in the program menu by pressing F1, and then press Space-4 repeatedly to move to the Utility menu. Then, press Enter on Utilities. Next, move to Setup internet by pressing Space-1 or Space-4, and then press Enter on Setup internet. And then press Enter on Wireless LAN. The Wireless LAN dialog box consists of the access point list, Advanced button and Close button. You can move between these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). If you do not have a wireless LAN turned on, you will hear no item when you press Enter on Wireless LAN. When you first open the Wireless LAN dialog box, the focus is on the access point list. The list has the information of wireless access points which is searched. Access point list will let you know the access point name, encryption, and sensitivity of each item. (Ex: linksys, encryption: WEP, sensitivity: good.) If there is more than one access point in the list, you can move between them by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. Move to the access point that you want to connect to. And press Enter. And then you will hear the Connecting with (access point name) message and connecting sound. If you are using network key in Access Point when you press Enter, Network key edit box will be displayed. In edit box, you have to input the encrypted key and press Enter. And if your settings are correct, then you will hear Completed setting profile with connecting sound. The Advanced common dialog box is used to modify the added profile or add new profile or check the existed profile. If you press Enter on the Advanced button while wireless LAN turned off, no item will be displayed. Pressing Enter on the advanced button, while wireless LAN turned on. The Advanced dialog box has 5 controls. You can navigate among these controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-

tab (Space-1-2). The Advanced common dialog box contains profile list, Connect button, Add common dialog button, Remove button, Properties common dialog button and Close button controls. 1. profile list: Here you will see the profile lists that you have added. You can move through the list by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. 2. Connect button: It tries to connect the wireless using the selected profile by pressing the button. 3. Add common dialog button: You can add a profile here. Add common dialog has the 10 controls. 1) Setup IP: Automatic combo box: You can switch between automatic and manual by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If you select Manual, you will need to enter your IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address, and DNS IP address by yourself. You can move between these computer edit boxes by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. Press tab (Space-4-5) to move to the next control. 2) Network name (SSID) computer edit box: The edit box is empty and you can type in network name you prefer. 3) Network mode combo box: Here you can select between Infrastructure, and 802.11 ad-hoc mode by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 4) Network authentication mode combo box: Here you can select between Open, Shared, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. 5) Data encryption combo box: Here you can select the data encryption method by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. If you select Open or Shared in network authentication mode, you can choose between Disable and WEP. And if you select WPA-

PSK or WPA2-PSK in network authentication mode, either AES or TKIP can be selected in the Data encryption combo box. 6) The key is provided automatically check box: If the access point does not provide a key for users automatically, uncheck this check box by pressing Space. The default is that the check box is checked. 7) Network key computer edit box: This is a computer edit box to type the network key if the key is not provided automatically. 8) Key index edit box: This is an edit box to type the key number of the wireless access point that matches the network key input. 9) Confirm button: Pressing this button applies the changes. 10) Cancel button: You can press this button to cancel the setup. Note:

1) If Data encryption has been set as disabled, press Tab

(Space-4-5) and it will directly move to the Confirm button. 2) Network key and Key index will be displayed only if you uncheck the The key is provided automatically. 4. Remove button: If you want to delete a profile item in the profile list, select the profile item you wish to delete, and then press r (dots 1-2-

3-5) or go to the Remove button by pressing tab (Space-4-5), and then press Enter on Remove button. 5. Properties common dialog button: If you want to get information about a selected profile item in the profile list, press Enter on the Properties common dialog button after focusing on a profile item by using tab (Space-4-5). You can reconfirm the added information in each item. You can modify an item here directly. In order to exit from Advance dialog box, you can press Space-e(dots 1-5) or Space-z(dots 1-3-5-6). 17.10.3 Modem & Bluetooth DUN setup If you are going to set up the Braille Sense U2 to connect to the Internet via a modem, you should first put in a USB 3G modem card into the USB port, and connect a phone line to the modem on the USB 3G mode. Then, activate Setup internet in the Utilities menu. After you have activated Setup internet, move to the modem by pressing Space-1 or Space-4, and then press Enter. If you wish to connect to Mobile network using Bluetooth DUN, you can move to Setup internet in the Utilities menu and select Bluetooth DUN and enter on it. In this case, you dont need to insert USB 3G modem card into the Braille Sense U2 and its user interface is same as setting up connection using the modem. The modem setup contains the following: connect list, Default, Add, Modify, Delete, and Close. You can move between these by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). Within each item, you can move by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. The connect list has added connection names. You can move between these by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. The Default is to set to the default connection name in the Internet setup. If you want to choose a connection as the default, go to the connect list, and move to Default by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Then, press Enter. Add is a dialog box where you can set up the environment regarding the connect group names. It has connect name list, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between these by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The connect name list has Connect name, Connect number, ID, Password, and Modem speed. In Connect name, you can type in the host name to connect with, and in the Connect number, you can type in the number of the host. Here you can type in numbers and commas (,) only. You can type in numbers using computer Braille. In ID and Password, use computer Braille to type the ID and password that are required by the host server. In case of Bluetooth DUN, you can make the connection to Mobile network without any password according to Mobile server. In the Modem speed, select one from the list by pressing Backspace or Space. After completing each item, you can move to the next item by pressing tab (Space-4-5). Finally, with Modem speed completed, you can press Enter to save your registration. Before saving it, you can cancel your choices by moving to Cancel by pressing tab (Space-4-

5), and press Enter on it. Modify is used to modify the connect group. You can do this by moving to what you want to select in the connect list, and then press Enter. You can also press tab (Space-4-5) to locate Modify. Otherwise, you can press Enter-m (1-3-4) on the Connect name in the connect list directly. Modify has the same items as Add, and you use the menus in the same way. In Delete, if you want to delete an item, you can move to what you want to delete in the connect list, and then press Enter on delete. Use tab (Space-4-5) to move between the items. Or, you can delete an item by pressing Space-d (dots 1-4-5) on what you want to delete in the connect list. If you want to exit the Modem setup, you can press Space-z (dots 1-3-

5-6), or you can press Enter on Close by moving to it by pressing tab (Space-4-5). 17.10.4 ADSL Setup If you want to connect the Braille Sense U2 to the Internet via a DSL connection, you should use the ADSL setup. First, you should plug in a LAN cable to the Braille Sense U2s LAN port. If you press Enter on Setup internet, you will first see CB LAN 1/5. Then, go to ADSL by pressing Space-4 repeatedly. Press Enter on ADSL. It contains the following controls: connect list, default, add, modify, delete, and close. You can move between the controls by pressing tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). Within each control, you can move item by item by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. In the connect list, you will see the added connect names. Select one by pressing Enter on it. In Default, you can make one of the added connect names the default connection. If you make a connection the default connection, that will be the connection that is used to connect to the Internet first. In Add, you can manage the connect names in the list. It has three controls: edit field, a Confirm button, and a Cancel button. You can move between the three controls by pressing tab (Space-4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The edit field contains the following:

Connect name, ID, and Password. You can move between the controls by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. When in the Connect name control, type in the server host name. In ID and Password, you can type in what you want in ASCII. After completed filling in the appropriate information, press Enter or press Enter on Confirm after pressing tab (Space-4-5) moving. To cancel everything that has been typed in to the edit field, go to Cancel, and press Enter. In Modify, you can modify a connect name. If you want to modify a connection in the connect list, select the connect name you want to modify in the list. Then, press Enter on Modify. Or, after you have selected the connect name, press Enter-m (dots 1-3-4). Modify contains the same items as Add, and the text is typed in the same way. Using Delete, you can delete selected connect names. If you want to delete a connect name in the connect list, select the connect name you want to delete in the list, and then press Enter on delete. Or, after you have selected the connect name, press Space-d (dots 1-4-5). If you want to exit the ADSL setup, press Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6), or press Enter on Close. 17.11 Display Network Status Using this program, you can check if the Braille Sense U2 is currently connected to the Internet. This program provides you with the information about the current connection type, the current IP of the unit, subnet mask, gateway, and MAC address. To run this program, press Enter on Display Network Status, or press n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Utilities menu. If you start the program, a list of information about the connection type and address will be displayed. If you press tab (Space-

4-5), the Braille Sense U2 will display a Renew button. If you press tab (Space-4-5) again, exit will be displayed. If you press shift-tab

(Space-1-2), the Braille Sense U2 will move between these elements in the opposite direction. The first item in the information list (status) shows if the Braille Sense U2 is currently connected to the Internet

(online/offline), and what the current connection type is (LAN, Modem, ADSL, or Wireless LAN). The next item is the current IP address, followed by Subnet mask, and then Gateway, and finally MAC address. You can move between these items by pressing Space-4 or Space-1. If the Braille Sense U2 is not currently connected to the Internet, the status information shows that the Braille Sense U2 is offline. If you press Enter on the Renew button, it tries to connect to Internet using the parameters specified in Setup internet once again, and displays on/offline status. To end this program, press Space-z (dots 1-

3-5-6) at any time in the program. Or pressing Enter on the exit button will close the program too. You can also press Space-n (dots 1-

3-4-5) while you are in the program menu to open network status. 17.12 Display Power Status You can activate Display power status function by pressing b or press Enter on the Display power status in the Utilities menu. You can move to it by pressing Space-4 or Space-1 in the Utilities menu. Anywhere in the Braille Sense U2, you can activate this function by pressing Space-1-6. In Display power status, you can check two kinds of information regarding the Braille Sense U2's power. It will let you know the recharging percentage and if the Braille Sense U2 is using the AC adapter or USB cable or the battery. If you activate this function, you will see xx% charged, using battery, AC power or USB power. After checking it, you can exit by pressing Space-z (1-3-5-6), which will return you to the menu. 17.13 Backup/Restore Personalized settings Backup/Restore Personalized settings is a program where you can backup/restore the option settings for each program in the Braille Sense U2 all at once. This program can be found in the Utilities menu. You can run this program by pressing k (dots 1-3) in the Utilities menu. If you run this program, a dialog box will be opened. This dialog box contains: program option check box list, Select all button (Enter-a

(dot 1)), Backup button (Enter-u (dots 1-3-6)), Restore button (Enter-r

(dots 1-2-3-5)), and Cancel button. You can move between the check boxes in the program option check box list, by pressing Space-1 or Space-4. You can move between these controls by pressing tab

(Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2). The program option check box list contains Options settings, File manager options, Word processor options, Address manager options, Schedule manager options, Media player options, Web browser options, E-mail options, Bluetooth manager options, MSN messenger options and Database manager options. In this list, you move to the program option and check it by pressing Space. If you want to uncheck it you can do so by pressing Space again. After you select all the options you want to backup or restore, press Enter on the Backup or Restore button. If you want to select all of the programs in the list, press Enter on the Select all button. If you press Enter on Backup or Restore button, the dialog box will be closed. If you press a Backup button, it lets you see a list in which you can select a path where to store a backup file. It shows up flashdisk as default values. Here you move to disk or folder where you want to store a file, by using navigation key in a File manager program. And you select a folder or disk by pressing Space, press Enter, it turns up that a backup file is stored in selected folder. Each one of these options has its own backup file. This means that when you backup each of the 5 options, it will generate 5 backup files. If you need to store a backup file in a root of disk, refer to this way. When it comes out a name of disk, you press Enter after selecting a disk by pressing Space. If you press a Restore button, it lets you see a list in which you can select a path where to restore a backup file. A way how to move or select a folder or disk is the same as Backup. If you select a folder that is not back upped, you can be seen a message which tells that there is no backup option file. If you cold reset your Braille Sense U2, or its battery is fully discharged, the main option settings and settings for each program will be lost, and initialized to the default values. If you backup options using this program right before you cold reset, you can restore the option settings you set previously. 17.14Menu manager Using the Menu manager, on the Braille Sense U2, you can manage the programs that you want to display or not. Following programs can be set in the Menu manager. 1) Sense Dice Game 2) Sense Brain Game 3) Twitter 4) Google Talk 5) MSN Messenger. To execute the Menu manager, follow these steps below.

(1) Press U (dots1-3-6) or Enter on the Utilities.

(2) Press the short cut key, m (dots 1-3-4) or Enter on the Menu manager.

(3) The dialog box of the Menu manager will be displayed. The dialog box of the Menu manager consists of following items. 1) The 5 lists of the Braille Sense U2 program 2) Confirm button 3) Cancel button To navigate between each program, you need to press Space-1 or Space-4. And pressing Tab (Space-4-5) or Shift-tab (Space-1-2) to navigate between Confirm and Cancel button. To hide unused program, follow these steps below.

(1) When executing Menu manager, the list of the Braille Sense U2 program will be displayed.

(2) Pressing Space-1 or Space-4 to move to the program that you want to hide and press the Space to change to off.

(3) When checking all the programs as off, you need to press Enter. Or pressing Tab (Space-4-5) to move to Confirm and press Enter.

(4) Setting is complete. Press the Reset button which is located at the back of the Braille Sense U2.

(5) And when navigating between each program, off program will not be displayed. If you want to use the program again, execute the Menu manager and press the Space to change to on. And press the Reset button to reset the Braille Sense U2. When the Braille Sense U2 reboots itself, the program will be displayed. 17.15 Format To use the Braille Sense U2, you may need to format. This program can be found in the Utilities menu. You can execute this program by pressing f in the Utilities menu. When you format Braille Sense U2, all information is erased. Therefore, before you format Braille Sense U2, you are advised to backup important data. 17.15.1 Formatting the disk To execute format the disk, two methods are discussed separately below. First, you can format the disk in Utilities program. 1) Go to the Format in Utilities program. 2) Pressing Enter, it will be focused in the Disk: flashdisk. 3) Press Enter 4) Format flashdisk memory? Yes will appear on the Braille display. 5) Press Enter 6) display. All data will be lost. Continue? Yes will appear on the Braille 7) Now formatting flashdisk memory. will appear on the Braille display and format is started. 8) After you have completed the format, return to the Disk list. If you want to cancel the format, press Space, press Enter on No in step 4) or 6). Also, Format of SD and USB memory is available in the same method. If you inserted the SD card or USB memory in SD card slot or USB port, SD card and USB memory will be listed on Disk list. Any of the disks can be moved by using the up and down arrows. As above, you can format in the same process. Second, you can format the disk in program menu. 1) Press Space-1-2-3 in program menu. 2) While holding down Space-1-2-3, quickly press and release the 3) Continue pressing Space-1-2-3 until you hear the disk 4) After you have completed the format, return to the File reset button. formatting. manager program. 17.16 Set Sleep Timer You can set Sleep Timer in Braille Sense U2. The sleep timer will turn the unit off at a specified time regardless of what you are doing. Please follow these steps;

1) Execute Utilities. 2) Press Space-1 or Space-4, move to Sleep timer. 3) Press Enter on the Sleep timer. 4) Or press Space-j (dots 2-4-5), regardless of location. 5) It will find the edit box asking Sleep timer: 0. 6) Enter the number of minutes for the sleep timer. Enter the number range from 0 to 90. 7) Press Enter. Once the sleep timer is set, even if the device is active, it will power off. If you set the sleep timer for 5 minutes and press Space-J (dots 2-4-

5) after 2 minutes, you will find 3 in edit box. It means the power will be turned off after 3 minutes. 17.17 Upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware If you activate this function, you can update the Braille Sense U2 either through an Internet connection or from a disk that contains the upgrade file. If you decide to upgrade using an Internet connection, you must first complete the Setup internet function. If you update the Braille Sense U2, all of the settings will be returned to their default status. Data in the flashdisk will be protected. However, we recommend that you backup your files before updating the Braille Sense U2 Firmware. While updating, you cannot cancel the update. Note that you must not press the reset button while updating, and you should avoid power failure. We recommend that you do not touch the Braille Sense U2 while it is updating. It may take up to 30 minutes to update the Braille Sense U2, though it depends on the speed of your Internet connection. On completing the setup, the Braille Sense U2 will reboot again to finish the update. 17.17.1 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware Using the Internet To upgrade the Braille Sense U2 Firmware via the Internet, complete the following steps:

1) Make sure an Internet connection is available. Press Enter on Upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware in the Utilities menu. Then, Upgrade: Online will appear. 2) Now, press Enter on Upgrade: Online. The Braille Sense U2 will connect to the HIMS server, and your current software version will be compared to the HIMS server version. You will then be asked if you want to continue to upgrade. 3) If you press Enter on No, the upgrade will be cancelled. Press Space to toggle between Yes and No. If you press Enter on Yes, the Braille Sense U2 will download the upgrade file, the upgrade will stop. If the upgrade fails, it will give you the message Internet connection is not available. Check your cable and try again. To try the upgrade again, press Space-z (1-3-5-6) to cancel, and then activate upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware again. If the connection is successful, the updated files will be downloaded, and the Braille Sense U2 will start upgrading. If you do not have enough memory available on the flashdisk, the Braille Sense U2 will be unable to update until you make room for the upgrade files by deleting any unnecessary files from the Braille Sense U2. 4) After downloading the upgrade file, Braille Sense U2 will automatically start the upgrading process. Please remember that you must not do anything to the Braille Sense U2 until the upgrade is complete. When the upgrade is complete, you will be returned to the program menu, and you will hear File manager. 5) After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the software version by pressing Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) while you are in the program menu. 17.17.2 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware from a Disk To upgrade the Braille Sense U2 Firmware from a disk, complete the following steps:

1) Connect a disk (such as a compact flash card, SD card or USB memory stick) to the Braille Sense U2. The disk must have the upgrade file stored on it. Then, press Enter on Upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware. 2) Then, Upgrade: Online will appear. Press Space-4 to go to the Upgrade: Offline. Then, press Enter. Then, you will see the disk list. Press Space-4 repeatedly to go to the disk that contains the upgrade file. Then, press Enter. 3) You will then be asked if you want to continue to upgrade. If you press Enter on No, the upgrade will be cancelled. Press Space to toggle between Yes and No. If you press Enter on Yes, the Braille Sense U2 will start upgrading. This step will not appear when your current software version is not the latest version. 4) The Braille Sense U2 will automatically start the upgrading process. Please remember that you must not do anything to the Braille Sense U2 until the upgrade is complete. When the upgrade is complete, you will be returned to the program menu, and you will hear File manager. 5) After you have completed the upgrade, you should check the software version by pressing Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) while you are in the program menu. 17.18 Hot Keys for Utilities Calculator: c (dots 1-4) Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Delete numbers or operators: Backspace General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) PLUS: dots 3-4-6 Minus: dots 3-6 Division: dots 3-4 Multiplication: dots 1-6 Percent: dots 1-4-6 Power: Backspace-4-5 Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Decimal Point: dots 4-6 Left Parenthesis: dots 1-2-3-5-6 Right Parenthesis: dots 2-3-4-5-6 PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Memory Function:

Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Delete all saved items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4) Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5) Cosine: Enter-i (dots 2-4), i (dots 2-4) Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5) Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5) Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5) Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5) Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5) Copy to Clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Setting time and date: t (dots 2-3-4-5) Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 Move to 1 hour after: Space-4 Move to 1 hour before: Space-1 Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5 Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2 Move to 1 minute after: Space-6 Move to 1 minute before: Space-3 Switch Between a.m. and p.m.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Calendar: l (dots 1-2-3) Move items Move to the previous item: Tab (Space-4-5) Move to the next item: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move key for date in calendar Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 Pronunciation dictionary: p (dots 1-2-3-4) Move to the previous control: Tab (Space-4-5) Move to the next control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move to the previous item in entry: Space-1 Move to the next item in entry: Space-4 Add word: Space-i (dots 2-4) Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Stopwatch: w (dots 2-4-5-6) Stopwatch start, pause, restart: enter Check the elapsed time: Backspace Stop Braille display: Space-F2 Restart Braille display: Space-F2 Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: tab (Space-4-5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) Count down timer pause or restart: enter Count down timer Initialize: Backspace Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Setup internet: i (dots 2-4) Display power status: Space-1-6 Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Backup/Restore Personalized settings: k (dots 1-3) Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Move to next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Format: Space-1-2-3 Set Sleep Timer: Space-j (dots 2-4-5) Upgrade Braille Sense U2 Firmware: u (dots 1-3-6) Check download information: Space-i (dots 2-4) Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 18. Using the help menu The help section consists of various text files that will allow you to read about the many functions of the Braille Sense U2. You will find the following help sections:

1. Help overview 2. Basic functions help 3. File manager help 4. Word processor help 5. Address manager help 6. Schedule manager help 7. Email help 8. Media player help 9. FM Radio help 10. Web browser help 11. Daisy player help 12. Bluetooth manager help 13. Database manager help 14. Extras help 15. Social Networking help 16. Utilities help 17. Using the help menu 18. Using ActiveSync 19. Command summary 20. Command summary for USB keyboard 21. Troubleshooting guide 22. Accessories 23. Information about the Braille Sense U2 The section, Help overview, gives an entire overview of the Braille Sense U2. This section covers all of the functions of the Braille Sense U2. To access the help file, press F1 to go to the program menu, and use Space-4 repeatedly until you find Help. Then, press Enter on Help. Then, press Enter on Help overview. The navigation keys are the same as in the word processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see section 19.3.2. When you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense U2, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4), type the text you wish to find, and then press Enter. You can find the next occurrence of the particular text that you have previously searched for by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). The section, Basic functions help, gives an explanation of the Global options functions and common function, and how to use them. To access the help file, press F1 to go to the program menu, and use Space-4 repeatedly until you find Help. Then, press Enter on Help. Then, press Enter on Basic functions help. The navigation keys are the same as in the word processor. For a list of the navigation keys, please see section 19.3.2. Remember that when you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense U2, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4), type the text you wish to find, and then press Enter. You can find the next occurrence of the particular text that you have previously searched for by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). The remaining sections cover each of the functions of the Braille Sense U2 in detail. To access these help files, press F1 to go to the program menu, and use Space-4 repeatedly until you find Help. Then, press Enter on Help. Then, press Enter on the section that you want to read. The navigation keys are the same as in the word processor. Remember that when you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense U2, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing Space-f

(dots 1-2-4), type the text you wish to find, and then press Enter. Also, you can find the next occurrence of the particular text that you have previously searched for by pressing Enter-f (dots 1-2-4). To access this section, press F1 to go to the program menu, and use Space-4 repeatedly until you find Help. Then, press Enter on Help. Then, press Enter on Command summary. The navigation keys are the same as in the word processor. Remember that when you are reading the manual on the Braille Sense U2, you can search for text in the various sections by pressing Space-f (dots 1-2-4), type the text you wish to find, and then press Enter. You can find the next occurrence of the particular text that you have typed previously by pressing Enter-f

(dots 1-2-4). The Information about the Braille Sense U2 section gives the copyright and version of the Braille Sense U2, as well as the version of Windows CE that the Braille Sense U2 is using. To access Information about the Braille Sense U2 section, press F1 to go to the program menu, and use Space-4 repeatedly until you find Help. Then, press Enter on Help. Then, press Enter on Information about the Braille Sense U2. If you want to save the information about the Braille Sense U2, press Enter on Information about the Braille Sense U2 of Help and press tab (Space-4-5 or F3). Braille Sense U2 will display Save button. You press Enter on this button. Then Braille Sense U2 will display Successfully saved. and return to Save button. The saving file is named bs-information.txt. And this file is stored in flashdisk. 19. Using ActiveSync 19.1 What is ActiveSync?

ActiveSync is a program that allows mobile devices to connect to a personal computer. This program enables file transfers from a personal computer to a mobile device and vise versa. Also this program is able to synchronize the Braille Sense U2 with Microsoft Outlook. ActiveSync is not shipped with the Braille Sense U2. If you would like to use ActiveSync, you will have to download it from the Internet on to your personal computer. 19.2 Connecting the Braille Sense U2 to a PC Before connecting the Braille Sense U2 to your personal computer for the first time, make sure that the Braille Sense U2 is turned off. Once you have ActiveSync installed, you will need to plug a USB cable in to the USB OTG port on the right panel of the Braille Sense U2. Then, plug the other end of the USB cable in to a USB port on your personal computer. Now, turn on the Braille Sense U2. You will hear several sounds. First, on the Braille Sense U2, you will hear chimes. Then, you will hear a ding-dong sound on your computer, which lets you know the computer is connected properly to the Braille Sense U2. You will again hear chimes on the Braille Sense U2, and then on your computer. 19.3 Setting up the Braille Sense U2 in the ActiveSync Program After you have turned on the Braille Sense U2, and you have heard all of the sounds, a screen will come up on your computer that has the heading, Set Up a Partnership. You have a Yes option and a No option on this screen. If you select Yes on this screen, the next time you connect the Braille Sense U2 to your computer, you will be able to have it synchronize with Microsoft Outlook automatically. If you select No, the Set Up a Partnership screen will come up every time you connect the Braille Sense U2 to your computer. If you want to be able to synchronize the Braille Sense U2 with Microsoft Outlook, select Yes, and then press the next button. Then, you will be asked to select a name that you want to call the mobile device. You can only use the following characters: _, A-Z, or 0-9. You cannot use spaces. Once you have entered an appropriate name, press next. Then, a list of functions will appear on your computer. Each function has a check box located next to it. Make sure that only the Contacts check box (that corresponds with Microsoft Outlook) is checked. Then, press next. Then, the next dialog box that appears will say, setup complete. Then, press finish. ActiveSync will then look for changes, and synchronize with Microsoft Outlook. For more information on how to use ActiveSync or Microsoft Outlook, please visit www.microsoft.com. 19.4 Transferring Files to the Braille Sense U2 Via ActiveSync In order to transfer files to the Braille Sense U2 from your computer, you will first need to find the file(s) on your PC that you want to transfer. Once you have found the file(s) that you want to transfer, make sure the files have been selected by using the spacebar. After you have selected the file(s), you need to press ctrl-c on your PC to copy the file(s). Then, go to the desktop on your computer by pressing Windows-

key-d. Press the letter m until you find My computer. Press Enter on My computer. Then, press the letter m until you hear mobile device, and press Enter. The mobile device is the Braille Sense U2. After you have opened mobile device, you will enter in to the file list on the Braille Sense U2. One of the items in the list is my computer. Press the letter m until you hear my computer, and press Enter. Then, another file list will open. In this list, you will find the folder called flashdisk. This is the same flashdisk that you hear under file manager. Press f until you hear flashdisk, and then press Enter. You will notice that all of the folders that you find in the flashdisk under file manager are located here. You can paste the file(s) here directly by pressing ctrl-v, or you can paste the file(s) in to one of the folders by pressing enter on one of the folders, and then pressing ctrl-v to paste the file(s). If you want to copy folders from the Braille Sense U2 to your PC via ActiveSync, follow the same steps; except, you will need to copy files from the Braille Sense U2, and paste the file(s) to your PC in the directory where you want to store the file(s). 20. Command Summary 20.1 Common Combination Keys Call up the program menu: F1 Run the individual program in the program menu F1-shortcut key

(varies for each program) Call up the Task Name list: F1-F4 Switch to previous program: Space-F2-F3 Switch to next program: F2-F3 Call up the menu in the individual program: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Escape: Space-e (Space-1-5) or F4 Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or F3-F4) Move to the previous character: Space-3 Move to the next character: Space-6 Move to the previous line/item: Space-1 Move to the next line/item: Space-4 Move to the beginning of line/item: Home key (Space-1-3 or F2-up scroll button) Move to the end of line/item: End key (Space-4-6 or F3-down scroll button) Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-

3 or F1-F2-up scroll button) Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-

5-6 or F3-F4-down scroll button) Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 32-item group: Page up (space 1-2-6 or F1-F2) Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 32-item group: Page down (space 3-4-5 or F3-F4) Scroll left: Up scroll button Scroll right: Down scroll button Move the cursor to each cell or move to an item: The corresponding cursor routing key Capital sign: Space-u (dots 1-3-6) Read the current item again: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Say current time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Display power status: Space-1-6 Call up the Global options: Space-o (dots 1-3-5) Online help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5) Check software version: Space-v (dots 1-2-3-6) only in the Braille Sense U2 program menu. Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) in the Braille Sense U2 program menu Increase the voice volume: Backspace-F4 Decrease the voice volume: Backspace-F1 Increase the voice rate: Space-F4 Decrease the voice rate: Space-F1 Increase the voice pitch: Enter-F4 Decrease the voice pitch: Enter-F1 One-handed mode on: hold down F3 while turning on. One-handed mode off: hold down F4 while turning on. Bluetooth on/off: Backspace-3-4-5-6 Wireless LAN on/off: Backspace-1-4-5-6 Ethernet port on/off: Backspace-1-5-6 Scroll voice on/off: F3-up scroll button Selecting Braille cursor: F4-up scroll button Selection control information: F2-down scroll button Eight dot mode on/off: F1-down scroll button Change the Language: Enter-Backspace -v (dots 1-2-3-6) 20.2 File Manager 20.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) 20.2.2 Navigation Keys for the File List Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Space-5-6 Move between file list and address window: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) /

shift-tab (Space-1-2 or F3-F4) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Fast move to the top level disk: Space-1-2-5-6 20.2.3 Item (folder or File) Selection Key Select item by item: Space Continuous selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) 20.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Open with: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Zip: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Unzip: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Send: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Rename: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) File conversion: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Sort files by: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Set file info: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Display only files of type: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Search file: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Setup Network connection: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Cancel setting of Network connection: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Sharing a folder with other computer: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) Remove remote folder on network: Backspace-u (dots 1-3-6) Setup sharing security: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) 20.3 Word Processor 20.3.1 Hot Keys for the Commands New document: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Save: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Close current document: Space-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Environment setting: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Add to the clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Clear clipboard: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Delete: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Insert from file: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Insert date: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Insert time: Backspace-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Delete blank lines: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Change insert/overwrite mode: Space-i (dots 2-4) Check spelling: Enter-k (dots 1-3) Check spelling of the current word: Backspace-k (dots 1-3) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Replace: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Go to location: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Go to previous page: Space-1-2-6 or F1-F2 Go to next page: Space-3-4-5 or F3-F4 Set Mark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Go to the mark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5) Go to previous document: Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Go to next document: Shift-tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Read selected text: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Read beginning of selected text: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Auto scroll: up-down scroll buttons Read status: Space-3-4 Braille document layout: Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Braille paragraph layout: Backspace-1-2-4-6 General document layout: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) General paragraph layout: Backspace-2-3-4-6 20.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys Move to previous character: Space-3 Move to next character: Space-6 Move to previous word: Space-2 Move to next word: Space-5 Move to the beginning of the line: Home (Space-1-3) Move to the end of the line: End (Space-4-6) Move to previous line: Up arrow (Space-1) or up scroll button Move to next line: Down arrow (Space-4) or down scroll button Move to previous paragraph: Space-2-3 Move to next paragraph: Space-5-6 Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) Read current paragraph: Space-2-3-5-6 Read current line: Space-1-4 Read current word: Space-2-5 Read current character: Space-3-6 Delete current paragraph: Backspace-1-3-4-6 Delete current line: BackSpace-1-4 Delete current word: BackSpace-2-5 Delete current character: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Confirm current cursor position: Space-1-5-6 Set view format character: Space-1-4-6 Set reading unit: Space-2-4-6 Set read only: Space-3-4-6 Set reading mode: Space-1-2-4-6 20.4 Address Manager 20.4.1 Move keys for adding an address or in the menu Move to the previous field or menu item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next field or menu item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3) Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6) 20.4.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List Move to the previous field: Space-2 Move to the next field: Space-5 Move to the first field: Home (Space-1-3) Move to the last field: End (Space-4-6) Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 20.4.3 Hot keys for the Commands Add address: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Find address: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Edit address: Enter-m (dots1-3-4) Delete address: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Save as a file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Print address: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Backup address list: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore address list: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Setting add/searching address fields: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Import from CSV: Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Export to CSV: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) 20.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys Tab: Space-4-5 or F3 Shift-tab: Space-1-2 or Space-F3 Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) or F4 Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.5 Schedule Manager 20.5.1 Hot keys for the commands Move to the next field: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous field: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Add schedule: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Search schedule: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Modify schedule: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete schedule: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Backup schedule: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore schedule: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Set backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Alarm option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Save schedule as file: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Print schedule: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) 20.5.2 Move Keys in the Search Result List 1) Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next appointment in the same day: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the first appointment in the same day: Space-1-3 Move to the last appointment in the same day: Space-4-6 2) Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments registered Move to the previous schedule: Space-2 Move to the next schedule: Space-5 Move to the first schedule: Space-2-3 or Space-1-2-3 Move to the last schedule: Space-5-6 or Space-4-5-6 20.6 E-mail 20.6.1 Hot keys that are used in the inbox Call accounts manager: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Check for New Mail: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Write New Message: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Reply: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Reply all: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Forward: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Call up set path: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Call up set option: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Call up set spam: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to unread message: Enter-u (dots 1-3-4) Move to mailbox: Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy to Mailbox: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Add a sender to the address list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) (This is valid only at the from item of the inbox) Delete received e-mail: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) (It is valid only at the Subject and date item in the inbox) Save the received e-mail as text file: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Print the received e-mail: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.6.2 Hot keys for Sending E-Mail Including Reply, Forward, and Save in the Mail Outbox Search address list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Attach file: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Send e-mail: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Save in mail outbox: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Cancel: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cancel and exit from e-mail program: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.6.3 Hot Keys for Reading E-Mails or Writing an E-Mail Message Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Copy to the clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Cut to the clipboard: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) (This is not available when you are reading e-mail in the inbox) Paste from the clipboard: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) (This is not available when you are reading e-mail in the inbox) Delete selection and delete a letter: Space-d (dots 1-2) (It is not valid when you are reading e-mail in the inbox) Cancel block: Space-e (dots 1-5) 20.7 Media Player 20.7.1 Hot keys for commands Open file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Open folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Add file: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Add folder: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Save play list: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Save as play list: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Delete item: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Play: Enter, Play button Pause/continue: Space, Play button Stop: Backspace, Stop button Previous track: Dot 3, previous button Next track: Dot 6, next button 5th previous track: Dots 2-3 5th next track: Dots 5-6 First track: Dots 1-3 Last track: Dots 4-6 Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button Speed up: Dots 3-4-5 Slow down: Dots 1-2-6 Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5 Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4 Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1 Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5), Record button Record: Record button Pause/continue recording: Space, Record button Play: Play button Pause/continue play: Space, Play button Stop: Backspace, Stop button Delete play list during stop: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Set bookmark: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete bookmark: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Jump to bookmark: Enter-j (dots 2-4-5) Go to position: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Set mark: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Move to mark: Backspace-j (dots 2-4-5) Move to previous mark: Backspace-dot 3 Move to next mark: Backspace-dot 6 Delete mark: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5) Mark manager: Backspace-k (dots 1-3) Configuration dialog box: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Playback setting dialog box: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Record setting dialog box: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) Effect setting dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5) 20.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab Move to the next information: Space-4 Move to the previous information: Space-1 Pause when it is play state and play when it is pause state: Space Start playing: Enter Stop playing: Backspace Play the next file: Dot 6 Play the previous file: Dot 3 Play the last file: Dots 4-6 Play the first file: Dots 1-3 Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3 Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button Speed up: Dots 3-4-5 Slow down: Dots 1-2-6 Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5 Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4 Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1 Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5) Move to play list tab: Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Exit media player: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab Move to the next file: Space-4 Move to the previous file: Space-1 Move to the last file: Space-4-6 Move to the first file: Space-1-3 Select/resume current file (while playing, it is used as play/pause):

Space Start selecting files: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Start playing the selected files: Enter Stop playing: Backspace Delete the selected files in the play list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Play the next file: Dot 6 Play the previous file: Dot 3 Play the last file: Dots 4-6 Play the first file: Dots 1-3 Play the fifth file after the current file: Dots 5-6 Play the fifth file before the current file: Dots 2-3 Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button Speed up: Dots 3-4-5 Slow down: Dots 1-2-6 Change time index: dot 2 or dot 5 Move to next position by time index and play: dot 4 Move to previous position by time index and play: dot 1 Open menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) Open help: Space-h (dots 1-2-5) Move to playback information tab : Space-4-5/Space-1-2 Exit media player: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.8 FM Radio Call up the sets dialog box: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Call up the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 Internal speakers on/off: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6) or X (dots 1-3-4-6) Move to next frequency: dot 6 Move to previous frequency: dot 3 Auto previous frequency: dot 2, short press previous button Auto next frequency: dot 5, short press next button Go to frequency: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to previous preset: dot 1, long press previous button Move to next preset: dot 4, long press next button Registry preset: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) or long press record button Delete the preset: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) or long press stop button Call up the record dialog box: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Record start/pause: short press record button Record stop: short press stop button Mute on: short press stop button, space Muto off: short press play button, space Volume up: Space-up scroll button Volume down: Space-down scroll button 20.9 Web Browser 20.9.1 Hot keys for the command Open URL: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Open: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Read from beginning to cursor: Backspace-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Read from cursor to end: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Auto scroll: up scroll button-down scroll button Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Add to clipboard: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Copy URL: Backspace-d (dots 1-4-5) Copy link: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Go to the home page: Backspace-h (dots 1-2-5) Go to the previous page: BackSpace-Space-3 or Backspace-p (dots 1-2-

3-4) Go to the next page: BackSpace-Space-6 or Backspace-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Go to previous heading: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Go to next heading: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Go to previous text: Space-2-4-6 Go to next text: Space-1-2-4-5-6 Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Open the history list: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Space-i (dots 2-

4) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Links list: Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Set current as your home page: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Add to favorites: Backspace-a (dot 1) Favorites list: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Option settings: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) 20.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser Turn up the volume: Space-up scroll button Turn down the volume: Space-down scroll button Play: Play button of the front panel Stop: Stop button of the front panel 20.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5) Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-4 Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Backspace-Space-1 Move to the previous form: Space-1-2-3-4-6 Move to the next form: Space-1-3-4-5-6 Move to the previous table: Space-3-4-5-6 Move to the next table: Space-1-4-5-6 Move to the previous cell: Space-2-3 Move to the next cell: Space-5-6 Move to the upper cell: Space-3-5 Move to the lower cell: Space-2-6 Read current cell: Space-2-3-5-6 Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-3 Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Backspace-5-6 Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Backspace-3-5 Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Backspace-2-6 Check the current position: Space-1-5-6 Move to the previous frame: Space-3-4-6 Move to the next frame: Space-1-4-6 Read the current line: Space-r (dots 1-2-3-5) 20.10 Daisy Player Move to the title list: Space-dots 1-2-5-6 Open daisy file: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Voice setting: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Check the book-info: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Play/Pause: Space Move to the beginning of document: Space-1-3 or Space-1-2-3 Move to the last phrase: Space-4-6 or Space-4-5-6 Increase the speed: dots 3-4-5 Decrease the speed: dots 1-2-6 Increase the volume: Space-up scroll button Decrease the volume: Space-down scroll button Move to the next phrase: dot 6 or short press next button Move to the previous phrase: dot 3 or short press previous button Move to the next fifty phrase: dot 4 Move to the previous fifty phrase: dot 1 Move to the next page: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous page: Space-1-2-6 Go to the page: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) Move up: dot 2 Move down: dot 5 Set To Prior Level: dots 2-3 Set To Next Level: dots 5-6 Move to the next heading: Space-5 or long press next button Move to the previous heading: Space-2 or long press previous button Move to the last heading: Space-5-6 Move to the first heading: Space-2-3 Check the currently-reading level and heading: Enter-w (dots 2-4-5-6) Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5 Find heading: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to Specific Heading: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Set mark at current position: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Move to the next mark: Space-dot 6 Move to the previous mark: Space-dot 3 Delete mark: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 20.11 Bluetooth Manager Scanning Bluetooth device: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Connecting device: enter in the device name Connecting service: enter in the service name Disconnect the service in Bluetooth service list: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace Remove device setting in Bluetooth device list: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 1. FTP service Open local folder: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Send to: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Retrieve file: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) New folder: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Delete file/folder: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Information: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 20.12 Database Manager Add record: Enter-i (dots 2-4) Search records: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Table manager: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) List of records found: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Setting backup option: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Backup database: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Restore database: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) 1. Move by controls 2. Move in a list box Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Move to the next list item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the previous list item: Space-1 or up scroll button 3. Select your answer in the prompt box Move to the next answer: Space-4, Space, or down scroll button Move to the previous answer: Space-1, Backspace, or up scroll button 4. Move in the list of records found Move to the next record: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to the previous record: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the last record: Space-4-5-6 Move to the first record: Space-1-2-3 Move to the next field: Space-5 Move to the previous field: Space-2 Move to previous same field different record: Space-3 Move to next same field different record: Space-6 Move to the last field: Space-4-6 Move to the first field: Space-1-3 20.13 Extras 20.13.1 Games Skip record: space-e/space-z 20.14 Social Networking 20.14.1 Twitter Sign Out: Enter-g(dots 1-2-4-5) Personal Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4) Save Current Timeline: Space-s(dots 2-3-4) Home Timeline: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Friend Timeline: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) User Timeline: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Current User Timeline: Backspace-u (dots1-3-6) Mention Timeline: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Retweet By Me: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Retweet To Me: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Retweet Of Me: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Tweet: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Remove Tweet: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Retweet: Enter-e (dots 1-5)"

Reply: Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6) Add To Favorite: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Favorite List: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Send Direct Message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sent Direct Message: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Received Direct Message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Follow User: Backspace-a (dot 1) Following: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Followers: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Global Search: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) User Search: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Search Word List: Backspace-w(dots 2-4-5-6) Next List: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Move to the next tweet: Space-4 Move to the previous tweet: Space-1 Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Space-4-5-6 Move to the previous 32 list: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32 list: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 20.14.2 Google talk File (f) Menu Commands Sign out (l): Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Export Contact Lists(x): Backspace-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Import Contact Lists (i): Backspace-i (dots 2-4) Exit (z): Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Action (a) Menu Commands Start Chat (s): Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Send File (f): Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Move to Recently Chat (r): Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (m): Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact (b) Menu Commands Add Contact (q): Backspace-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Delete Contact (d): Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Block Contact (b): Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Manage Block List (m): Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Contact Information (i): Enter-i (dots 2-4) Manage Contact List (p): Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Option (s) Menu Commands My Status Options (u): Backspace-u (dots 1-3-6) Action Options (a): Backspace-a (dot 1) Alert Options (o): Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Path Options (p): Backspace-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Chat Window Menus File (f) Menu Commands Save Conversation (s): Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Close Chat (z): Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Edit (e) Menu Commands Cut (x): Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy (c): Enter-c (dots 1-4) Delete (d): Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Paste (v): Enter -v (dots 1-2-3-6) Start Selection (b): Enter -b (dots 1-2) Select All (a): Enter-a (dot 1) Find (f): Enter -f (dots 1-2-4) Find Again (g): Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Action (a) Menu Commands Start Chat (s): Enter -s (dots 2-3-4) Start Voice Chat (v): Enter-h (dots1-2-5) Stop Voice Chat (v): Space -e (dots 1-5) Send File (f): Enter -f (dots 1-2-4) View Contact List (r): Enter -t (dots 2-3-4-5) Manage Chat (m): Enter -m (dots 1-3-4) Move to Previous Chat (p): Space-2-3 Move to Next Chat (n): Space-5-6 The move keys in Google Talk. Move to the previous Contents: Space-1 Move to the next Contents: Space-4 Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Space-3-4-5 Move to the first item of the Contents: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last item of the Contents: Space-4-5-6 20.14.3 MSN messenger 1. Log-in dialog box Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Check or uncheck a check box: Space 2. The contact list box Move to the previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to the next item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move between online and offline groups: Space-5-6 Open the menu: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) or F2 Sign out: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) View chat: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) My status: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Exit: Enter-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Add contact: Enter-a (dot 1) Delete contact: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Contact information: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6). Send instant message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Last message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Play keyboard sound: Enter-k (dots 1-3) Message sound notification while in current window: Backspace-s

(dots 2-3-4) Message sound notification while messenger is in the background:

Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Nickname: Enter-p (dots 1-3-4) Save account: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) Confirm the Received Message, Enter-l (dots-1-2-3) 3. Instant message dialog box Move to the next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab (Space-1-2) or Space-F3 Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact list box: Space-1-2-6 or Space-3-4-5, F1-F2, or F3-F4 Save as: Space-s (dots 2-3-4) Print: Space-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Close: Space-e (dots 1-5) Cut: Enter-x (dots 1-3-4-6) Copy: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Delete: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Paste: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Select all: Enter-a (dot 1) Start selection: Enter-b (dots 1-2) Find: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) Find again: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) Invitation: Enter-i (dots 2-4) 20.15 Utilities 20.15.1 Calculator Calculator initialize: Backspace-c (dots 1-4) Delete numbers or operators: Backspace General function: Enter-g (dots 1-2-4-5) PLUS: Dots 3-4-6 Minus: Dots 3-6 Division: Dots 3-4 Multiplication: Dots 1-6 Percent: Dots 1-4-6 Power: Backspace-4-5 Square Root: Enter-q (dots 1-2-3-4-5) Decimal Point: Dots 4-6 Left Parenthesis: Dots 1-2-3-5-6 Right Parenthesis: Dots 2-3-4-5-6 PI: Enter-p (dots 1-2-3-4) Exp: Enter-e (dots 1-5) Recall Items: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Delete all save items: Enter-d (dots 1-4-5) Save Items: Backspace-s (dots 2-3-4) Trigonometric Function: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), s (dots 2-3-4) Arc Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Sine: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4), h (dots 1-2-5) Cosine: Enter-i (dots 2-4), i (dots 2-4) Arc Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Cosine: Enter-c (dots 1-4), h (dots 1-2-5) Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), t (dots 2-3-4-5) Arc Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), a (dot 1) Hyperbolic Tangent: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5), h (dots 1-2-5) Logarithm Function: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Natural Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), e (dots 1-5) Common Logarithm: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3), n (dots 1-3-4-5) Copy to Clipboard: Enter-c (dots 1-4) Option Setting: Enter-o (dots 1-3-5) 20.15.2 Setting time and date Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 Move to 1 hour after: Space-4 Move to 1 hour before: Space-1 Move to 10 minutes after: Space-5 Move to 10 minutes before: Space-2 Move to 1 minute after: Space-6 Move to 1 minute before: Space-3 Switch between A.M. and P.M.: Space-x (dots 1-3-4-6) 20.15.3 Checking Date and Time Checking date and time: Space-t (dots 2-3-4-5) 20.15.4 Calendar Move to the previous item: Tab (Space-4-5) Move to the next item: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move to the next day: Space-6 Move to the previous day: Space-3 Move to the next week: Space-5 Move to the previous week: Space-2 Move to the next month: Space-4 Move to the previous month: Space-1 Move to the next year: Space-5-6 Move to the previous year: Space-2-3 20.15.5 Pronunciation dictionary Move to the previous control: Tab (Space-4-5) Move to the next control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2) Move to the previous item in entry: Space-1 Move to the next item in entry: Space-4 Add word: Space-i (dots 2-4) Modify word: Space-m (dots 1-3-4) Delete word: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) 20.15.6 Stopwatch Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter Check the elapsed time: Backspace Stop and restart Braille display: Space-F2 Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab (Space-4-

5) or shift-tab (Space-1-2) Count down timer pause or restart: Enter Count down timer Initialize: Backspace Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 20.15.7 Display Network Status Display network status: Space-n (dots 1-3-4-5) 20.15.8 Display power status Display power status: Space-1-6 20.15.9 Backup/Restore personalized settings Move to previous item: Space-1 or up scroll button Move to next item: Space-4 or down scroll button Move to previous control: Shift-tab (Space-1-2 or Space-F3) Move to next control: Tab (Space-4-5 or F3) Select/unselect check box: Space 20.15.10 Format Format: Space-1-2-3 20.15.11 Sleep Timer Set Sleep Timer: Space-j (dots 2-4-5) 20.15.12 Upgrading the Braille Sense U2 Firmware Check download information: Space-i (dots 2-4) Cancel download and exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) 21. Command Summary for USB Keyboards 21.1 Common Combination Keys Call up the program menu: Win key Call up the Task Name list: Ctrl-Shift-F10 Call up the menu in the individual program: Alt Run the individual program in the program menu: Win key-shortcut key

(varies for each program) Switch to previous program: Alt-Shift-Tab Switch to next program: Alt-Tab Exit: Alt-F4 Escape: ESC Move to the next control in a dialog box: Tab Move to the previous control in the dialog box: Shift-tab Move to the previous character: Left arrow key Move to the next character: Right arrow key Move to the previous line item: Up arrow key Move to the next line item: Down arrow key Move to the beginning of line item: Home key Move to the end of line item: End key Move to the top of a document or to the first item: Ctrl-home Move to the bottom of a document or to the last item: Ctrl-end Move to the previous page or to the first item of the previous 18-item group: Page up Move to the next page or to the first item of the next 18-item group: Page down Read the current item again: Ctrl-shift-r Say current time: Ctrl-shift-t Display power status: Ctrl-shift-b Print spool: Alt-shift-p Call up the Global options: F10 Online help: F1 Check your version: Ctrl-shift-v only in the Braille Sense U2 program menu. Display network status: Ctrl-shift-n in the Braille Sense U2 program menu Voice volume up: F6 Voice volume down: Shift-F6 Voice rate up: F7 Voice rate down: Shift-F7 Voice pitch up: F8 Voice pitch down: Shift-F8 Voice on/off: F5 Braille display on/off: F4 Bluetooth on/off: F9 Wireless LAN on/off: F11 21.2 File Manager 21.2.1 Navigation keys on the file list and menu list Move to previous item: Up Arrow key Move to next item: Down Arrow key Move to the beginning of the list: Ctrl-home Move to the end of the list: Ctrl-end 21.2.2 Navigation Keys in the File List Fast move to folder list or move to file list: Ctrl-down Arrow Move between file list and address window: Tab / shift-tab Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace Fast move to the top level disk: Shift-Backspace 21.2.3 Item (Folder or File) Selection Keys Select item by item: Space Continuous selection: Ctrl-b Select all: Ctrl-a 21.2.4 Hot Keys for the Commands Open: Ctrl-o Open with: Ctrl-h Zip: Ctrl-z Unzip: Ctrl-u Send: Ctrl-s Copy: Ctrl-c Cut: Ctrl-x Paste: Ctrl-v Delete: DEL Rename: F2 New document: Ctrl-n New folder: Alt-f File conversion: Ctrl-t Select all: Ctrl-a Sort files by: Ctrl-g Set file info: Ctrl-i Display only files of type: Ctrl-w Search file: Ctrl-f Information: Alt-Enter Setup Network connection: Alt-e Cancel setting of Network connection: Alt-F4 Sharing a folder with other computer: Alt-s Remove remote folder on network: Alt-u Setup sharing security: Alt-p 21.3 Word Processor 21.3.1 Hot keys for the command New document: Ctrl-n Open: Ctrl-o Save: Ctrl-s Save as: Alt-s Close current document: Ctrl-F4 Print: Ctrl-p Settings: Ctrl-e Exit: Alt-f4 Start selection: Ctrl-b Copy: Ctrl-c Add to the clipboard: Ctrl-Ins Clear clipboard: Ctrl-Del Delete: Del Cut: Ctrl-x Paste: Ctrl-v Delete blank lines: Alt-e Select All: Ctrl-a Insert from file: Ctrl-i Insert date: Ctrl-w Change insert/overwrite mode: Insert Check spelling: Ctrl-k Check spelling of the current word: Alt-k Find: Ctrl -f Find again: F3 Replace: Ctrl-r Go to location: Ctrl-l Go to previous page: Page up Go to next page: Page down Set bookmark: Ctrl-m Go to bookmark: Ctrl-j Go to previous document: Shift-Tab Go to next document: Tab Read selected text: Alt-b Read beginning of selected text: Ctrl-u Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-g Read status: Ctrl-shift-/

Braille document layout: Alt-F5 Print document layout: Alt-F7 Braille paragraph layout: Alt-F6 Print paragraph layout: Alt-F8 21.3.2 Miscellaneous Hot Keys Move to previous character: Left arrow key Move to next character: Right arrow key Move to previous word: Ctrl-Left arrow Move to next word: Ctrl-Right arrow Move to the beginning of the line: Home key Move to the end of the line: End key Move to previous line: Up arrow key Move to next line: Down arrow key Move to previous paragraph: Ctrl-up arrow Move to next paragraph: Ctrl-down arrow Move to the beginning of the document: Ctrl-home Move to the end of the document: Ctrl-end Read current paragraph: Ctrl-shift-v Read current line: Ctrl-shift-c Read current word: Ctrl-shift-x Read current character: Ctrl-shift-z Delete current paragraph: Alt-Del Delete current line: Ctrl-Backspace Delete current word: Alt-Backspace Delete current character: Del Confirm current cursor position: Ctrl-Shift-s Set view format character: Ctrl- 5 Set reading unit: Ctrl-3 Set read only: Ctrl-2 Set reading mode: Ctrl-4 21.4 Address Manager 21.4.1 Move keys for moving from field to field in the record or in the menu Move to the previous field or menu item: Up arrow key Move to the next field or menu item: Down arrow key Move to the first field or menu item: Ctrl-Home Move to the last field or menu item: Ctrl-End 21.4.2 Move Keys for Moving from Record to Record Move to the previous record: Up arrow key Move to the next record: Down arrow key Move to the first field: Ctrl-Home Move to the last field: Ctrl-End Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the first record: Ctrl-Home Move to the last record: Ctrl-End Move to next same field different record: Left arrow key Move to previous same field different record: Right arrow key 21.4.3 Hot Keys for the Commands Add address: Ctrl-n Find address: Ctrl-f Modify address: Ctrl-m Delete address: Del Select all: Ctrl-a Save as a file: Alt-s Print address: Ctrl-p Backup address list: Ctrl-u Restore address list: Ctrl-r Backup option: Ctrl-e Setting add/searching address fields: Ctrl-o 21.4.4 Miscellaneous Hot Keys Tab: Tab Shift-tab: Shift-Tab Cancel: ESC Exit: Alt-f4 21.5 Schedule Manager 21.5.1 Hot keys for the commands Move to the next field: Tab Move to the previous field: Shift-Tab Add schedule: Ctrl-n Search schedule: Ctrl-s Modify schedule: Ctrl-m Delete schedule: Del Alarm option: Ctrl-o Save schedule as file: Alt-s Print schedule: Ctrl-p Backup schedule list: Ctrl-u Restore schedule list: Ctrl-r Backup option: Ctrl-e Switch searching mode: Ctrl-F2 21.5.2 Movement Keys for the Search Result List 1. Move from an appointment to another in the schedule list Move to the previous appointment in the same day: Up arrow key Move to the next appointment in the same day: Down arrow key Move to the first appointment in the same day: Home Move to the last appointment in the same day: End 2. Move from one appointment to another in all the appointments registered Move to the previous schedule: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to the next schedule: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the first schedule: Ctrl-Home Move to the last schedule: Ctrl-End 21.6 E-mail Sign Out: Enter-g(dots 1-2-3) Personal Information: Enter-I (dots 2-4) Save Current Timeline: Space-s(dots 2-3-4) Home Timeline: Enter-h (dots 1-2-5) Friend Timeline: Enter-f (dots 1-2-4) User Timeline: Enter-u (dots 1-3-6) Current User Timeline: Backspace-u (dots1-3-6) Mention Timeline: Enter-m (dots 1-3-4) Retweet By Me: Backspace-b (dots 1-2) Retweet To Me: Backspace-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Retweet Of Me: Backspace-o (dots 1-3-5) Tweet: Enter-t (dots 2-3-4-5) Remove Tweet: Space-d (dots 1-4-5) Retweet: Enter-e (dots 1-5)"

Reply: Enter-y (dots 1-3-4-5-6) Add To Favorite: Enter-v (dots 1-2-3-6) Favorite List: Enter-l (dots 1-2-3) Send Direct Message: Enter-s (dots 2-3-4) Sent Direct Message: Backspace-m (dots 1-3-4) Received Direct Message: Backspace-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Follow User: Backspace-a (dot 1) Following: Backspace-l (dots 1-2-3) Followers: Backspace-e (dots 1-5) Global Search: Space-f (dots 1-2-4) User Search: Backspace-f (dots 1-2-4) Search Word List: Backspace-w(dots 2-4-5-6) Next List: Enter-n (dots 1-3-4-5) Refresh: Enter-r (dots 1-2-3-5) Exit: Space-z (dots 1-3-5-6) Move to the next tweet: Space-4 Move to the previous tweet: Space-1 Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Space-1-2-3 Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Space-4-5-6 Move to the previous 32 list: Space-1-2-6 Move to the next 32 list: Space-3-4-5 Move to the previous list: up scroll button (Space-1) Move to the next list: down scroll button (Space-4) Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-home (Space-1-2-3)/ Home (Space-1-3) Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-end (Space-4-5-6)/ End (Space-4-6) Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 21.7 Media Player 21.7.1 Hot keys for commands Open file: Ctrl-o Open folder: Ctrl-f Add file: Alt-o Add folder: Alt-f Save play list: Ctrl-s Save as play list: Alt-s Delete time: Del Play: x or Enter Previous track: z or Alt-Left arrow key Next track: b or Alt-Right arrow key 5th previous track: Alt-Up arrow key 5th next track: Alt-Down arrow key First track: Ctrl-home key Last track: Ctrl-end key Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key Pause/Continue: Space Stop: c or Backspace Delete play list during stop: DEL Record: Ctrl-r Play: Enter Stop: Backspace Pause/Continue recording: Space Configuration dialog box: Alt-c Set bookmark: Ctrl-m Delete bookmark: Ctrl-d Jump to bookmark: Ctrl-j Go to position: Ctrl-g Playback setting dialog box: Ctrl-p Record setting dialog box: Alt-r 21.7.2 Hot Keys in the Play Information Tab Move to the next information: Down arrow key Move to the previous information: Up arrow Pause/Play when it is pause state: Space Start playing: Enter Stop playing: Backspace Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow key Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow key Play the last file: Ctrl-End key Play the first file: Ctrl-Home key Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow key Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow key Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key Open menu: Alt Open help: F1 Move to play list tab: Tab/Shift-Tab Exit media player: Alt-F4 21.7.3 Hot Keys in the Play List Tab Move to the next file: Down arrow key Move to the previous file: Up arrow key Move to the last file: End key Move to the first file: Home key Select resume current file (while playing, it is used as plays/pause):

Space Start selecting files: Ctrl-b Start playing the selected files: Enter Stop playing: Backspace Delete the selected files in the play list: Del Play the next file: Alt-Right arrow key Play the previous file: Alt-Left arrow key Play the last file: Ctrl-end key Play the first file: Ctrl-home key Play the fifth file after the current file: Alt-Down arrow Play the fifth file before the current file: Alt-Up arrow Move to backward by time index and play: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to forward by time index and play: Ctrl-Right arrow key Change time index: Ctrl-Up arrow key or Ctrl-Down arrow key Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key Speed up: Shift-Left arrow key Slow down: Shift-Right arrow key Open menu: Alt Open help: F1 Move to playback information tab: Tab/Shift-Tab Exit media player: Alt-F4 21.8 FM Radio Call up the sets dialog box: Ctrl-e Call up the menu: Alt Internal speakers on/off: x or Ctrl-shift-x Move to next frequency: Right arrow key Move to previous frequency: Left arrow key Auto previous frequency: Ctrl-Left arrow key Auto next frequency: Ctrl-Right arrow key Go to frequency: Ctrl -f Move to previous preset: Alt-Left arrow key Move to next preset: Alt-Right arrow key Delete the preset: Del Registry preset: Ctrl-s Call up the record dialog box: Ctrl-r Mute on/off: Space Volume up: Shift-Up arrow key Volume down: Shift-Down arrow key Recoding settings: Alt-r 21.9 Web Browser 21.9.1 Hot keys for the command Open URL: Ctrl-l Open: Ctrl-o Save as: Ctrl-s Page information: Alt-Enter Exit: Alt-F4 Read from beginning to cursor: Alt-g Read from cursor to end: Ctrl-Shift-Enter Copy selection: Ctrl-b Copy: Ctrl-c Add clipboard: Ctrl-Ins Copy URL: Alt-d Copy link address: Alt-l Go to the home page: Alt-h Go to the previous page: Alt-Left arrow key Go to the next page: Alt-Right arrow key Go to previous text: Ctrl-F5Go to next text: Ctrl-F6 Go to previous heading: Alt-b or Ctrl-F3 Go to next heading: Alt-f or Ctrl-F4 Refresh: Ctrl-r Open the history list: Ctrl-h Check the address of the selected title in the history list: Ctrl-shift-i Find: Ctrl-f Find again: F3 Links list: Alt-i Register as your home page: Ctrl-s Add to favorites: Alt-a Favorites list: Ctrl-l 21.9.2 Hot Keys When Playing Audio Files in web browser Turn up the volume: Shift-Up arrow key Turn down the volume: Shift-Down arrow key 21.9.3 Hot Keys for Reading Web Pages Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab Move to the next control: Tab Select the next item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Down arrow key Select the previous item in the combo box (list box): Alt-Up arrow key Move to the previous form: Ctrl-F1 Move to the next form: Ctrl-F2 Move to the previous table: Ctrl-F7 Move to the next table: Ctrl-F8 Move to the previous cell: Ctrl-Shift-Left arrow key Move to the next cell: Ctrl-Shift-Right arrow key Move to the upper cell: Ctrl-Shift-Up arrow key Move to the lower cell: Ctrl-Shift-Down arrow Read current cell: Ctrl-Shift-F Move to the previous cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to the next cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the upper cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Up arrow key Move to the lower cell of the upper level table: Ctrl-Down arrow key Check the current position: Ctrl-shift-s Move to the previous frame: Ctrl-F9 Move to the next frame: Ctrl-F10 Read the current line: Ctrl-Shift-r 21.10 Daisy Player Play/Pause: Space Move to the beginning of document: Home Move to the last phrase: End Increase the speed: Shift-Left arrow key Decrease the speed: Shift-Right arrow key Increase the volume: Shift-Up arrow key Decrease the volume: Shift-Down arrow key Move to the next phrase: Right arrow key Move to the previous phrase: Left arrow key Move to the next fifty phrase: Ctrl-Up arrow key Move to the previous fifty phrase: Ctrl-Down arrow key Move to the next page: Page down Move to the previous page: Page up Go to the page: Ctrl-g Move to the upper-level: Alt-Left arrow key Move to the down-level: Alt-Right arrow key Move to the next level at the preset level: Alt-Up arrow key Move to the previous level at the preset level: Alt-Down arrow key Move to the next heading: Ctrl-F6 Move to the previous heading: Ctrl-F5 Move to the first heading: Ctrl-F7 Move to the last heading: Ctrl-F8 Check the currently-reading level and heading: Ctrl-w Scan the heading list from the present to the end: Ctrl-n Find heading: Ctrl-f Find again: F3 Set mark at current position: Ctrl-m Move to the next mark: N Move to the previous mark: V Delete mark: Del Move to the title list: Shift-Backspace Open daisy file: Ctrl-o Check the book-info: Alt-Enter Voice setting: Ctrl-s 21.11 Bluetooth Manager Scanning Bluetooth device: Ctrl-r Connecting device: Enter in the device name Connecting service: Enter in the service name Disconnect the service: Ctrl-d Move to Bluetooth device list in service list: Backspace 1. FTP service Open local/remote folder: Ctrl-o Copy: Ctrl-c Paste: Ctrl-v Send to: Ctrl-s Retrieve file: Ctrl-r New folder: Ctrl-f Delete file/folder: DEL Information: Ctrl-i 21.12 Database Manager Add record: Ctrl-n Search records: Ctrl-f Modify record: Ctrl-m Table manager: Ctrl-t List of records found: Ctrl-r Setting backup option: Ctrl-e Backup database: Ctrl-u Restore database: Ctrl-o Print: Ctrl-p Save as: Alt-s 1. Move by controls Move to the next control: Tab Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab 2. Move in a list box Move to the next list item: Down arrow key Move to the previous list item: Up arrow key 3. Select your answer in the prompt box Move to the next answer: Space, or Down arrow key Move to the previous answer: Backspace, or Up arrow key 4. Move in the list of records found Move to the next record: Down arrow key Move to the previous record: Up arrow key Move to the last record: Ctrl-end Move to the first record: Ctrl-home Move to the next field: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the previous field: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to previous same field different record: Left arrow key Move to next same field different record: Right arrow key Move to the last field: End Move to the first field: Home 21.13 Extras 21.13.1 Games Skip record: Esc key/Alt-F4 21.14 Social Networking 21.14.1 Twitter Sign Out: Ctrl-g Personal Information: Ctrl-I Save Current Timeline: Alt-s Home Timeline: Ctrl-h Friend Timeline: Ctrl-f User Timeline: Ctrl-u Current User Timeline: Alt-u Mention Timeline: Ctrl-m Retweet By Me: Alt-b Retweet To Me: Alt-t Retweet Of Me: Alt-o Tweet: Ctrl-t Remove Tweet: Delete Retweet: Ctrl-e Reply: Ctrl-y Add To Favorite: Ctrl-v Favorite List: Ctrl-l Send Direct Message: Ctrl-s Sent Direct Message: Alt-m Received Direct Message: Alt-r Follow User: Alt-a Following: Alt-l Followers: Alt-e Global Search: Ctrl-f User Search: Alt-f Search Word List: Alt-w Next List: Ctrl-n Refresh: Ctrl-r Exit: Alt-F4 Escape: Esc key Move to the next tweet: Down arrow key Move to the previous tweet: Up arrow key Move to the first tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow key Move to the last tweet on the refreshing list: Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow key Move to the previous 32 list: Fn-Un arrow key Move to the next 32 list: Fn-Down arrow key Move to the previous list: Up arrow key Move to the next list: Down arrow key Move to the top of the list: Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow key/Fn-Left arrow key Move to the bottom the list: Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow key/Fn-Right arrow key Enter into selected folder or open the selected file: Enter Move to the upper level folder: Backspace 21.14.2 Google talk File Menu Commands Sign out: Ctrl-l Export Contact Lists: Alt-x Import Contact Lists: Alt-i Exit: Alt-F4 Action Menu Commands Start Chat: Ctrl-s Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h Send File: Alt-f Move to Recently Chat: Ctrl-t Manage Chat: Ctrl-m Contact Menu Commands Add Contact: Alt-q Delete Contact: Delete Block Contact: Alt-b Manage Block List: Alt-m Contact Information: Ctrl-i Manage Contact List: Ctrl-p Option Menu Commands My Status Options: Alt-u Action Options: Alt-a Alert Options: Alt-o Path Options: Alt-p Chat Window Menus File Menu Commands Save Conversation: Alt-s Close Chat: Alt-F4 Edit Menu Commands Cut: Ctrl-x Copy: Ctrl-c Delete: Delete Paste: Ctrl-v Start Selection: Ctrl-b Select All: Ctrl-a Find: Ctrl-f Find Again: F3 Action Menu Commands Start Chat: Ctrl-s Start Voice Chat: Ctrl-h Stop Voice Chat: Esc key Send File: Alt-f View Contact List: Ctrl-t Manage Chat: Ctrl-m Move to Previous Chat: Ctrl-Shift-Tab Move to Next Chat: Ctrl-Tab The move keys in Google Talk. Move to the previous Contents: Up arrow key Move to the next Contents: Down arrow key Move to the previous 32-items of the Contents: Fn-Up arrow key button Move to the next 32-item of the Contents: Fn-Down arrow key button Move to the first item of the Contents: Ctrl-Fn-Left arrow key Move to the last item of the Contents: Ctrl-Fn-Right arrow key 21.14.3 MSN messenger 1. Sign-in dialog box Move to the next control: Tab Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab Check or uncheck a check box: Space 2. The contact list box Move to the previous item: Up arrow key Move to the next item: Down arrow key Move between online and offline groups: Ctrl-Down arrow key Open the menu: Alt Signout: Ctrl-n View chat: Ctrl-r My status: Ctrl-m Exit: Alt-F4 Add contact: Ctrl-a Delete contact: Ctrl-d Contact information: Ctrl-v Send instant message: Ctrl-s Last message: Alt-r Play keyboard sound: Ctrl-k Message sound notification while in current window: Ctrl-Shift-s Message sound notification while messenger is in the background: Alt-m Nickname: Ctrl-p Save account: Ctrl-o Confirm the Received Message: Ctrl-l 3. Instant message dialog box Move to the next control: Tab Move to the previous control: Shift-Tab Move between the instant message dialog box and the contact listbox:

Page up, Page down Save as: Alt-s Print: Ctrl-p Close: ESC Cut: Ctrl-x Copy: Ctrl-c Delete: Del Paste: Ctrl-v Select all: Ctrl-a Start selection: Ctrl-b or F2 Find: Ctrl-f Find again: F3 Invitation: Ctrl-i Change my status: Ctrl-t Line break in the message box: Ctrl-Enter 21.15 Utilities 21.15.1 Calculator Calculator initialize: Alt-c Delete numbers or operators: Backspace General function: Ctrl-g Plus: +

Minus: -

Division: /

Multiplication: *

Percent: %

Power: ^

Square Root: Ctrl-q Decimal Point: . Left Parenthesis: (

Right Parenthesis: ) PI: Ctrl-p Exp: Ctrl-e Recall Items: Alt-r Delete all saved items: Ctrl-d Save Items: Alt-s Trigonometric Function: Ctrl-s Sine: Ctrl-s, s Arc Sine: Ctrl-s, a Hyperbolic Sine: Ctrl-s, h Cosine: Ctrl-c, c Arc Cosine: Ctrl-c, a Hyperbolic Cosine: Ctrl-c, h Tangent: Ctrl-t, t Arc Tangent: Ctrl-t, a Hyperbolic Tangent: Ctrl-t, h Logarithm Function: Ctrl-l Natural Logarithm: Ctrl-l, e Common Logarithm: Ctrl-l, n Copy to Clipboard: Ctrl-Ins Option Setting: Ctrl-o Statistics function: Alt-t 21.15.2 Setting the Date and Time Move to the next day: Right arrow key Move to the previous day: Left arrow key Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to the next month: Down arrow key Move to the previous month: Up arrow key Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow key Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow key Move to 1 hour after: Down arrow key Move to 1 hour before: Up arrow key Move to 10 minutes after: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to 10 minutes before: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to 1 minute after: Right arrow key Move to 1 minute before: Left arrow key Switch Between A.M. and P.M.: Ctrl-Shift-x 21.15.3 Checking the Date and Time Checking date and time: Ctrl-shift-t 21.15.4 Calendar Move to the previous item: Tab Move to the next item: Shift-Tab Move to the next day: Right arrow key Move to the previous day: Left arrow key Move to the next week: Ctrl-Right arrow key Move to the previous week: Ctrl-Left arrow key Move to the next month: Down arrow key Move to the previous month: Up arrow key Move to the next year: Ctrl-Down arrow key Move to the previous year: Ctrl-Up arrow key 21.15.5 Pronunciation dictionary Move to the previous control: Tab Move to the next control: Shift-Tab Move to the previous item in entry: Up arrow key Move to the next item in entry: Down arrow key Add word: Alt-i Modify word: Alt-m Delete word: Del 21.15.6 Stopwatch Stopwatch start, pause, restart: Enter Check the elapsed time: Space Stop Braille display: Ctrl-Shift-Space Restart Braille display: Ctrl-Shift-Space Switch between stopwatch and count down timer: Tab Count down timer pause or restart: Enter Count down timer Initialize: Backspace Exit stopwatch or count down timer: Alt-F4 21.15.7 Display Network Status Display network status: Ctrl-Shift-n 21.15.8 Display power status Display power status: Ctrl-Shift-b 21.15.9 Backup/Restore personalized settings Move to previous item: Up arrow key Move to next item: Down arrow key Move to previous control: Shift-Tab Move to next control: Tab Select/unselect check box: Space 21.15.10 Upgrading Braille Sense U2 Firmware Check download information: Space Cancel download and exit: Alt-F4 22. Troubleshooting Guide If you are having trouble with the Braille Sense U2, please try the following suggestions according to your problem:

22.1 The Braille Sense U2 Will Not Turn On 1. Check to make sure that the battery is inserted in to its compartment properly. 2. If the battery is inserted properly, connect the AC adapter, and plug the AC adapter in to an electrical outlet. The battery may need to be charged. 3. Or, Check the location of keyboard lock switch. If this switch put on lock, power switch does not work. 22.2 The Voice Cannot Be Heard 1. Make sure the volume is turned up. Press backspace-F4 to turn up the volume. 2. Make sure the voice is turned on. Press space-o (dots 1-3-5) to open the Global options. Press F3-F4 once. Then, press space. Then, press enter. This will turn on the voice. 22.3 The Voice is Too Fast to Understand 1. Press space-F1 to slow down the voice rate. 22.4 The Voice Pitch Is Too Low or Too High to Understand 1. Press enter-F1 to lower the pitch, or press enter-F4 to raise the voice pitch. 22.5 Lost Your Place 1. If you have lost your place in the Braille Sense U2, and cannot remember where you are press F1 to access the program menu. Then, press F2-F3 to switch between programs that are open. If you are in the word processor, pressing space1-5-6 will give you your current location. 22.6 No Internet Connection 1. If you are using a LAN, make sure that the Ethernet cable is 2. If you are using a modem, make sure that the phone line is connected 3. If you are using a DSL connection, make sure that that the Ethernet connected. to the modem. cable is connected. 22.7 Email 1. If you are having trouble downloading email, please contact your Internet service provider to make sure that you have the correct POP3 and SMTP settings. 22.8 The Braille display Does Not Display Braille 1. If the Braille display does not display Braille, make sure that the Braille display is turned on. In order to do this, press space-o (dots 1-

3-5), and press space. Then, press enter. The Braille display will now be turned on if this option was set to off. 22.9 The Braille Sense U2 Does Not Respond 1. If the Braille Sense U2 does not respond to keystrokes or commands, it may be necessary to reset the unit. To reset the Braille Sense U2, press the reset button, or press 1-2-3-4-5-6-F2-F3. Do NOT hold the reset button for more than 5 seconds. 22.10 The LCD Does Not Come On If the LCD screen does not come on, make sure that it is turned on. Press space-o (dots 1-3-5). Then, press F3-F4 twice. Press space to turn the LCD screen option on, and then press enter to save the option. 23. Accessories For information on available accessories for the Braille Sense U2, please contact HIMS Inc. You can contact HIMS at sales@hims-inc.com. Or, you can contact HIMS by phone at at 888-520-4467. You can also visit HIMS on the web at www.hims-inc.com. 24. Obtaining Support If you are having any problems with your Braille Sense U2, please contact the Hims-inc. If you require further assistance, please contact us at support@hims-inc.com. Or, you can contact HIMS by phone at 512-

837-2000.